Long Beach Police Department Policy ManualLong Beach Police Department
Policy Manual
Effective March 30, 2022
Wally Hebeish
Chief of Police
LAW ENFORCEMENT CODE OF ETHICS
As a Law Enforcement Officer my fundamental duty is to serve mankind; to
safeguard lives and property; to protect the innocent against deception, the weak
against oppression or intimidation, and the peaceful against violence or disorder;
and to respect the Constitutional rights of all men to liberty, equality and justice.
I will keep my private life unsullied as an example to all; maintain courageous calm
in the face of danger, scorn, or ridicule; develop self-restraint; and be constantly
mindful of the welfare of others. Honest in thought and deed in both my personal
and official life, I will be exemplary in obeying the laws of the land and the
regulations of my department. Whatever I see or hear of a confidential nature or
that is confided to me in my official capacity will be kept ever secret unless
revelation is necessary in the performance of my duty.
I will never act officiously or permit personal feelings, prejudices, animosities, or
friendships to influence my decisions. With no compromise for crime and with
relentless prosecution of criminals, I will enforce the law courteously and
appropriately without fear or favor, malice or violence and never accepting
gratuities.
I recognize the badge of my office as a symbol of public faith, and I accept it as a
public trust to be held so long as I am true to the ethics of the police service. I will
constantly strive to achieve these objectives and ideals, dedicating myself before
God to my chosen profession...law enforcement.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................ 23
1.1 DEPARTMENT MANUAL .................................................................. 23
1.1.1 MANUAL REVISION ..................................................................... 23
1.1.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF EMPLOYEES ........................................... 24
1.1.3 MANUAL DISTRIBUTION ............................................................ 24
1.2 LEGALITY .......................................................................................... 25
1.3 DELETED ........................................................................................... 26
1.4 POLICE DEPARTMENT PUBLICATIONS ......................................... 27
1.5 UNIFORM & EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL .................. 28
1.6 DEFINITION OF TERMS .................................................................... 29
1.7 ORDERS - TYPES OF ........................................................................ 32
1.8 CORRESPONDENCE REFERENCE NUMBER DESIGNATIONS .... 33
1.9 FLAGS - DISPLAY OF ....................................................................... 34
2 STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................... 35
2.1 ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE .................................................... 36
2.2 RANK ................................................................................................. 37
2.2.1 COMMAND AUTHORITY – WATCH COMMANDER ................... 37
2.2.2 COMMAND OF SCENE – INCIDENT COMMAND ....................... 37
2.2.3 DUTY CHIEF ON CALL ................................................................ 38
2.3 THE CHIEF OF POLICE ..................................................................... 40
2.4 ASSISTANT CHIEF OF POLICE ....................................................... 41
2.5 DEPUTY CHIEF OF POLICE OR BUREAU MANAGER ............... 42
2.6 POLICE COMMANDER OR ADMINISTRATOR ................................ 43
2.7 POLICE LIEUTENANT ....................................................................... 44
2.8 POLICE SERGEANT.......................................................................... 45
2.8.1 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................... 45
2.8.2 DIRECTION ................................................................................... 45
2.8.3 ENFORCEMENT OF RULES ........................................................ 45
2.8.4 INSPECTION ................................................................................ 45
2.8.5 TRAINING SUBORDINATES ....................................................... 46
2.9 MISCONDUCT OBSERVED BY SUPERVISOR ................................ 47
3 PERSONAL CONDUCT .......................................................................... 48
3.1 PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT & RESPONSIBILITIES ....................... 48
3.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES - EMPLOYEES ............................... 50
3.3 TRUTHFULNESS ............................................................................... 51
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.4 CONDUCT TOWARD THE PUBLIC .................................................. 52
3.5 CONDUCT ON-DUTY - PROHIBITED ACTIVITY .............................. 53
3.6 PERSONAL CONDUCT ..................................................................... 54
3.7 STANDARD OF CONDUCT ............................................................... 55
3.8 COOPERATION ................................................................................. 56
3.8.1 COOPERATING IN DEPARTMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS ......... 56
3.8.2 ADMINISTRATIVE LEAVE ........................................................... 56
3.9 RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN EMPLOYEES ..................................... 57
3.10 UNLAWFUL HARASSMENT COMPLAINTS ..................................... 58
3.10.1 COMPLAINT RESOLUTION PROCESS ...................................... 59
3.10.2 PROCEDURES ............................................................................. 59
3.10.3 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OFFICE INVESTIGATION ..................... 60
3.11 WORKPLACE THREATS AND VIOLENCE (Also see 3.6) .............. 63
3.12 ORDERS - MANNER OF ISSUING .................................................... 65
3.12.1 ORDERS – CRITICISM OF ........................................................... 65
3.12.2 ORDERS - UNLAWFUL ................................................................ 65
3.12.2.1 OBEDIENCE TO UNLAWFUL ORDERS ............................... 65
3.12.3 ORDERS – CONFLICT OF ........................................................... 65
3.12.4 ORDERS, FAILURE TO OBEY - INSUBORDINATION ................ 65
3.13 DUTY RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................ 67
3.14 LOYALTY ........................................................................................... 68
3.15 ASSISTANCE IN THE FACE OF DANGER ....................................... 69
3.16 ASSISTING CRIMINALS .................................................................... 70
3.17 PERSONAL PREFERMENT .............................................................. 71
3.18 AVAILABILITY ON-DUTY .................................................................. 72
3.19 CALLS FOR SERVICE ....................................................................... 73
3.20 CARING FOR NEEDY PERSONS ..................................................... 74
3.21 IDENTIFICATION AS POLICE OFFICER/SECURITY OFFICER ...... 75
3.22 GENERAL UNIFORM REQUIREMENTS ........................................... 76
3.22.1 MINIMUM ON-DUTY UNIFORM/EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 76
3.23 CLOTHING, APPEARANCE AND GROOMING ................................ 78
3.23.1 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................ 78
3.23.2 FINAL AUTHORITY AND POLICY EXCEPTIONS ....................... 78
3.23.2.1 GROOMING AND APPEARANCE STANDARD .................... 78
3.23.3 BODY PIERCING OR ALTERATION ........................................... 79
3.23.4 TATTOOS, BRANDS, SCARIFICATIONS .................................... 79
3.23.4.1 TATTOOS, BRANDS, SCARIFICATIONS – AUTHORIZED
COVERS................................................................................. 80
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.23.4.2 TATTOOS, BRANDS, SCARIFICATIONS – EXCEPTIONS . 80
3.23.5 CLOTHING STANDARD ............................................................... 80
3.23.5.1 CLOTHING STANDARD – NON-UNIFORMED SWORN
PERSONNEL ......................................................................... 80
3.23.5.2 CLOTHING STANDARD – NON-UNIFORMED CIVILIAN
PERSONNEL ......................................................................... 81
3.23.5.3 CLOTHING STANDARD – MANNER OF DRESS IN COURT
................................................................................................ 81
3.23.5.4 CLOTHING STANDARD – MANNER OF DRESS AT
TRAINING .............................................................................. 81
3.23.6 REQUEST FOR MEDICAL OR RELIGIOUS EXEMPTION .......... 82
3.24 INTOXICANTS - DEPARTMENT PREMISES .................................... 83
3.25 ALCOHOL AND DRUG USE ............................................................. 84
3.26 LOITERING ........................................................................................ 86
3.27 GIFTS, GRATUITIES & REWARDS................................................... 87
3.28 PHYSICAL FITNESS FOR DUTY ...................................................... 88
3.29 SMOKING AND SMOKELESS TOBACCO ....................................... 89
3.30 MEMBERSHIP IN ORGANIZATIONS ................................................ 90
3.31 PROFESSIONAL JOURNAL PUBLICATION POLICY ...................... 91
3.32 TESTIFYING ....................................................................................... 92
3.32.1 TESTIFYING FOR THE DEFENSE ............................................... 92
3.33 COMMERCIAL TESTIMONIALS ....................................................... 93
3.34 CORRESPONDENCE RESTRICTIONS ............................................. 94
3.35 CITY COUNCIL - EMPLOYEE ON-DUTY APPEARANCE ................ 95
3.36 TELEPHONES ................................................................................... 96
3.37 DEPARTMENTAL BUSINESS - SECURITY OF ................................ 97
3.38 FILING OF REPORTS ........................................................................ 98
3.39 DEPARTMENT PROPERTY - RESPONSIBILITY FOR ..................... 99
3.40 CHAIN OF COMMAND .................................................................... 100
3.40.1 FORWARDING OF COMMUNICATIONS TO HIGHER
COMMANDS ............................................................................... 100
3.41 RELIEF FROM ASSIGNMENT ......................................................... 101
3.42 ORAL BOARDS - APPEARANCE ON ............................................. 102
3.43 EMPLOYMENT - COLLATERAL ..................................................... 103
3.44 BUSINESS CARDS - DEPARTMENT .............................................. 104
3.45 DEPARTMENT ADDRESS - PRIVATE USE OF ............................. 105
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.46 ADDRESS & TELEPHONE NUMBERS – EMPLOYEES ................. 106
3.47 NOTIFICATION – CONTACT WITH OTHER AGENCIES ................ 107
3.48 INTERNET USAGE .......................................................................... 108
3.49 FAIR AND BIAS-FREE POLICING .................................................. 109
3.49.1 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................. 109
3.49.2 BIASED POLICING AND RACIAL PROFILING ......................... 110
3.49.3 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................... 110
3.50 EARLY INTERVENTION PROGRAM (EIP) ..................................... 110
3.51 SOCIAL MEDIA ................................................................................ 114
3.51.1 SOCIAL MEDIA – PURPOSE ..................................................... 114
3.51.2 SOCIAL MEDIA – POLICY ......................................................... 115
3.51.3 SOCIAL MEDIA – SAFETY ........................................................ 115
3.51.4 SOCIAL MEDIA – ON-DUTY DEPARTMENT APPROVED USAGE
AND GUIDELINES ...................................................................... 115
3.51.4.1 INVESTIGATIVE ACCOUNTS ............................................. 115
3.51.5 SOCIAL MEDIA – PROHIBITED ACTIVITY AND GUIDELINES 116
3.51.6 PRIVACY EXPECTATION .......................................................... 116
4 CHIEF OF POLICE ................................................................................ 118
4.1 INTERNAL AFFAIRS DIVISION ...................................................... 118
4.1.1 PERSONNEL COMPLAINTS ..................................................... 118
4.1.1.1 Personnel Complaints - Employee Responsibility .......... 118
4.1.1.2 Complaint Procedure – Watch Commander/Any Supervisor
.............................................................................................. 118
4.1.1.3 Complaint Procedure – Internal Affairs ............................ 119
4.1.2 INVESTIGATIONS OF ALLEGED MISCONDUCT ..................... 120
4.1.2.1 Employee Interview ............................................................ 120
4.1.2.2 Cooperating in Departmental Investigations .................... 120
4.1.2.3 Investigations – Employee Representatives .................... 120
4.1.2.4 Internal Affairs Investigations Call-Out Procedures ........ 121
4.1.2.5 Findings – Alleged Misconduct ......................................... 121
4.1.2.6 Reports by Internal Affairs Division .................................. 122
4.1.2.7 Reports by Other Divisions/Sections ................................ 122
4.1.3 DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OF PEACE OFFICERS
DETAINED FOR CRIMINAL OFFENSES ................................... 122
4.1.4 DELETED - ................................................................................. 123
4.1.5 DISCIPLINE ................................................................................ 123
4.1.5.1 Discipline - Penalties .......................................................... 123
4.1.5.2 Discipline - Inter-Unit Action .............................................. 124
4.1.5.3 Review Disciplinary Recommendations ........................... 124
4.1.5.4 Reports - Enforcement & Forwarding ............................... 124
4.1.5.5 Disciplinary Action – Informing Employee ....................... 124
4.1.5.6 Discipline - Appeals ............................................................ 125
4.1.5.7 Alternative Discipline Program .......................................... 125
4.1.5.8 Administrative Appeal Procedure / Written Reprimand .. 126
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2 ADMINISTRATIVE SECURITY SECTION ....................................... 130
4.2.1 ORGANIZED CRIME DETAIL .................................................... 130
4.3 DEPARTMENT PSYCHOLOGIST ................................................... 131
4.3.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEPARTMENT PSYCHOLOGIST 131
4.3.2 DUTIES ....................................................................................... 131
4.4 EMPLOYEE TRANSFER SELECTION PROTOCOL ....................... 133
4.4.1 PUBLISHING AN OPENING ....................................................... 133
4.4.2 SELECTION PROCESS ............................................................. 133
4.4.2.1 RESUME SCREENING ........................................................ 133
4.4.2.2 SENIORITY .......................................................................... 134
4.4.2.3 INTERVIEWS ....................................................................... 134
4.4.2.4 PROHIBITED AREAS OF INTERVIEW QUESTIONING ..... 134
4.4.2.5 SELECTION ......................................................................... 134
4.4.2.6 CANDIDATE NOTIFICATION AND TRANSFER ................. 135
6 ADMINISTRATION ................................................................................ 136
6.1 COMMUNITY RELATIONS .............................................................. 136
6.1.1 MEDIA RELATIONS POLICY & PROCEDURES ....................... 136
6.1.1.1 MEDIA ACCESS TO REPORTS & INFORMATION ............ 136
6.1.1.2 RELEASE OF LAW ENFORCEMENT INFORMATION ....... 136
6.1.1.3 PROCEDURES FOR RELEASE OF INFORMATION TO THE
PUBLIC AND MEDIA ........................................................... 139
6.1.1.4 MEDIA ACCESS TO INCIDENT SCENES ........................... 142
6.1.1.5 NOTIFICATIONS TO PUBLIC INFORMATION OFFICER ... 143
6.1.1.6 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE COMMUNICATION WITH MEDIA
.............................................................................................. 143
6.1.1.7 DEPARTMENT DISCLAIMER STATEMENT ....................... 144
6.1.2 RELEASE OF CRIMINAL STATISTICS TO THE PUBLIC ......... 145
6.1.2.1 RELEASE OF CRIMINAL STATISTICS – COMMUNITY
ENGAGEMENT .................................................................... 145
6.1.2.2 RELEASE OF CRIMINAL STATISTICS – CRIME ANAYLSIS
UNIT ..................................................................................... 145
6.1.5 SEXUAL ASSAULT - MEDIA POLICY ....................................... 145
6.1.7 CHAPLAINCY PROGRAM ......................................................... 146
6.1.8 COMMENDATIONS BOARD ...................................................... 147
6.1.9 COMMENDATIONS – ADMINISTRATION OF THE PROGRAM 148
6.1.9.1 OFFICER AWARDS ............................................................. 148
6.1.9.2 MEDAL OF HONOR ............................................................. 148
6.1.9.3 MEDAL OF VALOR ............................................................. 148
6.1.9.4 PURPLE HEART AWARD ................................................... 149
6.1.9.5 MERITORIOUS AWARD – CLASS A .................................. 149
6.1.9.6 MERITORIOUS AWARD – CLASS B .................................. 149
6.1.9.7 MERITORIOUS AWARD – CLASS C .................................. 149
6.1.9.8 REVIEW BY CITY MANAGER ............................................. 150
6.1.9.9 WEARING OF AWARDS ..................................................... 150
6.1.9.10 PERSONNEL RECORD ....................................................... 150
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1.10 CERTIFICATE OF COMMUNITY SERVICE ............................... 150
6.1.11 EMPLOYEE RECOGNITION PROGRAM ................................... 150
6.1.12 PROCEDURE FOR SUBMITTING SUGGESTIONS ................... 152
6.1.13 BULLETIN BOARDS – PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING ................ 152
6.2 COURT AFFAIRS ............................................................................ 154
6.2.1 SUBPOENAS AND SUMMONSES ............................................. 154
6.2.1.1 Acceptance of Subpoenas and Summonses .................. 154
6.2.1.2 Electronic Subpoena Service Procedure .......................... 154
6.2.1.3 Refusal of Service ............................................................... 155
6.2.2 COURT APPEARANCES ........................................................... 155
6.2.2.1 Conduct in Court ................................................................ 156
6.2.3 QUASI-JUDICIAL HEARINGS ................................................... 156
6.2.4 COURT CALENDAR ................................................................... 156
6.3 AUTOMATED LICENSE PLATE RECOGNITION (ALPR) .............. 157
6.3.1 ALPR PURPOSE AND SCOPE .................................................. 157
6.3.2 ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS ............................................... 157
6.3.3 AUTHORIZED USE OF ALPR DATA ......................................... 157
6.3.3.1 RESTRICTIONS ON COLLECTION OF ALPR DATA AND
USE OF ALPR SYSTEMS.................................................... 157
6.3.3.2 COMMERCIALLY COLLECTED ALPR DATA .................... 158
6.3.4 RETENTION OF ALPR DATA .................................................... 158
6.3.5 TRAINING ................................................................................... 158
6.3.6 AUDITS ....................................................................................... 158
6.3.7 DATA SHARING ......................................................................... 158
6.3.7.1 DISSEMINATION ................................................................. 159
6.4 ADMINISTRATION – RECORDS DIVISION .................................... 160
6.4.1 POSSIBLE SUSPECTS ON CRIME REPORTS ......................... 160
6.4.2 ASSAULT/BATTERY ON A PEACE OFFICER REPORTS ....... 160
6.4.3 STANDARDIZED FIRM ABBREVIATIONS ................................ 160
6.4.4 SALE OF POLICE REPORTS .................................................... 162
6.4.4.1 INFORMATION DESK PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITY.... 162
6.4.4.2 COLLISION REPORTS ........................................................ 162
6.4.4.3 INCIDENT & ARREST REPORTS ....................................... 163
6.4.4.4 SUMMARY OF CRIMINAL OFFENDER INFORMATION .... 163
6.4.5 TELEPHONIC CRIME REPORTING/ABBREVIATED CRIME
REPORT ..................................................................................... 163
6.4.6 INTENTIONALLY BLANK .......................................................... 166
6.4.7 ROBBERY TELETYPES – PREPARATION & SENDING .......... 166
6.4.8 MARINE SECURITY – NON-VIOLENT CRIME REPORTS TAKEN
BY ............................................................................................... 167
6.4.9 RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT UNIT ....................................... 167
6.4.10 REQUEST FOR STATISTICAL INFORMATION & SPECIAL
INQUIRIES FROM THE SYSTEMS SECTION ........................... 168
6.4.11 IMPREST CASH/PETTY CASH FUNDS .................................... 168
6.4.12 TRAVEL – OUT OF STATE & OVERNIGHT TRAVEL ............... 169
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.4.13 TRAINING/TRAVEL REIMBURSEMENT ................................... 171
6.4.14 WATCH REPORT ....................................................................... 171
6.5 JAIL OPERATIONS – BOOKING AND CUSTODY ......................... 173
6.5.1 BOOKING PROCEDURES ......................................................... 173
6.5.1.1 BOOKING AREA AND TUNNEL SECURITY ...................... 173
6.5.1.2 BOOKING ON WARRANTS ................................................ 173
6.5.1.3 HOLDING CELL USE .......................................................... 174
6.5.1.4 RESTRAINT CHAIR USE..................................................... 175
6.5.2 IMMIGRATION AND CUSTOMS ENFORCEMENT (ICE)
ADMINISTRATIVE WARRANTS ................................................ 175
6.5.2.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 175
6.5.2.2 ASSISTANCE WITH FEDERAL IMMIGRATION LAW ........ 175
6.5.2.4 EXCEPTIONS ....................................................................... 176
6.5.2.5 NO CONFLICT – FEDERAL POLICY .................................. 178
6.5.3 SEARCHING INMATES .............................................................. 178
6.5.3.1 PRISONER’S PROPERTY ................................................... 178
6.5.3.2 RELIGIOUS HEAD COVERINGS ........................................ 179
6.5.3.3 STRIP SEARCHES AND VISUAL BODY CAVITY SEARCHES
.............................................................................................. 179
6.5.4 DETENTION OFFICERS - USE OF CHEMICAL AGENTS ........ 180
6.5.5 MEDICAL RECORD FOR IN-CUSTODY PERSONS ................. 180
6.5.5.1 RELEASE & SECURITY OF JAIL PRISONERS FOR
EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT .............................. 181
6.5.5.2 MEDICAL TREATMENT – ADULT ARRESTEES ............... 183
6.5.6 HANDLING OF VIOLENT, ON PHENCYCLIDINE (PCP)
PRISONERS ............................................................................... 184
6.5.6.1 INJURED PRISONERS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF PCP
.............................................................................................. 184
6.5.7 RE-ARRESTING OF IN-CUSTODY PRISONERS ...................... 185
6.5.8 BAIL DEVIATION........................................................................ 186
6.5.9 CERTIFICATE OF RELEASE ..................................................... 188
6.5.10 IN-CUSTODY RELEASE/WRITTEN PROMISE TO APPEAR
CITATIONS/OWN RECOGNIZANCE (OR) RELEASE ............... 188
6.5.10.1 CITATION RELEASE GRADING SHEET ............................ 190
6.5.11 PRISONER COST RECOVERY PROGRAM .............................. 191
6.5.12 SUPERVISION OF INMATE WORKERS .................................... 195
6.5.13 BAIL FUGITIVE RECOVERY AGENTS ...................................... 196
6.5.13.1 COMMUNICATIONS SECTION RESPONSIBILITIES ......... 197
6.5.13.2 BUSINESS DESK RESPONSIBILITIES .............................. 197
6.5.13.3 PATROL OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................ 197
6.5.14 HOSPITALIZATION OF INMATES ............................................. 198
6.5.14.1 PHONE CALLS & VIDEO CONFERENCING ...................... 198
6.5.14.2 ATTORNEY VISIT REQUESTS ........................................... 199
6.5.14.3 AUTHORIZED VISITS .......................................................... 200
6.5.15 PRISON RAPE ELIMINATION (PREA) ...................................... 201
6.6 PERSONNEL ................................................................................... 210
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.6.1 PAYROLL TIME RECORDS & TIMECARDS ............................. 210
6.6.1.1 PAYROLL CHECK DISCREPANCIES ................................ 211
6.6.1.2 VACATION/OVERTIME/HOLIDAY REQUESTS FOR TIME
OFF ...................................................................................... 211
6.6.1.3 REQUESTS FOR COMPENSATORY TIME OFF ................ 211
6.6.2 OVERTIME ASSIGNMENT POLICY FOR SWORN PERSONNEL
.................................................................................................... 214
6.6.2.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 214
6.6.2.2 GENERAL ............................................................................ 214
6.6.2.3 OVERTIME CARDS ............................................................. 214
6.6.3 VOLUNTARY OVERTIME PROCESS ........................................ 215
6.6.3.1 PATROL STAFFING ............................................................ 215
6.6.3.2 SECURITY SERVICES STAFFING ...................................... 216
6.6.3.3 SPECIAL EVENTS STAFFING ............................................ 216
6.6.4 INVOLUNTARY OVERTIME PROCESS .................................... 216
6.6.4.1 PATROL ............................................................................... 217
6.6.4.2 SECURITY SERVICES DIVISION ........................................ 217
6.6.4.3 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITY & AUTHORITY217
6.6.5 HIGHER CLASSIFICATION (HC) PAY ....................................... 217
6.6.6 SPECIAL DETAIL ....................................................................... 218
6.6.7 SICK LEAVE ............................................................................... 218
6.6.8 ABSENCE - UNAUTHORIZED ................................................... 219
6.6.9 REPORTING OF ILLNESS/INJURY OFF-DUTY ........................ 219
6.6.9.1 RETURN TO WORK ............................................................ 219
6.6.10 DEATH/SERIOUS ILLNESS - EMPLOYEES ............................. 219
6.6.10.1 NOTIFICATION OF FAMILY – SIGNIFICANT OTHERS ..... 220
6.6.11 VACATION DAYS EXCHANGE.................................................. 221
6.6.12 DAYS OFF EXCHANGE ............................................................. 222
6.6.13 DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY – RESERVE POLICE OFFICERS
.................................................................................................... 223
6.6.14 DEATH OF RETIRED EMPLOYEES .......................................... 223
6.6.15 INJURIES - JOB-INCURRED (IOD) ............................................ 223
6.6.15.1 PAY FOR COMPENSABLE TIME AT THE EXPIRATION OF
4850 PAY ............................................................................. 227
6.6.15.2 IOD Employees ................................................................... 228
6.6.15.3 MODIFIED DUTY ................................................................. 228
6.6.15.4 TEMPORARY MODIFIED-DUTY (MATERNITY) ................. 229
6.6.16 EMPLOYEE CONDUCT WHILE ON SUSPENSION OR INJURED
ON-DUTY (IOD) LEAVE ............................................................. 230
6.6.16.1 SUSPENDED EMPLOYEES ................................................ 230
6.6.16.2 SUSPENSION - EMERGENCY ............................................ 230
6.6.17 POLICE INVESTIGATOR NON-CAREER .................................. 231
6.6.18 SICK LEAVE INCENTIVE/RECOGNITION PROGRAM ............. 232
6.6.19 SAFETY POLICY & PROCEDURES .......................................... 233
6.6.20 MARITAL POLICY – WORK ASSIGNMENTS ........................... 237
6.7 SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE ......................................................... 239
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.7.1 PURCHASE REQUISITIONS ...................................................... 239
6.7.2 ASSIGNMENT & CONTROL OF PATROL VEHICLES .............. 239
6.7.3 VEHICLES – PATROL ................................................................ 240
6.7.4 VEHICLE SYSTEM & MAINTENANCE ...................................... 241
6.7.5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF SURVEILLANCE VEHICLES
.................................................................................................... 243
6.7.6 DUAL PURPOSE VEHICLES ..................................................... 244
6.7.6.1 EMERGENCY OPERATION ................................................ 244
6.7.7 TAKE HOME VEHICLES ............................................................ 245
6.7.8 DEPARTMENT VEHICLES ......................................................... 245
6.7.9 ACCIDENTS INVOLVING CITY VEHICLES ............................... 246
6.7.10 ASSET INVENTORY, CONTROL & ACCOUNTABILITY ........... 246
6.7.11 DELETED PER PROJECT 20170042COP 11/10/17 .................. 250
6.7.12 AUTOMATED VEHICLE LOCATION (AVL) POLICY ................. 250
6.7.13 TACTICAL BLANKETS .............................................................. 252
6.8 TRAINING ........................................................................................ 253
6.8.2 TRAINING – MANDATORY & REQUIRED ................................ 253
6.8.2(A) ATTENDANCE AT TRAINING .................................................... 253
6.8.3 TRAINING – EXECUTIVE LEVEL SELECTION PROCESS ...... 254
6.8.4 DIVISIONAL TRAINING OFFICER ............................................. 256
6.8.5 FIREARMS – SHOOTING POLICY ............................................ 256
6.8.6 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS ........................................................ 256
6.8.6.1 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – Trigger Pull Weight .............. 257
6.8.6.2 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – Laser Sights ......................... 258
6.8.6.3 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – MAINTENANCE, REPAIR &
MODIFICATIONS ................................................................. 258
6.8.6.4 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – Semi-Automatic Firearms ... 258
6.8.6.5 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – Backup Firearms .................. 259
6.8.6.6 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – Primary Uniform Holster
Firearms............................................................................... 259
6.8.6.7 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – Primary Non-uniform Holster
Firearms............................................................................... 259
6.8.6.8 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – Backup Firearms .................. 259
6.8.7 AMMUNITION – DEPARTMENT ISSUED & AUTHORIZED
MANUFACTURERS .................................................................... 259
6.8.7.1 AMMUNITION – Authorized by Caliber ............................ 259
6.8.7.2 AMMUNITION – Replacement ............................................ 260
6.8.7.3 AMMUNITION – Prohibited ................................................. 260
6.8.7.4 AMMUNITION – Shotgun .................................................... 261
6.8.7.5 AMMUNITION – AR-15 ........................................................ 261
6.8.7.6 AMMUNITION – SWAT ....................................................... 261
6.8.8 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT ......................... 261
6.8.8.1 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – NON-
QUALIFICATION .................................................................. 262
6.8.8.2 QUALIFICATION – Ammunition Allotment ....................... 263
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.8.8.3 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – Range
Safety ................................................................................... 263
6.8.8.4 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – Schedule
.............................................................................................. 263
6.8.8.5 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – Scoring and
Pay/Shooting Badges ......................................................... 264
6.8.8.6 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – Carrying a
Concealed Weapon (CCW) Qualification Requirements for
Retired Police Officers ....................................................... 264
6.8.9 FIREARM MOUNTED TACTICAL FLASHLIGHTS .................... 265
6.8.10 HIGH VELOCITY RIFLE FIRE .................................................... 266
6.8.11 FIREARMS – PURCHASE & SALE OF FIREARMS UNDER
LETTER OF AUTHORIZATION .................................................. 266
6.8.11.1 FIREARMS – RECORD OF OFFICER’S ............................. 267
6.8.13 TRAINING BULLETINS .............................................................. 267
6.8.14 IMPACT WEAPONS – BATON, POLICE UTILITY TYPE
FLASHLIGHT & SAP .................................................................. 268
6.8.14.1 BATON SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 271
6.8.14.2 USE OF CHEMICAL AGENTS ............................................. 272
6.8.15 ACQUIRED IMMUNE DEFICIENCY SYNDROME (AIDS) -
TRAINING ................................................................................... 272
6.8.16 RESERVE POLICE OFFICER SELECTION PROCESS ............ 275
6.9 UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT ........................................ 276
6.9.1 GENERAL UNIFORM REQUIREMENTS ................................... 276
6.9.1.1 INSPECTIONS - UNIFORM .................................................. 276
6.9.2 APPEARANCE - ON-DUTY ........................................................ 276
6.9.2.1 HELMETS - GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................. 276
6.9.2.2 CIVILIAN CLOTHING ........................................................... 276
6.9.3 UNIFORM & EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT .............................. 277
6.9.4 CORRECT WEARING OF INSIGNIA OF GRADE ...................... 277
6.9.5 ISSUE AND SEIZURE OF BADGE, CAP PIECE, NAME PLATE &
IDENTIFICATION CARD ............................................................ 278
6.9.5.1 ISSUANCE OF RETIREMENT BADGES ............................. 280
6.9.5.2 LOST, STOLEN OR DAMAGED BADGES, CAP PIECES,
NAMEPLATES & IDENTIFICATION CARDS ...................... 280
6.9.5.3 MEMORIAL BADGES .......................................................... 280
6.9.5.4 RESERVE POLICE OFFICER BADGES AND
IDENTIFICATION CARDS ................................................... 280
6.9.6 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................... 282
6.9.7 UNIFORM EQUIPMENT COMMITTEE ....................................... 282
6.9.8 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEPARTMENT PROPERTY ................ 282
6.9.9 DAMAGED/INOPERATIVE PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT ....... 282
6.9.10 CITY-OWNED PROPERTY – PRESUMPTION OF
RESPONSIBILITY....................................................................... 282
6.9.11 SURRENDER OF DEPARTMENT PROPERTY ......................... 283
6.9.12 RETURNING CITY-OWNED PROPERTY .................................. 283
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.9.13 CITY-OWNED EQUIPMENT ITEMS - RECOVERED ................. 283
7 PATROL BUREAU – FIELD OPERATIONS ......................................... 284
7.1 FIELD OPERATIONS ....................................................................... 284
7.1.1 CALLS FOR SERVICE – RESPONSE TO ................................. 284
7.1.1 A SQUAD MEETINGS .................................................................... 284
7.1.2 USE OF FORCE.......................................................................... 285
7.1.2.1 USE OF FORCE – Legal Authority to Use Force .............. 285
7.1.2.2 USE OF FORCE – Force Defined ....................................... 285
7.1.2.3 USE OF FORCE – Force Policy .......................................... 285
7.1.2.4 USE OF FORCE – Force Options ....................................... 285
7.1.2.5 USE OF FORCE – Reportable Use of Force ...................... 285
7.1.2.6 USE OF FORCE – Non-Reportable Use of Force ............. 286
7.1.2.7 USE OF FORCE – Employee Responsibilities .................. 286
7.1.2.8 USE OF FORCE – Supervisor Responsibilities ................ 286
7.1.2.9 USE OF FORCE – Booking Sergeant Responsibilities .... 287
7.1.2.10 USE OF FORCE – Watch Commander Responsibilities .. 288
7.1.2.11 USE OF FORCE – Involved Employee Lieutenant
Responsibilities .................................................................. 289
7.1.2.12 USE OF FORCE – Division Commander Responsibilities
.............................................................................................. 289
7.1.2.13 USE OF FORCE – Bureau Responsibilities ...................... 289
7.1.2.14 USE OF FORCE – Internal Affairs Responsibilities ......... 290
7.1.2.15 USE OF FORCE – Training Section Responsibilities ...... 290
7.1.3 ARRESTS – FORCE ................................................................... 290
7.1.4 PHYSICAL SURVEILLANCE AND PLANNED ARREST
OPERATIONS ............................................................................. 291
7.1.4.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................ 291
7.1.4.2 Supervisor Responsibilities ............................................... 291
7.1.5 CODE THREE RESPONSE ........................................................ 292
7.1.6 CODE THREE – AUTHORITY TO INITIATE/CANCEL .............. 293
7.1.7 VEHICLE PURSUITS .................................................................. 294
7.1.7.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 294
7.1.7.2 Initiating Pursuits ............................................................... 294
7.1.7.3 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................ 295
7.1.7.4 Assessment of Risk Factors .............................................. 295
7.1.7.5 Pursuit Coordination .......................................................... 296
7.1.7.6 Air Support Unit (ASU) Responsibilities ........................... 296
7.1.7.7 FOREIGN JURISDICTION Pursuits .................................... 296
7.1.7.8 PURSUITS Leaving City Limits .......................................... 297
7.1.7.9 PURSUIT LIMITATIONS ...................................................... 297
7.1.7.10 MOTORCYCLE UNITS ........................................................ 297
7.1.7.11 TIRE DEFLATION DEVICE .................................................. 298
7.1.7.12 PURSUIT TERMINATION .................................................... 298
7.1.7.13 Supervisor Responsibilities ............................................... 299
7.1.7.14 SUPERVISOR POST-PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES ........ 299
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.7.15 Disaster preparedness and emergency communications
department (Communications Center) Responsibilities . 299
7.1.7.16 Review of pursuits – Police Vehicle and Air Support Unit
.............................................................................................. 300
7.1.7.17 Review of Pursuits – Time Period ..................................... 300
7.1.7.18 Review of Pursuits – Commander Responsibilities ........ 300
7.1.7.19 REVIEW OF PURSUITS – BUREAU RESPONSIBILITIES . 300
7.1.7.20 TRAINING ............................................................................ 300
7.1.8 DEPLOYMENT OF FIELD RESOURCES ................................... 302
7.1.8.1 DEPLOYMENT OF AR-15 RIFLES ...................................... 302
7.1.8.2 Intentionally blank .............................................................. 307
7.1.8.3 Deployment of Expectorant Shield ................................... 307
7.1.8.4 HOBBLE RESTRAINT DEVICE ........................................... 308
7.1.9 FIELD SERGEANT RESPONSIBILITIES ................................... 309
7.1.9.1 SITUATIONS REQUIRING FIELD SERGEANT RESPONSE
.............................................................................................. 309
7.1.9.2 EXCEPTION TO MANDATORY RESPONSE ...................... 310
7.1.9.3 SITUATIONS REQUIRING FIELD SERGEANT
NOTIFICATION .................................................................... 310
7.1.10 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................ 310
7.1.11 BEAT INTEGRITY/REDEPLOYMENT ........................................ 311
7.1.12 CAD TRACKING ......................................................................... 311
7.1.13 DRIVING UNDER THE INFLUENCE (DUI) ARREST ................. 311
7.1.13.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE ...................................................... 311
7.1.13.2 FIELD TESTS ....................................................................... 312
7.1.13.3 TRANSPORTATION PRIOR TO ARREST .......................... 312
7.1.13.4 CHEMICAL TESTS .............................................................. 312
7.1.13.5 CHOICE OF TEST ................................................................ 312
7.1.13.6 BREATH TEST ..................................................................... 313
7.1.13.7 BLOOD TEST ....................................................................... 313
7.1.13.8 REFUSALS .......................................................................... 314
7.1.13.9 BLOOD SAMPLE WITHOUT CONSENT ............................. 314
7.1.13.10 WARRANTLESS ARREST .................................................. 315
7.1.13.11 PRELIMINARY ALCOHOL SCREENING ............................ 315
7.1.13.12 PRELIMINARY ALCOHOL SCREENING FOR INDIVIDUALS
UNDER 21 YEARS OF AGE ................................................ 315
7.1.13.13 PRELIMINARY ALCOHOL SCREENING (PAS) DEVICE
MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 316
7.1.13.14 DUI PROBATION/COURT ORDERED IGNITION INTERLOCK
DEVICE ................................................................................ 316
7.1.14 VICTIMS OF VIOLENT CRIMES NOTIFICATION
REQUIREMENTS........................................................................ 316
7.1.15 CRIMES AGAINST POLICE OFFICERS – ARREST APPROVAL
.................................................................................................... 317
7.1.16 GANG RELATED - CRIME ......................................................... 318
7.1.16.1 GANG - DEFINED ................................................................ 318
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.17 ARREST – PRIVATE PERSONS ............................................... 320
7.1.18 PUBLIC INTOXICATION – ARRESTS OF SUBJECTS ............ 321
7.1.19 INTENTIONALLY BLANK – HELD FOR NEW POLICY ........... 321
7.1.20 SEARCH, SEIZURE & ARREST................................................ 321
7.1.21 CRIME SCENES – GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES ................. 322
7.1.21.1 CRIME SCENES – ASSIGNED OFFICER ........................... 323
7.1.21.2 RELIEF OF ASSIGNED OFFICER ....................................... 323
7.1.21.3 DETECTIVE NOTIFICATION ............................................... 323
7.1.21.4 DEATH DETERMINATION................................................... 324
7.1.21.5 PHOTOGRAPHY AND DIGITAL IMAGES........................... 324
7.1.22 RELEASED NOT BOOKED (RNB) ............................................. 325
7.1.23 TRANSPORTATION OF PRISONERS IN POLICE VEHICLES . 325
7.1.23.1 Nonviolent Prisoners with One Officer ............................. 326
7.1.23.2 Nonviolent Prisoners with Two Officers ........................... 326
7.1.23.3 Violent Prisoners with One Officer – Within the City ....... 327
7.1.23.4 Violent Prisoners with Two Officers – Within the City..... 327
7.1.23.5 Transportation of Prisoners Outside of the City .............. 327
7.1.23.6 Care of In-Custody Prisoners ............................................ 327
7.1.23.7 Preempting Prisoner Transportation to Respond to a Call
.............................................................................................. 328
7.1.24 ARRESTEES TRANSPORTATION OF UNCONSCIOUS –
UNRESPONSIVE ........................................................................ 328
7.1.25 DISPOSITION OF DEPENDENT CHILDREN TAKEN INTO
PROTECTIVE CUSTODY ........................................................... 329
7.1.26 MEDICAL RECORDS FOR PERSON IN CUSTODY
(ARRESTEES) ............................................................................ 330
7.1.27 MOTORIST – DISABLED ........................................................... 331
7.1.28 DEATH NOTIFICATION .............................................................. 332
7.1.29 ANIMAL BITES ........................................................................... 333
7.1.30 POST STORAGE HEARING (PSH) ............................................ 334
7.1.31 MARIJUANA POSSESSION - ISSUANCE OF CITATIONS ....... 336
7.1.31.1 Medical Marijuana – Proposition 215 – The Compassionate
Use Act of 1996 ................................................................... 336
7.1.33 DRUGS FOR K-9 RECOGNITION TRAINING ............................ 341
7.1.34 POLICE OFFICERS ASSOCIATION (POA) DIRECTORS
SPEAKING AT SQUAD MEETINGS .......................................... 342
7.1.35 RIDE-ALONG OBSERVER PROGRAM ..................................... 343
7.1.35.1 ELIGIBILITY – COMMUNITY MEMBERS ............................ 343
7.1.35.2 ELIGIBILITY – CIVILIAN EMPLOYEES, LAW
ENFORCEMENT VOLUNTEERS, OR OTHER LAW
ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES .............................................. 344
7.1.35.3 REQUESTING A RIDE-ALONG ........................................... 344
7.1.35.4 RIDE-ALONG WAIVERS ..................................................... 345
7.1.35.5 RIDE-ALONG GUIDELINES ................................................ 345
7.1.35.6 RIDE-ALONG PARTICIPANT RULES ................................. 345
7.1.35.7 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................ 345
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.36 WORKPLACE VIOLENCE INVOLVING CITY EMPLOYEES ..... 346
7.1.37 ARRESTS BY CITY SECURITY OFFICERS .............................. 346
7.1.38 CODE 7 (MEAL) POLICY ........................................................... 350
7.1.39 FIELD TRAINING PROGRAM .................................................... 350
7.1.39.1 PHASE I - ACADEMY .......................................................... 350
7.1.39.2 PHASE II – FIELD TRAINING & EVALUATION PROGRAM
.............................................................................................. 351
7.1.39.3 Phase III – Probationary Officer ......................................... 353
7.1.39.4 PATROL SERGEANT & LIEUTENANT FIELD TRAINING
PROGRAM ........................................................................... 355
7.1.39.5 PATROL SERGEANT & LIEUTENANT MENTOR PROGRAM
.............................................................................................. 355
7.1.39.6 PATROL OFFICER RETRAINING ....................................... 356
7.1.40 SPECIAL EVENTS ...................................................................... 357
7.1.41 PROPER USE OF THE SEGWAY .............................................. 357
7.1.42 PARADE PARTICIPATION ........................................................ 358
7.1.43 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME .......................................................... 358
7.2 CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE SECTION (CIS) .................................. 360
7.2.1 SUSPICIOUS ACTIVITY REPORTING (SAR) INCIDENTS
POTENTIALLY RELATED TO FOREIGN OR DOMESTIC
TERRORISM ............................................................................... 360
7.3 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................ 362
7.3.1 COMMUNICATIONS POLICIES ................................................. 362
7.3.2 KDT USAGE ............................................................................... 363
7.3.3 COMMUNICATIONS – MUTUAL AID WITH ORANGE COUNTY
LAW ENFORCEMENT ................................................................ 364
7.3.4 TRANSLATOR PROGRAM – VOLUNTEER BILINGUAL
EMERGENCY TRANSLATORS (ET) ......................................... 365
7.3.4.1 COMMUNICATING WITH PEOPLE WHO ARE DEAF OR
HARD OF HEARING ............................................................ 366
7.3.5 MONITORING OR RECORDING RADIO & TELEPHONIC
TRANSMISSIONS BY COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION ............. 368
7.3.6 COMPUTER AIDED DISPATCH (CAD) PREMISE HISTORY FILE
.................................................................................................... 369
7.3.7 FOREIGN JURISDICTION – POLICE INVESTIGATIONS
OUTSIDE THE CITY OF LONG BEACH .................................... 371
7.3.8 REVERSE 911 ............................................................................ 371
7.3.9 SILENT DISPATCHING .............................................................. 373
7.4 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC ....................................... 375
7.4.1 TRAFFIC COLLISIONS – CITY VEHICLES ............................... 375
7.4.1.1 CITY ATTORNEY RESPONSE ............................................ 375
7.4.1.2 COLLISION INVESTIGATION DETAIL (CID) ...................... 377
7.4.1.3 VEHICLE ACCIDENT REVIEW BOARD (VARB) ................ 378
7.4.2 CITATIONS – ACCOUNTABILITY & VOIDING .......................... 378
7.4.2.1 Accounting for Citations .................................................... 379
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.4.2.2 Procedure for Voiding Citations Issued by the Police
Department .......................................................................... 379
7.4.2.3 Lost or Stolen Citations ..................................................... 379
7.4.2.4 Citation Issued by Other City Departments ...................... 380
7.4.2.5 Parking Citations ................................................................ 380
7.4.2.6 THUMBPRINT ON TRAFFIC & MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS
.............................................................................................. 380
7.4.3 DISPATCHING TRAFFIC UNITS ................................................ 381
7.4.4 HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY VESTS ............................................. 381
7.5 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS/CRITICAL INCIDENTS .................... 383
7.5.1 CRITICAL INCIDENT CONTINGENCY PLANNING &
REPORTING ............................................................................... 383
7.5.2 UNUSUAL OCCURRENCES ...................................................... 384
7.5.2.1 SPECIAL DEPLOYMENT .................................................... 385
7.5.2.2 CALL-OUT PROCEDURES ................................................. 386
7.5.2.3 TACTICAL ALERT STAGES ............................................... 386
7.5.2.4 INCIDENT DEBRIEFING ...................................................... 388
7.5.2.5 CRITICAL INCIDENT DEBRIEF COMMITTEE .................... 389
7.5.4 REACT RESPONSE ................................................................... 390
7.5.4.1 REACT RESPONSE CRITERIA ........................................... 390
7.5.4.2 REQUEST FOR REACT....................................................... 391
7.5.4.3 REACT RESPONSE ROLE.................................................. 391
7.5.5 SPECIAL WEAPONS AND TACTICS (SWAT) .......................... 391
7.5.5.1 CRITERIA FOR SWAT ACTIVATION .................................. 392
7.5.5.2 SWAT THREAT ASSESSMENT MATRIX ........................... 392
7.5.5.3 SWAT ACTIVATION ............................................................ 393
7.5.5.4 SWAT REACTIONARY (REACT) DEPLOYMENT .............. 394
7.5.6 BARRICADED SUSPECT – SEARCH WARRANT
REQUIREMENT .......................................................................... 394
7.5.7 EMERGENCY FOOD AND WATER SUPPLIES......................... 396
7.5.8 LABOR RELATIONS MONITORING LOG ................................. 397
7.5.9 FLASH/SOUND DIVERSION DEVICES ..................................... 397
7.5.10 DEPLOYMENT OF LESS LETHAL MUNITIONS ....................... 400
7.5.10.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 400
7.5.10.2 Approved Munitions ........................................................... 400
7.5.10.3 Medical Treatment .............................................................. 400
7.5.10.4 Criteria for Launching Less Lethal Munitions .................. 400
7.5.10.5 Deployment Considerations .............................................. 401
7.5.10.6 ARREST PLAN .................................................................... 401
7.5.10.7 Deployment Distances ....................................................... 401
7.5.10.8 Target Areas ........................................................................ 401
7.5.10.9 Authorization for Deployment ........................................... 402
7.5.10.10 Warnings ............................................................................. 402
7.5.10.11 Storage and Loading .......................................................... 402
7.5.10.12 TRAINING REQUIRED FOR USE ........................................ 403
7.5.10.13 Special Weapons and Tactics Team (SWAT) ................... 403
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.5.10.14 Responsibilities .................................................................. 403
7.5.11 ELECTRONIC CONTROL DEVICE ............................................ 405
7.5.12 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ........................................................ 408
7.6 EQUIPMENT ISSUE ......................................................................... 412
7.6.1 ISSUANCE & MAINTENANCE OF RADIOS .............................. 412
7.6.2 SHOTGUNS ............................................................................... 413
7.6.2.1 Pre-shift shotgun inspection ............................................ 413
7.6.2.2 Shotgun loading and unloading ........................................ 413
7.6.2.3 Inspection of existing ammunition .................................... 413
7.6.2.4 Rotation of shotgun ammunition ...................................... 414
7.6.2.5 INVENTORY AND maintenance ......................................... 414
7.7 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT (PSDU) ............................................ 415
7.7.1 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT PURPOSE AND SCOPE ........... 415
7.7.1.1 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT FUNCTION .......................... 415
7.7.1.2 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT Dispatch ............................. 415
7.7.2 POLICE SERVICE DOG (PSD) DEPLOYMENT ......................... 415
7.7.2.1 DEPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS ................................... 415
7.7.2.2 Announcements .................................................................. 416
7.7.2.3 Announcement Exception .................................................. 417
7.7.3 POLICE SERVICE DOG CONTACTS AND INVESTIGATIONS 417
7.7.3.1 PSDU HANDLER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................... 417
7.7.3.2 PSDU Sergeant RESPONSIBILITIES ................................. 418
7.7.3.3 Assistance to Other Agencies ........................................... 418
7.7.4 USE OF A POLICE SERVICE DOG TEAM FROM OUTSIDE
AGENCY ..................................................................................... 418
7.7.5 MEDICAL CARE OF THE POLICE SERVICE DOG ................... 419
7.7.5.1 NON-EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE OF THE Police Service
Dog ....................................................................................... 419
7.7.5.2 EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE OF THE POLICE SERVICE
DOG ..................................................................................... 419
7.7.6 PSDU - TRAINING ..................................................................... 419
7.8 BODY WORN CAMERA (BWC) ...................................................... 420
7.8.1 PURPOSE ................................................................................... 420
7.8.2 OBJECTIVES .............................................................................. 420
7.8.3 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................. 420
7.8.4 BWC USAGE .............................................................................. 421
7.8.4.1 Normal BWC Field Use ....................................................... 422
7.8.4.2 BWC RECORDING .............................................................. 422
7.8.4.3 When NOT to record ........................................................... 424
7.8.4.4 AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION FEATURES ............................. 424
7.8.4.5 MOBILE DEVICE APPLICATIONS AND COMPUTER
SOFTWARE ......................................................................... 425
7.8.4.6 Entering metadata .............................................................. 425
7.8.4.7 Retention of digital evidence ............................................. 425
7.8.4.8 Reviewing impounded digital evidence ............................ 425
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.8.4.9 Deletion of Recordings ...................................................... 427
7.8.4.10 BWC Program Administrator Responsibilities ................. 427
7.8.4.11 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES .................................... 428
7.8.4.12 BWC REPORTING REQUIREMENTS ................................. 428
8 INVESTIGATIONS ................................................................................. 429
8.1 INVESTIGATIONS ........................................................................... 429
8.1.1 LETTERS TO VICTIMS OF CRIMES ......................................... 429
8.1.2 POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS ................................................ 430
8.1.3 U-VISA PROGRAM ..................................................................... 432
8.1.3.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 432
8.1.3.2 CERTIFICATION .................................................................. 432
8.1.3.3 CERTIFYING OFFICIAL....................................................... 433
8.1.3.4 TRACKING ........................................................................... 433
8.1.4 CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS INTERCEPTION
TECHNOLOGY ........................................................................... 433
8.1.4.2 DEPLOYMENT ..................................................................... 434
8.1.4.3 LEGAL PROCESS ............................................................... 434
8.1.4.4 SECURITY............................................................................ 435
8.1.4.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW ................................................ 435
8.2 GANGS AND VIOLENT CRIMES (GVC) DIVISION ......................... 436
8.2.1 HOMICIDE DETAIL CALL-OUTS ............................................... 436
8.2.1.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 436
8.2.1.2 NOTIFICATIONS .................................................................. 436
8.2.1.3 RESPONSE FOR OFFICER-INVOLVED SHOOTING OR IN-
CUSTODY DEATH ............................................................... 437
8.2.1.4 Incident Scene Management .............................................. 437
8.2.2 REPORT FILING FOR ALL OFFICER INVOLVED FIREARMS
DISCHARGE AND IN-CUSTODY DEATH INCIDENTS ............. 438
8.2.2.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................ 438
8.2.2.2 SERGEANT AND LIEUTENANT RESPONSIBILITIES ....... 439
8.2.2.3 COMMAND OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ........................ 439
8.2.3 INTENTIONAL FIREARMS DISCHARGE AND IN-CUSTODY
DEATH INVESTIGATIONS ......................................................... 439
8.2.3.1 officer Responsibilities ...................................................... 439
8.2.3.2 MEDICAL AID ...................................................................... 440
8.2.3.3 In-Custody Death within a Detention Facility ................... 440
8.2.3.4 Field supervisor responsibilities ....................................... 440
8.2.3.5 Removal from scene ........................................................... 441
8.2.3.6 Involved officer Statement ................................................. 441
8.2.3.7 Homicide DETAIL Responsibilities ................................... 442
8.2.3.8 Watch Commander Responsibilities ................................. 442
8.2.3.9 PEER OFFICER ................................................................... 442
8.2.3.10 internal affairs ..................................................................... 443
8.2.3.11 department psychologist ................................................... 443
8.2.3.12 EMPLOYEE Association Representative or Attorney ...... 443
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.3.13 Public Information officer (PIO) ......................................... 444
8.2.3.14 RELEASE OF OFFICERS’ NAMES ..................................... 444
8.2.3.15 Paid Administrative Leave ................................................. 444
8.2.3.16 POST-OIS SHOOTING course ............................................ 445
8.2.4 UNINTENTIONAL FIREARMS DISCHARGE AND ANIMAL
SHOOTINGS ............................................................................... 446
8.2.4.1 officer Responsibilities ...................................................... 446
8.2.4.2 FIELD Supervisor Responsibilities ................................... 446
8.2.4.3 INVOLVED OFFICER Statement ........................................ 447
8.2.4.4 Homicide Supervisor Responsibilities ............................. 447
8.2.4.5 Watch Commander Responsibilities ................................. 448
8.2.4.6 Internal Affairs .................................................................... 448
8.2.4.7 department psychologist ................................................... 448
8.2.4.8 Employee Association Representative or Attorney ......... 448
8.2.4.9 No-Hit Unintentional Discharge – Animal Shooting Review
.............................................................................................. 448
8.2.4.10 POST Unintentional Discharge SHOOTING course and
training ................................................................................ 449
8.2.4.11 UNINTENTIONAL DISCHARGE – NON-POLICE
DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEES .............................................. 450
8.2.5 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE – RESPONSE TO OFFICER
INVOLVED SHOOTING AND IN-CUSTODY DEATH
INVESTIGATIONS ...................................................................... 450
8.2.5.1 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE – AT THE SCENE ............. 451
8.2.5.2 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE – AT THE STATION ........... 451
8.2.5.3 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE NOTIFICATION – OFF-
DUTY OFFICER INVOLVED SHOOTING INVESTIGATIONS ......... 452
8.2.6 COMPELLED STATEMENTS ..................................................... 452
8.2.6.1 CHIEF OF POLICE REVIEW ................................................ 452
8.2.7 FIREARMS – SHOOTING REVIEW BOARD ............................. 452
8.2.7.1 Convening the Board ......................................................... 453
8.2.7.2 MEMBERSHIP – shooting review board ........................... 453
8.2.7.3 Non-Police Department Employees .................................. 454
8.2.7.4 Review of Officer Involved Shootings .............................. 454
8.2.7.5 Dissenting Opinions ........................................................... 455
8.2.7.6 Chief of Police Review ....................................................... 455
8.2.7.7 Non-Police Department Employee Department Head
Review ................................................................................. 455
8.2.7.8 Project Assignment – Shooting Review Board Results .. 455
8.2.7.9 Memorandum of Completion ............................................. 456
8.2.8 IN-CUSTODY DEATH REVIEW BOARD ................................... 456
8.2.8.1 Convening the Board ......................................................... 456
8.2.8.2 MEMBERSHIP – in-custody death review board .............. 456
8.2.8.3 Review of In-Custody Deaths ............................................ 456
8.2.8.4 Dissenting Opinions ........................................................... 457
8.2.8.5 Chief of Police Review ....................................................... 457
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.8.6 Project Assignment – In-Custody Death Review Board
Results ................................................................................. 457
8.2.8.7 Memorandum of Completion ............................................. 457
8.2.9 HATE CRIMES AND HATE- OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS
.................................................................................................... 458
8.2.9.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE ...................................................... 458
8.2.9.2 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 458
8.2.9.3 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND
HATE- OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS ........................ 459
8.2.9.4 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND
HATE- OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – Preliminary
Investigating Officer ........................................................... 459
8.2.9.5 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND
HATE- OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – Field
Supervisor ........................................................................... 460
8.2.9.6 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND
HATE- OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – Watch
Commander ......................................................................... 460
8.2.9.7 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND
HATE- OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – Investigating
Detail Responsibility .......................................................... 460
8.2.10 CRIMES AGAINST PEACE OFFICERS ..................................... 461
8.2.11 VIOLENT CRIMES DETECTIVE – NOTIFICATION.................... 461
8.2.12 TARASOFF NOTIFICATION ................................................... 462
8.2.12.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................ 462
8.2.12.2 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES .................................... 463
8.2.13 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS ...................................... 463
8.2.13.1 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – DEFINITIONS ..... 463
8.2.13.2 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – NOTIFICATIONS 464
8.2.13.3 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – OFFICER
RESPONSIBLITIES ............................................................. 464
8.2.13.4 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – CLASSIFICATION
.............................................................................................. 464
8.1.13.5 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – BE ON THE LOOK
OUT (BOLO) ........................................................................ 465
8.2.13.6 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – TELETYPE ......... 465
8.2.13.7 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – LOCATED MISSING
PERSONS ............................................................................ 465
8.2.13.8 COURTESY MISSING PERSON REPORTS ....................... 466
8.2.13.9 AMBER AND SILVER ALERTS ........................................... 466
8.2.14 GUN VIOLENCE RESTRAINING ORDERS (GVRO) ................ 467
8.2.14.1 GVRO DEFINITION .............................................................. 467
8.2.14.2 TYPES OF GVROs .............................................................. 467
8.2.14.3 GVRO CONSIDERATIONS .................................................. 468
8.2.14.4 PROCEDURES FOR OBTAINING A GVRO ........................ 468
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.14.5 TEMPORARY EMERGENCY GUN VIOLENCE
RESTRAINING ORDER ....................................................... 469
8.2.14.6 GVRO SERVICE .................................................................. 470
8.3 FORENSIC SCIENCES ................................................................... 471
8.3.1 DISPOSITION OF PROPERTY AND EVIDENCE ...................... 471
8.3.1.1 DESTRUCTION OR AUCTION OF PROPERTY .................. 471
8.3.1.2 DISPOSITION OF CASH...................................................... 472
8.3.1.3 COURT ORDERED RELEASE ............................................ 472
8.3.1.4 RELEASE OF AMMUNITION ............................................... 472
8.3.1.5 DRUG DESTRUCTION ........................................................ 472
8.3.1.6 DRUG INVESTIGATIVE DETAILS (MCI & DRUG
INVESTIGATIONS SECTIONS) ........................................... 472
8.3.1.7 STOLEN PROPERTY IN COMPUTER SYSTEMS
(AUTOMATED FIREARMS SYSTEM (AFS) & AUTOMATED
PROPERTY SYSTEM (APS) ................................................ 473
8.3.2 PROPERTY AND EVIDENCE CHECK-OUT AND RETURN ...... 474
8.3.3 PROPERTY AND EVIDENCE PACKAGING AND HANDLING . 475
8.3.4 IMPOUNDING OF PROPERTY AND EVIDENCE....................... 476
8.3.4.1 IMPOUNDING OF UNITED STATES CURRENCY AND
COINS .................................................................................. 476
8.3.4.2 IMPOUNDING OF ITEMS FOR FREEZER STORAGE ........ 476
8.3.4.3 IMPOUNDING OF WET OR BLOODY EVIDENCE .............. 476
8.3.4.4 IMPOUNDING OF NARCOTICS .......................................... 476
8.3.4.5 IMPOUNDING OF BICYCLES ............................................. 477
8.3.4.6 IMPOUNDING OF KNIVES AND BLADES .......................... 477
8.3.4.7 IMPOUNDING OF COLLECTIBLES .................................... 477
8.3.4.8 IMPOUNDING OF JEWELRY .............................................. 477
8.3.4.9 IMPOUNDING OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS ......................... 478
8.3.4.10 IMPOUNDING OF HAZARDOUS WASTE ........................... 478
8.3.4.11 IMPOUNDING OF PRISONER’S PROPERTY ..................... 478
8.3.5 FIREARMS HANDLING AS PROPERTY AND EVIDENCE ....... 479
8.3.5.1 FOUND FIREARMS ............................................................. 479
8.3.5.2 FIREARMS - SAFEKEEPING .............................................. 479
8.3.5.3 RELEASE OF FIREARMS ................................................... 479
8.3.5.4 FIREARMS DESTRUCTION ................................................ 481
8.3.6 CRIME LAB SERVICES ............................................................. 482
8.3.7 CRIME LAB REQUESTS ............................................................ 483
8.3.7.1 FORENSIC ANALYST FIELD CALL-OUT ........................... 483
8.3.7.2 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................ 483
8.3.7.3 CRIME LAB REPORTS ....................................................... 484
8.3.12 IDENTIFICATION TECHNICIAN ................................................ 485
8.4 JUVENILE ........................................................................................ 488
8.4.1 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................. 488
8.4.2 JUVENILE INTAKE AND DETENTION ...................................... 488
8.4.2.1 DEPENDENT AND FOUND CHILDREN .............................. 488
8.4.2.2 CUSTODY OF STATUS OFFENDERS ................................ 489
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.4.2.3 CUSTODY OF JUVENILE OFFENDERS ............................. 489
8.4.2.4 NOTIFICATION OF PARENT OR GUARDIAN .................... 490
8.4.3 MEDICAL CARE OF JUVENILES .............................................. 490
8.4.3.1 Suicidal Juveniles ............................................................... 491
8.4.3.2 Separation of Juveniles at Juvenile Investigations Detail
.............................................................................................. 491
8.4.4 JUVENILE CITATIONS ............................................................... 491
8.4.4.1 JUVENILE CITATIONS – NON-CITABLE JUVENILES ...... 492
8.4.5 ADMONISHMENTS TO JUVENILES .......................................... 492
8.4.5.1 MIRANDA ADVISEMENT .................................................... 492
8.4.5.2 Gladys R Questionnaire ..................................................... 492
8.4.6 TRUANCY, LOITERING – DAYTIME & NIGHTTIME ................. 493
8.4.6.1 DAYTIME LOItERING Enforcement & processing ............ 493
8.4.6.2 curfew ENFORCEMENT & processing .............................. 493
8.4.7 JUVENILE DETENTION - WEAPONS ........................................ 493
8.5 SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS ........................................................... 494
8.5.1 LICENSING ................................................................................ 494
8.5.2 SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS – CONFIDENTIAL INFORMANT
FILE SYSTEM ............................................................................. 496
8.5.3 USE OF INFORMANTS/INFORMANT PAYMENT POLICY ....... 496
8.5.4 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMANTS – PAYMENTS TO (SECRET
SERVICE FUND)......................................................................... 498
8.5.5 INTERAGENCY ASSET SEIZURE ............................................. 501
8.5.6 FORFEITED PROPERTY – ADOPTION & TRANSFER OF
FEDERAL & STATE FORFEITED PROPERTY ......................... 501
8.5.7 DESIGNATION OF CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES FOR
REVERSE STINGS AND POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT (PSDU)
OPERATIONS ............................................................................. 502
8.5.8 USE OF CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES IN REVERSE STING,
PSDU, AND OUTSIDE AGENCY OPERATIONS ....................... 503
8.5.9 INVESTIGATION OF CLANDESTINE LABORATORIES ........... 505
8.5.9.1 ALERT TASK FORCE & CALL-OUT PROCEDURE ........... 507
8.5.11 REGISTRATION OF SEX, DRUG & ARSON OFFENDERS ...... 510
8.5.11.1 SEX OFFENDER IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
(MEGAN'S LAW) .................................................................. 511
8.5.12 WARRANT SUSPECT PICK-UP POLICY ................................. 512
8.5.13 RELEASE OF CRIMINAL STATISTICS TO THE PUBLIC ......... 513
8.5.14 NARCOTICS FLASH FUND ...................................................... 514
8.5.15 DRUG INTERDICTION FUND ................................................... 515
8.6 VICE INVESTIGATIONS .................................................................. 518
8.6.1 HANDLING OF LEWD CONDUCT COMPLAINTS..................... 518
8.6.1.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................... 518
8.6.1.2 SCOPE ................................................................................. 518
8.6.1.3 Enforcement ........................................................................ 518
8.6.1.4 Procedures .......................................................................... 519
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.7 SPECIAL VICTIMS INVESTIGATIONS............................................ 521
8.7.1 DOMESTIC VIOLENCE/SEXUAL ASSAULT RESOURCES FORM
.................................................................................................... 521
8.7.2 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................. 521
8.7.3 DOMESTIC ABUSE RESPONSE TEAM (DART) ....................... 522
8.7.3.1 DART Call-Out Criteria ....................................................... 522
8.7.3.2 DART Call-Out – Officer Responsibilities ......................... 522
8.7.3.3 DART Call-Out – Field Supervisor Responsibilities ........ 523
8.7.3.4 DART Call-Out – Watch Commander Responsibilities .... 523
8.7.4 DOMESTIC VIOLENCE .............................................................. 523
8.7.4.1 ENFORCEMENT OF DOMESTIC VIOLENCE LAWS ......... 523
8.7.4.2 VICTIM ASSISTANCE ......................................................... 523
8.7.4.3 DOMESTIC VIOLENCE – REPORTING .............................. 524
8.7.5 DOMESTIC VIOLENCE RESTRAINING ORDERS ..................... 524
8.7.5.1 EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE ORDERS (EPO) .................... 524
8.7.5.2 SERVICE OF ORDERS ........................................................ 524
8.7.5.3 OUT OF STATE PROTECTIVE AND RESTRAINING ORDERS
.............................................................................................. 525
8.7.5.4 ARRESTS AND CITATIONS FOR DOMESTIC VIOLENCE . 525
8.7.6 SEXUAL ASSAULT RESPONSE TEAM (SART) ....................... 526
8.7.6.1 SART Call-Out Criteria ....................................................... 526
8.7.6.2 SART Call-Out – OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES ............... 527
8.7.6.3 SART Call-Out – Field Supervisor Responsibilities ......... 528
8.7.6.4 SART Call-Out – Watch Commander Responsibilities .... 528
8.7.7 SEXUAL ASSAULT EVIDENCE ................................................. 528
8.7.8 VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN ACT (VAWA) SEXUAL ASSAULT
EXAMS ........................................................................................ 528
8.7.8.1 VAWA SEXUAL ASSAULT EXAMS – Patrol Officer
Responsibilities .................................................................. 529
8.7.8.2 VAWA SEXUAL ASSAULT EXAMS – Sex Crimes Sergeant
Responsibilities .................................................................. 529
8.7.8.3 VAWA SEXUAL ASSAULT EXAMS – Sex Crimes Detective
Responsibilities .................................................................. 530
8.7.8.4 VAWA SEXUAL ASSAULT EXAMS – Evidence Control
Section Responsibilities .................................................... 530
8.7.9 CHILD ABUSE RESPONSE TEAM (CART) ............................... 530
8.7.9.1 CART CALL-OUT CRITERIA ............................................... 530
8.7.9.2 CART CALL-OUT – Officer Responsibilities..................... 531
8.7.9.3 CART CALL-OUT – Field Supervisor Responsibilities .... 531
8.7.9.4 CART CALL-OUT – Watch Commander Responsibilities 531
8.7.10 SUSPECTED CHILD ABUSE REPORT (SCAR) ........................ 532
8.7.10.1 SCAR – EMERGENCY Communications BUREAu
Responsibilities .................................................................. 532
8.7.10.2 SCAR – Patrol Officer Responsibilities ............................ 533
8.7.10.3 SCAR – Field Supervisor Responsibilities ....................... 533
8.7.10.4 SCAR – Watch Commander Responsibilities ................... 533
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.7.10.5 SCAR – Child Abuse Supervisor Responsibilities ........... 534
8.7.10.6 SCAR – SPECIAL VICTIMS Section Lieutenant
Responsibilities .................................................................. 534
9 LEGAL ................................................................................................... 535
9.1 COMPENSATION FOR INJURIES INCURRED ON-DUTY ............. 535
9.2.1 NOTIFICATION TO SCHOOL AUTHORITIES OF THE ARREST
OF SCHOOL EMPLOYEES ........................................................ 535
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
Revised October 15, 2002
1.1 DEPARTMENT MANUAL
The Department Manual describes the Police Department's organizational
structure, sets the policy and procedures, and identifies Bureau responsibilities.
The objectives, principles, policies, procedures, rules and regulations set forth in
the Department Manual are guides to the actions of all Department employees. All
employees of the Department are to conform to the rules and provisions described
in the Department Manual. It is recognized that due to the fluid nature of police
work, the Chief of Police may authorize policy and procedures outside of the
guidelines set forth in the Department Manual. Those authorized changes shall
be incorporated into the Department Manual once Manuals and Orders has been
advised of the changes.
This Department Manual supersedes all existing manuals, orders, and other
regulations, which are in conflict with the contents contained herein.
1.1.1 MANUAL REVISION
All requests for Manual Section revisions, additions, or deletions shall be submitted
through the applicable Bureau Deputy Chief of the employee initiating the request.
All requests shall then be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police. The Office
of the Chief of Police shall review and determine if the request will be forwarded to
the Support Bureau.
Support Bureau shall assign the project to the Training Division, which will conduct
an analysis of the Manual Section and draft a Manual Insert to submit for Bureau-
level and appropriate recognized employee labor organization input.
Training Division shall ensure that all Bureau Deputy Chiefs/Managers or their
designees have reviewed and signed for their respective Bureaus, either
concurrence or objection, relative to the subject policy and procedures. Bureau
Deputy Chiefs shall comment in writing regarding any changes or concerns they
may have.
All documents subject to review by the Bureau shall accompany the final draft
Manual Insert submitted to Chief of Police for review and signature. Upon approval
by the Chief of Police, Support Bureau will distribute a copy of the revision to the
Bureaus, which will ensure appropriate assigned personnel receive a copy of the
insert.
The final, signed Manual Insert shall remain in effect as policy and will be
immediately integrated with the Department Manual.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
24 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1.2 RESPONSIBILITY OF EMPLOYEES
All employees shall be responsible for maintaining up-to-date copies of the
Department Manual and other appropriate Department publications and are
required to familiarize themselves with their contents.
1.1.3 MANUAL DISTRIBUTION
A copy of the Long Beach Police Department Manual shall be made available to
all sworn employees. Copies shall also be available to all Divisions and to offices
where repeated reference to the Department Manual is required. The Manual is
also available to Police Department employees on the Intranet.
The Chief of Police shall authorize the distribution of Department publications.
Upon request, the following publications shall be available to the Civil Service
Department for consideration in the preparation of Police promotional
examinations:
• Manual of the Long Beach Police Department
• Training Bulletins
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
25 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.2 LEGALITY
If any content contained in any Department publication is found to be illegal or
otherwise inapplicable, such findings shall not affect the validity of the remaining
portions of the publication.
The absence of a prohibitive order does not mean that the Department has
approved of any act contemplated or carried out.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.3 DELETED
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
27 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.4 POLICE DEPARTMENT PUBLICATIONS
Official publications of the Long Beach Police Department issued under authority
of the Chief of Police are as follows:
• Bureau Orders – issued by a Bureau Chief/Manager
• Division Manuals - issued by a Division Commander/Administrator
• Divisional Orders - issued by a Division Commander
• Legal Information Bulletins - issued by the Training Division Commander
• Training Bulletins - issued by the Training Division Commander
• Manual of the Long Beach Police Department - issued by the Training
Division Commander
• Uniform and Equipment Specifications Manual - issued by the Training
Division Commander
• Personnel Orders - issued by the Personnel Division Administrator
• Special Orders - issued at the Division or Bureau level
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
28 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.5 UNIFORM & EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
The Uniform and Equipment Specifications Manual identifies all the uniform and
equipment regulations of the Department. Only those items described shall be
authorized for use by employees. The Support Bureau is responsible for the
revision, update and continual maintenance of the Uniform and Equipment
Specifications Manual.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
29 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.6 DEFINITION OF TERMS
The definitions herein govern the terminology used in all communications and
whenever reference is made to any organizational unit of the Department. These
terms will provide uniformity and clarity when discussing the operation and
organization of the Long Beach Police Department.
The following words and terms shall have the meanings assigned.
• Adult – shall mean any person 18 years of age or older
• Beginning of Day and Week – shall mean the workday shall begin at 0001
(12:01 A.M.) and conclude at 2400 (12:00 Midnight). The work week shall
commence at 0001 (12:01 A.M.) each Saturday
• Booking – shall mean the process of registering in Department records the
custody of persons or property
• Business Hours – shall mean 0800 hours to 1700 hours, Monday through
Friday, excluding legal holidays
• Call – shall mean a response made by an employee to a station assignment,
a request from a private person, a Department communication, or in the
furtherance of a Department investigation or assignment
• Charter – shall mean the Charter of the City of Long Beach
• Chief Officer - shall mean a Deputy Chief or Chief
• City – shall mean the City of Long Beach
• Civilian Employee – shall mean any employee of the Department and of the
City of Long Beach, other than a Police Officer
• Command Officer - shall mean a Commander, Deputy Chief, or Chief
• Commanding Officer - shall mean a Commander, Deputy Chief, or Chief
• County – shall mean the County of Los Angeles
• Department – shall mean the Long Beach Police Department
• Department Property – shall mean any City-owned property controlled by the
Department
• Employee/Personnel – these terms are used interchangeably and apply to
any person employed by the Department. These terms also apply to reserve
officers while on-duty
• Incident Commander - shall mean the person of any rank who has taken
charge of an emergency to deploy resources in order to manage the event.
The Incident Commander shall remain in charge until relieved by a higher
ranking officer
• Intoxication – shall mean any employee who is found under the influence of
intoxicating liquor or drugs – see Under the Influence
• Juvenile – shall mean any person under the age of 18 years
• Lawful Order – shall mean any written or oral directive issued by a superior
officer to any subordinate or group of subordinates in the course of police duty
which is not in violation of Federal or State law, City Ordinance and/or
Department rule or regulation
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
30 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Manual, Department Manual, or Procedures Manual - shall mean the
Manual of the Long Beach Police Department
• May – shall mean the action is permissive
• Minor – shall mean any person under the age of 18 years
• Exception: A person under the age of 21 years shall be considered a minor
with respect to the following:
• Sentencing and commitment of persons to the California Youth Authority
• Veteran’s benefits
• Alcoholic Beverage Control Act
• Officer/Sworn Personnel – are used interchangeably and apply to those
employees of the Department, regardless of rank, who are “…sworn in, as
provided by law, to perform the duties of a regular police officer of the City of
Long Beach.” These terms also apply to reserve officer while on-duty
• Permanent Employee – shall mean any person employed by the Long Beach
Police Department who has completed entry level employment probation
• Rank – shall mean the Civil Service title of the classification held by an officer
• Reporting District – shall mean a predetermined geographical area
designated for crime analysis. The district is based on population density,
urban development, recorded criminal history and calls for service (CFS)
• Right – shall mean, in reference to conditions of employment, conditions
specifically outlined by State or Federal law, the City Charter, City Ordinances,
Civil Service Rules and regulations, and the Memorandum of Understandings
of recognized representative employee labor organizations
• Rules/Regulations – shall mean the Manual of the Long Beach Police
Department and other Department documents consisting of detailed directives
and/or orders binding employees of all ranks in terms of authority,
responsibility, and conduct
• Seniority Definitions – Seniority is established as the employee’s most recent
hire date. Time in grade for seniority purposes shall be date of promotion.
Application – Seniority and/or time in grade shall be considered as pertaining
to the following:
• Vacation
• Days off
• Shift
• Holidays
• Shall/Will – means that the action required is mandatory
• Under the Influence – If there is at any time 0.08% by weight of alcohol in the
person’s blood, it shall be presumed that the person is under the influence of
intoxicating liquor
• If there is at any time 0.05% or more but less than 0.08% by weight of
alcohol in the person’s blood, such fact shall not give rise to any
presumption that the person is or is not under the influence of intoxicating
liquor, but such fact may be considered with other competent evidence in
determining whether the person was under the influence of intoxicating
liquor at the time of any alleged offence
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
31 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• If there is at any time 0.08% or more by weight of alcohol in the person’s
blood, it shall be presumed that the person is under the influence of
intoxicating liquor
• Watch Report - shall mean a communication consisting of memoranda of
interest to all personnel or multiple Divisions
• Watch/Shift – shall mean a designated span of time within a 24-hour period
during which personnel are engaged in the performance of their assigned
duties
• Work Day – shall mean the day in which the employee is directed to perform
his/her duties. In situations where an employee works eight to ten consecutive
hours and the hours cover portions of two successive days, the following rule
will apply:
• If the majority of the hours worked are prior to twelve midnight, the day
commencing work shall be considered the “Work Day”.
• If the majority of the hours-worked are after twelve midnight, the day of
ending work shall be considered the “Work Day”.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
32 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.7 ORDERS - TYPES OF
• SPECIAL ORDERS - Special Orders affect the entire Department but are by
nature self-canceling due to time constraints, special situations, or objectives.
Special Orders indicate the Office of Origin and require the signature of the
Chief of Police. Special Orders may be issued in the format of a Watch Report.
• BUREAU ORDERS - Bureau Orders are orders governing the operations and
procedures specific to a particular Bureau. Bureau Orders are intended to be
included in Bureau Manuals. Bureau Orders shall be signed by the Bureau
Chief and shall be approved by the Chief of Police.
• DIVISIONAL ORDERS - Divisional Orders are orders governing the operations
and procedures specific to a particular Division or portion of a Division.
Divisional Orders are intended to be included in Division Manuals. Divisional
Orders shall be signed by the Commander of that Division and shall be
approved by the Bureau Chief
• PERSONNEL ORDERS - Assignment, reassignment, or special detail of
personnel to or within the Department is accomplished by Department
Personnel Orders authorized by the Chief of Police and issued by the
Administrator of the Personnel Division
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
33 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.8 CORRESPONDENCE REFERENCE NUMBER DESIGNATIONS
Reference number designations, as indicated in Training Bulletin #1, shall be used
on all outgoing correspondence to indicate the point of origination. The
designation is intended to simplify identification and distribution of any replies
received.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department GENERAL PROVISIONS
34 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.9 FLAGS - DISPLAY OF
Display of the United States flag at Department facilities and by individuals
representing the Department shall be in accordance with the provisions of the
National Flag Law. See Protocol Manual for further.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
35 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2 STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
36 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.1 ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
Office of the Chief of Police
• Administrative Investigations Detail
• Department Psychologist
• Employee Relations
• Internal Affairs Division
Administration Bureau
• Community Relations Division
• Fiscal Division
• Personnel Division
• Records Division
Investigations Bureau
• Detective Division
• Gang and Violent Crimes Division
• Youth Services Division
Patrol Bureau
• East Division
• North Division
• South Division
• West Division
• Field Support Division
Support Bureau
• Jail Division
• Port Police Division
• Security Services Division
• Training Division
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
37 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.2 RANK
As peace officers, sworn members of the Department have a special responsibility
to act or take command in situations calling for law enforcement action. These
situations may be regular operations such as the command of a patrol shift or might
be an emergency situation such as a disaster.
Sworn police personnel are distinguished by rank, which is assigned in terms of
level of responsibility within the chain of command. The descending order of rank
in the Department is as follows:
• Chief of Police
• Assistant Chief
• Deputy Chief
• Police Commander
• Police Lieutenant
• Police Sergeant
• Police Corporal
• Police Officer
Civilian Chain of Command
• Manager
• Administrator
• Supervisor
2.2.1 COMMAND AUTHORITY – WATCH COMMANDER
Revised March 2, 2015
In the absence of the Chief of Police and/or sworn command staff, the on-duty
Watch Commander shall be the ranking authority of the Department. This authority
includes, functional responsibility and supervision for all on-duty personnel in the
Department and incidents citywide. The on-duty Watch Commander will remain
on-duty until relieved by a subsequent Watch Commander, who shall carry the
same authority and responsibility.
2.2.2 COMMAND OF SCENE – INCIDENT COMMAND
At the start of any police incident, the senior patrol officer or ranking patrol officer
present shall assume command and direction of police personnel in a manner to
assure the most orderly and efficient accomplishment of the police task. When
two or more share the highest rank and no one has been designated as in
command, the officer having seniority in rank shall be in command. This officer
shall remain in command until relieved by a supervisory or command officer of
higher rank. The mere presence of a ranking or senior officer at the scene shall
not indicate his/her assumption of command. The ranking or senior officer shall
remain in an advisory capacity unless he/she specifically assumes command.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
38 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Supervisory or command officers should consider assuming the role of incident
commander when any of the following circumstances exist:
• Multiple crime scenes or related incidents
• Significant deployment of resources
• When the current incident commander could be better used in a different
capacity, e.g., operations officer
• When the ranking supervisor or command officer determines that their
expertise would be better served as incident commander
• When other agencies are involved
• When significant political circumstances exist
• When he/she has begun to give direction and/or orders
Careful consideration should always be given prior to assuming the role of incident
commander to ensure a smooth transition of incident leadership.
Assumption of Command
The senior or ranking officer assuming command at the scene must advise the
officer in command at the time he/she is being relieved. When an officer assumes
command, he/she also assumes all responsibility for the successful completion of
the operation.
At the conclusion of the tactical phase of the incident, command may be
relinquished to the ranking officer from the investigative detail that will conduct any
required follow up investigation.
2.2.3 DUTY CHIEF ON CALL
Unusual or emergency situations may require the attention of the Department’s
senior command staff. In order to facilitate the handling of unusual situations that
occur, an On-Call Duty Chief will be designated as the first senior level command
officer to be notified. The Duty Chief will be a resource to the Watch Commander
via pager or telephone on a daily basis during the hours of 1700 to 0800 Monday
through Friday and 24 hours on weekends and holidays. The Watch Commander
shall refer to the Critical Incident Notification Guide for mandatory notifications to
the Duty Chief.
The Office of the Chief of Police will compile the Duty Chief roster from the ranks
of Deputy Chief and Commander. The Duty Chief roster will be distributed to all
command personnel, patrol lieutenants, the Communications Division, and the
headquarters business desk four weeks in advance of the assignment dates.
Duty Chief Responsibilities
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
39 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Assist the Watch Commander in evaluating the situation and ensure the
necessary procedures are being taken to resolve the problem
• Make the necessary notifications as outlined in the Duty Chief Notification
Guide
• May use the Watch Commander or Communications supervisor to help make
the notifications. Some of the notifications may be made by other means at a
later time based upon the circumstances of the event as determined by the
Duty Chief.
• Must respond to particular situations to assist the Watch Commander as
identified on the Duty Chief Notification Guide
• Shall call the Chief’s Office each morning, prior to 0800 hours, to verify that
appropriate notifications have been made
Select this link for the most current CRITICAL INCIDENT NOTIFICATION GUIDE.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
40 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3 THE CHIEF OF POLICE
Revised July 22, 2021
The Office of the Chief of Police shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed July 22, 2021
The Chief of Police is the Chief Executive Officer of the Department and the final
Department authority relative to policy, budget, operations, and discipline. The
Chief exercises all lawful powers of the office and issues such lawful orders as are
necessary to assure the effective operation of the Department.
General Responsibilities
In addition to those responsibilities identified in Government Code §41601-41612,
the Chief of Police is required to manage and lead the Department, which includes
enforcing all laws and ordinances within the City’s legal jurisdiction; planning,
directing, coordinating, and staffing all operations of the Department; enforcing all
rules and regulations within the Department; completing and forwarding such
reports as may be required by proper authority; and maintaining the Department’s
relationships and lines of communication.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
41 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.4 ASSISTANT CHIEF OF POLICE
Revised July 22, 2021
The Office of the Chief of Police shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed July 22, 2021
The Assistant Chief of Police is appointed by the Chief of Police after the
appointment is confirmed by the City Manager. The Assistant Chief is
responsible for Department operations and other responsibilities as assigned by
the Chief of Police. Subject to the authority of the Chief of Police, the Assistant
Chief of Police shall issue such orders as may be required to promote the
effective performance of all Department operations.
In the absence of the Chief, the Assistant Chief of Police assumes the duties of
the Office of the Chief with the authority to act in accordance with City and
Department policy.
General Responsibilities
The Assistant Chief of Police is required to manage and lead, which includes
enforcing all laws and ordinances within the City’s legal jurisdiction; planning,
directing, coordinating, and staffing all operations of the Department; enforcing all
rules and regulations within the Department; completing and forwarding such
reports as may be required by proper authority; and maintaining the Department’s
relationships and lines of communication.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
42 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.5 DEPUTY CHIEF OF POLICE OR BUREAU MANAGER
Revised July 22, 2021
The Office of the Chief of Police shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed July 22, 2021
A Deputy Chief of Police or Bureau Manager is appointed by the Chief of
Police after the appointment is confirmed by the City Manager. A Deputy Chief
of Police or Bureau Manager provides administrative and executive
assistance to the Assistant Chief of Police or the Chief of Police. Subject to
the authority of the Assistant Chief of Police or the Chief of Police, a Deputy
Chief of Police or Bureau Manager shall issue such orders as may be required
to promote the effective performance of all operations within their Bureau.
A Deputy Chief of Police may be assigned to act as the Assistant Chief of Police
in the absence of the Assistant Chief of Police.
General Responsibilities
A Deputy Chief of Police or Bureau Manager at the direction of the Assistant
Chief of Police or the Chief of Police, is required to manage and lead, which
includes planning, directing, controlling, and coordinating all operations within
their Bureau. A Deputy Chief of Police or Bureau Manager shall report directly
to the Assistant Chief of Police.
A Deputy Chief of Police or Bureau Manager may be assigned additional duties
by the Assistant Chief of Police or the Chief of Police.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
43 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.6 POLICE COMMANDER OR ADMINISTRATOR
Revised July 22, 2021
The Office of the Chief of Police shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed July 22, 2021
A Police Commander or Administrator is appointed by the Chief of Police after the
appointment is confirmed by the City Manager. Subject to the authority of their
assigned Bureau Deputy Chief of Police or Bureau Manager, Police Commanders
and Administrators ensure the effective utilization of police resources in an efficient
manner within their respective divisions while ensuring that City, Department, and
Divisional goals and objectives are achieved.
Police Commanders may be assigned to act as a Deputy Chief of Police in the
absence of a Deputy Chief. Administrators may be assigned to act as a Bureau
Manager in the absence of a Bureau Manager.
General Responsibilities
A Police Commander or Administrator may be assigned additional duties by
their Bureau Deputy Chief of Police/Bureau Manager.
Police Commanders and Administrators are required to manage and lead which
includes planning, directing, supervising, and coordinating operations within their
assigned Divisions. A Police Commander or Administrator shall report directly
to their Bureau Deputy Chief of Police/Bureau Manager.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
44 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.7 POLICE LIEUTENANT
Lieutenants are appointed by the Chief from a certified promotional eligibility list
provided by the Civil Service Department in rank order, per Article IV Section 29
of the Civil Service Rules and Regulations. Under direction, a lieutenant will
command or assist in the command of a functional unit of the Police Department.
A lieutenant directs, supervises, and inspects and coordinates the activities of all
law enforcement and support personnel in a functional or specialized unit or unit
watch.
General Responsibilities
• Command
Direction and control of personnel under their command, typically a watch or
section, to assure the proper performance of duties and adherence to established
rules, regulations, policies, and procedures. Schedules, assigns, supervise, and
reviews the work of assigned personnel. Provides for continuation of command
and/or supervision in their absence.
• Discipline & Morale
Enforces rules, regulations, and orders; recommends and carries out disciplinary
actions. Maintains discipline and morale within their command and is responsible
for the investigation of personnel complaints not assigned elsewhere.
• Inter-Divisional Action
Promotion of team effort and cooperation with other Divisions and units within the
Department. Initiation of action in cases not regularly assigned to their command
when a delay to inform the proper unit may result in a failure to perform. Confers
with commanding officers and acts for them in their absence and performs other
related duties as required.
Specialized Responsibilities
• Patrol - Squad Meeting - Conducts roll calls and communicates all orders or
other information at roll call. Inspection and correction of their command as
necessary
• Reports & Records - Preparation of correspondence and reports.
Maintenance of records relating to the activities of their command
• Investigations - Performs specialized work in law enforcement investigations,
communications, training, community relations and related police assignments
• Training – Coordinates the activities or regular and special police training
programs, including safety and the use of emergency vehicles
• Maintenance - Assurance that offices, equipment, supplies and material
assigned to their command are correctly used and maintained
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
45 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.8 POLICE SERGEANT
Revised October 24, 2014
Sergeants are appointed by the Chief from a certified promotional eligibility list
provided by the Civil Service Department in rank order per Article IV, Section 29
of the Civil Service Rules and Regulations. Where assigned, sergeants work
under the direction of a Lieutenant, Commander, Administrator, Manager, Deputy
Chief or Chief of Police. Sergeants supervise one or more employees. In addition
to the routine and individual responsibilities of all employees, each sergeant is
specifically responsible for the following:
2.8.1 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 24, 2014
A sergeant may be assigned to either field or station duties. They shall closely
supervise the activities of their subordinates, making corrections when necessary
and commending when appropriate. The field sergeant shall monitor his/her radio
at all times. The field sergeant shall log all significant dispatches and dispositions
on the Patrol Bureau’s Sergeant’s Daily Log.
See also section 7.1.9.1 – FIELD SITUATIONS REQUIRING FIELD SERGEANT
RESPONSE
2.8.2 DIRECTION
Revised October 24, 2014
Sergeants shall exercise direct command to assure order, conduct, discipline and
efficiency. Exercise of command may extend to subordinates outside the usual
sphere of supervision if the objective or reputation of the Department requires. If
a sergeant requires a subordinate other than their own to leave a regular
assignment, the directing sergeant shall inform the subordinate’s own sergeant or
supervisor as soon as possible.
2.8.3 ENFORCEMENT OF RULES
Revised October 24, 2014
Sergeants must enforce Department rules, regulations and orders and ensure
compliance with Department policies and procedures.
2.8.4 INSPECTION
Revised October 24, 2014
Sergeants are responsible for the inspection of activities, personnel, facilities and
equipment under their supervision. They are responsible to initiate appropriate
action in the event of failure, error, violation, misconduct, or neglect of duty by a
subordinate.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
46 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.8.5 TRAINING SUBORDINATES
Revised October 24, 2014
A sergeant shall have a working knowledge of the duties and responsibilities of
their subordinates. They shall observe public contacts made by subordinates and
be readily available to provide assistance or instruction as required. The sergeant
shall observe the conduct of assigned personnel and take pro-active command as
necessary.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department STRUCTURE, RANK & RESPONSIBILITIES
47 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.9 MISCONDUCT OBSERVED BY SUPERVISOR
Whenever any command or supervisory officer observes or is informed of
misconduct of another employee that indicates the need for disciplinary action,
they shall take authorized and necessary action and render a complete report of
the incident and their actions. The report will be directed to their Commanding
Officer, who shall forward it as provided in 4.2.5.4 entitled “Reports Enforcement
& Forwarding.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
48 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 PERSONAL CONDUCT
3.1 PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT & RESPONSIBILITIES
Knowledge of Laws & Regulations
Employees are required to establish and maintain a working knowledge of all
appropriate State laws, all laws and regulations of the Department, all Orders and
Directives of the Department and Divisions thereof, and the City of Long Beach
Civil Service Rules and Regulations. In the event of improper action or breach of
discipline, it shall be assumed that the employee was familiar with the law, rule, or
policy in question.
Obedience to Laws & Regulations
Employees are required to obey all State laws, all laws and regulations of the
Department, all Orders and Directives of the Department and Divisions thereof,
and the City of Long Beach Civil Service Rules and Regulations. Employees shall
have all the duties, obligations, responsibilities, and rights assigned to them by
law, including the Memorandum of Understanding.
Authority for Enforcing Obedience
Pertaining to the knowledge of and obedience to laws and regulations, the
disciplinary process is influenced by, and the authority for the enforcement of the
preceding, is found specifically in Article III, Section 302, of the Long Beach City
Charter, and Article VIII, Sections 75 and 76 of the Civil Service Rules and
Regulations, which states in part as follows:
• Powers and Duties of the City Manager
Article III, Section 302, Long Beach City Charter: "The City Manager shall
have the following powers and duties: (b) To appoint, suspend and remove all
City employees in both the classified and unclassified service; except for the
classified service, such powers shall be pursuant to the Civil Service provisions
of this Charter, Civil Service rules, regulations and ordinances; and except the
City Clerk's Department and the elective officers and their appointees and such
officers and employees as shall be subject to appointment by the City Council."
• Specific Charges
Article VII, Section 75, Civil Service Rules and Regulations: "Prior to
suspending, dismissing or demoting a permanent classified employee for
disciplinary reasons, the appointing authority or his/her designated
representative shall afford the employee an opportunity to respond to the
allegations that caused the disciplinary action to be considered. Should the
employee fail to provide sufficient reasons to cause a reconsideration of the
contemplated discipline, a written letter of charges, which shall set forth the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
49 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
acts or omissions with which the employee is charged, shall be served upon
the employee by, or on behalf of, the appointing authority. The letter of charges
shall cite the rules and/or regulations the employee is alleged to have violated.
Service of the letter of charges may be accomplished by either personally
delivering a copy to the employee or by mailing a copy via certified United
States Mail with a return receipt. The letter of charges shall inform the
employee of his or her right to appeal the disciplinary action to the Civil Service
Commission and shall advise the employee that a written notice of appeal must
be filed with the Commission: (1) no later than 10 days after the date the letter
of charges was personally delivered; or (2) no later than 10 days after the date
of delivery recorded on the certified mail return receipt; or (3) not later than 25
days after the date of mailing if the certified mail return receipt is not returned
and the letter of charges was mailed to the employee's address on file."
• Employee Appeal of Discipline Imposition
Article VII, Section 76, Civil Service Rules and Regulations: "With the
exception of summary suspensions under Section 87, any permanent
employee who is suspended, dismissed, or demoted for disciplinary reasons or
pursuant to Section 40, shall be entitled to an appeal under Section 1103 of the
City Charter and/or these Rules. If an employee desires to appeal, he/she must
file a written notice of appeal and request for a hearing: (1) no later than a 10
days after the date the letter of charges was personally delivered; or (2) no later
than 10 days after the date of delivery recorded on the certified mail return
receipt; or (3) no later than 25 days after the date of mailing if the certified mail
return receipt is not returned and the letter of charges was mailed to the
employee's address on file. The Commission may, for good cause, grant an
additional five days in which to file an appeal. In the absence of a timely appeal,
the order of suspension, dismissal or demotion shall be final without any action
of the Commission."
Article XI Section 1103: City Charter Disciplinary Appeals: "No employee
in the classified service shall be suspended, discharged or reduced in
classification for disciplinary reasons until the employee has been presented
with the reasons for such action specifically stated in writing. The employee
shall have the right to appeal such action to the Commission in accordance
with the procedures specified in its rules. The reasons for such action and any
reply thereto by the employee, shall be filed in writing with the Commission."
• Establishing Elements of Violation
Existence of facts establishing a violation of the law, ordinance or rule, is all
that is necessary to support any allegation of such a violation as a basis for a
charge under this section. It is not necessary that a formal criminal complaint
be filed or sustained.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
50 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES - EMPLOYEES
Revised 12/21/2007
While on-duty, employees shall take appropriate action at all times to:
• Treat all persons equally and with fairness, regardless of race, ethnicity, creed,
sexual orientation, disability or social status
• Be responsible for the protection of life and property from criminal attack and
in emergency situations when the welfare of the community is threatened
• Enforce all State and local laws in a reasonable and prudent manner
• Enforce local ordinances relating to the control of crime and regulation of
conduct
• Take such action as may be necessary and operate in such a manner as to
assure the citizens of the City that orderly activities of the community may
proceed without disruption from criminal and irresponsible elements
• Cooperate with and assist citizens of the community and units of the City,
County, State and Federal Government with such problems and in such
situations as customs and traditions dictate, in matters both criminal and non-
criminal
• Be responsible for the care, handling, security and proper disposition of
property obtained during the performance of their duties. The arresting officer
is responsible for the security of all personal property in the possession or
under the control of the arrestee at the time of arrest. With the exception of
vehicles, this responsibility is transferred to Booking Desk personnel or
transporting officers when they accept custody of the arrestee
• Unless otherwise directed, employees shall report to their daily assignment at
the time and place specified and shall be properly uniformed and equipped.
They shall give careful attention to orders and instructions, avoiding
unnecessary talking or movement
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
51 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3 TRUTHFULNESS
Employees are required to be truthful at all times. Employees shall not knowingly
falsify any official report or enter or cause to be entered any inaccurate, false or
improper information on the books, records or registers of the Department.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
52 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.4 CONDUCT TOWARD THE PUBLIC
Employees shall be courteous and orderly when working with the public.
Employees shall perform their duties quietly, avoiding harsh, violent, profane or
insolent language, and shall always remain in control of their behavior regardless
of provocation. On request, employees are required to supply their names and
Departmental ID Number (DID #) or the names and DID # of other employees.
Employees shall respond to requests from the public quickly, efficiently and in a
courteous and professional manner, avoiding unnecessary referral to other parts
of the Department.
Impartial Attitude
Employees shall remain impartial toward all individuals with whom they come in
contact. All citizens are guaranteed equal protection under the law. Exhibiting
partiality for or against a person because of race, sex, national or ethnic origins,
age, influence, or for any other reason, is considered conduct unbecoming an
officer. Similarly, unwarranted interference in the private business of others when
not in the interests of justice is also considered conduct unbecoming an officer.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
53 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.5 CONDUCT ON-DUTY - PROHIBITED ACTIVITY
Employees are prohibited from engaging in the following activities while on-duty:
• Consumption of alcohol/intoxicants by Departmental personnel unless
consumed to further a police purpose. (Also see 3.24, 3.25)
• Sleeping
• Recreational reading (excluding lunch hour)
• Conducting personal business (excluding lunch hour)
• Gambling (unless to further a police purpose)
• Loafing (failure to be attentive to police business)
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
54 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.6 PERSONAL CONDUCT
Employees shall be courteous and civil at all times in their relationship with one
another. On-duty, and particularly in the presence of other officers, employees or
the public, officers shall be referred to by rank. (Also see 3.11)
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
55 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.7 STANDARD OF CONDUCT
Employees shall conduct their private and professional lives in such a manner as
not to harm the integrity or reputation of the Department.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
56 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.8 COOPERATION
Cooperation between the ranks and units of the Department is essential to
effective law enforcement. Therefore, all members are strictly charged with
establishing and maintaining a high spirit of cooperation with the Department.
3.8.1 COOPERATING IN DEPARTMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS
Employees are required to answer questions or provide material and relevant
statements to the proper authority in a Departmental personnel investigation, when
directed. Failure to comply may result in the employee being found insubordinate
and subject to disciplinary action.
3.8.2 ADMINISTRATIVE LEAVE
The Chief of Police retains the discretion to assign any employee to Administrative
Leave during the course of an investigation into allegations of serious misconduct.
Investigations involving an assignment to Administrative Leave will be completed
as quickly as possible. While assigned to Administrative Leave an employee will
continue to receive pay and benefits.
When assigned to Administrative Leave, employees must remain at their residence
(or other location approved by the Internal Affairs Division Commander or his or
her designee), during a set schedule as determined by the Internal Affairs Division
Commander or his or her designee. An employee on Administrative Leave is
required to perform any work they are assigned, to remain on call at the assigned
location of Administrative Leave and report in to the assigned Department
representative at the directed times. Additionally, an employee assigned to
Administrative Leave is required to physically report to any work location as
directed by the Internal Affairs Division Commander or his or her designee.
Employees on Administrative Leave may request the use of holiday time, vacation
time or banked overtime by contacting their assigned Department representative
and obtaining prior approval. Employees assigned to Administrative Leave who
become ill and are unable to fulfill their work duties may use sick time by notifying
their assigned Department representative. Employees assigned to Administrative
Leave are not permitted to engage in collateral employment during their scheduled
hours.
While assigned to Administrative Leave, employees are prohibited from acting in
an official capacity. Employees are prohibited from representing themselves as a
law enforcement officer, and from donning any department uniform or equipment.
Employees who are directed to do so must return department issued equipment,
uniforms, badges and identification to the Department.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
57 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.9 RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN EMPLOYEES
Camaraderie among employees is healthy for the employing organization and a
necessary ingredient in a successful, productive and fulfilling occupation.
However, public trust requires that employees avoid a conflict between their
professional responsibilities and their personal relationships with other employees.
Corrected 05/26/04
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
58 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.10 UNLAWFUL HARASSMENT COMPLAINTS (2.2 Human Relations Personnel Policies & Procedures)
It is the policy of the City of Long Beach to actively promote employment
opportunities to all persons on all matters affecting City employment. The City of
Long Beach reaffirms that no person shall be harassed on the basis of race,
religion, color, national origin, ancestry, physical or mental disability, medical
condition, marital status, age, sex, sexual orientation, or on any other basis
inconsistent with federal or state statutes, the City Charter, or City ordinances,
resolutions, rules, or regulations.
Unlawful Harassment - Harassment that creates a hostile, intimidating, or
offensive work environment, and occurs because of an employee's protected
status (i.e. race, religion, national origin, ancestry, physical or mental disability,
medical condition, marital status, age, sex, or sexual orientation), is unlawful.
Sexual Harassment - Sexual harassment is a form of sex discrimination. It is
conduct of a sexual nature that is unwelcome, not asked for, and not returned.
Sexual harassment may consist of any form or combination of verbal, non-verbal,
visual, or physical conduct. It need not be explicit, nor even specifically directed
at an individual. Such behavior includes, but is not limited to: Sexually offensive
comments, offers, slurs, innuendoes, leering, ogling, posters, cartoons, or
drawings; physical contact such as touching, pinching, or brushing against
another's body; or demands for sexual favors.
Unwelcome sexual conduct which is sufficiently severe and pervasive as to create
a hostile, intimidating, or offensive work environment, or when an employment
decision is based on whether an employee submitted or refused to submit to some
form of sexual conduct, is considered harassment.
The following are three criteria that shall be utilized as guidelines for determining
whether or not certain conduct constitutes unlawful sexual harassment:
• Submission to the conduct is made either as an explicit or implicit condition of
employment; or,
• Submission to or rejection of such conduct is the basis for employment
decisions affecting an individual, such as, continued employment or decisions
affecting pay, benefits, and/or advancement opportunities, or other terms and
conditions of employment; or,
• Such conduct has the purpose or effect of substantially interfering with an
individual's work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive
working environment
Retaliation - Retaliation against an individual for having initiated a complaint of
harassment or discrimination is considered unlawful harassment. To discipline,
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
59 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
transfer, shun, or deny a promotional opportunity, training, or assignment to an
employee, after he/she has filed a complaint, may be viewed as retaliation.
3.10.1 COMPLAINT RESOLUTION PROCESS
The following procedures are intended to facilitate the timely resolution of
complaints of unlawful harassment. They are designed to administratively resolve
complaints in a timely manner, ensure that appropriate action is taken, and
minimize the financial impact upon both the complainant and the City.
A City employee, job applicant, or third party, such as a member of the public, has
several administrative processes available to him/her for resolution of a complaint.
An individual may present a complaint either to an appropriate
supervisor/manager, a designee, or the City's Equal Employment Opportunity
Office.
Each Department head designates an Equal Opportunity Counselor who acts as
liaison between management and the Department's employees. The
Administrator of the Personnel Division is the Police Department's Counselor. The
counselor serves as the Department's primary contact person on equal
employment opportunity issues, and assists employees in the resolution of
problems and concerns related to equal employment opportunity matters.
Upon request, employees shall be permitted to use scheduled work hours in order
to meet with their Equal Opportunity Counselor, appropriate supervisor/manager,
or the City's Equal Employment Opportunity Office. No employee shall fear
reprisal or retaliation because of reporting an alleged act of harassment.
It is important that complainants be apprised of their rights to file a complaint with
an external regulatory agency. They should, however, be encouraged to first
utilize the City's internal procedure to seek resolution.
3.10.2 PROCEDURES
Any employee, who believes he/she has experienced any type of unlawful
harassment, should immediately notify the appropriate supervisor/manager,
Department Equal Employment Counselor, or the City's Equal Employment
Opportunity Office.
Departmental Investigation
• Upon being made aware that an issue exists regarding harassment, the
Department shall immediately contact the City's Equal Employment
Opportunity Office for direction, prior to proceeding with any investigation, and
before taking ANY action. This will help verify that the policy is being correctly
interpreted and the procedures are properly followed. It will also provide
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
60 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
uniformity in the City's response to allegations regarding unlawful harassment
and ensure that immediate and appropriate action is taken
• In the event a complaint is filed with the Equal Employment Opportunity
Commission (EEOC) or the Department of Fair Employment and Housing
(DFEH), by following this procedure, the Equal Employment Opportunity Office
will be fully informed and in agreement with all prior action taken
• With the concurrence of the Equal Employment Opportunity Office, the
Department shall proceed with an investigation
During this entire process, it is critical that, to the extent possible, strict
confidentiality be maintained. Any individual contacted during an investigation
is to be instructed to maintain confidentiality regarding all matters related to the
complaint. All records pertaining to the complaint are strictly confidential and
are to be maintained apart from any personnel file
As part of the investigation, the complainant must advise the Department what
he/she would consider a resolution of the complaint
• Upon completion of an investigation and prior to drawing any conclusion, the
Department shall again contact the Equal Employment Opportunity Office. In
cooperation with the Equal Employment Opportunity Office, the course of
action will be determined, including any corrective action, if appropriate
• Upon completion of the corrective action, the Department shall notify the
complainant, complete records, then report the action taken to the Equal
Employment Opportunity Office
3.10.3 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OFFICE INVESTIGATION
The Equal Employment Opportunity Office acts as a neutral third party in a
complaint, and is responsible for investigating, examining the facts, and
determining whether unlawful harassment did occur. The role of the Equal
Employment Opportunity Office is not to serve as an advocate of either the City or
the complainant, but to determine the truth of the matter and protect the City
against needless liability.
• An employee or job applicant always has the option of filing a complaint directly
with the City's Equal Employment Opportunity Office
• An employee shall be allowed to use scheduled work hours for meeting with
the Equal Employment Opportunity Officer/designee
• The Equal Employment Opportunity Office shall contact and advise the
Department head that an employee/applicant has filed an unlawful harassment
complaint. Then, following discussion with the Department, the Equal
Employment Opportunity Office will decide whether the Department or the
Equal Employment Opportunity Office will proceed with an investigation. The
Department head will be notified of the course of action
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
61 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• In order to seek resolution, any person(s) having knowledge of the incident(s)
may be contacted directly by the Equal Employment Opportunity
Office/designee. When this occurs, and when it is appropriate, the Equal
Employment Opportunity Office will notify the appropriate Department Manager
of the contact and the information received from the employee(s)
Because an investigation may ultimately be conducted by an outside regulatory
agency, it is imperative that the Equal Employment Opportunity Office receive
all comments uncensored and as stated by the employee(s). Under no
circumstances will information be altered or withheld. This could impede the
City's ability to properly respond to the charges and ultimately result in
additional liability to the City.
• Upon completion of the investigation, the Equal Employment Opportunity Office
shall contact and advise the Department of the results and the appropriate
corrective action that will be recommended to the City Manager/designee
• Following the completion of any corrective action, the Department is to advise
the Equal Employment Opportunity Office of the action taken. The Equal
Employment Opportunity Office shall then inform the complainant of the
resolution and closure of the complaint. The complainant shall also be advised
of his/her right to file a complaint with an external regulatory agency
Outside Regulatory Agencies
An individual may elect to file a complaint with an outside regulatory agency. The
state agency is the Department of Fair Employment and Housing (DFEH) and the
federal agency is the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC).
• The City's Equal Employment Opportunity Office is responsible for handling
and responding to all complaints filed with outside regulatory agencies. Should
the Department receive a complaint, it is to be immediately forwarded to the
Equal Employment Opportunity Office
• Once a complaint is received from an outside agency, communication with the
individual/ complainant ceases and all further communication takes place
between the Equal Employment Opportunity Office and the regulatory agency.
It then becomes the responsibility of the Equal Employment Opportunity Office,
on behalf of the City, to prepare a response to the complaint
• Upon receipt of a complaint, the Equal Employment Opportunity Office shall
provide the Department head with a copy of the complaint. The Department
then assigns an individual to respond to the allegations contained in the
complaint, provides any additional information that might assist in preparing the
City's response, and returns it to the Equal Employment Opportunity Office
within the time specified
• Upon receipt of the Department's response, the Equal Employment Opportunity
Office prepares the City's response to the regulatory agency. As with internal
investigations, this often requires that individuals, who may be able to provide
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
62 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
additional information or clarification, will be contacted directly, following
notification of appropriate Department management
• Once the City's response is completed, it is forwarded to the City Attorney's
Office for review. When concurrence is obtained, the response is forwarded to
the appropriate agency and a copy of the City's response is forwarded to the
Department
• Prior to the resolution of a complaint, agencies often contact the Equal
Employment Opportunity Office and request additional information and/or
meetings with specific individuals. This will be coordinated through the Equal
Employment Opportunity Office. There should not be any contact between the
Department and an agency, without the prior knowledge of the Equal
Employment Opportunity Office and the approval of the City Attorney's Office
Should an agency, attorney, or union representing a complainant contact the
Department or individual, they are to be referred to the Equal Employment
Opportunity Office.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
63 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.11 WORKPLACE THREATS AND VIOLENCE (Also see 3.6)
The City of Long Beach is committed to providing a safe work environment that is
free of violence or the threat of violence. Threats, threatening behavior, or acts of
violence against employees, visitors, or other individuals by anyone on City
property will not be tolerated. Violations of this policy by City employees will lead
to disciplinary action, up to and including termination, and may include arrest and
prosecution. Violations by non-City employees may result in arrest and
prosecution as well.
This policy is applicable to all City departments and offices reporting to the City
Manager, and to all City locations under the City Manager's authority. It is further
requested that elective offices and other City departments comply with the
provisions of the policy.
Responsibility
The City has formed a Threat Management Team to implement this policy and
monitor issues dealing with workplace threats and violence. This team is
responsible for implementing this policy, managing violence prevention programs,
and crisis intervention. The Police Department's management representative to
the Threat Management Team is the Personnel Administrator.
All Department managers, supervisors and employees are responsible for
reporting threats or incidents of violence to their management representative.
Definitions of Threats and Violent Behavior
• The actual or implied threat of harm to an individual, group of individuals, or
relatives of those individuals. These threats may be made in person, over the
telephone, through the mails, or by electronic communication
• The possession, on City property, of weapons of any kind, unless specifically
authorized by the Police Department or appointing authority, or the brandishing
of any object that could reasonably be construed as a weapon
• Loud, disruptive or angry behavior or language that is clearly not part of the
typical work environment
• Blatant or intentional disregard for the safety or wellbeing of others
• Willful destruction of City or personal property
• Commission of a violent felony or misdemeanor on City property
• Any other act that a reasonable person would perceive as constituting a threat
of violence
Procedures
Emergency Incidents – Any employee who is subjected to, witnesses, or has
knowledge of actions that pose immediate danger to themselves or others must
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
64 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
report these acts to appropriate authorities at once. When the incident constitutes
an emergency, the employee should immediately notify a supervisor and/ or the
Watch Commander.
The primary objective in dealing with an incident in-progress is to stabilize the
situation, de-escalate the potential for violence, and ensure that there is no harm
to person or property. Once the emergency has passed, the designated
management representative shall be responsible for conducting a thorough
investigation of the incident, and reporting findings to the department head and the
City Safety Officer, using the Threat Incident Report as a guide.
Non-emergency Incidents – When an employee becomes aware of a potential
violation of the policy which does pose an immediate threat of violence, he/she is
responsible for notifying their immediate supervisor and the designated
management representative.
No employee who, acting in good faith, initiates a complaint or reports an incident
under this policy will be subject to retaliation or harassment. Any employee
reported to be in violation of this policy will be entitled to due process.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
65 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.12 ORDERS - MANNER OF ISSUING
Revised May 2, 2013
The Office of the Chief of Police will have audit responsibility.
Orders from supervisors to subordinates shall be in clear and understandable
language, civil in tone, and shall be used only in regard to Department business.
Orders may be written or oral and in the form of a directive or instruction.
3.12.1 ORDERS – CRITICISM OF
Revised May 2, 2013
Employees shall not publicly criticize orders from supervisors.
3.12.2 ORDERS - UNLAWFUL
Revised May 2, 2013
No command or supervisory officer shall knowingly issue an order that is in
violation of a law, ordinance or Department policy.
3.12.2.1 OBEDIENCE TO UNLAWFUL ORDERS
Revised May 2, 2013
Employees issued orders that they feel are unjust or contrary to policies and
regulations must first obey the order to the best of their ability except when ordinary
and prudent knowledge would indicate that the order would be detrimental to the
Department, the City, or physical well-being of an employee or a private citizen.
3.12.3 ORDERS – CONFLICT OF
Revised May 2, 2013
In the event of a conflict of orders, employees shall respectfully call such conflict
to the attention of the supervisor giving the last order. Should the latter not change
his/her order, the order shall be obeyed. The employee shall not be held
responsible for disobedience of any former order or for any violation of the rules in
obeying the last order given.
3.12.4 ORDERS, FAILURE TO OBEY - INSUBORDINATION
Revised May 2, 2013
Failure or deliberate refusal of any employee to obey a lawful order given by a
supervisor shall be considered insubordination. Ridiculing a supervisor or the
orders given by a supervisor, in or out of their presence is also considered
insubordination. Employees in doubt as to the nature of their assignment shall seek
clarification from their supervisor by going through the chain of command.
Employees assigned to the Internal Affairs Division and investigating potential acts
of misconduct shall be considered to be acting at the direction of the Chief of
Police. Employees shall follow orders given by employees assigned to the Internal
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
66 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Affairs Division as if the orders were given by the Chief of Police. Failure to do so
shall be deemed insubordination.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
67 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.13 DUTY RESPONSIBILITIES
Employees of the Department are always subject to duty. Employees shall, at all
times, respond to the lawful orders of superior officers and other proper authorities.
Appropriate police action must be taken whenever required. Employees assigned
to special duties are not relieved from taking proper action outside the scope of
their specialized assignment when necessary.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
68 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.14 LOYALTY
Loyalty to the Department and to associates is an important factor in Departmental
morale and efficiency. Employees shall maintain loyalty to the Department and
their associates consistent with the law and personal ethics.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
69 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.15 ASSISTANCE IN THE FACE OF DANGER
Officers are required to take appropriate police action toward aiding fellow police
officers exposed to danger or in situations where danger may be impending.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
70 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.16 ASSISTING CRIMINALS
Employees shall not communicate directly or indirectly information that may assist
persons guilty of criminal or quasi-criminal acts in avoiding arrest or punishment.
Employees shall not use information systems for the purpose of assisting persons
accused of crimes without legal justification.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
71 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.17 PERSONAL PREFERMENT
Employees shall not, unless within the scope of their assignment, seek the
influence or intervention of individuals outside the Department for purposes of
personal preferment, advantage, transfer or advancement.
Private Gain
Employees shall not participate in activities that involve the use, for private gain or
advantage, of the Department's time, facilities, equipment or supplies; nor shall
employees in any way use the badge, uniform, prestige or influence of the
Department for private gain or advantage.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
72 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.18 AVAILABILITY ON-DUTY
Employee’s on-duty shall not conceal themselves except as required in a specific
police function. Employees shall be immediately available to the public during duty
hours.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
73 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.19 CALLS FOR SERVICE
While on-duty, employees of the Department shall respond without unnecessary
delay to all calls for police assistance from citizens or other police employees.
Emergency calls shall take precedence; however, all calls shall be answered as
soon as possible consistent with normal safety precautions and California vehicle
laws. Failure to respond to a call for police assistance promptly, without
justification, is considered misconduct. Except under the most extraordinary
circumstances or when otherwise directed by competent authority, employees
shall not fail to answer any telephone or radio call directed to them.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
74 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.20 CARING FOR NEEDY PERSONS
Employees shall always be alert to assist lost, helpless, injured or ill individuals.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
75 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.21 IDENTIFICATION AS POLICE OFFICER/SECURITY OFFICER
Officers shall identify themselves by displaying the official badge and/or
identification card, if requested to do so, before taking action except when
impractical, not feasible, or where the identity is obvious.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
76 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.22 GENERAL UNIFORM REQUIREMENTS
See Special Order BULLET RESISTANT VESTS issued April 28, 2017.
All police employees of the Department, except non-uniformed civilian employees,
shall maintain a regulation uniform in good order. Officers in uniform shall wear
badge and nameplate identification at all times.
All articles of uniform shall conform to the Long Beach Police Department Uniform
and Equipment Specifications Manual. Civilian clothing will not be worn with any
distinguishable part of the uniform. Employees shall not wear the uniform off-duty
without the permission of a commanding officer, with the exception of traveling to
and from work.
Wearing the Uniform
Uniforms shall be kept neat, clean and well pressed at all times; leather and shoes
polished, badges and metal shined.
3.22.1 Minimum On-Duty Uniform/Equipment Requirements
The Chief’s Office has Audit Responsibility
Effective date: April 16, 2007
Patrol Officer
• Uniform – Badge – Nametag
• Body Armor/Protective Vest (in the event of a medical condition that temporarily
precludes an officer from wearing a vest, exceptions will be made on a case by
case basis)
• Sam Browne
• Lethal Weapon
• Impact Weapon
• Taser if issued
• Flashlight
• Handcuffs
Field Detective
• Uniform – Approved for the specific assignment worked – Badge – Nametag
• Body Armor/Protective Vest
• Sam Browne/Utility/Tactical belt
• Lethal Weapon
• Impact Weapon
• Taser if issued
• Flashlight
• Handcuffs
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
77 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Investigative Detective
• Suit and tie or approved soft uniform and
• Badge or Department ID
• Lethal Weapon (when away from desk and outside Public Safety Building)
• Handcuffs
• Undercover officers are not required to comply
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
78 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.23 CLOTHING, APPEARANCE AND GROOMING
Revised February 7, 2019
The Office of the Chief of Police has audit responsibility.
3.23.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised February 7, 2019
1) Tattoo – The act or practice of marking the skin with indelible designs, forms,
figures, art, etc., by making punctures in the skin and inserting pigment.
Tattoo also includes the act or practice of marking the skin with non-
permanent ink, designs, forms, figures, art, etc. (e.g., airbrush, henna,
temporary tattoo, etc.).
2) Scarification – The act of intentional cutting of the skin for the purpose of
creating a design, form, figure, or art.
3) Branding – The act of intentional burning of the skin for the purpose of
creating a design, form, figure, or art.
4) Piercing – The act of creating a hole in any part of the body for the purpose
of inserting an object, jewelry, or ornamentation.
3.23.2 FINAL AUTHORITY AND POLICY EXCEPTIONS
Revised February 7, 2019
The final authority for interpretation and compliance with all provisions contained
within LBPD Manual § 3.23 regarding clothing, appearance, tattoos, body piercing
and grooming will rest with the Office of the Chief of Police, or appointed designee.
Sworn personnel in undercover assignments may deviate from the established
clothing, grooming, and appearance standards otherwise mandated by this policy
with the approval of their division commander, or designee.
Pregnant women or employees with medical restrictions, as documented by a
medical professional, may deviate from the dress code with the approval of their
division commander, administrator, or designee.
3.23.2.1 GROOMING AND APPEARANCE STANDARD
Revised February 7, 2019
The following grooming standards apply to all Department personnel:
1) Employees will present a neat and clean appearance;
2) Hair will be neat, clean, and trimmed;
3) Hair coloring is permitted in natural hair colors only;
4) Any employee required to use respirators shall not have facial hair that
interferes with the proper functioning of the respirator;
5) Makeup may be worn in moderation and shall be consistent with a
professional and businesslike appearance.
Determination of hairstyle within the following criteria is an individual decision. The
following grooming standards apply to all sworn and uniformed civilian personnel:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
79 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1) Head hair shall be neat and clean, and shall not interfere with the proper
wearing of the uniform, hat, or use of protective equipment (i.e., mobile field
force helmet, gas mask, or Class A cover, etc.).
2) Head hair shall not be worn, or arranged in a way that would be advantageous
for a suspect to grab and constitute a safety hazard for the employee.
3) Wigs or hairpieces may be worn. The wig or hairpiece shall conform to the
Department’s general hair standards.
4) Sunglasses shall be conservative in style, and professional in appearance.
5) Male employees
a. Head hair shall be neatly trimmed and may be worn full at the sides and
back, but shall not extend over the shirt collar of the uniform.
b. Sideburns shall not extend below the bottom of the earlobe, will be of
even width, not flared, and will end with a clean-shaven horizontal line.
c. Mustaches shall not extend below the natural smile line.
d. Beards shall be permitted only for non-uniformed civilian personnel, or
for a bonafide medical condition.
6) Female employees
a. Hair may be worn full at the sides and back, but shall not extend over
the shirt collar of the uniform;
i. While dressed in civilian attire, hair may extend over the collar of
civilian clothing, as long as it presents a well-groomed appearance.
b. Women’s hair control devices shall be in neutral colors only.
3.23.3 BODY PIERCING OR ALTERATION
Revised February 7, 2019
Males are not permitted to wear any visible piercings. Females with pierced ears
are permitted to wear one (1) small stud-type earring per earlobe. With the
exception of the earlobe for female employees, body piercing shall not be visible
while an employee is on duty or representing the Department in any official
capacity.
Alteration to any visible area of the body, while in any authorized uniform or attire
that is a deviation from normal anatomical features, and is not the result of an
accident, a medical condition or medically required, is prohibited. Such body
alterations include, but are not limited to:
1) Tongue piercing or splitting; or,
2) Abnormal shaping of the ears, eyes, nose or teeth.
3.23.4 TATTOOS, BRANDS, SCARIFICATIONS
Revised February 7, 2019
All Department personnel, while on-duty, shall not display any tattoo, brand, or
scarification. Visible tattoos on the neck, face, head, tongue, lips, scalp, or hands
are not authorized. A single-band tattooed ring, on one finger, on one hand, is
authorized and does not require covering.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
80 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The display of any tattoo, scarification or brand considered offensive, regardless
of its location, by any member of the Department, while in any Department facility,
is not permitted and shall be covered with a Department approved uniform or
authorized cover at all times. Examples of offensive tattoos, scarifications, or
brands prohibited by this policy include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Those that exhibit or advocate discrimination against gender, race, religion,
ethnicity, or national origin;
2) Those that exhibit gang, supremacist, or extremist group affiliation; or
3) Those that exhibit or depict drug use, sexually explicit acts, or other obscene
material.
3.23.4.1 TATTOOS, BRANDS, SCARIFICATIONS – AUTHORIZED
COVERS
Revised February 7, 2019
Employees shall cover all tattoos, brands, and scarifications by wearing an
authorized long-sleeved uniform shirt or appropriate business attire. The following
additional coverings are approved:
1) Employees with visible tattoos, brands or scarifications that extend below the
elbow may wear a compression sleeve in black for sworn officers, tan for
special service officers, or in a color similar to the specific uniform shirt worn.
2) If an employee has tattoos, brands or scarifications covering a three-inch
square area or less, that is visible on the arm or leg; the employee may opt
to cover the area with one adhesive patch, of a color as close to the
employee’s skin color as reasonably available. Only one patch per arm or
leg is authorized and may not exceed three-inches by three-inches in size.
3.23.4.2 TATTOOS, BRANDS, SCARIFICATIONS – EXCEPTIONS
Revised February 7, 2019
Employees hired prior to January 4, 2007, shall be exempt from the restriction in
LBPD Manual § 3.23.4 TATTOOS, BRANDS, SCARIFICATIONS on tattoos,
scarifications, or brands already in existence as of July 5, 2007. Any member of
the Department who, after July 5, 2007, obtained a visible tattoo, scarification, or
brand shall:
1) Lose their previously held grandfather exemption; and,
2) Cover all visible tattoos, scarifications, or brands with a Department approved
cover; or,
3) Remove the tattoo, scarification, or brand at their own expense.
3.23.5 CLOTHING STANDARD
Revised February 7, 2019
3.23.5.1 CLOTHING STANDARD – NON-UNIFORMED SWORN
PERSONNEL
Revised February 7, 2019
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
81 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Male employees, who are not working undercover assignments and who are
permitted to wear civilian clothes on duty, shall wear either a business suit or sports
coat and trousers, with a dress shirt and tie, or a Department approved uniform for
that assignment. Cargo pants, sweatpants, athletic shoes, or sandals shall not be
worn. All shoes shall be secured at the heel of the foot or have a support strap.
Female employees, who are not working undercover assignments and who are
permitted to wear civilian clothing, shall conform to the standards normally worn
by office personnel in the private business sector, or a Department approved
uniform for that assignment. Cargo pants, sweatpants, shorts, t-shirts, bare
midriffs, blouses, and shirts that are see-through or have revealing necklines,
athletic shoes, or beach-type sandals shall not be worn. All shoes shall secure at
the heel of the foot or have a support strap.
3.23.5.2 CLOTHING STANDARD – NON-UNIFORMED CIVILIAN
PERSONNEL
Revised February 7, 2019
Civilian employees shall conform to the standards normally worn by office
personnel in the private business sector unless otherwise directed by the division
commander, administrator, or designee. Cargo pants, sweatpants, jeans, shorts,
t-shirts, tank tops, bare midriffs, blouses, and shirts that are see-through or have
revealing necklines, athletic shoes or beach type sandals shall not be worn.
3.23.5.3 CLOTHING STANDARD – MANNER OF DRESS IN COURT
Revised February 7, 2019
Appearance in court is a duty assignment; when appearing in court, employees
must wear a Department approved uniform, specific to the employee’s duty
assignment, or a coat, with a dress shirt and tie for male employees and business
attire for female employees. Employees must not appear in undercover attire
unless so directed by the District Attorney or City Prosecutor. Weapons shall not
be displayed unless the uniform is worn.
3.23.5.4 CLOTHING STANDARD – MANNER OF DRESS AT TRAINING
Revised February 7, 2019
Attendance at training is a duty assignment; employees are required to comply
with the stated dress code appropriate to the specific training. If not specified,
employees shall dress in a manner that presents a professional image. The
following shall not be worn while attending training:
1) Tank tops,
2) T-shirts with inappropriate logos or images,
3) Shorts,
4) Sandals or bare feet, or
5) Any attire deemed inappropriate by the division commander, administrator,
or designee.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
82 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Personnel who report to training inappropriately attired or groomed will be ordered
to leave and make a suitable change. Any time incurred as absent from training
for this purpose will not be reflected as scheduled hours on the Employee Time
Record.
3.23.6 REQUEST FOR MEDICAL OR RELIGIOUS EXEMPTION
Revised February 7, 2019
To request a medical or religious exemption from this policy, an employee shall
contact the Personnel Administrator to schedule a meeting to discuss the need for
an exemption.
The Personnel Administrator will review the issues, and possible accommodations.
A recommendation will be provided to the Chief of Police, or his/her designee, for
final approval.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
83 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.24 INTOXICANTS - DEPARTMENT PREMISES (Also see Definitions "Under the Influence")
Employees shall not bring into or keep intoxicating liquor on Department
premises except:
• When necessary in the performance of a police task
• Packaged goods for temporary storage in locker space when the seals are
unbroken
Liquor brought into Department premises in the furtherance of a police task shall
be properly identified and stored according to current policy.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
84 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.25 ALCOHOL AND DRUG USE (Also see 3.5)
The Department has a zero tolerance for illegal drug use, or any other substance
that would interfere with the employee's safe and effective job performance.
Employees shall not ingest illegal drugs. The possession of illegal drugs by
employees shall be limited to legitimate and previously sanctioned police
purposes.
Employees shall not be intoxicated while on-duty.
In accordance with the Department of Human Resources, Personnel Policies &
Procedures, Alcohol and Drug Use, Number 1.10:
• Employees shall not consume alcohol, be under the influence of alcohol, or
possess an open container of alcohol, or unlawfully manufacture, distribute,
dispense, possess, or use illegal drugs while at City work locations or
elsewhere during work hours, during meal and rest periods, while in or
operating City vehicles or equipment, while wearing clothing that identifies the
individual as a City employee, while foreseeably subject to being called to duty,
or at any time that would foreseeably interfere with the employee's safe and
effective job performance. Exceptions pertaining to alcohol may be allowed
while performing an approved police task.
• Employees may be required to take a drug and/or alcohol test if there is a
reasonable suspicion of violation of this policy.
Definitions
• Foreseeably Subject to Being Called to Duty - When an employee has been
placed on standby status, or placed on call to appear in court, or given notice
to return to work the same day
• Foreseeably Interfere - When any reasonable person should have known that
using a drug, medication, alcohol, or any other substance could cause
drowsiness, potentially hazardous side effects, or have mind or mood altering
properties that could interfere with the employee's safe and effective job
performance or operation of City vehicles or equipment
• Illegal Drug - Any controlled substance, drug, narcotic or immediate precursor
specified or referenced in any provision of the California Uniform Controlled
Substance Act (Division 10 of the Health and Safety Code) which may subject
an individual to criminal penalties, or a legal drug that has not been legally
obtained or is being used by an individual for whom it was not prescribed, or is
not being used in a manner, combination, or quantity for which it was
manufactured, prescribed, or intended
• Reasonable Suspicion - A suspicion based on objective facts and reasonable
inference drawn from those facts, that an employee is under the influence of
drugs and/or alcohol so that the employee's ability to perform the functions of
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
85 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
the job is impaired or so that the employee's ability to safely perform his/her job
is reduced
• Workplace - At City work locations or other assigned locations during work
hours, or while in or operating City vehicles or equipment
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
86 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.26 LOITERING
On-Duty
Officers on-duty or in uniform shall not enter taverns, theaters or other public
places except to perform a police task. Loitering and unnecessary conversation in
such locations is forbidden.
Off-Duty
Employees off-duty and not on official standby shall not loiter in Department areas
other than those normally designated for use as recreation areas.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
87 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.27 GIFTS, GRATUITIES & REWARDS
Soliciting
Employees shall not under any circumstance solicit any gift, gratuity, loan, or fee
where there is a direct or indirect connection between the solicitation and their
Departmental employment.
Acceptance
Employees shall not accept either directly or indirectly any gift, gratuity, loan, fee
or any other thing of value arising from or offered because of Police employment
or any activity connected with their employment. Employees shall not accept any
gift, gratuity, loan, fee or other thing of value, the acceptance of which might tend
to influence directly or indirectly the actions of said employee or any other
employee in any matter of Police business; or which might tend to cast an adverse
reflection on the Department or its employees. No employee of the Department
shall receive any gift or gratuity from other employees junior in rank without the
express permission of the Chief of Police.
Disposition
Any unauthorized gift, gratuity, loan, fee, reward or other thing of value falling into
any of these categories and coming into the possession of any employee shall be
forwarded to the office of the Chief of Police with a written report detailing the
circumstances.
Free Admissions & Passes
Employees shall not solicit or accept free admission to theaters or other places of
amusement for themselves or others, except in the line of duty.
Other Transactions
Employees are prohibited from buying or selling anything of value from or to any
complainant, suspect, witness, defendant, prisoner or other person involved in any
case which has come to their attention or which has arisen out of their
Departmental employment, except as may be specifically authorized by the Chief
of Police.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
88 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.28 PHYSICAL FITNESS FOR DUTY
Revised May 20, 2004
All sworn employees of the Department shall maintain good physical condition so
they can handle the strenuous physical contacts often required of a law
enforcement officer.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
89 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.29 SMOKING AND SMOKELESS TOBACCO
Revised July 11, 2013
The Office of the Chief of Police has audit responsibility.
DEFINITIONS
Smoking is defined as the combustion of any cigar, cigarette, pipe, or other similar
article, using any form of tobacco or other combustible substance, whether through
inhalation or taste.
Smokeless Tobacco refers to tobacco products that are used orally, but are not
burned or smoked. These products include, but are not limited to, snuff and
chewing tobacco. Smokeless tobacco is unhygienic and raises health concerns
caused by the expectoration of saliva mixed with tobacco onto the ground or into
“spit cups.”
POLICY
Employees shall not smoke or use smokeless tobacco on-duty, while in direct
contact with the public, or in any City owned or operated facility or vehicle.
Employees who smoke or use smokeless tobacco products shall dispose of related
waste products in a lawful, healthy, clean and safe manner.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
90 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.30 MEMBERSHIP IN ORGANIZATIONS
Except for the Armed Forces Reserve components enumerated in the California
Veterans Code, employees shall not affiliate themselves with any organization or
group, the constitution or bylaws of which in any way exacts prior consideration or
which would prevent its members from rendering proper and efficient service to
the Department.
• Trade Unions - Employees shall not affiliate themselves with a labor union,
trade association or federation which would in any way exact an allegiance
which would conflict with the loyalty owed to the Department or City or would
prevent them from performing their full and complete police duties
• Subversive Organizations - Employees shall not knowingly become a
member of or be connected with any subversive organization, except when
necessary in the performance of a police duty and then only under the direction
of the Chief of Police
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
91 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.31 PROFESSIONAL JOURNAL PUBLICATION POLICY
It is the policy of this Department to encourage employees to share their
professional knowledge and experiences by publishing articles in professional
journals.
Written material proposed for publication in professional journals may be submitted
to the Office of the Chief of Police for assistance in language usage, accuracy of
facts and possible legal ramifications. The author may have the article reviewed
by qualified individuals in or out of the Department. The Office of the Chief of
Police shall make all reasonable attempts to arrange for a review, and to maintain
the anonymity of all parties concerned. If the article contains material which falls
within any of the restrictions, the author will be apprised and have the opportunity
to make appropriate corrections.
The Office of the Chief of Police shall offer the author assistance in achieving
publication but cannot guarantee the acceptance of any article that has not
previously been contracted for by a journal.
It is not required to submit written material for review. However, in maintaining the
Department's obligation to the community and in order to preserve the
Department's efficiency and integrity, employees may not publish material or make
such material available to unauthorized individuals which:
• Impairs, in any manner, the efficiency of the Department or the administration
of the Department
• Breaches the right of privacy of either private citizens or employees of the
Department
• Impairs or impedes pending Department investigations
• Violates any official rule, regulation, or policy of the Department
The only exception shall be articles that are an assignment made by the
Department and intended for Department use. All such articles must be submitted
first to the Chief of Police for authorization to publish.
Publicity
Employees shall not seek personal publicity by any means other than through
publication in professional journals.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
92 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.32 TESTIFYING
Process Service - Departmental Responsibilities
In its capacity as employer, the Police Department is the legal agency of last resort
in the serving of civil or criminal processes on employees. Therefore, if all
reasonable attempts on the part of the process server have failed, the process may
legally be served on the Administrator of the Personnel Division, who then must
serve the named employee.
Civil Depositions & Affidavits
Employees shall consult with the City Attorney, before giving a deposition or
affidavit on a civil case arising out of police business.
Civil Cases
Employees shall not serve processes or assist in civil cases, except as legally
required, particularly those where they may be personally involved. Employees
shall avoid entering into civil disputes, particularly while performing their police
duties, but shall prevent or abate a breach of the peace or crime in such situations.
3.32.1 TESTIFYING FOR THE DEFENSE
An employee subpoenaed to testify for the defense in any trial or hearing, or
against the City or Department in any trial or hearing, shall notify his/her Bureau
Chief and Court Affairs upon receipt of the subpoena. The employee shall also
notify the District Attorney, City Prosecutor, or City Attorney's Office, whichever is
appropriate.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
93 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.33 COMMERCIAL TESTIMONIALS
Employees shall not permit use of their names or photographs to endorse products
or services that are in any way connected with law enforcement without prior
authorization by the Chief of Police. Employees shall not allow use of their names
or photographs in any commercial testimonial that alludes to their position or
employment with the Department without prior approval by the Chief of Police.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
94 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.34 CORRESPONDENCE RESTRICTIONS
Employees shall not use Departmental letterhead or stationery for private
purposes or for sending correspondence out of the Department over their
signatures with the exception of official Departmental business and with the
permission of the Chief of Police.
Department correspondence to the City Manager and City Council members shall
be sent only over the signature of the Chief of Police or Acting Chief of Police.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
95 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.35 CITY COUNCIL - EMPLOYEE ON-DUTY APPEARANCE
An on-duty employee who desires to appear at a City Council meeting, sub-
committee and/or hearing shall request permission by memorandum to the Chief
of Police. The memorandum shall contain the employee's name, rank/job
classification, current assignment and a brief description of their reason for
appearance.
The memorandum shall be forwarded to and received in the Office of the Chief of
Police 24 hours prior to the requested appearance. After a determination by the
Chief of Police, the employee shall be notified that the request has been approved
or denied.
An on-duty employee shall NOT appear at a City Council meeting, sub-committee
and/or hearing without prior approval of the Chief of Police except in an emergency
response.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
96 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.36 TELEPHONES
Department telephone equipment shall be used for conducting City and police
related business. The use of Department telephone equipment for personal use
shall be limited to essential communications and used in moderation.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
97 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.37 DEPARTMENTAL BUSINESS - SECURITY OF
Employees shall not release police information outside the Department or assist
any relative, friend, or acquaintance to obtain unauthorized information, except as
provided in this Manual or as required by law or competent authority. Specifically,
information contained in police records ordinarily accessible only to employees,
and names of informants, complainants, witnesses and other persons known to
the police, are considered confidential.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
98 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.38 FILING OF REPORTS
Employees are required to file the following reports prior to end of Watch:
• Arrest Reports and related Incident Reports
• Incident Reports with named suspects
Other reports may be carried over until the next scheduled work shift with the
permission of a supervisor.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
99 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.39 DEPARTMENT PROPERTY - RESPONSIBILITY FOR
Employees are responsible for the proper care of Department property and
equipment assigned to them or under their control. Damaged or lost property may
subject the responsible individual to reimbursement charges and appropriate
disciplinary action if the damage or loss is due to negligence.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
100 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.40 CHAIN OF COMMAND
The chain of command shall be respected in all matters. Information and
communications shall move up and down through channels, or horizontally with
prior approval. It shall be the responsibility of each level to forward information
and communications to the next higher or lower level together with approval,
disapproval, recommendation or action taken.
3.40.1 FORWARDING OF COMMUNICATIONS TO HIGHER
COMMANDS
Any employee receiving a written communication for transmission to a higher
command shall in every case forward such communication. An employee
receiving a communication from a subordinate directed to a higher command shall
endorse it indicating approval, disapproval, or acknowledgement.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
101 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.41 RELIEF FROM ASSIGNMENT
Employees are to remain at their assignment and on-duty until properly relieved
by another employee or until dismissed by proper authority.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
102 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.42 ORAL BOARDS - APPEARANCE ON
An employee receiving a request to participate on any type of personnel or oral
interview board shall instruct the requesting party to forward a written request to
the Office of the Chief of Police. The Personnel Division shall process such
request, where a permanent record will be maintained, and necessary notifications
will be made to the Long Beach Civil Service and City Human Resources Director.
The Administrator of the Personnel Division with the approval of the Chief of Police
will assign employees in response to such requests.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
103 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.43 EMPLOYMENT - COLLATERAL
An employee may engage in collateral employment or business activity with the
approval of the employee's department head and the appointing authority.
Procedure
• Permanent full time or part time employees must request approval to engage
in collateral employment or business activity
• An approved "Collateral Employment/Business Activity Authorization Request"
form is required prior to engaging in any collateral employment or business
activity. A memorandum describing the nature of the collateral employment or
business activity, and the duties, acts, and functions to be performed shall be
attached to the request
• Each collateral employment or business activity requires a separate form. The
total hours to be worked for all requests by an employee must be provided in
the "Hours/Week" section on each separate form
• Previously approved collateral employment or business activity requests must
be renewed on later than April 1 each year
Conditions and Limitations
• An employee shall not engage in any employment, activity, or enterprise for
money or other personal gain which is inconsistent, incompatible, inimical, or
in conflict with the employee's duties and responsibilities of employment with
the City
• An employee will not be permitted to accept off duty employment in any
capacity when such employment is by an establishment where the primary
purpose is the selling or serving of alcoholic beverages, unless specifically
authorized by the Chief of Police
• The employment shall not exceed 20 hours per week
• The employment shall not in any way conflict with the objectives of the
Department, impair the reputation of the Department, or abuse the City's police
power
• The police uniform shall not be worn, nor shall police equipment be used,
unless so authorized by the Chief of Police
• An employee, who is absent because of an on the job injury or illness, must
obtain written permission from the department head or designee to engage or
to continue in collateral employment or business activity during such an
absence
Issuance of Permit
The decision of the Chief of Police and City Manager to issue or deny a permit to
work outside of the Department is final.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
104 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.44 BUSINESS CARDS - DEPARTMENT
Personalized business cards shall be issued to employees with the rank of
Lieutenant and above, and to civilian employees in comparable positions. Cards
shall be printed with the individual's name, rank and organization unit.
The Department shall furnish utility business cards for use by employees assigned
to any organizational units authorized by the Chief of Police. The card will contain
spaces for entering the employee's name and telephone extension.
The Chief of Police may authorize issuance of personalized business cards to
employees whose duties require continual contact with other law enforcement
agencies, government officials, media, or private vendors, and to any other
member of the Department at his discretion.
Notations shall not be made to any Department business card to confer or suggest
special consideration to the recipient. Employees coming into possession of such
cards shall forward the card to the Office of the Chief of Police with a report
detailing the circumstances under which the card was obtained.
All business cards authorized by the Department shall state on the reverse side (in
small print):
"This card was issued in the course of official Police Department business. No special consideration is
intended or implied. Misuse of this card may result in the violation of Penal Code section 146(d), a
misdemeanor."
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
105 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.45 DEPARTMENT ADDRESS - PRIVATE USE OF
Employees shall not use the Department as a mailing address for private
purposes. However, the Department shall recognize Section 1808.4 of the State
of California Vehicle Code as it relates to the confidentiality of public officers'
addresses.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
106 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.46 ADDRESS & TELEPHONE NUMBERS – EMPLOYEES
Immediately upon reporting for duty at the Police Department, employees shall
record their correct address of residence and telephone number with the Personnel
Office. Should the employee have a second permanent address and telephone
number, they shall provide this information to the Personnel Office as well.
Changes in address or telephone number shall be reported to the Personnel Office
within 24 hours of the change. This shall be done in writing on the appropriate form
and within the specified time whether the employee is working or on leave.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
107 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.47 NOTIFICATION – CONTACT WITH OTHER AGENCIES
There are certain instances when a Department employee shall be required to
notify the Police Department regarding contact with another law enforcement
agency.
PROCEDURE
A Department employee shall notify the Watch Commander, as soon as possible,
when any of the following conditions exist:
• When a Department employee is arrested by another law enforcement agency;
this includes being issued a misdemeanor citation and released; or
• When a Department employee becomes aware that he/she is a subject of any
criminal investigation by any law enforcement agency or government body; or
• When a Department employee becomes aware that he/she is served with any
restraining order or protective order
WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITY
The Watch Commander who receives notification regarding a Department
employee’s involvement in any of the above situations shall immediately notify the
Duty Chief and the commanding officer of the Internal Affairs Division.
INTERNAL AFFAIRS RESPONSIBILITY
At the direction of the commanding officer of the Internal Affairs Division, Internal
Affairs investigators shall conduct a preliminary investigation, and may respond to
the arrest location. Internal Affairs shall also notify the Bureau Chief and
Commander of the involved employee.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
108 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.48 INTERNET USAGE
It is the policy of the City of Long Beach as well as the Long Beach Police
Department to make every effort to provide employees with the best technology to
conduct official business. In this regard, the city has installed hardware and
advanced technology systems, which include the Internet. This policy is created
to ensure proper use and advise all employees regarding access to and disclosure
of information created, transmitted, received, and stored via the Internet.
All employees shall comply with the following conditions of Internet usage.
• All Long Beach Police Department computers and technology systems are
formal communication tools
• The Internet shall only be used for city related business purposes
• All Internet usage shall be conducted in a professional and courteous manner
• All data, including any that is stored or printed as a document, and Internet
usage is subject to audit and review. There is no expectation of personal
privacy. The personal computers and software allowing access to the Internet
are the sole and exclusive property of the City of Long Beach and shall be
monitored
• Employees are strictly accountable for the Internet E-mail password issued to
them as it provides an audit trail for Internet E-mail activity. This password shall
not be shared with anyone
• All employees with Internet access shall sign the Long Beach Police
Department Internet Policy Statement for inclusion in their personnel file
Restricted Activities
• Data that discloses sensitive, personal, confidential or proprietary information
shall not be sent, provided, or accessed without appropriate supervisory
authorization
• The Internet shall not be used for the following without prior written
authorization from the Chief of Police:
• Personal or recreational activities
• Commercial activities
• Bargaining unit activities
• Political activities outside an employee’s job scope
• Employees shall not use city technology to transmit, download, forward, store,
or view obscene or pornographic material of any kind unless in the course of
an investigation and then only with supervisory approval. Employees shall
notify their supervisor in the event obscene or pornographic material is
unintentionally accessed or has been received
• Employees shall not transmit or forward defamatory, unprofessional,
threatening, offensive, or harassing messages of any kind unless in the course
of an investigation and then only with supervisory approval
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
109 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Employees shall not create or forward chain letter E-mails unless in the course
of an investigation
• Employees shall not use the Internet for illegal activities
3.49 FAIR AND BIAS-FREE POLICING
Revised March 25, 2021
The Office of the Chief of Police shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed March 25, 2021
The purpose of this policy is to memorialize the Long Beach Police Department’s
commitment to professional, fair and bias-free treatment of all people and to clarify
the circumstances in which personnel may consider specified characteristics when
carrying out duties.
Fair and bias-free policing enhances legitimate law enforcement efforts and
promotes trust within the community.
3.49.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised March 25, 2021
Biased Policing – Discrimination in the performance of law enforcement duties or
delivery of police services, based on personal prejudices or partiality of an
employee toward classes of individuals based on specified characteristics.
Fair and Bias-Free Treatment – Conduct of an employee wherein all people are
treated in the same manner under the same or similar circumstances irrespective
of specified characteristics.
Police Services – Enforcement of the law and other actions and activities that
contribute to the overall well-being of the public.
These include, but are not limited to, welfare checks, death notification, public
assistance to persons who may be lost, confused or affected by mental or physical
illness, traffic control, medical emergencies, lifesaving services, crime prevention,
public information, and community engagement.
Racial Profiling – The practice of detaining a subject based on specified
characteristics that casts suspicion on an entire class of people without any
individualized suspicion on the particular person being stopped.
Specified Characteristics – Real or perceived personal characteristics, to include
but not limited to race, ethnic background, national origin, immigration status,
gender, gender identity/expression, sexual orientation, religion, socioeconomic
status, age, disability, or affiliation with any political or non-criminal group
(protected characteristics).
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
110 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.49.2 BIASED POLICING AND RACIAL PROFILING
Revised March 25, 2021
Biased policing and racial profiling are prohibited both in the enforcement of the
law and the delivery of other police services.
Employees who are authorized to take enforcement action must be able to
articulate specific facts, circumstances, and conclusions that support probable
cause or reasonable suspicion for any non-consensual detention and/or search or
seizure, as applicable. The articulable facts may include descriptors such as
gender, age, race or ethnicity if it supports individualized probable cause or
suspicion on that particular person. Nothing in this order shall limit an employee’s
ability to interview witnesses nor discourage routine conversations or consensual
contacts with the public.
The employees shall inform the subject regarding the reason for the contact if it
will not compromise the safety of employees or other persons or an investigation.
The employee should inform the subject preferably at the point of contact or by the
conclusion of every interaction. This is important to avoid misunderstandings as
to the reason for the contact.
3.49.3 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised March 25, 2021
Supervisors are responsible for ensuring compliance and shall initiate an
investigation of any alleged violation of this order. For further refer to LBPD Manual
§ 4.1.1.2 Complaint Procedure – Watch Commander/Any Supervisor.
Supervisors shall ensure that employees who report instances of biased policing
are not subject to retaliation. Supervisors shall take prompt and reasonable steps
to address any retaliatory action taken against any member of this Department
who discloses information concerning biased policing.
3.50 EARLY INTERVENTION PROGRAM (EIP)
Revised July 22, 2021
The Office of Constitutional Policing shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed July 22, 2021
The Early Intervention Program (EIP) is designed to assist supervisors with early
recognition of employees who have been involved in a higher than average
number of performance indicators as compared to other members of the
employees’ peer group. Identifying those employees will give supervisors an
opportunity to conduct a detailed review of the employee’s actions to see if any
performance trends exist that should be modified and improved.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
111 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The EIP represents the Department’s commitment to provide mentorship to its
employees and hold the entire chain of command accountable for addressing
employee performance and to manage risk to officers.
The EIP also represents the Department’s goal to deliver maximum performance
in servicing the community and builds public trust.
EIP employs a management strategy that is neither punitive nor disciplinary in
nature. EIP is separate from and does not replace the existing disciplinary
processes as outlined in the Department Manual.
The Department’s EIP applies to all sworn employees, Park Rangers, and Special
Services Officers of the Long Beach Police Department.
All data recorded and related to EIP is considered a confidential personnel record.
3.50.1 EARLY INTERVENTION PROGRAM COMPONENTS
Revised July 22, 2021
The Department will utilize peer-based purview monitoring within EIP which entails
the comparison of one employee to their peers in the same Division, Section or
Detail. This will be achieved through the software application EIPro that is
programmed to highlight certain performance indicators of employee activity that
appear higher in number than the average of their peer group. The supervisor will
be alerted to employees whose activities have been highlighted by EIPro when
they log into the program. These performance indicators are listed below.
EIP will consist of the following components:
• Performance Indicators
• Inspection Guidelines
• Employee Mentoring Process
• EIP Documentation
3.50.1.1 PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
Revised July 22, 2021
Performance indicators are data that represent the categories of employee
performance activity that will be monitored. These indicators include:
• Use of Force
• Firearm Discharges
• In Custody Deaths
• Vehicle Pursuits
• Citizen Complaints
• Administrative Complaints
• Vehicle Accidents
• Forced Entries
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
112 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Civil Litigation
• EEO complaints
3.50.1.2 EIP INSPECTION GUIDELINES
Revised July 22, 2021
Quarterly Review:
Supervisors will conduct a “Peer Analysis” review, using the attached EIP REVIEW
FORM, of their employees and identify those whose performance indicators are
higher than the average of their peer group.
EIPRO utilizes color coding in each performance indicator category to highlight a
higher than average number. Employees who are shaded in either yellow or red
in any specific performance indicator have a higher than average number of
reported incidents in that category. The color coding DOES NOT indicate the
quality of the employee’s performance on any given incident or in total. It is only
a visual cue to show the relationship of the number of incidents in relationship to a
given peer average.
Supervisor Review:
Supervisors will conduct a thorough review of any employee whose critical
performance indicators are above the peer average as indicated by EIPro’s color
coding. The review process should include:
• Obtain relevant documentation or information regarding the specified
performance indicator.
• Identify factual circumstances surrounding the initiation, progression, and
conclusion of those incidents.
• Consider mitigating factors surrounding those incidents.
• Determine if there are any relevant repeated issues or trends.
• Consider any additional factors that may be relevant to identified issues that
may potentially impact work performance including:
- An employee’s work history within the Department, outside employment, or
any prior interventions or mentoring plans.
- The outcome of prior incidents that have already gone through separate EIP
reviews and consider whether the employee has followed through with any
training recommendations or is scheduled to do so.
3.50.1.3 EMPLOYEE MENTORING PROCESS
Revised July 22, 2021
After the supervisor performs the above review, he/she will meet with the employee
and inform them of their findings, sharing any concerns that were identified from
the review and offer mentoring, guidance and/or training options.
Prior to the meeting with the employee, the employee's Supervisor shall be
responsible for identifying topics to be reviewed and include specific examples of
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
113 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
any areas of concern, along with performance expectations and areas in need of
development.
During the meeting with the employee, the supervisor should:
• Discuss goals and objectives.
• Discuss training needs and requirements.
• Discuss performance trends and provide guidance.
• If necessary, supervisors should identify the activities, support systems, and
resources that are available to assist the employee.
• Employees are encouraged to provide input on any identified performance
improvement assistance; however, supervisors are never permitted to ask
questions related to an employee’s medical information.
• Supervisors shall be mindful of the provisions of the Public Safety Officers
Procedural Bill of Rights Act (POBR) and shall not question employees on
matters that are potentially pending disciplinary review. The purpose of the
meeting is only to discuss performance related concerns and not allegations of
misconduct.
If an employee only has one incident type outside of the peer group average, the
supervisor may, but is not required to, conduct the employee review process. If the
supervisor decides that a review is not necessary, this decision must still be
documented in the Review Form.
Division Commanders will be responsible for ensuring that employee reviews take
place and are documented on the EIP Review form.
Options the supervisor should consider offering the employee include:
• Refresher Training options:
- Defensive Tactics
- Legal Updates
- Report Writing
- Anger Management
- Cultural Diversity
- Tactical Communication
- Driver/Pursuit Training
- Physical Fitness Training
- Field Training Program
- De-escalation Techniques
• Support options available:
- Supervisor Coaching or Counseling
- Peer Support
- Employee Assistance Program or other counseling options
• Recommended Departmental change options:
- Review/Modify Training
- Review/Modify Policy
- Equipment Purchase
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
114 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.50.1.4 EIP DOCUMENTATION
Revised July 22, 2021
Each supervisor who conducts an EIP review shall complete an EIP Review form.
After reviewing an employee’s EIP record and if a determination is made that no
action is required (i.e., the employee only had one incident in any one group), the
supervisor will complete the form and submit it through their chain of command.
The employee is not required to sign the form.
When the supervisor meets with the employee and provides resources, or together
the employee and supervisor agree on a course of action, the supervisor will
complete the form and have the employee sign to acknowledge the review. The
supervisor will then forward the form to the employee’s chain of command for
signatures.
Once the form has been signed off by the Division Commander, an entry will be
completed in EIPro. The form will be uploaded to BlueTeam and attached to the
corresponding incident. The employee will have program access to view this
incident type.
3.50.2 EIP SYSTEM ACCESS
Revised July 22, 2021
EIP contains performance indicators that relate to confidential information.
Department employees may only access EIP in accordance with their assigned
access levels. Misuse of the EIP, including the unauthorized sharing of information
from EIP, may result in disciplinary action.
The Internal Affairs Division will only be responsible for granting access to the
application and setting employee purviews on what they can see/view.
The peer analysis data and review form shall not be used for performance
evaluations. It also shall not be accessed, used, or considered when the
Department makes determinations on promotions, transfers or requests by
employees for transfer or special assignments.
3.51 SOCIAL MEDIA
Revised July 22, 2021
The Administration Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed July 22, 2021
3.51.1 SOCIAL MEDIA – PURPOSE
Revised July 22, 2021
The City of Long Beach Administrative Regulation (AR8-34) establishes guidelines
for the use of social media by the City as a means of conveying information about
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
115 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
the City and its events and activities to the public, for further refer to AR8-34 – City
Social Media Policy. This policy is supplemental to AR8-34 and establishes the
Department’s position on the use of social media when referencing matters related
to the Long Beach Police Department.
The intent of this policy is to ensure employees use appropriate discretion when
posting photographs or speech that does not jeopardize investigations or discredit
the Department. It is not the intent of this policy to prohibit employees from
engaging in conduct that constitutes protected speech under state or federal
constitutions, as well as labor or other applicable laws.
3.51.2 SOCIAL MEDIA – POLICY
Revised July 22, 2021
Authorized Department members may use social media to communicate with the
public about investigations, public services, or other relevant events. Authorized
Department members shall ensure their use of social media is professional and
protects the constitutional rights of all.
3.51.3 SOCIAL MEDIA – SAFETY
Revised July 22, 2021
Employees shall not disseminate or post information on social media or networking
sites that could compromise the safety of others. Employees shall take necessary
precautions not to disclose confidential information or jeopardize the privacy rights
of others.
3.51.4 SOCIAL MEDIA – ON-DUTY DEPARTMENT APPROVED USAGE
AND GUIDELINES
Revised July 22, 2021
The Department encourages the use of electronic communication technology and
social media networking sites to share and gather information in support of its
organizational mission and for work-related purposes.
3.51.4.1 INVESTIGATIVE ACCOUNTS
Revised July 22, 2021
An employee shall only create and use a social media account for investigative
purposes with authorization from their Division Commander.
All employees who create social media accounts for investigative purposes shall
provide the account username and password to their supervisor. The supervisor
shall maintain a list of all social media accounts and passwords.
The Deputy Chief of each bureau authorizing the use of social media accounts for
investigative purposes shall ensure that an annual review is conducted.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
116 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.51.4.2 PUBLIC-FACING ACCOUNTS
Revised July 22, 2021
For public-facing accounts, authorization shall be requested through the Media
Relations Detail prior to the creation of the account. A public-facing account is a
social media profile that is created to be available to the general public and
represents or depicts on-duty personnel, police facilities, and Department
sanctioned activities.
Authorized employees who use social networking platforms to conduct
Department business as part of their normal duty assignment, shall use a public-
facing social networking account and not their private personal account.
The following shall apply to the use of public-facing social media:
• Authorized employees shall ensure social media content posted serves the
public in a civil and unbiased manner.
• All content placed on a public-facing social networking platform shall reflect the
mission and core values of the organization and conform to all policies
regarding the release of information per LBPD Manual § 6.1.1 MEDIA
RELATIONS POLICY AND PROCEDURES.
• The Media Relations Detail has administrative oversight on all public-facing
social media accounts and will track all usernames and passwords.
• The Media Relations Detail reserves the right to remove without notice any
comments or submissions that meet the standards set forth, by the City’s Social
Media Terms and Conditions.
• The removal of any content on public-facing social media accounts must be
requested through the Media Relations Office, prior to the removal of the
content.
3.51.5 SOCIAL MEDIA – PROHIBITED ACTIVITY AND GUIDELINES
Revised July 22, 2021
Employees who choose to participate in public-facing social media or social
networking platforms shall conduct themselves in a manner that aligns with City
standards of appropriateness, style and decorum.
Employees are prohibited from posting confidential or sensitive work activities or
assignments, employee work schedules, inmate transportation schedules, or other
operationally sensitive information.
Employees shall not post, transmit, reproduce, or disseminate information or links
that are inappropriate or harmful to the City, the Department or its operations.
3.51.6 PRIVACY EXPECTATION
Revised July 22, 2021
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONAL CONDUCT
117 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Employees have no reasonable expectation of privacy with regards to anything
published or maintained on an internet site open to public view. Employees forfeit
any expectation of privacy with e-mails, texts, or anything published, or maintained
through file-sharing software or any internet site that is accessed, transmitted,
received, or reviewed on any Department technology system.
The Department reserves the right to access, review, and disclose, for any reason,
all information transmitted over any technology that is issued or maintained by the
Department, including the Department e-mail system, computer network, or any
information placed into storage on any Department system or device.
Access to a database, service, or website that requires a username or password
does not create an expectation of privacy if an employee accesses the database,
service, or website through a Department computer or network. However, the
Department may not require an employee to disclose a personal username or
password or open a personal social website, except when access is reasonably
believed to be relevant to the investigation of allegations of work-related
misconduct (Labor Code Sec. 980).
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
118 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 CHIEF OF POLICE
4.1 INTERNAL AFFAIRS DIVISION
4.1.1 PERSONNEL COMPLAINTS
4.1.1.1 PERSONNEL COMPLAINTS - EMPLOYEE RESPONSIBILITY
Citizen complaints may be filed with any supervisor or directly with the Internal
Affairs Division. Any employee who becomes aware of an allegation of misconduct
or is personally aware of another employee's misconduct shall immediately notify
his/her supervisor, or in that supervisor's absence, the Watch Commander. Failure
to make such notification(s) constitutes misconduct. The "Personnel Complaint
Form," PD Form 1010.008(a), is the computerized personnel complaint form that
shall be utilized for the receipt of all citizen complaints taken in person. Complaints
received telephonically and/or anonymously shall be taken. (California Penal
Code Section 832.5)
4.1.1.2 COMPLAINT PROCEDURE – WATCH COMMANDER/ANY
SUPERVISOR
The Watch Commander/Supervisor shall recognize that the employee's immediate
supervisor shall have the primary responsibility for investigating complaints in most
instances.
The Watch Commander/Supervisor has the primary responsibility for assisting the
citizen and resolving the complaint when possible. Doubt about the legitimacy of
a complaint shall be resolved by accepting the complaint for further investigation.
• The Supervisor receiving the information or discovering acts of misconduct
shall immediately notify his or her supervisor and complete the Personnel
Complaint Form (PD Form 1010.008(a))
– Explain the admonishment to the complainant and obtain their signature
• The Watch Commander/Supervisor, after receiving a complaint from a citizen,
shall complete the Personnel Complaint Form. The first page of the Personnel
Complaint Form is designed to briefly and clearly record the citizen's complaint
along with other necessary information about the complaint. Some cases may
require additional pages for the citizen's complaint. In those cases, the
supervisor shall use blank paper for supplemental pages. (Do not write on the
reverse side of the personnel complaint forms.)
NOTE: A copy of the complaint (page 1) shall be sent to the complaint
via US Mail, after a case number is assigned, when the complaint is not
received in person (telephonically or in writing). The supervisor taking the
complaint is responsible for ensuring the copy of the complaint is mailed
to the complainant.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
119 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• The personnel Complaint Follow-up portion of the form shall be used by the
supervisor to document the details of the preliminary investigations. The follow-
up portions of the form shall not be copied or given to the citizen
• Both portions of the Personnel Complaint Form and any other related
documents shall be immediately forwarded to Internal Affairs Division.
• The Watch Commander/Supervisor shall note on his/her respective log that a
personnel complaint has been received. The notation shall include the
complainant's name, address, telephone number, nature of the complaint and
accused employee's name(s), if known
The Watch Commander/Supervisor may determine that because of the nature and
urgency of a complaint, the Internal Affairs Division should investigate it. If so, the
Watch Commander/Supervisor shall complete the Personnel Complaint Form and
implement the Internal Affairs call-out procedure.
All applicable Arrest Reports, Incident Reports, Evidence Reports, investigative
memoranda, statements, CAD printouts, or other relevant information shall be
attached to the complaint form.
4.1.1.3 COMPLAINT PROCEDURE – INTERNAL AFFAIRS
The Internal Affairs Division shall be responsible for the daily tabulation of all
citizen complaints and shall forward an annual report to the State of California,
Department of Justice.
All citizen complaints received by the Department shall be forwarded immediately
to the Internal Affairs Division. Internal Affairs will assign a number to each
complaint for control and assignment purposes.
The Chief of Police, a Bureau Chief or the Commanding Officer of the Internal
Affairs Division may initiate an Internal Affairs investigation.
Internal Affairs shall apprise the employee's Bureau Chief and Division
Commander whenever a unit other than the accused employee’s Bureau initiates
an investigation.
The Commanding Officer of Internal Affairs may determine that because of the
nature of a complaint, the most appropriate means of investigation would be at the
Bureau-level. In these instances, the Internal Affairs Division shall assign the
complaint to the accused employee's Bureau for investigation.
Investigations shall be completed within 30 days from the date the Department
received the complaint. The Internal Affairs Commander must approve all
extensions.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
120 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
All investigations of alleged employee misconduct shall be maintained in the
Internal Affairs Office. All records of investigations shall be maintained pursuant
to the Department's approved records retention schedule.
4.1.2 INVESTIGATIONS OF ALLEGED MISCONDUCT
4.1.2.1 EMPLOYEE INTERVIEW
The Supervisor of a sworn employee, against whom allegations have been made,
may counsel that employee for the purpose of correcting unacceptable behavior.
If during a counseling interview, a supervisor determines that the interview may
lead to disciplinary action, the Police Officers' Bill of Rights (3300 C.G.C.)
admonitions shall be given.
Adherence to the Police Officers' Bill of Rights applies only to interviews that may
lead to the imposition of discipline.
Additional Supervisory Responsibilities
A Supervisor at the scene of an incident that may involve employee misconduct
shall:
• Evaluate the need for emergency suspension and assume responsibility for
making that determination
• Apprise his/her supervisor of the incident as soon as possible
• Obtain names, addresses and telephone numbers of complainants and
witnesses
• Collect & file appropriate physical evidence
• Determine the need to implement the Internal Affairs call-out procedure
• Assist Internal Affairs investigators until relieved
• File a complete and accurate report regarding the incident
4.1.2.2 COOPERATING IN DEPARTMENTAL INVESTIGATIONS
Employees are required to answer questions or provide material and relevant
statements to the proper authority in a Department personnel investigation, when
directed. Failure to comply may result in the employee being found insubordinate
and subject to disciplinary action.
4.1.2.3 INVESTIGATIONS – EMPLOYEE REPRESENTATIVES
• Personnel assigned to investigate complaints of misconduct shall not be a
subject of the same investigation
• During the course of the investigation, personnel assigned to investigate
complaints of misconduct shall not act as an employee representative for any
personnel involved in the investigation
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
121 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1.2.4 INTERNAL AFFAIRS INVESTIGATIONS CALL-OUT
PROCEDURES
The Internal Affairs Division is responsible for the investigation of complaints
alleging misconduct, whether the incident occurs on-duty or off-duty, on the part of
any employee of this Department.
Internal Affairs Division personnel shall be notified at any time of the day or night
including weekends and holidays, in any of the following circumstances:
• Whenever an employee of this Department is arrested or an arrest is pending
by this Department or any other agency
• Whenever there is an implication of any serious criminal conduct alleged
against any employee of this Department
• Whenever an officer is served a Domestic Violence Restraining Order that will
affect the officer's ability to possess a firearm
• Whenever an incident occurs which is of such serious nature and magnitude
that, in the opinion of the Field and/or Station Commander, it will require an
immediate Internal Affairs investigation
The Internal Affairs investigator, upon being notified, will evaluate the incident and
determine if response to the scene is necessary. In order for the Internal Affairs
investigator to evaluate the incident, the following information will be required:
• A brief summary of the incident
• The location and time of occurrence of the incident
• The location of the involved employee
The Internal Affairs investigator who responds to the scene shall assume the
responsibility of directing and coordinating an Administrative investigation. Internal
Affairs personnel will not interfere in an ongoing criminal investigation. Officers
shall give information, however, which the Internal Affairs investigator determines
is necessary, to the Administrative investigation.
The Watch Commander shall call the on-call Internal Affairs Investigator. A current
roster of Internal Affairs Investigators shall be located in the Communications
center.
4.1.2.5 FINDINGS – ALLEGED MISCONDUCT
One of the findings listed below shall be included in the report of investigation of
an alleged act of misconduct.
Unfounded - The investigation indicates that the act or acts complained of did not
occur, or the individual named in the complaint was not involved.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
122 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Exonerated - The investigation indicates that the act or acts did occur, but were
justified, lawful and proper.
Not Sustained - The investigation fails to discover sufficient evidence to clearly
prove or disapprove the allegation made in the complaint.
Sustained - The investigation disclosed sufficient evidence to clearly prove the
allegations made in the complaint.
Other - The investigation reveals that the alleged act was not misconduct, service;
employee was a witness only, or other statement by the Chief of Police.
4.1.2.6 REPORTS BY INTERNAL AFFAIRS DIVISION
Reports of investigations by the Internal Affairs Division shall contain basically the
same information as those submitted by other units, except that NO
recommendation for or against disciplinary action shall be made.
Investigations by the Personnel and Training Divisions are limited to fact finding
and evaluation of the complaint.
4.1.2.7 REPORTS BY OTHER DIVISIONS/SECTIONS
Whenever any Division or Section other than Internal Affairs opens, investigates
and concludes a disciplinary matter on an employee of that Division or Section,
and especially whenever discipline is imposed as a result, a full set of reports and
findings shall be forwarded to the Internal Affairs Division for storage in official files.
4.1.3 DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OF PEACE OFFICERS
DETAINED FOR CRIMINAL OFFENSES
California Labor Code Section 432.7 allows limited disclosure of arrest information
pertaining to peace officers. The Watch Commander or Commanding Officer of
the Internal Affairs Division shall be authorized to notify other law enforcement
agencies when a peace officer from that agency has been detained for a criminal
offense by members of this Department. In incidents that do not result in an arrest,
the Watch Commander may use his/her discretion whether or not to contact that
officer's agency. In incidents that result in a misdemeanor citation, an arrest, or
would normally lead to an arrest for a misdemeanor or felony, the arresting officer
shall notify the Watch Commander who in turn shall notify the other agency.
• Custodial - When it is learned that members of this Department have detained
a peace officer from another agency for a criminal offense, the Watch
Commander shall be notified. The Watch Commander shall be responsible for
notifying the appropriate agency of the incident and logging the incident in the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
123 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Watch Commander log
• Non-Custodial - When it is learned that a peace officer from another agency
has been identified as a suspect in a criminal investigation, which was
conducted by members of this Department, the Commanding Officer of Internal
Affairs shall be notified. The Commanding Officer of Internal Affairs Division
shall give advice and provide liaison assistance between Department
investigators and the other agency
4.1.4 DELETED -
4.1.5 DISCIPLINE
Disciplinary Action
Employees who violate their oath and trust by committing an offense punishable
under the laws or statutes of the United States, the State of California or the
ordinances of the City of Long Beach, or who violate any provision of the Rules
and Regulations of the Long Beach Police Department or of the Civil Service Rules
and Regulations, or who disobey a lawful order, or who are incompetent to perform
their duties, are subject to appropriate disciplinary action.
Departmental Authority to Discipline
Final Departmental discipline, authority and responsibility rests with the Chief of
Police or his/her designee. Except for emergency suspensions, the Chief of Police
shall approve all Department discipline.
4.1.5.1 DISCIPLINE - PENALTIES
Subject to the provisions of the Long Beach City Charter, the Civil Service Rules
and Regulations and, where necessary, the approval of the City Manager, the
following penalties may be assessed against any employee of the Department as
disciplinary action:
• Written reprimand
• Suspension
• Demotion
• Dismissal from service
Acts of gross misconduct shall be subject to severe discipline including
dismissal from service.
Employees suspended from employment shall be required to surrender their
Department issued badge, weapon and identification to their commanding officer.
The commanding officer will secure the property until the employee is returned to
duty.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
124 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
An employee who resigns or is terminated from the Department shall deliver all
City owned property in his/her possession to the Personnel Division.
4.1.5.2 DISCIPLINE - INTER-UNIT ACTION
When the improper conduct of an employee of one unit is of such a nature that
immediate or emergency disciplinary action is required of a Supervisor or
Command Officer of another unit, such action may be taken at once within the
following limitations:
• Emergency suspension until the next business day
Inter-Unit Admonition
When a Supervisor or Command Officer of one unit finds it necessary to admonish
or adversely criticize in any manner an employee of another unit, he/she shall
notify that employee's supervisor as soon as possible. He/she shall also submit a
written report detailing the reasons for this action to his/her Commanding Officer
and to the Commanding Officer of the employee.
4.1.5.3 REVIEW DISCIPLINARY RECOMMENDATIONS
The letter of transmittal shall be prepared by the officer recommending disciplinary
action and placed in the case file for review through the chain of command.
4.1.5.4 REPORTS - ENFORCEMENT & FORWARDING
Each level in the chain of command must endorse and forward reports received
bearing on disciplinary matters. Such endorsement may be one of approval,
disapproval or recommended modification. No employee shall alter or cause to
be altered or withdrawn any disciplinary report. Disciplinary reports in transit
through the chain of command shall not be delayed but must be reviewed,
endorsed, and forwarded as soon as possible. Disciplinary reports shall be filed
in accordance with current Department orders.
4.1.5.5 DISCIPLINARY ACTION – INFORMING EMPLOYEE
An employee who is accused of misconduct shall be informed of the charges when
they are filed. The employee shall have the benefit of responding to proposed
discipline in a Skelly Hearing before discipline is imposed and shall be informed in
writing of the charges and penalties when actually imposed.
Exception: An employee receiving a written reprimand as the form of discipline
is not entitled to a Skelly Hearing, but shall have the right to respond in writing and
have the response attached to the reprimand in the employee's personnel file.
Sworn personnel may appeal a letter of reprimand to Human Relations.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
125 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1.5.6 DISCIPLINE - APPEALS
Appeals from penalties imposed as disciplinary measures may be taken as
provided in the Long Beach City Charter and in accordance with the Civil Service
Rules and Regulations.
4.1.5.7 ALTERNATIVE DISCIPLINE PROGRAM
The Alternative Discipline Program provides employees the opportunity to
participate in the determination and administration of their corrective-action
discipline when deemed appropriate by the Chief of Police. The Chief of Police
has the ultimate authority to determine and administer corrective action.
Employees may either decline participation in the program and accept the
imposed discipline, or appeal in accordance with the procedures set forth in
the Civil Service Rules and Regulations.
The Administration recognizes that in some instances where an employee has
failed to perform his/her work in an appropriate manner, the interests of both
employee and Department are better served by allowing the employee to
participate in counseling, training, or other means of self-help, rather than endure
a suspension. Employee involvement in the structuring of alternative discipline
provides a positive approach toward correcting inappropriate behavior.
In situations where alternative discipline is utilized, the employee's record will
reflect the misconduct and the term of suspension, along with a notation that
Alternative discipline was implemented. At the end of a six-month period, a follow-
up letter, which includes a statement that the program was successfully (or
unsuccessfully) completed for that period, will be included in the employee's
Personnel and Internal Affairs files.
Procedures
• The decision to allow the alternative discipline shall be made subsequent to the
decision of a recommendation penalty (i.e., suspension). A Commander or
Bureau Chief may recommend the program; however, the final decision rests
with the Chief of Police
• If the program is not suggested, or the employee decides not to participate, the
traditional system of administrative discipline will be followed
• A Corrective Action Questionnaire will accompany a Skelly letter, if alternative
discipline is available to the employee
• Employees who enter the Alternative Discipline Program may choose training,
counseling, or other means of self-help. To obtain assistance in designing their
discipline/corrective action, employees should contact the Department
Organizational Psychologist, Department Training Coordinator, Employee
Assistance Program or other professional
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
126 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• An employee who selects the program shall, at the Skelly hearing, be in
possession of a completed Corrective Action Questionnaire. The employee
and his/her Bureau Chief will discuss the questionnaire and proposed
corrective action. An employee may accept the program within five calendar
days after the Skelly hearing
• In most situations, personnel within either the Police Department or the
Department of Health and Human Services will conduct alternative discipline.
Payment by the Department of any costs that result from an Alternative
Discipline Program must be approved by the Chief of Police
• Implementation of the alternative discipline system begins when the Chief or
designee agrees on the contents of the Corrective Action Questionnaire. In the
event there is no agreement, the traditional system of administrative discipline
shall be followed
• Upon implementation of alternative discipline, the employee's full suspension
will not be imposed. An Alternative Discipline Disposition Letter shall be
prepared and served. The length of the proposed suspension and the
employee's participation in the program shall be included in the disposition
letter and on the employee's Internal Affairs History Card
• At the end of a six-month period, the Bureau Chief will make a determination
as to the employee's successful completion of their Corrective Action Plan
(alternative discipline) for that period. A letter of successful, or unsuccessful,
completion will be prepared by the employee's Bureau Chief and entered into
the employee's Personnel and Internal Affairs files
• If, prior to completing the program, it is determined the employee has failed to
comply with the terms and conditions agreed upon, the Bureau Chief will notify
the Internal Affairs Division. The employee will be notified that he/she must
complete the original discipline, or portion thereof, at the discretion of the Chief
of Police. Whenever formal discipline is imposed, the employee is entitled to
the Civil Service Appeal process
• Circumstances under which employees may not be given the option of
volunteering for the program include, but are not limited to, the following:
− Failure to perform satisfactorily during probationary period
− Job abandonment
− Failure to abide by the Employee Assistance Program rules and regulations
when made as a condition of continued employment
− Serious criminal offenses or immoral act
− Blatant offenses of discrimination
− Drug abuse
− Previous failure to conform to alternative discipline
− Misconduct compounded by lying or insubordination
4.1.5.8 ADMINISTRATIVE APPEAL PROCEDURE / WRITTEN
REPRIMAND
Chief of Police or Designee - Step One
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
127 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The written reprimand shall include the following statement:
• "You may, if you so desire, within five working days after service upon you of
this written reprimand, appeal on the standard appeal form to the Chief of
Police, otherwise, the written reprimand shall stand"
The officer may submit a completed appeal form to the Chief of Police within five
working days of receipt of the written reprimand.
The Chief of Police or designee shall meet with the officer within 10 working days
from the receipt of the completed appeal form.
A representative may accompany the officer at his/her request.
Parties shall agree that every attempt will be made in good faith to resolve the
matter and all known information relevant to the matter shall be made known to
the Chief of Police or designee.
A decision shall be made, in writing, within 30 calendar days.
City Manager or Designee - Step Two
If the Chief of Police does not resolve the appeal regarding the written reprimand
to the satisfaction of the officer, the officer may request a hearing with the City
Manager or designee within five working days of the decision of the Chief of Police.
The City Manager or designee shall hear the matter within 10 working days from
the receipt of the notification of the appeal, and affirm, reverse or modify the
decision of the Chief of Police.
A decision shall be made, in writing, within 30 calendar days.
If the decision is to affirm, the officer shall have 30 calendar days within which to
file a written response to any adverse comment entered into his/her personnel file.
Such written response shall be attached to, and shall accompany, the adverse
comment.
Presentation of Appeal
Officers shall have the right to present their own appeal or do so with the
assistance of their Police Officers Association (POA) representative. The POA
shall not be allowed to appeal any written reprimand on behalf of the officer without
written approval by the officer. The officer receiving the written reprimand shall be
present during Steps One and Two of these procedures.
Appeal Forms
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
128 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The appeal shall be processed on the "Administrative Appeal Form," (PD Form
2000.012), provided by the Police Department and shall contain information which:
• Identifies the officer;
• Contains the specific reason for appeal;
• Identifies witnesses, if applicable, and;
• States the corrective action desired. These may include revising or removing
the written reprimand
Time-Off for Processing Appeal
The preparation for an appeal hearing shall not be considered City business. The
time spent by the officer and the City shall not compensate representative.
The officer shall receive time-off from regularly scheduled duty hours to participate
in the appeal hearing at Steps One and Two, without loss of pay.
If the officer's representative is also a City employee, the representative shall
receive time-off from regularly scheduled duty hours to participate in the appeal
hearing at Steps One and Two, without loss of pay.
Participation in any appeal hearing by the officer or representative during off-duty
hours will not be compensated.
Cost of Appeal Presentation
Each party shall bear the expense of presenting their own case.
Tape-Recording of the Appeal Hearing
If any tape recordings are made, the party who elects to tape-record these
proceedings shall allow the other party access to the tapes upon request.
Cost of Witnesses at Appeal Hearing
The cost of the witnesses called by either party shall be borne by the party who
requests the witnesses.
The cost of the witnesses called by both parties shall be shared equally by both
parties.
City employees called as witnesses, on-duty at the time, shall receive time-off from
duty to participate in the appeal hearing, without loss of pay for the time so spent.
City employees called as witnesses, not on-duty at the time, may receive
compensation by the party or parties who request the witnesses.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
129 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Number of Witnesses at Appeal Hearing
Calling of witnesses by either party shall be accomplished with a reasonable
amount of constraint.
Each party may call approximately three or four witnesses.
In the event that either party desires more witnesses, the Chief of Police/City
Manager or designee, shall determine the number of witnesses permitted.
Extension of Time Limits
All time periods specified in this procedure may be extended by mutual, written
consent of the aggrieved officer and the Chief of Police/City Manager or designee.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
130 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2 ADMINISTRATIVE SECURITY SECTION
The Administrative Security Section provides information to the Chief of Police
enabling him to make informed judgments and decisions necessary to counter and
control the activities of organized crime. The Administrative Investigations Section
also maintains liaison with State, Federal and local agencies having similar
purposes.
The Administrative Security Section includes the Organized Crime Detail.
4.2.1 ORGANIZED CRIME DETAIL
• Collect, evaluate and analyze data pertaining to organized criminal activity
within the City of Long Beach
• Keep the Chief of Police apprised of this data and disseminate it at his
discretion
• Conduct special investigations as directed by the Chief of Police
Information regarding organized crime gathered by Department personnel shall be
forwarded to the Administrative Security Section.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
131 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.3 DEPARTMENT PSYCHOLOGIST
Long Beach Police Department Psychologist
The Police Psychologist is a member of the Chief of Police staff and reports directly
to the Chief.
4.3.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEPARTMENT PSYCHOLOGIST
• Education: Doctorate Degree in psychology
• Current Professional License: California Department of Consumer Affairs,
Board of Psychology
• At least five years of postgraduate experience in the diagnosis and treatment
of emotional and mental disorders (per POST Administrative Manual –
Commission Procedure C-2)
• At least three years working in a psychological capacity with a police
department with experience in screening, counseling and consulting with
employees
• Professional psychological education, training and experience in both clinical
and social/organizational psychology
4.3.2 DUTIES
The five major duties of the Department Psychologist include:
• Psychological Screening for police recruits, reserve officers, lateral police
officers, Marine Patrol Security Officers, communication dispatchers; CCW
applicants, and under contract or other agreement for the Long Beach Fire
Department; Parks, Recreation and Marine Department, Harbor Department,
Long Beach City College and Long Beach Unified School District
• Psychological Counseling for Department employees and their family
members. Coordination of the Department’s Peer Support and Critical Incident
Stress Debriefing Team and the "Proactive Peer Counseling Program” where
employees who have experienced some kind of trauma are contacted. Liaison
to the Chaplain’s Program. Maintains links to mental health web sites from the
Department website. Works with the Officer-Involved Shooting (OIS) Team to
follow-up on officers and dispatchers involved in hit shootings
• Organizational Consulting and Team Building with supervisors, managers
and chiefs. Meets weekly with the Chief and Deputy Chiefs, and the Internal
Affairs commander to review personnel complaints. Member of the Employee
Advisory Committee, the Strategic Plan Recommendations Committee and
facilitates the Policy Steering Committee. Participates in the following Advisory
Committees to the Chief of Police: Black, Hispanic, Asian, Gay and Lesbian,
Youth, Chaplain, Medical and Chairpersons. Does formal consulting on a daily
basis with supervisors and managers as requested. Consults with the Chief of
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
132 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Police on a frequent basis about the overall emotional and mental health of the
Department
• Conducts Training with recruits, reserves, Civilian Police Academy
participants, dispatchers, crime lab staff and others as requested. Serves on
the Training Advisory Committee with involvement in the Professional
Development Institute at the Academy. Attends annual conferences of the
following: California Psychological Association, American Psychological
Association, International Association of Chiefs of Police and the California
Peace Officers Association
• Social and Behavioral Science Research through the Academic Education
and Action Research Advisory Committee to the Chief of Police. This
committee is made up of several leaders in the Department as well as faculty
members of universities and colleges in the Long Beach area. Encourages
students, faculty members and employees to conduct research projects within
the Department. Coordinates college student interns who review and distribute
behavioral science research findings that can be applied in the Department.
Provides research findings from literature, which are summarized and
distributed through written “Research Updates” and Management Training Day
programs
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
133 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4 EMPLOYEE TRANSFER SELECTION PROTOCOL
Revised November 16, 2016
The Administration Bureau will have audit responsibility.
The purpose of this policy is to establish a uniform and fair procedure for the
selection of employees desiring transfer to open positions within the Department.
Transfer is defined as movement from one division to another, into the same
classification in which the applicant is currently employed. For transfer purposes,
the geographic patrol divisions shall be considered one division.
4.4.1 PUBLISHING AN OPENING
Revised November 16, 2016
Job openings shall be advertised via a Watch Report containing the following
information:
1) Description of position duties (e.g., serving warrants, filing cases, staff work,
etc.);
2) Description of working conditions (e.g., shift, hours, days off, holidays worked,
skill pay, dress code, location, etc.);
3) Required (Minimum) and preferred qualifications (e.g., experience,
education, training, language skills, etc.);
4) Filing deadline;
5) Resume submission deadline; and
6) Description of the selection process.
The Watch Report shall be distributed a minimum of two weeks prior to the
beginning of the selection process.
4.4.2 SELECTION PROCESS
Revised November 16, 2016
Information gathered during the selection process shall be confidential. Those
participating in the selection process shall be discreet in their handling and
discussion of this information, as well as the decision making process.
In addition to an applicant’s requirement to submit a resume, the selection process
should include, but is not limited to:
1) Review of work performance evaluations;
2) Review of Internal Affairs history;
3) Discussion with current and past supervisors;
4) Interviews may be conducted;
5) Review of candidate’s written work (previously filed reports, memorandums,
etc.).
4.4.2.1 RESUME SCREENING
Revised November 16, 2016
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
134 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
A resume must be submitted by all applicants. This will allow for an initial resume
screening, with the option of limiting interviews to the top qualified candidates.
Before reviewing the resumes, the supervisor should ensure that the candidate
meets the required qualifications published in the Watch Report, followed the
instructions to file for the position, and submitted a complete application packet in
a timely manner. In the event interviews are scheduled, those candidates not
selected to continue in the process shall be notified of this fact prior to the
scheduling of interviews.
4.4.2.2 SENIORITY
Revised November 16, 2016
Seniority is a factor that should be taken into consideration when making a
selection. Although seniority alone should not be the deciding factor, when all other
strengths and qualifications are close or equal between two candidates, seniority
may be used as the determining factor in selection.
4.4.2.3 INTERVIEWS
Revised November 16, 2016
No less than two persons shall conduct the interviews. It is preferred that at least
one of the members of the interview panel be of higher rank and at least one should
be from the division to which the candidate is applying. The same interviewers
should be used for all interviews when possible. A standardized list of questions or
scenarios will be utilized for all applicants.
4.4.2.4 PROHIBITED AREAS OF INTERVIEW QUESTIONING
Revised November 16, 2016
There are a number of areas an interviewer is prohibited from asking or referencing
by law. These areas include the following:
1) Marital status or children (e.g., divorced, pregnant, childcare issues, etc.);
2) Hobbies, interests and outside activities;
3) Physical or mental disability (including workers’ compensation issues);
4) Legally protected status (i.e., race, religion, age, ancestry, gender or sexual
orientation);
5) Union activity, grievances or other legally protected complaints, and
6) Any other question that falls outside the scope of evaluating the candidate’s
skills, knowledge and abilities to perform the duties of the position for which
he or she applied.
4.4.2.5 SELECTION
Revised November 16, 2016
The commander of the detail with the job opening shall contact the selected
candidate’s commander and determine a suitable date for transfer and complete
a Change of Assignment form with the agreed upon date. The Change of
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CHIEF OF POLICE
135 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Assignment form will then be forwarded to the Commander’s Bureau Chief, who
will ultimately forward it to the Chief of Police. No transfers will take place until the
Chief of Police has signed the Change of Assignment.
4.4.2.6 CANDIDATE NOTIFICATION AND TRANSFER
Revised November 16, 2016
Under no circumstances shall any of the interviewed applicants be advised of who
was or was not selected until the Chief of Police has signed the Change of
Assignment form. Once the Chief of Police has signed the Change of Assignment
form, the division with the job opening shall notify the selected candidate and
advise him or her of the date of transfer. It will be the responsibility of the receiving
detail to ensure the selected candidate has all necessary information and
equipment to make the transition smooth and efficient.
The Detail with the job opening shall also be responsible for notifying candidates
that were not chosen of their non-selection. Non-selected candidates will have the
opportunity to discuss the selection process further.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
136 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 ADMINISTRATION
6.1 COMMUNITY RELATIONS
6.1.1 MEDIA RELATIONS POLICY & PROCEDURES
Revised March 2008
The Department shall seek to establish a cooperative relationship with the media.
The basis of that relationship shall be the timely provision of information in a
manner that does not impede Department operations. Department employees
shall cooperate with members of the press by providing accurate and timely
information on newsworthy events.
The PIO shall assume primary responsibility for coordinating and maintaining
communication between the Department and the media. All Department personnel
are responsible for complying with the outlined procedures below.
6.1.1.1 MEDIA ACCESS TO REPORTS & INFORMATION
Revised March 2008
• The media may review the Booking Log maintained in the Records Division.
Juvenile information, however, shall not be accessible
• When requested, members of the media shall be permitted to review Arrest and
Crime Reports in accordance with §6254(F), Government Code. All requests
received per 6254(F), Government Code shall be forwarded to the
Department’s Custodian of Records. Excluded from review shall be
investigative follow-up reports and reports of a sensitive nature. Either the on-
duty records supervisor or the investigator of the case shall approve all such
requests
• Media members shall not be provided or permitted to make duplicate copies of
reports
• Media members requesting more detailed information relative to a crime or
unusual occurrence should be referred to the Media Relations Office during
business hours. Requests during non-business hours should be referred to the
Business Desk at 570-7236 who will issue the pager number of the on-call
Public Information Officer (PIO)
6.1.1.2 RELEASE OF LAW ENFORCEMENT INFORMATION
Revised March 2008
See Special Order PUBLIC RECORDS ACT REQUEST issued December 27, 2018.
§6254(F) of the California Government Code requires that certain information be
made available to the public.
Any of the following information shall be released to the public, except to the
extent that disclosure of a particular item of information would endanger the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
137 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
safety of a person involved in an investigation or would endanger the
successful completion of the investigation or a related investigation:
• Time, circumstance, and location of all complaints or requests for assistance
• Time and nature of police response including the extent that such information
is recorded
• Time, date, and hundred block of location (except in sexual assaults)
• Victim age and city of residence
• The factual circumstances surrounding the crime or incident
• General description of:
− Injuries involved
− Weapons involved
− Property involved
NOTE: The name of a victim of any crime defined by §261, 264, 264.1, 273(a),
273(d), 286, 288, 288(a) or 289 of the Penal Code may be withheld at the victim’s
request, or at the request of the victim’s parent or guardian if the victim is a minor.
Crime Reports may be released to:
• The victim of the incident
• An authorized representative of the victim (attorney or victim’s designee)
• An insurance carrier against which a claim has been or may be made
• An individual suffering bodily or property damage as a result of the incident
• Categories of crime reports subject to release under this section are: Arson,
Burglary, Fire, Explosion, Robbery, Vehicle theft, Crimes of violence,
Vandalism, Larceny
NOTE: In some cases, certain information is not released such as information from
an informant and conclusions of the investigating officer.
Arrest Reports
The following information shall be made public:
• The full name, current address, and occupation of every person arrested.
Detailed information on name, date of birth, exact address, and booking
number of juvenile offenders shall not be disclosed, except for age,
gender, and city of residence
• The arrestee’s physical description including:
− Date of birth
− Sex
− Height
− Weight
− Color of eyes & hair
• Date and time of arrest
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
138 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Date and time of booking
• Location of arrest
• Factual circumstances surrounding arrest
• Amount of bail set
• Time and manner of release or location where the arrestee is being held
• Probation/parole holds
NOTE: Nothing in 6254(F) of the California Government Code (CGC) requires the
release of information by which a juvenile offender’s identity may be disclosed.
Juvenile information can only be obtained through the Superior Court
juvenile system.
Traffic Accidents (20012 CVC)
• Traffic Accident Reports may be released to an involved party, insurance
carrier, or the attorney of the involved party to the accident. Involved parties
include the drivers of the vehicles, registered or legal owner, passengers,
witnesses, or anyone who has sustained property loss or injury as a result of
the accident. The opinions and conclusions of the officer will not be released.
Release of fatality, hit and run, or City Property Damage Reports requires prior
approval of the Accident Investigation Detail Traffic Accident Reports need not
be stamped with the “Confidential” warning stamp
Prior to releasing information, approval shall be obtained from one of the
following individuals:
• The investigator in charge of the crime scene or investigation
• PIO at the scene
• Incident Commander
The Investigator in charge and the Public Information Officer shall work together
to determine what information may be released without jeopardizing the ongoing
investigation.
Department personnel shall NOT release the following information:
• Information that could jeopardize the safety of victims, witnesses, or suspects
• Information that may hinder an investigation or interfere with the successful
apprehension and prosecution of the suspect(s)
• Information/reports regarding incidents/investigations of a sensitive nature
• Observations about an accused’s character
• Statements, admissions, confessions, or alibis attributable to the accused, or
the refusal or failure of the accused to make a statement
• Information regarding the performance of an examination or test, or the
accused’s failure or refusal to submit to an examination or test
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
139 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Statements concerning the identity, address, testimony or credibility of
prospective witnesses
• Opinion as to the accused’s guilt or speculation concerning his/her possible
plea to criminal charges
• Information concerning an accused’s prior criminal record
• The name or address of any victim of a sex offense. It is sufficient to provide
the age and sex of the victim and the general vicinity of the occurrence
• The name or address of any victim of a crime where a substantial possibility of
retaliation exists
• The identification of individuals under the age of 18 who are suspects or victims
in an investigation or who are taken into custody. It is sufficient to provide the
age and sex of the individual
• Information concerning an Internal Affairs investigation without the
authorization of a Bureau Chief or higher ranking officer
• Information concerning the amount of loss resulting from a theft, burglary or
robbery or other information that may lead to a recurrence of a particular crime
• Information relative to the cause of death, identity of the victim or other specific
facts of an investigation such as the location of a wound and statements of
witnesses
• Information relative to an officer-involved shooting without prior authorization
by the on-call homicide team supervisor, or Chief of Police
• Information relative to a homicide prior to a formal press release or
authorization by the on-call homicide team supervisor, Bureau Chief or higher
ranking officer
• Information regarding another law enforcement or other government agency’s
investigation or suspect without that agency’s approval
6.1.1.3 PROCEDURES FOR RELEASE OF INFORMATION TO THE
PUBLIC AND MEDIA
Revised March 2008
The Department shall release information to the public, when requested, in writing
on the Report Receipt/Application for Release of Report form, PD 2300.003 or
written CPRA request, in accordance with 6254(F) of the Government Code.
Complete copies of all reports will not be routinely available. The Records
Administrator, and/or his/her designee shall approve all such requests with
concurrence of the Investigator.
Crime Reports & Arrest Reports
• Citizens desiring to purchase a copy of a report will be required to complete a
Report Receipt/Request for Release of Report (PD form 2310.003) and submit
the appropriate fees (6257 GC). The report will be sent to the investigator
handling the case for review and approval
• Upon approval of release, the Records Division will mail the report. All Crime
and Arrest Reports will be stamped with the “Confidential” warning stamp
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
140 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Only arrested individuals or their attorneys may purchase copies of the arrests
reports, if approved by the investigating officers. If litigation is pending in Court,
they should be referred to the City Prosecutor or District Attorney’s Office or
City Attorney for complete copies of the reports. Subpoena Duces Tecum will
be accepted via the Department’s Court Affairs Office
• Booking Log – The Records Division will maintain this log for the press and the
public to review. The booking log report will be run once per week on Tuesday.
Juvenile information will not be included in the report
Dispatch Printouts & Tapes
• Dispatch Tapes – Citizens requesting copies of dispatch tapes will be required
to submit a Subpoena Duces Tecum to the Court Affairs Office. This request
will be forwarded to the Custodian of Records for further processing (a fee may
be charged)
• Dispatch Printouts – Citizens requesting dispatch printouts must present a
Subpoena Duces Tecum or CPRA request. This request will be forwarded to
the Custodian of Records for further processing (a fee may be charged)
Records Division Responsibilities
• Records Division personnel will complete all file searches. The Records
Division will not interpret or summarize reports for interested parties
• Any file pulled will be referred to the investigator in charge, or in his/her
absence, the investigative detail sergeant. Any information released will be
logged out in the front of the jacket
• Citizens desiring to purchase a copy of a report will be required to complete a
Report Receipt/Application for Release of Report, PD form 2310.003, and
submit it to the Records Division with the appropriate fees
• The Records Division will notify the assigned investigator of the request. After
approval, the report will be mailed. Reports will not be released over the
counter unless approved by a Senior Records Clerk and/or the Watch
Commander
• Telephone requests from citizens, attorneys or insurance companies for copies
of reports will not be accepted
The following items will not be released:
• Local or State Criminal History (Show-up)
• Booking Photograph (Bail bonds personnel may receive a photo with the name,
Booking Number and date portion cut-off)
• Investigation follow-up reports
• Fingerprint Cards
• Suspect information (i.e., name, vehicle license number) except as specifically
authorized by the Chief of Police or his designee
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
141 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sexual Assault Incidents
Investigations Bureau personnel shall notify the Media Relations Detail in a timely
manner and assist in creating a news release regarding sexual assault cases in
which the following circumstances exist:
• In any case where the Lead Investigator and/or the Detail Supervisor
determines that notification could assist with the investigation and/or alert the
public of potential danger
• When several cases exist that may be linked by modus operandi (MO) or other
evidence as having been committed by the same suspect
In accordance with §6254 of the Government Code, information that could
endanger the successful completion of any investigation or endanger a person’s
safety shall not be released. If the Lead Investigator or Detail Supervisor
determines that notification to the public could be detrimental to the case, the
Division Commander and Media Relations shall be notified.
The following criteria shall be used in the preparation of Public Information News
Releases with the understanding that the identity of sex crimes victims are to be
protected in accordance with §293 of the Penal Code:
• The name, address or date of birth of victim(s) shall NOT be revealed
• To further protect the victim’s identity, the relationship between the victim and
suspect shall NOT be revealed (e.g. son, daughter, wife, etc.…)
• A major intersection or commonly known area shall designate the location of
the crime(s), NOT the specific address or hundred block of a particular street
• Witness identities shall NOT be revealed
• Criminal Information Bulletins (CIB) distributed to police personnel are
confidential and shall NOT be released to the media or public
• A Public Information Bulletin (PIB) may be distributed to the community
Officer Involved Shootings
The on-call PIO will coordinate logistics with all media representatives. Preliminary
information such as acknowledgement of the incident and general call information
(i.e. time, type of call, location) will be released at the PIO’s discretion. A member
of the Command Staff, the Incident Commander, the Lead Investigator, or the PIO
may give a formal statement to the media.
The PIO will prepare a News Release and obtain final approval from the OIS
Supervisor or their designee, prior to its release.
In situations where there is an administrative review of an officer’s actions, such
as an Internal Affairs review, a Shooting/In-Custody Death Review Board, or an
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
142 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Accident Review Board, the officer’s name will not be released to the media absent
his/her consent.
6.1.1.4 MEDIA ACCESS TO INCIDENT SCENES
Revised March 2008
Officers shall notify the Incident Commander when the media is on-scene. The
media representatives should be directed to an established staging area
determined by the officer, Incident Commander, or PIO. The Incident Commander
shall notify the on-scene PIO or the on-call PIO. All media shall be given equal
access to information and locations. If necessary, a media pool will be established.
NOTE: The media is not required to respond to or remain at the media staging
area. They shall have freedom of movement outside the perimeter, just as the
general public would.
If a conflict develops between department personnel and the media, or a member
of the media is detained or arrested, a supervisor and/or the on-scene or on-call
PIO shall be notified immediately.
Media members shall present media credentials issued by the Los Angeles County
Sheriff’s Department, the Los Angeles Police Department, the Orange County
Sheriff’s Department, or any other law enforcement agency upon request at a
crime scene or incident location.
CRIME SCENES
Media access to crime scenes must be restricted. The media does not have right
of access past the inner perimeter of the crime scene tape. With permission of the
Lead Investigator or the Incident Commander, the media may be allowed past the
outer perimeter tape, while on the outside of the inner crime scene tape. If
possible, the Incident Commander or on-scene PIO should facilitate. The media
must be allowed access to any public areas where the general public has freedom
of movement.
The media does not have access to operational areas that are part of crime scenes
(i.e. Command Posts – Patrol, SWAT and Fire). The media cannot interfere with
areas of operation where rescue and recovery are taking place, and areas where
police and fire equipment is set up. The media must obtain permission from the
property owner in order to access areas of private property.
TRAFFIC ACCIDENTS
The media does not have access to the inner perimeter of crime scenes (including
traffic fatalities, 20001’s, 20002’s, 23152’s, and termination areas of pursuits). The
media does have access to areas where the general public has freedom of
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
143 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
movement. They can access areas of minor injury and non-injury accidents as
long as there is no interference with emergency operations and equipment.
DISASTER SCENES
Penal Code section 409.5(d) allows duly authorized members of the media access
to areas closed to the general public. Areas include those closed due to riot, fire,
flood, earthquake and other disasters. At the scene of a disaster, news media
personnel must act in a responsible manner and their actions may not interfere
with public safety efforts. This section does not allow media access to Command
Posts (i.e. Patrol, SWAT, and Fire) and/or operational areas. Safety cannot be the
basis for excluding access to a disaster scene.
If an officer comes into contact with media personnel entering a disaster area, the
officer shall advise the media of any safety hazards and shall request that the
Communications Center document the advisal, and the media representatives
name and station in the call history.
6.1.1.5 NOTIFICATIONS TO PUBLIC INFORMATION OFFICER
Revised March 2008
The Critical Incident Notification Guide shall be followed for notification to the PIO.
In addition, it is the Incident Commander’s responsibility to notify the on-call PIO if
any of the following occur:
Telephone Notification
• Media on-scene requesting interview with PIO, Incident Commander, or
Supervisor
• Incident or arrest that has potential to become high profile
• Conflict between media and department personnel
• Media representative is detained or arrested
Watch Commander Log Entry
• Media responds to an incident (no interview requested, general information
provided)
6.1.1.6 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE COMMUNICATION WITH MEDIA
Revised March 2008
All Department employees must obtain prior approval from the Office of the Chief
of Police before representing themselves as an employee of the Long Beach
Police Department to any media outlet/publication (i.e. Letter to the Editor, articles
in print publications, TV/cable shows, internet sites, and radio broadcasts). This
includes the release or posting of any photograph/video of any department
employee or event.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
144 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1.1.7 DEPARTMENT DISCLAIMER STATEMENT
Revised March 2008
Employees responsible for the preparation and issuance of initial memoranda
relative to press releases, unusual occurrences and officer-involved shootings (hit
and no-hit), shall always include the following disclaimer:
• “The following information is preliminary and has not been completely
confirmed. The information is based, in part, on hearsay and is intended for
early informational use rather than as a formal investigative report.”
The disclaimer statement shall be stamped at the beginning of all transmittals
disseminated regarding press releases, unusual occurrences and officer involved
shootings.
Disclaimer stamps will be located in the Accident Investigation Detail and the
Homicide Detail.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
145 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1.2 RELEASE OF CRIMINAL STATISTICS TO THE PUBLIC
Revised November 8, 2017
Information contained in the monthly statistical report may be released to the
general public. The following reports are available at the Long Beach Main Library:
• Reported Crime Monthly, Quarterly and Annual
To release criminal statistics or other crime information for a specific address or
area, employees shall adhere to the following procedures:
6.1.2.1 RELEASE OF CRIMINAL STATISTICS – COMMUNITY
ENGAGEMENT
Revised November 8, 2017
• Requests for reports compiled for the City Council should be referred to the
Library.
• The Community Relations Division may release information to the public by
reporting district only. Requests may be made in person, by telephone, or in
writing, and are limited to one month’s worth of one reporting districts’ statistics.
Requests for multiple reporting districts or multiple month statistics should be
directed to the Library.
• If information is requested for a specific address, or for crime information not
contained in the monthly Statistical Report, or by reporting district, a letter for
the request shall be submitted to the Chief of Police. Upon approval, the Chief
of Police may charge the requesting party the actual cost of collecting and
duplicating the data prior to the release of information per City policy.
6.1.2.2 RELEASE OF CRIMINAL STATISTICS – CRIME ANAYLSIS UNIT
Revised November 8, 2017
• All non-law enforcement requests for criminal statistics will be directed to the
Office of the Chief of Police for approval.
• Upon approval by the Chief of Police, the Crime Analysis Unit will process the
request and return to the Chief’s Office.
• Only criminal statistical information and reports approved by the Office of the
Chief of Police may be released to the public from the Crime Analysis Unit. The
Chain of command shall be strictly adhered to with these reports.
6.1.5 SEXUAL ASSAULT - MEDIA POLICY
Revised: August 5, 2002
Audit Responsibility Administration Bureau
Investigations Bureau personnel shall notify the Community Relations Public
Information Detail in a timely manner and assist in creating a Press Release
regarding sexual assault cases in which the following circumstances exist:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
146 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• In any case where the Lead Investigator and/or the Detail Supervisor
determines that notification could assist with the investigation and/or alert the
public of potential danger
• When two or more cases exist which may be linked by modus operandi (MO)
or other evidence as having been committed by the same suspect
• In accordance with §6254 of the Government Code, information that could
endanger the successful completion of any investigation or endanger a
person's safety shall NOT be released. If the Lead Investigator or Detail
Supervisor determines that notification to the public could be detrimental or
dangerous, the Division Commander shall be notified.
The following criteria shall be used in the preparation of Public Information Press
Releases with the understanding that the identity of sex crimes victims are to be
protected in accordance with §293 of the Penal Code:
• The name, address or date of birth of victim(s) shall NOT be revealed
• To further protect the victim’s identity, the relationship between the victim and
suspect shall NOT be revealed (e.g. son, daughter, wife, etc.)
• A major intersection or commonly known area shall designate the location of
the crime(s), NOT the specific address or hundred block of a particular street
• Witness identities shall NOT be revealed
• Criminal Information Bulletins (CIB) distributed to police personnel are
confidential and shall NOT be released to the media or public
6.1.7 CHAPLAINCY PROGRAM
The Long Beach Department Chaplain's Advisory Group is one of several advisory
groups that report directly to the Chief of Police. The Chaplains Group is open to
all denominations. Members must conform to the by-laws, which in part require
that Chaplain responsibilities be discharged in a non-sectarian manner, and that
they refrain from unsolicited proselytizing.
The mission of the Police Chief's Chaplain's Advisory Group is to function as a
liaison between the Long Beach Police Department and the community in which
they serve. The goals of this committee include, but are not limited to:
• Counseling employees of the Police Department and their families
• Providing assistance to victims as part of a Crisis Response Team
• Advise and assist the members of the Police Department to recognize
differences in the community that may affect the timely and effective
enforcement of the laws
Executive Committee
• An Executive Committee comprised of six clergy from a variety of religious
affiliations shall be formed from members of the Chaplain's Advisory Group.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
147 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Chief of Police will approve all members. The Executive Committee shall
recruit Chaplains and promote the program throughout the community
• A thorough background investigation will be conducted on each prospective
Chaplain
Call Out Procedures
• Chaplains will be indexed in the Communications Division Watch Commander's
Call out Book. A current list will be maintained identifying each Chaplain's
contact number and religious affiliation. Police employees should advise the
Communications Center when a Chaplain is needed and Communications
personnel will make the necessary notifications
• The on-call Chaplain will be notified by paging the 24-hour Alpha Numeric
pager which is indexed in the call out book
• All Chaplains responding to a crime scene will promptly report to the Incident
Command Post/Incident Commander to receive further instructions
• Patrol Assignments
• Chaplains will participate in patrol assignments with police officers. A minimum
of one 10-hour shift per month is required and must be scheduled in
cooperation with each divisional patrol scheduling sergeant
• Chaplains will pursue and participate in relevant training in order to maintain
and advance their skill level
6.1.8 COMMENDATIONS BOARD
The Commendations Board shall be comprised of 10 Civilian Executive Committee
members. The Chief of Police shall appoint these committee members and they
serve at his discretion. Commendation Board members shall appoint a
Chairperson from among its members who will preside over the selection process.
The Commanding Officer of the Community Relations Division shall be Co-
Chairperson of the Board and serve as the Department’s liaison to the Board. The
Chief of Police shall make the final award selections.
The Commendations Board shall convene during the second week of November
each year to consider recommendations for commendations. All members of the
Commendations Board shall classify police and citizen recommendations for
commendations.
The Board shall determine by majority vote whether the reported act is within one
of the following award categories:
• Medal of Honor
• Medal of Valor
• Meritorious Award – Class A
• Meritorious Award – Class B
• Meritorious Award – Class C
• Citation to a Citizen
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
148 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
After the Commendations Board has made its initial selections, a Director of the
Long Beach Police Officers’ Association (selected by the POA President) shall
review the Board’s selections and recommend changes, if necessary. These
recommendations shall be considered by the Board, but will not be binding.
The final decisions of the Commendations Board shall be reviewed and the Chief
of Police shall make final approval of award recipients. The Chief of Police shall
present these awards at the Annual Awards Banquet.
6.1.9 COMMENDATIONS – ADMINISTRATION OF THE PROGRAM
The Department shall promote and administer a continuous program recognizing
officers and other City employees who have performed acts of meritorious service
or accomplishment.
To obtain maximum benefit from the Commendations Awards Program and to
ensure all meritorious are promptly and properly recognized, all levels of command
and supervision shall understand its importance.
6.1.9.1 OFFICER AWARDS
An officer of the Long Beach Police Department or a Long Beach Police
Department Reserve Officer is eligible to receive the following meritorious awards:
Medal of Valor, Purple Heart Award, Meritorious Award Class A, Meritorious Award
Class B and Meritorious Award Class C.
6.1.9.2 MEDAL OF HONOR
The award shall be presented to the family of any officer killed in the line of duty.
6.1.9.3 MEDAL OF VALOR
This award is presented to an officer for an extraordinary act of heroism extending
above and beyond the normal demands of police service. The award is also
presented for police service performed at great risk to the officer’s life or safety in
an effort to preserve human life, whether in an on-duty or off-duty status.
“Above and beyond the normal demands of police service” is defined to include
ALL of the following:
• Outstanding bravery above and beyond that which is normally expected
• Failure to take such action would not be deemed a dereliction of duty
• Threat to the officer’s life existed, and the officer had sufficient time to evaluate
the threat
• The objective is of sufficient importance to justify the risk
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
149 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• The officer accomplished the objective or was prevented from doing so by
incurring a disabling injury or by circumstances beyond the officer’s control
6.1.9.4 PURPLE HEART AWARD
Any employee of this Department, as well as any private individual, may submit a
written recommendation to the Commendations Board nominating a police officer
to receive a Purple Heart Award.
Nominees must meet the following standards in order to qualify as a recipient of
the Purple Heart Award:
• The officer must have been a member of this Department at the time of the
incident
• The officer must have been injured while on-duty, or if off-duty, he/she must
have placed themselves in an on-duty status by taking action as a law
enforcement officer
• The injured officer’s actions at the time of the injury must have been directly
related to a law enforcement function
• The officer must have sustained a significant physical injury
• Eligibility is determined by the Commendations Board, based on the officer’s
actions as applied to the aforementioned criteria.
All Purple Heart Awards will be awarded at the Department’s Annual Awards
Banquet.
Officers are encouraged to wear their awards as part of their uniform.
6.1.9.5 MERITORIOUS AWARD – CLASS A
This award is presented for an act of heroism by an officer extending above and
beyond the normal demands of police service performed at great risk to the
officer’s safety in an effort to preserve human life.
6.1.9.6 MERITORIOUS AWARD – CLASS B
This award is presented for an act of heroism by an officer extending above and
beyond the normal demands of police service or a service performed at great
personal risk.
6.1.9.7 MERITORIOUS AWARD – CLASS C
This award is presented for the performance of an act, or acts over a period of
time, under conditions where bravery or other outstanding performance of duty is
involved but which is not above and beyond the normal demands of police service.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
150 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1.9.8 REVIEW BY CITY MANAGER
The City Manager will review recommendations received from the Chief of Police
and may authorize the award of the Medal of Valor presented at the Annual Awards
Banquet.
6.1.9.9 WEARING OF AWARDS
Officers authorized to wear the Medal of Valor and the Meritorious Awards Classes
A, B, or C, shall be encouraged to do so when in uniform.
6.1.9.10 PERSONNEL RECORD
The record of any member or employee having received awards described shall
be placed in the recipient’s personnel jacket.
6.1.10 CERTIFICATE OF COMMUNITY SERVICE
This award is presented to private citizens or City employees for performance of
the following:
• An act of bravery aiding, or attempting to aid, a private individual or officer of
this Department
• An act where necessary assistance is rendered to save the life of a private
citizen or an officer of this Department
• Outstanding assistance rendered to the community or Department
6.1.11 EMPLOYEE RECOGNITION PROGRAM
The intent of the Employee Recognition Program is to identify and acknowledge
exemplary performance by sworn and civilian employees. It is designed to be an
on-going program by which the Department identifies individuals for employee of
the quarter and year.
Selection Criteria
The following criteria should be considered when evaluating nominees for
employee recognition:
• Nominee holds a sworn or non-sworn position below the rank of lieutenant
• Maintains a consistently high level of work performance
• Maintains a consistently high degree of initiative and job interest
• Takes complete responsibility for work assignments
• Demonstrates a positive attitude
• Demonstrates a high degree of dependability
• Provides informal leadership by continually setting a good example
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
151 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Learns from experience and is responsive to training
• Understands and practices a fair work ethic
• Looks for opportunities to improve our organization and communicates positive
suggestions
• Possesses a high degree of personal integrity
• Maintains a professional appearance
• Exhibits responsiveness
Nomination Procedures
Any member of the Department may nominate an individual for consideration by
their respective Bureau’s Employee Recognition Committee by completing PD
form 1000.025. The completed form shall be forwarded to their Bureau Chief who
will retain it until the next meeting of the Bureau’s Recognition Committee. Upon
convening of the committee, all current nominations shall be reviewed and acted
upon.
Employee Recognition Committee
Selection Procedures
Each Bureau Chief shall establish an Employee Recognition Committee shall be
chaired by a Commanding Officer. No less than two peer members shall be
assigned to the committee and the committee size shall not exceed five members.
The committee shall meet quarterly and shall review all nominations from their
Bureau. A report shall be immediately forwarded to the Bureau Chief articulating
the recommendation of individual(s) for recognition. The committee shall have the
latitude to indicate in their report that no employee will be recommended for the
evaluation period. The committee recommendations shall be forwarded to the
Chief of Police after approval by the Bureau Chief and after the employee has been
appropriately acknowledged.
Annually, the Department shall identify an Employee of the Year. The selection of
this individual shall be accomplished in the following manner:
• Each Bureau Committee shall make a recommendation for Employee of the
Year and forward it to their respective Bureau Chief
• Upon approval, the Bureau Chief shall forward their Bureau’s
recommendations to the Commander, Community Relations Division.
Recommendations shall be due to Community Relations, no later than October
10th of each year
• The Deputy Chief of the Administration Bureau shall compile the
recommendations and present to the Bureau Chief’s at a Deputy Chief’s
meeting. The Bureau Chiefs shall come to consensus on a selection
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
152 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• The Commander, Community Relations Division, shall draft a report and
forward it to the Chief of Police by November 20th of each year for final approval
• Quarterly selections shall be forwarded to the Chief of Police as follows:
January – March due April 10
April – June due July 10
July – September due October 10
October – December due January 10
Recognition
It shall be the responsibility of each Bureau Chief to provide suitable recognition
for their employees. The form of recognition should be commensurate with the
level of achievement. All selectees shall receive a letter of commendation signed
by the Chief of Police, in addition to any other form of recognition. Display of
photographs will be at the discretion of the awardees.
The Bureau Chief shall also ensure that all Department employees are made
aware of their Bureau’s awardees. If appropriate, they shall also be responsible
for press releases.
6.1.12 PROCEDURE FOR SUBMITTING SUGGESTIONS
Employees shall submit their suggestions to their immediate supervisors. The
supervisor shall review the report and forward it to the employee’s commanding
officer. The concerned commanding officer shall review the suggestion and
complete an evaluation and recommendation to the Commendations Board.
6.1.13 BULLETIN BOARDS – PUBLIC SAFETY BUILDING
No information will be posted or displayed anywhere in the Public Safety Building
except on Departmental bulletin boards. Do not use walls and glass windows for
posting
• “For Sale” information will be posted on bulletin boards located in the basement
area only, not on the other floors of the building
• “For Sale” information posted in the basement area will be removed after two
weeks
• All building bulletin boards may be used for Department and social notices
• All posted information shall display a posting date. Information not having a
date will be removed immediately
• The Community Relations Division will have the responsibility for monitoring
the bulletin boards and ensuring compliance
Department bulletin boards have been placed in the following locations:
• Basement
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ADMINISTRATION
153 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• 1st floor
• 2nd floor
• 3rd floor
• 4th floor
Any complaints or suggestion regarding the use of these bulletin boards should be
forwarded to the Community Relations Division.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COURT AFFAIRS
154 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.2 COURT AFFAIRS
Revised July 11, 2013
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
Only Court Affairs may accept a subpoena duces tecum or a summons intended
for service on department employees. Court Affairs will forward the subpoena or
summons to the LBPD Custodian of Records.
6.2.1 SUBPOENAS AND SUMMONSES
Revised July 11, 2013
A summons is a document served on an employee informing them that they are
being civilly sued. If an employee receives a summons for a civil action brought
against them for an act or action while in the performance of their duties, they shall
immediately contact the City Attorney’s Office for the purpose of obtaining legal
representation.
A subpoena is a writ by a government agency that has authority to compel
testimony or the production of evidence under penalty for failure.
6.2.1.1 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBPOENAS AND SUMMONSES
Revised July 11, 2013
All entities delivering subpoenas to the Department must submit them to Court
Affairs at least five days prior to the scheduled court date. Court Affairs will enter
any received subpoena or summons into the Electronic Subpoena Service System
for service to the involved employee.
Court Affairs shall accept all timely civil subpoenas that exhibit a court case
number, date, time and location. Depending on the information requested, Court
Affairs may charge the serving party a fee. The fee shall be received prior to the
acceptance of a subpoena.
Business representatives wishing to serve a subpoena or summons shall be
directed to Court Affairs, during normal business hours. Representatives
attempting to serve a subpoena or summons after normal hours or on a holiday
shall be directed to return to Court Affairs on the next scheduled business day
during normal business hours.
Subpoenas received via USPS mail, teletype or fax shall be forwarded to Court
Affairs for processing. In the event a subpoena is inadvertently mailed to a
substation; the employee shall immediately forward the subpoena to Court Affairs.
6.2.1.2 ELECTRONIC SUBPOENA SERVICE PROCEDURE
Revised July 11, 2013
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COURT AFFAIRS
155 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Court Affairs shall enter every subpoena they receive into the Court Affairs
Electronic Subpoena System. Employees will log into the system and enter their
department ID number to accept their individual subpoenas. Employees must
check the Court Affairs Electronic Subpoena Service System on each of their
workdays. Employees shall respond to all subpoenas served on them ordering
their presence in court.
6.2.1.3 REFUSAL OF SERVICE
Revised July 11, 2013
An employee may refuse subpoena service for the following reasons:
• If a subpoena is entered into the Court Affairs Electronic Subpoena Service
System with less than five working days of the court hearing, it shall be
considered untimely; however, this does not preclude the employee from
accepting service if they are on a normal workday or are otherwise able to
attend.
• Employees on approved vacations, holidays, or overtime days off may be able
to refuse subpoena service if they have forwarded an approved copy of the
time off request to the Court Affairs Office in a timely manner. Court Affairs
must receive an approved vacation request at least 14 days prior to a vacation.
They must receive an approved copy of a holiday or overtime day off request
at least 7 days prior. Note: Employees must honor all subpoenas received prior
to the submission of a vacation, holiday, or overtime day off request.
Employees shall contact the Court Affairs Sergeant if a conflict arises.
• Employees assigned to training on scheduled court appearance days shall
provide a memorandum to Court Affairs advising them of the length and
location of the training assignment. The memorandum should be delivered to
Court Affairs at least one workweek prior to the training class.
• Employees who are military reservists and ordered to active duty shall provide
Court Affairs with a memorandum advising of the length, duty location, and
return to work date no later than one workweek prior to their activation date.
• Employees who are physically unable to attend court due to illness or injury
shall notify Court Affairs as soon as possible. The Personnel Division will notify
Court Affairs of all employees who are IOD. Employees who are IOD, but in a
light-duty work status are still required to accept and honor all served
subpoenas.
6.2.2 COURT APPEARANCES
Revised July 11, 2013
When required by subpoena, ordered by a commanding officer or court liaison
officer, attendance at a court or quasi-judicial hearing is considered an official duty
assignment. Failure to appear in court on the date and time ordered, without good
cause, may result in court-mandated or department action.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COURT AFFAIRS
156 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Employees shall receive overtime compensation for court in accordance with the
most current Memorandum of Understanding from their respective bargaining unit.
Employees are responsible for monitoring their court cases through adjudication.
An employee who receives a subpoena to testify for the defense, against the City,
or against the Department in any trial or hearing, shall notify their Division
Commander as soon as possible. The employee shall notify Court Affairs if the
subpoena was received outside of the Electronic Subpoena Service System.
6.2.2.1 CONDUCT IN COURT
Revised July 11, 2013
While in court, employees shall avoid mannerisms that might imply disrespect to
the Court, such as: reading, talking, texting or using cell phones, eating, drinking,
chewing gum, wearing hats or sunglasses, or sleeping.
6.2.3 QUASI-JUDICIAL HEARINGS
Revised July 11, 2013
Employees may be required to attend quasi-judicial hearings to provide testimony
concerning their actions, observations or activities. Court Affairs will enter all
quasi-judicial hearings into the Electronic Subpoena Service System. Employees
shall conform to the same standards of conduct and procedures pertaining to all
other court appearances.
Quasi-judicial hearings include:
• Parole hearings
• Probation hearings
• Department of Motor Vehicles hearings
• Alcohol Beverage Control hearings
• Civil Service hearings
• Depositions
6.2.4 COURT CALENDAR
Revised July 11, 2013
Court Affairs shall display one copy of the court calendar outside of the Court
Affairs Office and distribute two copies of the court calendar to the Public Safety
Building Business Desk. Each Division is responsible for printing and displaying
the calendar for employees to view. Court calendars are only valid for the next-
court day if printed after 1800 hours.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ALPR
157 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3 AUTOMATED LICENSE PLATE RECOGNITION (ALPR)
Revised August 17, 2017
The Administration Bureau has audit responsibility.
6.3.1 ALPR PURPOSE AND SCOPE
Revised August 17, 2017
The Long Beach Police Department utilizes automated license plate reader
(ALPR) technology, and supporting software, to gather and analyze data to enable
the rapid identification and location of vehicles of legitimate interest to law
enforcement.
ALPR units are attached to vehicles or at fixed locations, where they collect license
plate information from vehicles on public roadways and public property.
6.3.2 ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS
Revised August 17, 2017
Alert: A visual or auditory notice that is triggered when the ALPR system receives
a potential hit on a license plate.
Hit: A read matched to a license plate that has previously been registered on an
agency’s hot list of license plates related to stolen vehicles, wanted vehicles, or
other factors supporting investigation, or which has been manually registered by a
user for further investigation.
Hot list: Hot list data consists of license plate numbers selected by an agency for
inclusion on a particular list to facilitate the targeting of vehicles displaying those
license plate numbers.
Read: Digital images of license plates and vehicles, and associated metadata
(e.g., date, time, and geographic coordinates associated with the vehicle image
capture) that are captured by the ALPR system.
6.3.3 AUTHORIZED USE OF ALPR DATA
Revised August 17, 2017
ALPR data shall be used for official law enforcement purposes in support of local,
state, and federal agencies.
6.3.3.1 RESTRICTIONS ON COLLECTION OF ALPR DATA AND USE OF
ALPR SYSTEMS
Revised August 17, 2017
ALPR units may be used to collect data that is within public view but may not be
used for monitoring individual activities protected by the First Amendment to the
United States Constitution. It is the personal responsibility of all employees with
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ALPR
158 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
access to ALPR data to take reasonable measures to protect the privacy and civil
liberties of individuals, as well as the security and confidentiality of ALPR data.
Civilian ALPR operators may not contact occupied vehicles that return as stolen,
wanted, or subject-of-investigation.
Users of ALPR data shall visually confirm the license plate characters generated
by the ALPR readers correspond with the digital image of the license plate in
question. ALPR hits shall be verified through JDIC, CLETS or other official law
enforcement sources.
6.3.3.2 COMMERCIALLY COLLECTED ALPR DATA
Revised August 17, 2017
The Long Beach Police Department has access to commercially collected ALPR
data, which shall be treated in the same manner as LBPD ALPR data.
6.3.4 RETENTION OF ALPR DATA
Revised August 17, 2017
ALPR data collected by the Long Beach Police Department shall not be retained
for a period exceeding 24 months. Once the retention period for ALPR data has
expired, the Department shall purge the data from the ALPR system.
ALPR records of vehicles having been identified and linked to a criminal
investigation will be retained in accordance with the applicable criminal statute of
limitations.
6.3.5 TRAINING
Revised August 17, 2017
Only personnel trained in the use of the ALPR system, including its privacy and
civil liberties protections, shall be authorized to access the ALPR system. All
personnel who have access to the ALPR system will participate in annual training
that shall include, at minimum, a review of this policy.
6.3.6 AUDITS
Revised August 17, 2017
Access to, and use of, ALPR data is logged for audit purposes. ALPR system
audits will be conducted periodically and on request to supervisory personnel at
the Long Beach Police Department.
6.3.7 DATA SHARING
Revised August 17, 2017
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ALPR
159 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
ALPR data may be shared with other authorized and verified law enforcement
officials and agencies at any time for legitimate law enforcement purposes.
6.3.7.1 DISSEMINATION
Revised August 17, 2017
ALPR data is for official use only. The Long Beach Police Department may
disseminate ALPR data to any government entity with an authorized law
enforcement or public safety purpose. ALPR information shall not be disseminated
for personal gain or for any other non-law enforcement purpose.
ALPR data may be disseminated to owners and operators of critical infrastructure
in circumstances where such infrastructure is reasonably believed to be the target
of surveillance for the purpose of a terrorist attack or other criminal activity.
Historical ALPR data shall not be disseminated to members of the public or news
media, except in the following circumstances:
1) A public safety exception where the Department reasonably determines that
an individual or vehicle poses a threat of substantial harm to the public.
a) Limited Release of Information – The release of ALPR data must be
limited to information that could reasonably protect the public from the
harm justifying the dissemination of the data.
2) ALPR images may be used in a photo line-up to further the particular
investigation for which the ALPR image was requested.
The Long Beach Police Department shall raise all applicable exemptions contained
in the jurisdiction's freedom of information act to withhold or otherwise limit the
disclosure of historical ALPR data.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
160 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.4 ADMINISTRATION – RECORDS DIVISION
6.4.1 POSSIBLE SUSPECTS ON CRIME REPORTS
Possible suspects shall not be listed in the suspect on crime reports. This area is
to be used only when information is obtained identifying a known suspect that
could result in an arrest.
Possible suspects shall only be listed in the narrative portion of the report. Include
all information leading to the identification of an individual as a possible suspect.
In order for a wanted felony vehicle to be entered into CLETS, the Detail Sergeant
or detective assigned the case shall notify Auto records. The following information
will be required for the entry:
• Vehicle license number (VIN)
• Make
• Model
• Color
• Pertinent DR#
6.4.2 ASSAULT/BATTERY ON A PEACE OFFICER REPORTS
• A separate crime report shall be filed for each officer/victim involved in an
incident. Officers/victims shall not be listed as additional victims in reports of
Assault/Battery on a police officer
• Only one crime report requires the full narrative of the incident
• Subsequent crime reports for each additional officer/victim shall refer to the
initial DR# in the narrative
• Indicate all DR#s and supplements in the “Connecting Report #” box on the
“Crime Report” form (PD form 23100.001)
• Officers shall not file their own crime report when identified as victim
6.4.3 STANDARDIZED FIRM ABBREVIATIONS
Personnel filing an initial crime report will list the correct and complete title of the
victim on the report. The Record Division will ensure that the proper standardized
abbreviation is used for entry in PSIS. Personnel inquiring of the system will use
the appropriate abbreviation. All punctuation and store numbers will be omitted
from the victim’s name in the computer index.
The following list of standard abbreviations for repeated victims is currently used:
Repeated Victims Standardization of Entries
Alpha Beta Alpha Beta
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
161 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
American Check Cashing Exchange American Check Cashing
AM PM Mart AM PM
Any Kind Check Cashing Any Kind Check Cashing
Avis Rent-a-Car Avis
Bank of America B of A
Builder’s Emporium Builder’s Emporium
Church’s Chicken Churchs Chicken
City of Long Beach City of LB
City of Long Beach Fire City of LB Fire
City of Long Beach Gas & Water City of LB Gas & Water
City of Long Beach Harbor City LB Harbor
City of Long Bean Police City of LB Police
City of Long Beach Recreation City of LB Recreation
CVI Cable CVI
Denny’s Restaurant Denny’s
Egyptian Drugs Egyptian Drugs
Farmers and Merchant Bank F & M
General Telephone and Electric GTE
Grocery Warehouse Grocery Warehouse
Hertz Rent-a-Car Hertz
Home Depot (The) Home Depot
In & Out Burgers In & Out
Jack in the Box Jack in the Box
JC Penny JC Penny
JJ Newberry JJ Newberry
Kentucky Fried Chicken ` KFC
K-Mart KMart
Long Beach Public Transportation Co. LB Public Trans Co
Long Beach Plaza Mall LB Plaza Mall
Long Beach Unified School District LBUSD
Lucky Discount Supermarket Lucky
McDonnell Douglas McDonnell Douglas
Montgomery Ward Montgomery Ward
Nix Check Cashing Nix Check Cashing
Nortica’s 32nd Street Market Nortica’s
Pavilions Pavilions
Pic N Save Pic N Save
Ralph’s Grocery Company Ralph’s
Sav On Drug Stores Savon
Savon Express Savon Express
7-Eleven Stores 7 11
Smart & Final Smart & Final
Southern California Edison SCE
So. California Rapid Transit District RTD
State of California State of California
Stop & Go Market Stop & Go
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
162 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Taco Bell Taco Bell
Target Stores Target
Thrifty Drug Stores Thrifty
Top Value Top Valu
Vons Grocery Vons
Wards Pharmacy Wards
Wells Fargo Bank Wells Fargo
Wienerschnitzel Wienerschnitzel
6.4.4 SALE OF POLICE REPORTS
In accordance with §6257 of the Government Code of the State of California, the
Department shall charge and collect for the City a fee for each copy of a Police
Report released to authorized persons, regardless of the number of pages
contained in the report. This fee shall apply to persons requesting copies of
Incident and Arrest Reports, including those reports provided via the Civil
Subpoena Duces Tecum process. Special circumstances may warrant waiver of
the fee, for which written approval by the Administrator, Information Management
Division, is required.
A fee will NOT be charged to an authorized representative of the Federal, State,
County, and City, District or other political subdivision.
A copy of a report will NOT be issued which is confidential, privileged in nature, or
when the public interest would suffer by disclosure of the report.
Authorized personnel from law enforcement and government agencies, not subject
to payment of fees, may obtain copies of reports by mail or in person. All other
requests for Incident Reports shall be made through the use of PD form 2310.003
(2/93), “Request a Report by Mail”. The Records Division shall process all such
requests and the copies will be mailed to the requestor.
6.4.4.1 INFORMATION DESK PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITY
Upon request, Information Desk personnel shall give in-person applicants a copy
of PD form 2310.003 (2/93) for each report requested. They will accept the
application and a check, money order or cash and forward it to the Information
Management Division.
6.4.4.2 COLLISION REPORTS
Traffic Collision Reports may be released to an involved party, insurance carrier,
or attorney of the involved party to the accident. Involved parties are the drivers
of the vehicles, registered or legal owners, passengers, witnesses or anyone who
has sustained a property loss as a result of the accident. The opinions and
conclusions of the officer shall not be released. Release of fatality, hit and run or
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
163 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
City property damage reports require prior approval by the Accident Investigation
Section Traffic accidents are not required to be stamped with the “Confidential”
warning stamp.
6.4.4.3 INCIDENT & ARREST REPORTS
Citizens wanting to purchase a copy of a report are required to complete a
“Request a Report by Mail” form and submit the appropriate fees (6257 GC). The
requested report shall be sent to the investigator handling the case for review and
approval.
Once approved, the Records Division within 10 days (6256 GC) shall mail the
report. All Crime and Arrest Reports shall be stamped with the “Confidential”
warning stamp.
Subjects of arrest or their attorneys may purchase copies of the report. If litigation
is pending in Court, they should be referred to the City Prosecutor of District
Attorney’s Office for complete copies of the reports. The Department’s Court
Affairs Office shall accept a Subpoena Duces Tecum.
6.4.4.4 SUMMARY OF CRIMINAL OFFENDER INFORMATION
Individuals wanting to review their records with the Department must apply in
person between the hours of 0800 to 1630, Monday through Friday. Individuals
will be identified through fingerprints and provided with the date, charge and
disposition of their local arrests. A fee is charged for this service. Individuals
inquiring of their records with the California Department of Justice or the Federal
Bureau of Investigation must contact those agencies directly.
Records Division Responsibilities
• Accept applications and fees associated with the report
• Review for completeness and individual’s right to obtain report
• Determine if investigative approval is required
6.4.5 TELEPHONIC CRIME REPORTING/ABBREVIATED CRIME
REPORT
See Special Order DISCONTINUATION OF TELEPHONIC STOLEN VEHICLE AND STOLEN
VESSEL REPORTS issued July 14, 2015.
Individuals requiring telephonic reports shall be advised to telephone the North
Police Facility to report incidents occurring west of Cherry and north of Wardlow,
the East facility for incidents occurring east of Cherry, the West Facility for
incidents occurring west of the 710 freeway and the downtown Station for all other
incidents.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
164 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abbreviated Crime Report
All personnel will use the abbreviated Crime Report (PD form 2310.024). The
types of crimes that may be filed on the Abbreviated Crime Report and
circumstances surrounding those crimes are identified as follows:
All misdemeanors
NOTE: In all cases when a suspect is named or there is information in the report
that would lead to the identity of the suspect, the “Investigative Crime Report” (PD
form 2310.001) shall be used.
A unit will be dispatched if any of the following circumstances are present:
• The victim has been injured
• The suspect is at or near the scene, or a crime has just occurred
• There is physical evidence to be collected
• The victim is hysterical or confused
• The victim insists that a unit be dispatched
• In the case of a Hit and Run 20002(a) CVC, when the victim’s vehicle was
occupied
Grand Theft Property 487.1 PC – Grand Theft Gun 487.3 PC
A unit will be dispatched if any of the following circumstances are present:
• The suspect is at or near the scene, or the crime has just occurred
• There is physical evidence to be collected
• The victim insists that a unit be dispatched
• The loss totals $5,000.00 or more
Burglary (auto) 459(A) PC – Burglary (boat) 459(B) PC
A unit will be dispatched if any of the following circumstances are present:
• The suspect is at or near the scene, or the crime has just occurred
• There is physical evidence to be collected
• The victim insists that a unit be dispatched
• The loss totals $5,000.00 or more
Auto Theft VC – Abbreviated Crime Reports will not be used for Auto Thefts
Officers will respond to and take Stolen Vehicle Reports ONLY when one of the
following conditions exist:
• Suspects are in custody or in the area
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
165 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Suspects are named
• Evidence exists at the scene
• Victim insists that a unit be dispatched
Personnel assigned to the Information/Business Desks at all the police substations
and the main station will be responsible for taking telephonic Stolen Vehicle
Reports. See Special Order DISCONTINUATION OF TELEPHONIC STOLEN VEHICLE AND
STOLEN VESSEL REPORTS issued July 14, 2015. However, the person receiving the
call when any of the following conditions exist will refer such calls to the Auto Theft
Detail for evaluation of the circumstances:
• The victim is a rental agency and the suspect in the renter of the vehicle
• The vehicle is taken by means of Forgery, Fraud or Trick and Device (these
reports will be referred to the Forgery/Fraud Detail)
• The victim has loaned the vehicle to another party regardless of the time period
involved
• The vehicle is alleged to have been embezzled
• If none of the aforementioned conditions exist, Stolen Vehicle Reports will be
taken via telephone at the Information/Business Desk of the appropriate
station.
• The employee receiving the report will confirm that the victim is willing to
prosecute and that special circumstances are not present
• The identity of the Victim/Reporting Party and registered owner information with
the Department of Motor Vehicles (CLETS)
• AUTO STATS shall be contacted to determine if the vehicle has been reported
stored, impounded or repossessed, if circumstances indicate that this
information may not yet have been entered into CLETS
• The Vehicle Report (PD form 2310.010) will be completed using information
from the victim. The report should indicate the last driver and that no one was
given permission to use the vehicle
• The word “TELEPHONE” shall be written in the signature box
• The filing employee will obtain a DR#, indicate it on the report and give the
victim the DR#
• The filing employee will forward the written document to the Reporting Office
for review and assignment
General Information
• Recoveries shall not be taken by telephone
• All vehicles associated with missing persons shall be entered by Police
Systems at the time the missing person information is entered
Auto Records personnel shall NOT enter the missing vehicle into the stolen vehicle
system as requested by the Department of Justice. If a missing vehicle card is
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
166 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
received, make a copy of the card and forward to Police Systems for entry into the
missing person system. Auto Records will maintain the card.
• Courtesy reports from other jurisdictions will not be taken telephonically
• IF the identity (via driver’s or identification card number) of the victim/reporting
party and/or ownership information cannot be verified through CLETS, a unit
will be dispatched to take the report
• If DMV shows a “Release of Liability” form on file, this alone does not establish
ownership of the vehicle
• If it is determined that other questionable and unusual circumstances exist
regarding the stolen vehicle, the watch commander shall make the
determination to refer the victim to the Auto Theft Detail, or refer the call to the
communications center to dispatch a unit
6.4.6 INTENTIONALLY BLANK
6.4.7 ROBBERY TELETYPES – PREPARATION & SENDING
Teletypes shall be sent on the following:
• Any robbery indicating a potential series
• Any robbery with a named suspect or vehicle license number, or unusual
descriptive information, regarding the vehicle
• When the victim is a major market, restaurant, retailer, bank, or commercial
business
• Whenever serious injury is sustained, shots are fired, suspects are
exceptionally violent
• Any extensive loss
NOTE: Purse snatch or street robberies should NOT have a Teletype sent unless
they have appropriate suspect or vehicle information.
All teletypes should include basic information; date and time, time of robbery, name
of victim, loss, suspect’s physical description, weapons used, suspect’s vehicle
description, and a brief description of any MO. Be specific regarding unusual
actions, unusual dress, or suspect’s exact comments. All teletypes should be short
and direct.
The patrol officer who handles the crime report should hand write the Teletype and
forward it to the watch commander. The officer may KDT the information if he/she
is unable to return to the station in a timely manner. The watch commander will
approve or make any required adjustments on the teletype, enter the information
on the watch commander’s activity log, and deliver the teletype to the Police
Systems Office.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
167 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Police Systems personnel shall transmit the Teletype to the appropriate
jurisdictions and forward a copy to the Robbery Detail. The copy shall include the
date and time the Teletype was sent.
6.4.8 MARINE SECURITY – NON-VIOLENT CRIME REPORTS TAKEN
BY
Long Beach Marine Patrol Security Officers shall be authorized to take police
reports for non-violent crimes where weapons were not used, and Vehicle, Bicycle
and Vessel reports. Marine Patrol Officers may also take Special Accident reports
that occur within the Marina Areas.
When the Marine Patrol Security Officers become aware that a crime involving
violence or weapons was perpetrated in their area, they shall request a police unit
to conduct the investigation. The Detective Division will continue to investigate
these reports consistent with those taken by Long Beach Police Officers.
6.4.9 RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT UNIT
The purpose of Research and Development shall be to develop long-range plans,
environmental evaluations, and to conduct special projects.
Organizational Structure
Research and Development, Administration Bureau, is under the direct
supervision of the Administrator, Information Management Division. A Police
Sergeant will be designated as the Coordinator of the Unit. Personnel assigned to
the unit will be responsible to the coordinator for duty functions and assignments.
Responsibilities
Long-Range Planning – Responsible for planning, researching and coordinating
projects within the following areas:
• Research, develop and publish a three- and five-year strategic Department
plan
• Analyze appropriate forecasts to assist management in developing
Departmental goals
• Establish and maintain liaison with qualified individuals in the field of long-range
planning
Environmental Evaluation
The unit will be responsible for the preparation of Environmental Impact Reports
(EIR) in response to major commercial developers regarding the effect of projects
on police services by:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
168 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Preparing draft EIR’s on Department originated projects
• Evaluating the various City Master Plans
• Attending community meetings
Special Projects
The unit shall be the Department’s central repository for research and
management information and perform the following functions:
• Conduct staff research and prepare reports
• Review, analyze, summarize and/or coordinate major staff research projects
• Review, analyze and recommend project evaluations
• Receive, study and respond to Departmental employee suggestions directed
• Evaluate equipment options
• Respond to planning surveys from outside agencies
6.4.10 REQUEST FOR STATISTICAL INFORMATION & SPECIAL
INQUIRIES FROM THE SYSTEMS SECTION
All requests for statistical (batch) information, or full file searches must be
submitted in writing to the Administrator, Information Division.
Subsequent to approval, written requests will be forwarded to the Police Project
Manager, Information Services Division, General Services Department. The
Police Systems Section personnel will deliver results to the requesting Section,
Division or Bureau.
In the absence of the Administrator, Information Management Division, the Deputy
Chief of Administration Bureau can approve requests for batch process computer
runs.
Should an emergency situation arise where statistical information is required
immediately, the Administrator, Information Management Division, will honor an
emergency telephone request. A request memorandum will be required prior to
delivery of the statistical information.
6.4.11 IMPREST CASH/PETTY CASH FUNDS
Utilization and Control Procedure for Advancing Imprest Cash Funds to Individuals
for Expenditures
Individual(s) will request an advance of imprest cash from the Budget Section in a
form approved by both the Bureau Chief and the Administrator, Information
Management Division. The following information shall be included:
• Vendor
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
169 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Requesting personnel
• Program/Activity to be charged
• Description of the purchase
• Cost of the purchase
• Reason for the purchase
• The individual will exchange the approved request form for cash from the
Budget Section
The Budget Section will ensure the form is complete and that the purchase meets
the requirements of the imprest cash fund.
When the purchase is completed, the individual will return the following to Budget
Section:
• The exact change, if the expenditure was less than the amount advanced
• An ORIGINAL receipt for the expenditure
The Budget Section will maintain all necessary accounting records and the security
of the imprest cash funds.
The Budget Section will report all expenditures to the Financial Management
Section and obtain reimbursement of funds to the imprest cash fund.
Expenditures
There may be incidents when an individual makes a purchase within the
requirements of the imprest cash fund, by using his/her personal cash.
The same procedures will be followed as for the advance of imprest cash funds
except, rather than advancing funds to the individual, the individual will be
reimbursed for the expenditure.
Reimbursement
Reimbursement will not be made for expenditures made by any individual which
does not meet the requirements for the Imprest Cash Fund regulations and have
the approval of the applicable Bureau Chief and Administrator, Information
Management Division.
6.4.12 TRAVEL – OUT OF STATE & OVERNIGHT TRAVEL
All out of state or overnight travel requires advance authorization by the Chief of
Police or his designee. Travel by Department employees is defined as a business
trip or attendance at a convention or business meeting which:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
170 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Has a public or municipal purpose, the aims of which are reasonably calculated
to aid the Department in the attainment of its objectives; and
• Requires expenses for transportation to any location farther than one day’s
round trip travel from this City. One day, round trip travel may be approved by
the employee’s Bureau Chief
• Requires expenses for overnight lodging and meals
Types of travel are defined as follows:
• Conventions – A convention is defined as a regularly recurring conference of
the membership of a professional, technical, fraternal or other organization in
which the subject matter broadly relates to Department operations
• Business Meeting – A business meeting is defined as an advisory committee
session or other gathering in which the subject matter broadly relates to
Department operations
NOTE: This definition includes, but is not limited to, training activities,
conferences, panels, seminars or workshops on specific City problems; and
appearances before judicial, quasi-judicial or legislative bodies.
• Business trips – A business trip is defined as travel for other than a convention
or business meeting; the purpose of which is of immediate concern to
Department operations
• Extradition of Fugitives
NOTE: This definition includes investigative travel (i.e., criminal investigation)
and operations travel (i.e., recruiting, real estate and grant negotiations and the
observations of activities of other law enforcement agencies)
All requests for out-of-state and overnight travel shall be submitted in advance on
the memorandum titled, “Request for Out of State and Overnight Travel”, and shall
include the following:
• Name of traveling employee
• Dates and number of days involved
• Purpose of travel
• Destination
• Mode of transportation to be used
• Authority financing the travel
• A statement of sufficient funds have been allocated for the travel
• A statement that the travel has been budgeted by the Department; or is being
financed by another agency
• If another agency is financing the trip, a statement that the trip is in the best
interest of the City
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
171 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: Requests for non-budgeted travel for business meetings and business
trips shall include a statement that the trip is of benefit to the City.
Procedure
• Obtain a written advance authorization from the Chief of Police or his designee
by completing the “Request for Out of State or Overnight Travel” memorandum
(PD form 2250.005)
• A request for travel other than investigate should be submitted 30 days prior to
departure
• Requests for travel on a District Attorney’s authorization for out-of-state
extradition or other requests for investigative travel should be submitted as
soon as possible, but must be authorized by the Chief of Police or his designee
prior to departure
6.4.13 TRAINING/TRAVEL REIMBURSEMENT
• City regulations require original receipts for reimbursement of all training/travel
expenses. All receipts shall be submitted taped on clean, white, 81/2” x 11”
paper. Receipts shall be in chronological date order with the meal, either
breakfast, lunch or dinner, clearly identified. Reimbursement requests shall be
submitted within 14 days of course completion. Budget staff reserves the right
to return to the employee sloppy or incomplete reimbursement packages.
• Rental vehicle shall be pre-authorized by your Bureau Chief in writing and
submitted with training requests
• At the close of the course, the “Evaluation of School/Seminar” form shall be
completed
• All forms, receipts and a copy of your training certificate from the course shall
be submitted to the Training Reimbursement Coordinator in the Budget Section
• Tip and alcohol expenses are not eligible for reimbursement
• Air Travel – Airline tickets shall be obtained through the Department’s Budget
Section, Training Reimbursement Coordinator. Employees shall not make their
own arrangements
• Allow 21-working days from submittal of reimbursement package to the Budget
Section for reimbursement check
Cancellation Policy
Cancellation of course attendance must be authorized in writing by a Bureau
Deputy Chief or Manager, and submitted to the Budget Section seven working
days prior to the course. If an employee cannot attend a course, every effort
should be made to send an alternate.
6.4.14 WATCH REPORT
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department RECORDS DIVISION
172 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Watch Report is a file consisting of memoranda of interest to all personnel or
multiple divisions, issued at the Division or higher level, containing information
relative to wanted persons, crime patterns, other incidents calling for police
attention, special notices, et cetera.
Items placed in the Watch Report file shall be typed on a long form memorandum
or covered by a long form memorandum addressed to the Watch Report and shall
be approved by the office or Division Commander of the Division from which they
originate. In the case of items that are of interest to the Department, but not
originated within a specific Division, it shall be the responsibility of the Watch
Commander to review and approve these items, by signature with photo number.
The Watch Report is a business document. Items that appear in the report should
be presented in a professional and business-like manner.
Notices of intent to employees such as retirement functions, funerals and notices
of employee organization functions should be limited to type of event, date, time,
location, and contact person.
The originator of all Watch Report items shall indicate in the body of the
memorandum how many days the item is to be read in the Patrol Watches.
All approved Watch Report items shall be routed via e-mail by the originator of the
report. The Records Division shall maintain a file of all Watch Reports items for
one year from the date of origin.
Each Department unit shall develop guidelines to ensure that all their personnel
receive Watch Report information in a timely manner.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
173 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5 JAIL OPERATIONS – BOOKING AND CUSTODY
Revised February 7, 2019
The Support Bureau will have audit responsibility.
6.5.1 BOOKING PROCEDURES
Revised February 7, 2019
Officers booking an inmate into the Long Beach Police Department Jail shall
complete the Arrest and Booking Information Form (PD 4102.013(A)). Officers
shall submit the Arrest and Booking Information Form prior to completing a
Probable Cause Declaration (ePCD). The Booking Sergeant will provide the
Booking Number required for the ePCD to be completed. The arresting officer is
responsible for ensuring that the inmate is booked for the correct charge level.
At no time is an inmate to be left alone by the arresting officer. The arresting officer
is responsible for the inmate until the inmate is released to the custody of Jail
Division personnel.
All inmates shall remain handcuffed while in Booking except during the routine
removal of property for booking purposes or when deemed medically necessary
by Jail Medical Staff.
Only employees assigned to Booking are allowed behind the Booking Desk, unless
authorized by the Booking Sergeant.
Arresting officers shall inform the Jail Nurse and Detention Officers of any pertinent
information regarding an inmate’s mental and physical status (e.g., if the inmate is
sick, has been injured in anyway, or is suicidal) as soon as possible.
6.5.1.1 BOOKING AREA AND TUNNEL SECURITY
Revised February 7, 2019
The Booking Desk and the access tunnel to the Booking Desk are secure areas.
The general public and the news media are prohibited from entering these areas
unless authorized by the Watch Commander or another member of the Command
Staff.
Command Officers who authorize entry into these restricted areas shall notify the
Watch Commander and the Booking Sergeant of the authorization and shall either
accompany or arrange for a member of the Department to escort the visitor. The
Department escort shall remain with the visitor while in the restricted area and until
the visit is terminated.
6.5.1.2 BOOKING ON WARRANTS
Revised February 7, 2019
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
174 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
When an inmate is arrested for an outstanding warrant, whether misdemeanor or
felony and the warrant is not an exact match to the inmate, the warrant must be
verified through the inmate’s fingerprints before the inmate is booked for the
charges.
The Booking Clerk will verify the warrant at the time of booking. If the warrant
cannot be verified by computer check, fingerprints are sent to the fingerprint
classifier for verification.
In the rare event that an inmate is sent to County Jail without having cleared
Livescan, the County will add charges as needed.
If an inmate is booked on an open charge, a warrant charge will not be added
unless the warrant is an exact match or is verified by fingerprints. Livescan does
not verify warrants that are already added to the booking sheet, therefore any
warrant that is not an exact match shall be verified first by fingerprints before being
added as a booking charge.
The Booking Sergeant is responsible for verifying any and all charges added to the
booking sheet.
6.5.1.3 HOLDING CELL USE
Revised February 7, 2019
The holding cell in booking is a temporary housing cell and shall be used only
during the initial booking process. Inmates may be placed in the holding cell at the
discretion and approval of the Booking Sergeant. This may occur if an inmate
displays any of the following behaviors:
1) Poses a threat to the safety and security of the facility;
2) Poses a threat of escape;
3) Presents a threat to themselves or others, including inmates threatening
suicide;
4) Assaults officers or others; or
5) Is uncooperative or disruptive during the booking process.
Officers utilizing the holding cell will adhere to the following procedures:
1) The Booking Sergeant must be notified when an inmate is placed in or
removed from the holding cell;
2) All lights must remain on while the holding cell is occupied;
3) Holding cell doors are to remain locked at all times;
- The key for the holding cell will be kept with the Booking Sergeant when
the cell is not in use;
4) All inmates placed in the holding cell shall be restrained at all times;
5) Male and female inmates should not be housed in the holding cell together;
6) Officers placing inmates into the holding cell must maintain constant visual
supervision over the inmate.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
175 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5.1.4 RESTRAINT CHAIR USE
Revised February 7, 2019
The restraint chair should be considered as an option only when an inmate meets
the following criteria:
1) Displays behavior resulting in the destruction of property; or
2) Reveals intent to cause physical harm to self or others.
The restraint chair can be used in conjunction with the placement of inmates in the
holding cell. Employees shall adhere to the Jail Standard Operating Procedure
Chapter 15 when using the restraint chair.
6.5.2 IMMIGRATION AND CUSTOMS ENFORCEMENT (ICE)
ADMINISTRATIVE WARRANTS
Revised November 14, 2019
The Support Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Review date November 14, 2019
6.5.2.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised November 14, 2019
ICE administrative warrants or detainers – ICE uses administrative warrants as
a request for local law enforcement agencies to detain an individual until ICE
responds and takes custody of the individual for the purposes of immigration
proceedings. ICE administrative warrants that are entered into the National Crime
Information Center (NCIC) database may appear when officers conduct a
want/warrant check of an individual.
6.5.2.2 ASSISTANCE WITH FEDERAL IMMIGRATION LAW
Revised November 14, 2019
Department personnel shall not detain an individual in response to a hold request
or administrative warrant issued by ICE. Upon receipt of an ICE hold request,
Department personnel shall provide the individual and his or her representative
with TRUTH Act Form #2 ICE Request indicating that LBPD does not intend to
comply with the hold request.
Department personnel shall not assist in the enforcement of federal immigration
law unless a valid exception exists as listed in LBPD Manual § 6.5.2.4
EXCEPTIONS.
The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) 287(g) program refers to an ICE
initiative which allows a state or local law enforcement entity to enter into a
partnership with ICE, under a joint Memorandum of Agreement (MOA), to receive
delegated authority for immigration enforcement within their jurisdictions. The
LBPD does not participate in the DHS 287(g) program.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
176 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Prior to responding to a specific request by ICE when they are conducting
immigration related enforcement for law enforcement support services, such as
traffic control or peacekeeping efforts during a federal operation, officers shall
receive approval from the Watch Commander. In the event of an immediate threat
to public safety, such approval is not required.
6.5.2.3 INQUIRIES INTO PLACE OF BIRTH, CITIZENSHIP OR
IMMIGRATION STATUS
Revised November 14, 2019
Department personnel shall not inquire into an individual’s place of birth,
citizenship, or immigration status unless the information is:
• Necessary for furthering a criminal investigation;
• Needed for processing an arrestee for a criminal offense or directly related to
any other law enforcement or employment purpose unrelated to immigration
enforcement;
• Required for providing services to victims of certain crimes (U-Visa) or victims
of human trafficking (T-Visa); or
• Authorized to be collected under federal, state, or local law or policy.
6.5.2.4 EXCEPTIONS
Revised November 14, 2019
An LBPD employee shall not assist in the enforcement of federal immigration law
except under one or more of the following circumstances:
1) Making inquiries into information that is required to certify an individual who
has been identified as a potential crime or trafficking victim for a T- or U-Visa
pursuant to 8 USC § 1101(a)(15)(T) or 1101(a)(15)(U), or to comply with 18
USC § 922(d)(5).
2) Required by state or federal law, or by a valid judicial warrant or subpoena.
3) Conducting enforcement or investigative duties associated with a joint law
enforcement task force, including sharing confidential information with other
law enforcement agencies for task force investigative purposes, provided that
such participation follows state law and:
a) The primary purpose of the joint task force is to enforce non-immigration
related criminal violations, and the LBPD duties are primarily related to
violation of state or federal law unrelated to immigration enforcement.
4) Investigating, enforcing, or detaining upon reasonable suspicion of, or
arresting for, a violation of unlawful re-entry of removed aliens whose removal
was subsequent to a conviction for an aggravated felony, per 8 USC §
1326(a) and 1326(b)(2).
5) Transfers to ICE.
a) Transfers are only permitted under the following circumstances:
i. When authorized by a signed judicial warrant or judicial probable
cause determination, or
ii. When the individual meets any one of the conditions set forth in
Government Code § 7282.5(a):
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
177 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Convicted at any time of a serious or violent felony (defined in
1192.7(c), or 667.5(c) of the California Penal Code).
2. Convicted at any time of a felony that is presently punishable
by imprisonment in state prison.
3. Convicted within the past 15 years of a felony listed in
Government Code § 7282.5(a)(3), or within the past 5 years
of a wobbler (a crime punishable as either a felony or a
misdemeanor) listed in Government Code § 7282.5(a)(3).
4. An individual that is currently on the California Sex and Arson
Registry.
5. An individual has been convicted of specified federal
aggravated felonies identified in 8 USC § 1101(a) (43) (A)-(P).
6. An individual identified by ICE as the subject of an outstanding
federal felony arrest warrant for any federal crime.
b) Upon receiving any detainer request from ICE, LBPD shall provide the
individual and his or her representative with TRUTH Act Form #2 ICE
Request, which shall specify whether LBPD intends to comply with the
request for transfer.
6) Responding to a request from federal immigration authorities for information
about an individual’s criminal history such as previous criminal arrests,
convictions, or similar criminal history information obtained through CLETS
only where permitted by State Law.
7) Providing information regarding a person’s release date or responding to
requests for notification by providing release dates or other information only
if:
a) One of the following applies:
i. The release date or other information is available to the public,
ii. Is in response to a notification request from immigration authorities
regarding persons meeting one or more of the criminal background
conditions specified under Government Code § 7282.5(a)-(b),
iii. When otherwise required by law, or
iv. In accordance with existing City regulations; and
b) LBPD complies with the California TRUTH Act as follows:
i. If LBPD receives an ICE notification request to provide release date
information, it must provide the individual and his or her
representative TRUTH Act Form #2 ICE Request, which shall
specify whether LBPD intends to comply with the request; and
ii. Where LBPD does provide ICE with notification that an individual
is being, or will be released on a certain date, it must also provide
the individual and his or her representative TRUTH Act Form #3
Notification of Release to ICE.
8) Providing personal information, as defined in Civil Code § 1798.3, about an
individual, provided that the information is available to the public.
9) Providing immigration authorities access to interview an individual in
Department custody once the LBPD has complied with the California TRUTH
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
178 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Act by providing the individual with TRUTH Act Form #1 Consent to Interview
with ICE.
6.5.2.5 NO CONFLICT – FEDERAL POLICY
Revised November 14, 2019
This policy does not prohibit or restrict any LBPD employee from sending,
receiving, requesting, maintaining, or exchanging information regarding citizenship
or immigration status of an individual to/from federal immigration authorities or any
other federal, state or local entity, in accordance with 8 USC §§ 1373 and 1644.
6.5.3 SEARCHING INMATES
Revised February 7, 2019
It shall be the responsibility of the arresting or transporting Officer to search their
inmate, remove all property, and make a complete inventory of the inmate’s
property (including bags, backpacks, and purses) on the Booking or Property form.
Arresting or transporting Officers shall also be responsible for bagging the inmate’s
property while at the Booking desk.
Such searches shall not include personal areas (such as an inmate’s underwear),
as those types of searches will be handled by Jail personnel if warranted.
Nothing in this section shall preclude an Officer from retrieving a weapon or
perceived weapon from an inmate’s personal area for purposes of officer safety.
Instances where an Officer cannot reasonably remove an inmate’s property shall
be communicated to Jail personnel, so the property can be removed during the
intake process.
6.5.3.1 PRISONER’S PROPERTY
Revised February 7, 2019
Officers will place prisoner’s property in the provided clear plastic bag and
complete the Property Inventory section on the Arrest and Booking Information
Form.
Prisoner’s property that does not fit into the plastic bag shall be inspected and
searched as appropriate, and if feasible placed into large, brown paper bags. The
bag(s) or property shall be placed into the appropriate bulk property location with
the appropriate property report filed. Entry to this effect shall be made on the Arrest
and Booking Information Form as well as on the bulk property log.
Inmates will not take any money to the jail floors. All money will be counted and
placed into a money envelope. Officers will legibly write their name, DID and the
inmate’s booking number on the money envelope. The envelope will be given to
the Booking Sergeant or placed in the money safe next to the Booking window.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
179 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Inmate’s shoelaces will be removed and placed into the plastic property bag. All
prescription and over-the-counter medication will be placed into the plastic bag.
Officers will not take inmate’s medication into the Jail.
Additional charges, which may result from evidence uncovered during the search,
shall be added to the Arrest and Booking Information Form.
6.5.3.2 RELIGIOUS HEAD COVERINGS
Revised February 7, 2019
If an inmate is wearing a religious head covering, all reasonable efforts shall be
made to allow this practice, except where safety and security concerns dictate
otherwise. During intake, or whenever the removal of an inmate’s religious head
covering is necessary, officers shall make every reasonable effort to abide by the
following procedures:
1) Utilize Jail personnel of the same gender as the inmate during removal;
2) Keep the inmate out of the view of others, including uninvolved staff;
3) Allow the inmate to remove the religious head covering; staff may pat down
the head covering prior to removal.
While in custody, approval of the wearing of religious head coverings will be at the
discretion of the Booking Sergeant. A religious head covering will be permitted
except where removal or confiscation is reasonably required due to security or
safety issues. If the retention of the religious head covering is approved, the article
shall be searched, in accordance with the procedures above, and returned to the
inmate. The inmate shall be allowed to reapply the head covering at the earliest
practicable opportunity and before leaving the private area.
All religious head coverings shall be searched and remain subject to search while
the inmate is in custody. Any item that may pose a threat to the safety or security
of the facility or that may potentially cause harm to the inmate or others shall not
be allowed.
In the event an item is not allowed, the reason will be explained to the inmate and
documented in the inmate’s booking record by the Booking Sergeant.
6.5.3.3 STRIP SEARCHES AND VISUAL BODY CAVITY SEARCHES
Revised February 7, 2019
All persons, except for physicians or licensed medical personnel, conducting or
otherwise present during a strip search, or a visual or physical body cavity search
shall be of the same sex as the person being searched.
Persons conducting a strip search, or a visual body cavity search shall not touch
the breasts, buttocks, or genitalia of the person being searched.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
180 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
In some instances, an arresting officer may request a strip search of an inmate
that does not fit the criteria per 4030(F) PC (i.e. misdemeanor or infraction arrest).
The following must exist to facilitate such a search:
1) There must be a reasonable and articulable suspicion that the inmate is
concealing contraband or a weapon;
2) Officers must complete the Authorization to Strip Search Form, which is
available from the Booking Sergeant.
3) Officers shall provide written justification on the form articulating the reason
for the request.
4) The Authorization to Strip Search Form must then be approved by the
Booking Sergeant.
Once the strip search has been completed, the Authorization to Strip Search Form
shall be attached to the inmate’s paperwork.
6.5.4 DETENTION OFFICERS - USE OF CHEMICAL AGENTS
Revised February 7, 2019
All Detention Officers, once trained and certified, are authorized to carry and use
chemical agents.
Chemical agents will only be used to control violent combative persons. It may be
used at an officer’s discretion where the safety of officers or inmates is an issue.
It is not the intention of this policy to limit the use of chemical agents only to inmates
who are outside of a cell or dayroom area. There are occasions where the use of
chemical agents through the bars is acceptable, such as, but not limited to a fight
between inmates where great bodily injury may occur.
The following procedures will be adhered to after chemical agents have been used:
1) Everyone exposed shall be treated by the on-duty Jail Nurse, or in the
absence of the nurse, transported to the contract hospital;
2) An incident report shall be filed in the automated reporting system with "Use
of Force" noted on the first line;
3) The involved employee shall notify their supervisor;
4) The supervisor shall notify the Booking Sergeant;
5) The Booking Sergeant shall notify the Patrol Watch Commander;
6) The Detention Supervisor shall enter the incident in the Jail Tiburon Daily Log;
7) All reports shall be forwarded to the Booking Sergeant for review;
8) Detention Officers should file supplemental reports to the original arrest report
with additional charges if necessary.
9) Any use of force resulting in additional charges filed on an inmate requires a
new DR to be filed by a Patrol Officer.
6.5.5 MEDICAL RECORD FOR IN-CUSTODY PERSONS
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
181 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
A “Medical Record for Persons In-Custody” form (PD Form 2100.56) will be
completed by arresting or transporting officers any time a person in-custody (or
person to be taken into custody) is examined or treated by a physician or hospital
outside of the Department Jail.
Procedure
All officers transporting a prisoner for examination by a physician, whether from jail
after booking or subsequent to arrest and prior to booking, shall adhere to the
following:
• Prepare a copy of the Long Beach Police Department “Medical Record for
Persons in Custody” form
A hospital employee shall complete the second portion of the report. The
information is self-explanatory and may be typed or printed on the form
• The third portion of the report is to be completed and signed by the physician
who actually examines the person in custody. The physician, prior to the
patient leaving the medical facility, must complete this part of the form. A copy
of the hospital emergency report of the in-custody person shall be requested
and submitted with all other related reports
• When booking the injured person, or transporting someone already booked
back from the hospital, the medical report shall be shown to the Booking
Supervisor. The supervisor shall review, initial and write his/her photo number
on the medical report if the booking is approved. The medical report shall be
taken, with the prisoner, to the Jail for review by the Jail Supervisor. If the Jail
Supervisor approves the booking, or readmitting of a person already booked,
he/she shall initial and write his/her photo number on the medical report for
injured persons
• The form should accompany the prisoner to the Long Beach Jail and remain
there to be completed by the jail physician. The Jail Division will forward the
form to the Information Management Division to be included in the prisoner’s
file
If the prisoner is not kept in LBPD custody, and instead is released to another
agency, this report should be included with reports, which are filed on the prisoner
and forwarded to Information Management. A copy of our form should be made
and left with the facility the prisoner is released to so the prisoner can receive
consistent continuing treatment.
6.5.5.1 RELEASE & SECURITY OF JAIL PRISONERS FOR EMERGENCY
MEDICAL TREATMENT
No prisoner shall be transported from the Jail for medical reasons without the
knowledge and consent of the watch commander. The watch commander shall be
responsible for providing security for paramedics transporting a prisoner and for
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
182 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
determining if the prisoner should be released on his/her own recognizance or
remain in custody with appropriate security measures in effect.
Procedure
When a prisoner is in need of immediate medical attention, any employee
observing such a condition shall immediately notify paramedics and a jail
supervisor. A prisoner shall be considered in need of immediate medical attention
when:
• An intoxicated prisoner does not react in a normal manner after two hours
• A prisoner is found unconscious
• A delay in medical treatment might result in further complications
When a jail supervisor becomes aware that a prisoner is in need of immediate
medical attention, the jail supervisor shall ensure that paramedics have been
called and shall immediately notify the watch commander.
The watch commander, upon notification, shall immediately assign an officer to
respond to the jail to provide security in the event the prisoner is transported from
jail, and to keep him/her apprised of the prisoner’s medical status.
In the event that the prisoner needs outside medical care, paramedics will
determine the means of transportation.
• If the prisoner is to be transported by paramedics, the officer shall provide
security by accompanying the prisoner to the paramedic van
• If paramedics determine they will not transport, the officer will transport the
prisoner to the hospital
The watch commander shall review the condition of the prisoner and consider
releasing the prisoner from custody on his/her own recognizance. The watch
commander at his/her discretion may elect not to release the prisoner, in which
case an officer must be assigned to guard the prisoner at the hospital until such
time as the prisoner can be transported to a security medical facility.
It is the watch commander’s responsibility to follow-up and ensure the release of
a prisoner in need of medical treatment, prior to leaving at the end of the shift.
Delegation of this task does not relieve the watch commander of this responsibility.
Aspects to be considered relative to an OR or 849(B) (2) release include, but are
not limited to, the following:
• Does the prisoner require extended medical examination or care?
• The nature of the charges; i.e., misdemeanor, felony, or warrant
• Was the prisoner able to provide satisfactory identification?
• Is there a reasonable likelihood that the offense would continue?
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
183 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Would the safety of persons or property be imminently endangered if the
prisoner were released?
• Is there reason to believe that the prisoner would not appear for Court at the
time and place specified, if released on his/her own recognizance?
The watch commander shall make every effort to make a decision as to whether
or not to release the prisoner, prior to the prisoner being transported from jail.
6.5.5.2 MEDICAL TREATMENT – ADULT ARRESTEES
Revised September 11, 2008
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
Jail Division Responsibilities
The Jail nurse shall medically screen all incoming prisoners prior to the completion
of processing. The actual acceptance or rejection of a prisoner is delegated to the
Jail Supervisor or on-duty nurse. (See Jail Division Policy 8.100, Section 1 –
Medical Responsibility). The Jail supervisor shall record all significant medical
problems in the Jail Division logbook to apprise other personnel in the Division of
immediate of potential problems. Required Jail inspections will be completed to
provide adequate monitoring of each inmate.
Transportation to Medical Facilities
Injured prisoners, mentally unstable individuals (5150 WIC), and violent PCP
prisoners, et cetera, may require transportation to County medical facilities outside
the City. These individuals shall be transported to medical facilities in police
vehicles when feasible. If these individuals require ambulance transport, police
officers shall follow the procedures as outlined below.
• Paramedics shall be called to evaluate and transport from the scene or Jail to
a local hospital if necessary, it will be the option of the paramedics to request
a private ambulance be called for transportation
• If the patient is medically stable for transfer, and is charged with an offense that
precludes an RNB (i.e. 187, 261, etc.) the referring hospital shall place the call
to MEDICAL ALERT CENTER (MAC), telephone (213) 226-6697, advising
them of the name of the patient in custody and requesting transfer. The hospital
shall also provide MAC with the arresting officer’s name, badge number and
jurisdiction. After MAC accepts the transfer, they will dispatch a private
ambulance under contract with the County. A police officer must accompany
the prisoner in the ambulance. The officer must arrange for their return
transportation
• Police, paramedics or an ambulance must transport adults who are under the
influence of PCP and exhibit violent behavior to a local hospital. A continuation
of unruly and violent behavior at the hospital shall require transport to the LASD
Main Central Jail by LBPD personnel
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
184 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5.6 HANDLING OF VIOLENT, ON PHENCYCLIDINE (PCP)
PRISONERS
The majority of persons arrested for being under the influence of PCP are
controllable. The violent offender, however, presents a danger to himself/herself
as well as those he/she may come in contact with.
All adults under the influence of PCP who are acting in an unruly and violent
manner shall be medically treated at a local hospital and once cleared, shall be
booked directly into either the Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department (LASD) Main
Central Jail, or Sybil Brand Institute for Women. Juveniles shall be taken to Unit 3
at USC Medical Center. All prisoners taken to these facilities must meet the unruly
and violent criteria. If the prisoner does not appear to have all the classic
symptoms of PCP ingestion as described in Training Bulletin #89, he/she shall
have a medical examination from the nearest medical facility prior to
transportation. Arresting officers must have the approval of a field supervisor prior
to transporting a prisoner to any of these facilities.
Notification
In the case of an adult, the field supervisor will notify the Communications Center
and the Communications Supervisor will notify the appropriate jail with an
estimated time of arrival. The LASD Main jail telephone number is (213) 974-4921;
the Sybil Brand telephone number is (213) 267 2611.
When the arrested party is a juvenile, the field supervisor will notify a Youth
Services Supervisor who will notify the Probation Intercept Officer on-duty and Unit
3 at USC Medical Center, telephone number (213) 226-5584.
Transportation
Arresting officers shall transport the violent PCP prisoner to the appropriate facility
when possible. Paramedics shall transport only in those instances when it is
mandatory that the prisoner be completely immobilized by strapping the prisoner
to a cot or similar device. Approval for such transportation must be obtained
through the Fire Deputy Chief on-call.
6.5.6.1 INJURED PRISONERS UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF PCP
Any violent, injured adult prisoner under the influence of PCP shall be taken to the
USC Medical Center Jail Ward and shall not be taken directly to the County Jail.
An injured juvenile, 16 years of age or older, shall be taken to the USC Medical
Center Jail Ward. The Communications Supervisor will notify USC Medical Center
Jail Ward when an adult is involved. When a juvenile is involved, the Youth
Services Section will make the notification.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
185 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
When the juvenile is 15 years of age or younger, Youth Services will notify the
Probation Intercept Officer who will assist in obtaining a court order that will permit
the juvenile to be booked at USC Medical Center Jail Ward. If an Intercept Officer
is not on-duty, Youth Services will call the Central Juvenile Hall Intercept Officer at
telephone number (213) 226-8506 for assistance. The arresting officers and the
field supervisor should give every consideration to releasing the juvenile to his/her
parents when this is an appropriate disposition. A “Released Not Booked” (RNB)
arrest report must be filed if the Juvenile is released to his/her parents.
Location of Facilities & Responsibilities
• Twin Towers – 450 Bauchet Street, Los Angeles
o North on the Long Beach Freeway to Santa Ana Freeway; North on
Vignes Street (Downtown Los Angeles); North to Bauchet Street
• Officers shall drive to the ambulance entrance on the north side of the complex
and park as near to the door as possible. They shall enter the premises through
the ambulance entrance with the prisoner. Jail personnel shall assume charge
of the prisoner at that time. Officers shall stay in the sally port until Jail
personnel return their handcuffs or restraints to them. Transporting officers
shall complete the required forms prior to returning to Long Beach
• USC Medical Center – 1200 North State Street, Los Angeles, Jail Ward, phone
#213 226-4563
o North on Long Beach Freeway to San Bernardino Freeway; westbound
in second lane from right; exit State Street northbound into hospital
complex, right turn on Zonal Avenue to Guard house
Officers shall place their handguns inside the gatehouse at the entry gate. Their
shotgun shall be firmly locked in its rack within the vehicle. When the gate opens,
the officers shall drive to the "Reception" entrance and park as near to the door as
possible. Jail Deputies will come to the vehicle and remove the subject. Officers
shall accompany the Jail Deputies to the third floor of the facility. The booking
information will be completed by the officers in the "Reception" area prior to their
return to Long Beach. When the prisoner is a juvenile, the arresting officers must
then leave the hospital complex and drive to Central Juvenile Hall at 1605 East
Lake Avenue, which is located behind the hospital complex. At Central Juvenile
Hall, the officers must complete entrance papers before returning to Long Beach.
6.5.7 RE-ARRESTING OF IN-CUSTODY PRISONERS
POLICY
Any prisoner who is charged with committing an offense while in-custody shall be
rebooked under a new booking number. The prisoner will be charged with the
offense committed while in-custody and the additional charge of 653.75 C.P.C.
shall be added to indicate an in-custody arrest. In addition, all warrant and non-
warrant charges will be transferred to the new booking number as added charges.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
186 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Booking Employee Responsibility
The new booking form set shall be stamped “Re-Booking” with the original booking
number and arrest package number cross-referenced on each page of the booking
form set.
Any warrant abstract added to the new booking form set will have the original
booking number lined out with a single line and the new booking number written in
above it. Copies of these changes will be forwarded to the Warrant Detail.
Filing Officer Responsibilities
• File a supplemental report to the original arrest package cross-referencing all
booking numbers and arrest package numbers.
• Ensure the Investigator’s blue copy of the booking form set is immediately
placed in the in-box of the Detail handling the original booking, located in the
Information Management Division.
Senior Records Clerk Responsibility
• Ensure rebooking entries are entered into RMS and all cross-references are
made between the original and new arrest package numbers and booking
numbers.
• Ensure fingerprint cards are sent to the Department of Justice (D.O.J.), if
necessary.
Bailiff Responsibility
Bailiff personnel will ensure only the new booking number appears on all remands,
release papers, and commitments.
Investigating Detail Responsibility
Two copies of the new booking sheet will be provided to the Detective Bureau: one
copy to the Detail handling the original case and one copy to the Detail handling
the new case. It will be the responsibility of the Detail Sergeants to determine
which Detail will handle and file both cases.
6.5.8 BAIL DEVIATION
If a determination has been made to increase, decrease, or eliminate the need for
the posting of bail, the Los Angeles Superior Court, Pre-trail Services Unit, has
recommended the following procedures.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
187 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• To initiate a bail deviation, complete a “Request for Bail Deviation From Felony
Bail Schedule”, PD Form 4102.010 (8/79)
• Telephone Pre-trial Services Unit, at (213) 974-5821, or the District Attorney’s
Command Post (24-hours), at (213) 974-3607
• Inform the representative of your requirement, bail increase, bail decrease, or
the need to eliminate bail. Be prepared to provide the following information:
− Name of suspect
− Booking number
− Charges
− Specific reasons for the Request of Bail Deviation
After Pretrial Service has received authorization from the Commissioner for a bail
deviation, they will generate a Notice of Bail Deviation by Teletype to the
Department. This is the officer’s authorization from the Judge/Commissioner that
the request is granted and will record the name of the Judge/Commissioner
granting the request on the Request for Bail Deviation from Felony Bail Schedule.
Procedure
Felony & Misdemeanor Suspect
The original Teletype authorizing bail deviation and the original Bail Deviation form
will remain with the Booking Supervisor.
A copy of the Teletype authorizing bail deviation and a copy of the Bail Deviation
form will be included with the arrest report.
A copy of the Teletype authorizing bail deviation and the Bail Deviation form will
be placed in the suspect’s property.
Booking Supervisor
Upon receipt of the Teletype authorizing bail deviation, notification shall be given
to personnel assigned at the Information Desk and Jail Division.
The Teletype authorizing bail deviation and the Bail Deviation form will be routed
in the same manner as a bail bond.
Detectives
Upon receiving a case package, including the Notice of Bail Deviation, be sure that
each package of report copies includes a copy of the record of bail deviation. The
record of bail deviation includes a copy of PD Form 4102.010 (8/79) and a copy of
the related Teletype.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
188 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
It is important that all report packages delivered to the District Attorney or the City
Prosecutor include a complete record of bail deviation.
Watch Commander
As provided in Section 810 PC, an incarcerated person has the right to request
bail deviation.
Upon receipt of a request for bail deviation made through the court system, a court
appointed Bail Deviation Officer would contact the watch commander.
6.5.9 CERTIFICATE OF RELEASE
TO comply with the requirements of California Penal Code Section 851.6 entitled,
“RELEASED AFTER ARREST WITHOUT A WARRANT CERTIFICATE AS
DETENTION WHEN NO FORMAL CHARGE IS MADE,” the following procedures
shall be followed:
• When an individual is ARRESTED and BOOKED by a member of this
Department, and is later released with no criminal charges filed, in compliance
with 849(b)(1) or 849(b)(3) of the California Penal Code, he/she SHALL be
issued a “Certificate of Release Form: (PD Form 3000.006)
• The detective assigned to the case shall complete the Certificate of Release
Form, sign the form, and personally deliver it to Booking Desk personnel. The
detective will then complete the Booking Desk procedure authorizing the
individual’s release
• Booking Desk personnel shall place the Certificate of Release Form in the
prisoner’s property envelope and deliver the form to the subject along with
his/her property
• The detective’s follow-up report shall contain the following statement in the
narrative: “Certificate of Release issued”
• When an individual is ARRESTED and is RELEASED, NOT BOOKED, and
demands a Certificate of Release Form (PD Form 300.06), the form shall be
issued by the Arresting Officer
• The Arresting Officer shall complete the Certificate of Release Form, sign it and
give it to the subject
• The Arrest and RNB Information Form shall include the following statement in
the narrative: “Certificate of Release issued”
6.5.10 IN-CUSTODY RELEASE/WRITTEN PROMISE TO APPEAR
CITATIONS/OWN RECOGNIZANCE (OR) RELEASE
Arresting officer will check the applicable space on the 853.6 PC compliance
section of the “Arrest/RNB Information Form” (PD Form 4102.013).
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
189 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The booking sergeant will assure the appropriate space is checked on the 853.6
PC compliance section of the Arrest/RNB Information Form.
Jail personnel will advise the prisoner of the possibility of a citation release. If
qualified, the prisoner will sign a written promise to appear prior to being released.
The jailer will assist the arrestee in the completion of the citation release
information on the Bailiff/Detail copy. The prisoner will be fingerprinted and
photographed consistent with other prisoners. Upon completion, the information
will be sent to the Records Division with the completed Records Division copy and
the fingerprint cards.
Records Division Responsibilities
Records Division personnel responsible for making the identification will forward
the Citation Release form to the jail supervisor with the following: a copy of the
arrestee’s blue arrest face sheet, a list of any prior arrests, and the release card.
If the arrestee has no local record, a notation will be made on the Citation Release
Information form.
Jail Supervisor Responsibilities
The jail supervisor SHALL review the Citation Release form, arrest information
and the arrestee’s prior arrest record. If the individual is eligible, considering
criteria, and receives five points from the point system scale sheet, the jail
supervisor shall authorize the Citation Release. The authorized release card will
be forwarded to the Booking Desk for routine release processing, with an approval
noted on the Bailiff/Detail copy. It should be noted that when housing space in the
jail becomes critical, certain criteria may be waived and the release policy
liberalized with the approval of the jail supervisor. Reasonable effort should be
made to validate any citation release information furnished by the arrestee.
Citation Release Criteria: Release will not be executed if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
• The safety of the arrestee or others may be jeopardized by the release, where
the arrestee may return, or there is reasonable likelihood that the cause of the
arrest or offense will continue or resume. This includes offenses such as
11550(a)&(b) H&S, Under the influence of an Opiate or PCP; 647(B) PC,
soliciting for prostitution: and 647 (A) PC, Lewd Acts; 273.6 Domestic Violence;
violation of orders, and any Domestic Violence case where the victim is injured
• If evidence indicates that the arrestee, if released, will commit any offense
causing injury to persons or damage to property
• If the arrestee fails to properly identify himself/herself
• If the arrestee refuses to sign the Promise to Appear
• If the arrestee is unable to care for his/her safety or the safety of others by
virtue of intoxication or other conditions (release as soon as conditions permit)
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
190 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• If the arrestee demands to be immediately taken before a magistrate
• If a reasonable likelihood exists that the arrestee will fail to appear in court as
promised
• When the arrestee is charged with a violation of Section 23152 (Driving Under
the Influence of Alcohol) or 23153 (Combination of Alcohol and Drugs) of the
California Vehicle Code. The arrestee may be released when he/she has
regained sobriety
• When the arrest is for a warrant
• When the arrestee does not attain a minimum point score of five from the point
system scale sheet
• When the prosecution of the offense or offenses for which the person was
arrested, or the prosecution of any other offenses would be jeopardized by
immediate release of the person
Disqualified Applicants
In the event that the arrestee does not qualify for release, the watch commander
will note the denial on the Release Card and forward it to the Booking Desk through
normal channels. The watch commander will also note the denial, and a brief
statement as to the reason, on the Bailiff/Detail copy, which will be forwarded to
the Records Division where it will be filed in the arrestee’s Departmental Record
folder.
Jail Personnel Citation Duties
• When the Citation Release card arrives in jail, the jail officer will advise the
arrestee that they have been approved for a Citation Release and that they are
to sign a “Citation Release and Promise to Appear in Court”, PD form 2310.007
• If the arrestee desires to be released on a Citation Release, the jail officer will
complete the form according to the current Bail/Appearance schedule. The jail
officer will complete the form according to the current Bail/Appearance
schedule. The jail officer will then witness the arrestee’s signature as a promise
to appear
• The jail officer will give the arrestee a copy and forward the Record’s copy and
court copy to the Records Division
• The arrestee will be released following routine release procedures
• Military arrestees are eligible to the military authorities upon release
6.5.10.1 CITATION RELEASE GRADING SHEET
Length of time resided at present address:
• Over one year 3 points
• Over six months 2 points
• Four to six months 1 points
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
191 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Length of time resided in the State (Award only of no point given for established
residence)
• Over one year 1 point
Length of time employed by present employer
• Current job over one year 3 points
• Current job over six months 2 points
• Current job three to six months or supported by family 1 point
Marital Status
• Married 2 points
• Divorced or single 1 point
• Separated 0 points
Dependents
• Two or more children under 18 years 2 points
• One child under 18 years 1 point
Prior arrests
• No previous arrest 2 points
• One misdemeanor arrest 0 points
• Two misdemeanor or one felony -1 point
• Three misdemeanor or 2 felony -2 points
• Four misdemeanor or 3 felony - -3 points
A total of five points are required for release.
6.5.11 PRISONER COST RECOVERY PROGRAM
Implementation of the Prisoner Cost Recovery Program will allow the Department
to assess a fee to individuals participating in the Court Commitment – Community
Service Program. Under the program, individuals sentenced by the Long Beach
Municipal Court for driving under the influence and public intoxication, will provide
custodial and maintenance functions for the Department including Civic Center
grounds maintenance and detailing of police vehicles. Females assigned to this
program will be confined to the Women’s Jail and will perform maintenance and
domestic assignments. Individuals who cannot perform manual labor will not be
accepted into the program. Security Officers assigned to the Fleet Services
function will supervise participants.
General Policy
The Administration Bureau of the Department shall be responsible for
administering the Prisoner Cost Recovery Program as specified herein.
Program Guidelines
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
192 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Weekenders will initially report to the lobby business desk and pay the appropriate
assessment fee by cash or money order. The fee to cover the commitment will be
paid in advance of each weekend or day to be served. The individual will be given
two copies of his/her receipt. The individual is then authorized to proceed to the
basement booking desk for processing and fingerprinting of all
Weekender/Community Service participants. Processing into the weekender
program will not begin until after the number of days to be served is confirmed with
the number of days paid.
One receipt will be given to and maintained by Jail/Booking and the sentenced
individual will retain the second receipt.
Weekenders will report for work at the booking desk at 0500 hours each morning
and will be checked out at 1700 hours.
The parking lot Security Officer will supervise the work detail of all male
weekenders.
Female weekenders will work on the 4th floor under the direct supervision of the
female Security Officer in-duty in the Women’s Jail.
New weekenders will be booked into the computer system on their initial weekend.
On that weekend, the Records Division will provide a photograph of the weekender
to be attached to the attendance sheet. The weekender’s name, booking number,
payment receipt, beginning and ending dates of commitment and case number will
be written on the attendance sheet. Booking desk personnel will complete this.
The weekender will sign his/her name on the first line of the attendance roster and
will place a right thumbprint to the right of their name. The Booking Desk Security
Officer will sign under the weekender’s signature and time stamp the roster to the
right of the thumbprint. This roster will be maintained at the booking desk.
At the close of each day, the parking lot Security Officer will return the weekender
to the booking desk to be released. The weekender will again sign after “out”, affix
his/her right thumbprint and the Booking Desk Security Officer will sign below. The
roster is time-stamped by the Booking Desk Security Officer who will maintain the
roster in a file. This file will be kept at the Booking Supervisor’s desk.
The commitment from the court and the original booking slip will be maintained
with the weekender attendance roster at the booking desk.
At the completion of the sentence, the computer will be updated and all rosters will
be given to the Records Division for filing.
Jail Watch I Supervisor will be responsible for the following:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
193 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Booking clerks will book into the computer system every new weekender and
fill out the weekender attendance roster. Complete the handwritten log of the
weekend commitment (name, booking number, Departmental Record (DR)
number, starting date, ending date, receipt and amount paid)
• A Booking Desk Security Officer will fingerprint all weekenders as follows:
• Flats (flat hand and fingerprints) on the back of the blue printout sheet (first day
only)
• Print and time stamp the weekender attendance roster (daily)
• Processed male weekenders shall line up in the booking tunnel along the south
wall; Female weekenders go directly to the 4th floor
• Notify parking lot Security Officer when weekenders have been processed and
are ready for work. The parking lot Security Officer will assume control of male
weekenders. If needed, the parking lot Security Officer will supervise the lineup
of male weekenders in the booking tunnel
• If a weekender fails to appear for a weekend, it will be the responsibility of the
watch I Booking Desk Supervisor to prepare a “No-Show Weekender Form”
and notify the Court via the Court Affairs Office. The attendance roster will be
delivered to the Records Division for filing
Watch II Jail Supervisor will be responsible for the following:
• Attaining additional fingerprints or photographs of the weekender, if requested.
Fingerprints and photographs will be prepared by 4th or 6th floor personnel
• If the attendance roster does not have a photograph of the weekender, one
shall be secured from the Records Division and attached to the roster
Watch III Supervisor will be responsible for the following:
• Booking Desk Security Officer will checkout all weekenders
• Print and time stamp the weekender attendance roster
• Place the attendance roster into the weekender file to be kept at the Booking
Supervisor’s desk until completion of the sentence or failure to serve the
commitment
• At the completion of the sentence, the computer will be updated by Watch III
Booking Clerks and all weekender paperwork will be forwarded to the Records
Division for filing
Records Division Procedures
Booking personnel will be responsible for ensuring that Records Division receives
the paperwork (blue booking sheet, attendance sheet and Court commitment) on
all first day weekenders.
The Records Division supervisor will assign a clerk to run each subject on the
PSIS, PHI computers and 3x5 card index file to obtain a Department Record (DR)
number and/or Main number.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
194 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
If the weekender has a Department Record Number:
• Pull DR and insert a red “out” card with a 3x5 card stating “weekender” and
date
• Records Division Supervisor or Fingerprint Classifier will verify fingerprints
• Records Division personnel will run a warrant check on all AKA’s typed on the
front of the DR jacket. If warrants are found, the Booking Sergeant will be
notified. If warrants are not found, indicate on the front of the blue sheet “No
Wants/Warrants, date and last name of the employee who ran warrant check.
If warrants are found, indicate on the front of the blue sheet, Booking Sergeant
notified, date and last name of employee
• Photograph mug will be stapled to the attendance roster
• Write the DR # on the attendance roster
• If subject does not have a Main number, request one local fingerprint card.
Fingerprint classifiers will issue a main number. Then file in the “weekender”
box
• If subject has a DR# and a Main #, file in “weekender” box in DR# order
• A copy of the blue face sheet stating how many weekends to be served will be
placed in the DR and original paperwork will be returned to Booking
• Do not type on Booking Control Log unless Main # is issued
• A conversion sheet will be forwarded to Police Systems. Highlight LBWE in the
jail location box and paperclip all conversion together with a note “weekenders”
If a weekender requires a full fingerprint work up:
• Booking will be notified that subject requires a full fingerprint work-up and what
fingerprint cards are necessary
• Copy both sides of the blue booking sheet and attach to the fingerprint cards
when received. A second copy of the blue booking sheet will be made for
conversion
• Original paperwork will be returned to Booking
• The fingerprint classifier will class and search the prints and, if necessary, issue
a new DR# and/or Main number
• A conversion sheet will be turned into Police Systems by the fingerprint
classifier. Highlight “LBWE” in the jail location box and paperclip all
conversions together with a note "weekenders”
• Department Records for workers will go to the DR desk for processing and then
are filed in the “weekender” box
• Put on Booking Control Log if new DR# and/or Main number
• Release cards are not required on any weekender.
• NO show up is required on weekenders.
• “Time Served” paperwork:
• Paperwork is brought to the Records Division by booking desk personnel and
put in “weekender” box to be processed
• Fingerprint classifier pulls Department Record from “weekender” box, identifies
prints and turns a conversion into the Police Systems Section. The conversion
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
195 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
will indicate number of weekends to be served, time served and date of entry
by the Police Systems Section in free field
• Example: Sent 2 WE/Time Served 8-23-87
• “No Show” paperwork:
• When “No show” paper work is brought to the Records Division, it will be
verified to confirm the Court commitment is not the original, but a legible copy.
The original commitment should be forwarded to Booking for them to return to
Court
Police Systems will convert the booking numbers with fingerprints and enter note
in free field.
Example: Sent 4 WE/No Show – date
Records Division will not keep “No show” paperwork on subjects unless there are
fingerprints and a blue sheet with booking number.
If the DR has not be converted, it will be forwarded to Police Systems for
conversion.
If the DR has been converted, it will be put in “Ready to File” cart by the DR desk.
Fee Deposit
The Budget Section will collect the weekender fees each Monday morning or the
next available business day. The fees collected will be reconciled with the other
cash deposit transactions made at the Business Desk and deposited with the City
Treasurer.
6.5.12 SUPERVISION OF INMATE WORKERS
POLICY
Sentenced inmate workers participate in the “trusty” program, which is considered
an alternative sentencing option for the Long Beach Court. It is a minimum
security-type operation and considered a privilege to serve “city time”. In this
program, sentenced inmate workers assist with jail operations by performing
janitorial, food preparation duties, and other tasks throughout the Department such
as painting, light maintenance, and moving furniture. Sentenced inmate workers
are sometimes referred to as “trusties”, but should be regarded as prisoners who
need direct supervision.
PROCEDURE
Department employees shall adhere to the following guidelines when utilizing
sentenced inmate worker services:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
196 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• For inmate availability, call the Jail Supervisor at extension 87267.
• Report to the Jail to pick up an inmate. The inmate must be signed for, noting
the location and work the inmate will be performing and wear an orange vest
as identification.
• The inmate shall be under the direct supervision of an employee at all times
while performing the designated task.
• When the task is completed, an employee shall escort the inmate worker back
to the Jail. The inmate must be signed-in upon return.
Employees should treat sentenced inmate workers with the appropriate courtesy
and respect. However, since inmate workers have access throughout the building,
this creates several security concerns. When a problem or situation exists, an
employee should question the inmate worker. If there are any doubts about a
situation, report the problem to the Jail Supervisor at extension 87267. A Jail
Supervisor is on-duty at all times and will help with any problems.
Community Service Workers/Weekenders
The Department also utilizes community service workers and weekenders to
perform work. Community service workers and weekenders are supervised by gas
pump Security Officers, not the Jail Division. If a problem occurs with these
workers, contact Fleet Operations at extension 87448, or during the weekend
contact the gas pump at extension 87433.
6.5.13 BAIL FUGITIVE RECOVERY AGENTS
Revised April 14, 2015
The Support Bureau will have audit responsibility
A bail fugitive recovery agent is a person who is provided written authorization
pursuant to California Penal Code Sections 1300 and 1301 by the bail or depositor
of bail, and is contracted to investigate, surveil, locate, and arrest a bail fugitive for
surrender to the appropriate court, jail, or police department, and any person who
is employed to assist a bail or depositor of bail to investigate, surveil, locate, and
arrest a bail fugitive for surrender to the appropriate court, jail, or police department
(California Penal Code Section 1299.01(d)).
Bail fugitive recovery agents may attempt to book a fugitive at the Long Beach
Police Department. They often wear uniforms similar to police officers with vests,
and badges, and appear to be official government law enforcement officers.
Bail fugitive recovery agents are private citizens and should not be allowed into the
booking tunnel (6.5.2 BOOKING AREA & TUNNEL SECURITY), or the Public
Safety Building (PSB), beyond the business desk. If the agent has business in the
PSB, they must be escorted into and out of the building.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
197 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5.13.1 COMMUNICATIONS SECTION RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised April 14, 2015
Bail fugitive recovery agents may call the Communications Center identifying
themselves as an “agent” with an in-custody warrant suspect, and inquire where
to take their prisoner. The Communications Center employee taking the call should
ask the caller their agency affiliation. Agents from an official government law
enforcement agency i.e. Parole, ATF, etc., should be directed to the booking
tunnel. Bail fugitive recovery agents, however, shall be directed to the PSB
business desk.
6.5.13.2 BUSINESS DESK RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised April 14, 2015
When a bail fugitive recovery agent brings in a prisoner to the PSB business desk,
business desk employees must verify that the warrant is a Long Beach Police
Department warrant. Not all warrants issued in the Long Beach Court are from the
Long Beach Police Department, there are many agencies that file criminal cases
in the Long Beach Court. If the warrant is not a Long Beach Police Department
warrant, but a warrant issued in Los Angeles County direct the bail fugitive
recovery agent to the Los Angeles County Men’s Central Jail or the Women’s
CRDF facility. For a warrant issued in another county, refer them to the originating
agency.
If the warrant is a Long Beach Police Department warrant, call for a patrol officer
to respond to the business desk to take custody of the prisoner. Do not allow the
bail fugitive recovery agent to bring their prisoner to booking or to enter the PSB
beyond the secure area of the business desk.
6.5.13.3 PATROL OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised April 14, 2015
When requested to respond to the business desk for a warrant arrest prisoner,
ensure the warrant is a Long Beach Police Department warrant before taking
custody of the prisoner. If the warrant is not an LBPD warrant, refer the bail fugitive
recovery agent to the proper agency or the Sheriff’s Department.
If the prisoner has a Long Beach Police Department warrant, take custody of the
prisoner and complete the booking process. Do not allow the bail fugitive recovery
agent to accompany you into the PSB or booking area. If the agent wants a copy
of the booking paperwork for proof of arrest, have them provide their contact
information and the booking clerk will provide them with a copy of the booking form
after completing the booking process.
6.5.13.4 BOOKING SECTION RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised April 14, 2015
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
198 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Under no circumstances will bail fugitive recovery agents be allowed to drive into
the booking tunnel or bring their prisoner into the tunnel or booking area. They
shall be directed to the business desk.
The booking clerk will examine the warrant to determine if it is valid and in the
warrant system. If not, the prisoner will be released, and not booked. If the warrant
is valid, the booking sergeant will determine if our Department will accept the
prisoner for booking or issue a citation.
6.5.14 HOSPITALIZATION OF INMATES
Revised October 20, 2015
The Investigations Bureau will have review responsibility.
Last reviewed June 18, 2019
Medical issues may cause an inmate to have an extended stay at a hospital,
requiring a police officer or armed security services officer (SSO) to guard the
individual.
When an inmate is transported to a local hospital for treatment, or a person is
arrested and taken directly to a hospital for treatment, an officer will remain with
the inmate until they are transported to the station and released to the custody of
the Jail Division.
Any arrestee who is transported to a local hospital, falls under the same guidelines
as if they were in custody within the Jail Division. The hospital room where the
arrestee is housed, is an extension of the jail and should be considered a jail cell.
The arrestee shall remain handcuffed and/or in leg restraints to ensure he or she
does not escape. Restraints should only be removed if deemed medically
necessary and should be re-applied as soon as medically allowed. Handcuffs and
leg restraints can be obtained from the Jail Division for long term hospitalizations.
For security reasons, arrestees and inmates are logged into the hospital records
under an assumed name. The room number and the fact the subject is in the
hospital are not public records. Officers guarding an inmate shall not disclose the
location of the inmate to anyone other than department employees, nor should
they broadcast it over the radio.
6.5.14.1 PHONE CALLS & VIDEO CONFERENCING
Revised October 20, 2015
Last Reviewed June 18, 2019
The phone within the hospital room should be unplugged at all times or kept out of
reach of the inmate to ensure he or she is not receiving or making calls.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
199 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Inmates at a hospital, once they are medically able, will be allowed to make three
local outgoing telephone or video calls daily, not to exceed five minutes each per
CPC § 851.5. Incoming calls are not allowed.
An officer guarding an inmate shall dial the telephone number or place the video
call for the inmate. The officer shall record the number or internet contact
information and file a follow-up report documenting this information. In all cases,
every attempt should be made to record the telephone or video call, unless the
inmate is speaking to his or her attorney, clergy, or a doctor, which are all privileged
communications. If the call is going to be recorded, the arrestee and person called
shall be notified that the call is being recorded.
Prior to a phone or video call, notify the arrestee that he or she is not allowed to
provide information relative to their hospital room number or which floor they are
housed within the hospital.
Video conferencing may be allowed if the following criteria are met:
1) The hospital provides authorization to ensure the computer equipment will
not interfere with any medical equipment;
2) The requesting party can provide the necessary computer equipment;
3) The requesting party can provide internet access.
6.5.14.2 ATTORNEY VISIT REQUESTS
Revised October 20, 2015
Last Reviewed June 18, 2019
California Penal Code § 825(b) states that after an arrest, an attorney may, at the
request of the prisoner, or any relative of the prisoner, visit the prisoner. Any
person who refuses or neglects to allow the visit is guilty of a misdemeanor.
Attorney visitation is for licensed attorneys only, not representatives, investigators,
experts, or family members. No one other than the attorney will be allowed to visit
unless authorized by the Investigations Bureau. If attorney visitation is to occur,
refer to, and follow, section 6.5.14.3 AUTHORIZED VISITS.
Prior to authorizing a visit, the handling detective will ensure a representation letter
has been received from the attorney showing they represent the arrestee.
An attorney who asks to visit their client shall not automatically be given such
approval for a visit. Officers who are contacted by an inmate’s attorney will do the
following prior to allowing a visit:
1) Contact the handling detective(s) to determine if they are involved in any
investigative procedures with the inmate. If the handling detective is
unavailable, check with his or her chain of command. If investigative
procedures are underway, such as an interview, notify the attorney of the
delay. Investigative procedures may not unduly delay the attorney’s visit,
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
200 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
however, detectives are not required to stop an interview to allow the visit to
commence.
2) Ensure there are no medical procedures being conducted or scheduled
during the time the attorney wants to visit so as not to interfere with medical
care.
3) Visits should occur during hospital visiting hours. If outside of visiting hours,
the attorney must obtain approval from the hospital in addition to obtaining
approval from the handling detective. Once initial approval is given, the
attorney may visit again without detective approval unless otherwise
specified.
6.5.14.3 AUTHORIZED VISITS
Revised October 20, 2015
Last Reviewed June 18, 2019
If a visit is authorized for a family member, attorney, or clergy the rules listed below
shall be explained to the individual(s) prior to the visit. The length of a visit and
how often a visit will occur will be determined by Investigations Bureau personnel.
Visitation by an attorney, family or clergy member is governed by the California
Code of Regulations, Title 15, Subchapter 2, Article 7.
A) Attorneys
1) Must present a valid Bar Association card from the state in which he or
she is licensed to practice;
2) Must submit to a pat-down frisk search and a search of their briefcase,
bag, and any other containers in their possession; the scope of the
search is for weapons and/or contraband only;
3) May not record or photograph due to privacy concerns within the hospital
4) May bring in a pad of paper and pen to write notes;
5) May not give their client anything to keep, such as notes or other items,
with the exception of a business card;
6) The officer guarding the inmate will remain in the room during the
attorney visit, but may not record, document or monitor the conversation.
a) The officer may not discuss any conversation that was overheard
with anyone, unless there is discussion of the commission of a
future crime, in which case the visit will be immediately terminated
and the Watch Commander notified.
B) Family or Clergy Members
1) Must be escorted by designated officer at all times;
2) Visitations can be terminated at any time;
3) Visits by family or clergy may be permitted only when the attending
physician has determined that the inmate is likely to die as a result of his
or her condition;
4) Visits by family or clergy may be permitted if there are no security
concerns precluding such a visit;
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
201 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
5) Visits must be approved by a Command Officer or Lieutenant within the
Investigations Bureau;
6) No more than two visitors will be allowed at a time;
a) Must possess current Government identification;
b) Must provide name of visitor in advance;
c) May not be a convicted felon;
d) No Long Beach Police Department arrests within last 6 months ;
e) Must submit to a pat-down frisk search, and a search of their
briefcase, bag, and any other containers in their possession; the
scope of the search is for weapons and/or contraband only;
7) May not discuss current case;
8) May not pass notes or other items;
9) No electronic devices are permitted to be used in the room.
6.5.14.4 DISRUPTIVE BEHAVIOR DURING VISITS
Revised October 20, 2015
Last Reviewed June 18, 2019
Disruptions at the hospital involving visitors, will result in the immediate termination
of the visit. If a visitor is asked to leave, or returns without authorization, they must
be informed to leave immediately or they are subject to arrest for trespassing,
assuming the hospital will sign a private person’s arrest. If the hospital does not
wish to be a victim of a crime and probable cause exists, consider arresting for
obstruction of justice, CPC §148, or disturbing the peace, CPC §415.
6.5.15 PRISON RAPE ELIMINATION (PREA)
Revised January 26, 2016
The Support Bureau will have audit responsibility.
6.5.15.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
Revised January 26, 2016
This policy provides guidance for complying with the Prison Rape Elimination Act
of 2003 (PREA) and the regulation that establishes standards (PREA Rule) to
prevent, detect and respond to sexual abuse, harassment and retaliation against
detainees or prisoners in the LBPD Jail (28 CFR 115.111).
A) Definitions
1) Intersex - A person whose sexual or reproductive anatomy or
chromosomal pattern does not seem to fit typical definitions of male or
female. Intersex medical conditions are sometimes referred to as
disorders of sex development (28 CFR 115.5).
2) Sexual abuse - Any of the following acts, if the detainee does not
consent, is coerced into such act by overt or implied threats of
violence or is unable to consent or refuse:
a) Contact between the penis and the vulva or the penis and the
anus, including penetration, however slight.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
202 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
b) Contact between the mouth and the penis, vulva or anus.
c) Penetration of the anal or genital opening of another person,
however slight, by a hand, finger, object or other instrument.
d) Any other intentional touching, either directly or through the
clothing, of the genitalia, anus, groin, breast, inner thigh or the
buttocks of another person, excluding contact incidental to a
physical altercation (28 CFR 115.6).
Sexual abuse, as defined in 28 CFR 115.6, includes abuse by a staff member,
contractor or volunteer as follows, with or without consent of the detainee, prisoner
or resident:
a) Contact between the penis and the vulva or the penis and the
anus, including penetration, however slight.
b) Contact between the mouth and the penis, vulva or anus.
c) Contact between the mouth and any body part where the
staff member, contractor or volunteer has the intent to abuse,
arouse or gratify sexual desire.
d) Penetration of the anal or genital opening, however slight, by a
hand, finger, object or other instrument, that is unrelated to
official duties, or where the staff member, contractor or volunteer
has the intent to abuse, arouse or gratify sexual desire.
e) Any other intentional contact, either directly or through the
clothing, of or with the genitalia, anus, groin, breast, inner thigh or
the buttocks, that is unrelated to official duties, or where the staff
member, contractor or volunteer has the intent to abuse, arouse
or gratify sexual desire.
f) Any attempt, threat or request by a staff member, contractor or
volunteer to engage in the activities described above.
g) Any display by a staff member, contractor or volunteer of
his/her uncovered genitalia, buttocks or breast in the presence
of a detainee, prisoner or resident.
h) Voyeurism by a staff member, contractor or volunteer (28 CFR
115.6).
3) Sexual harassment - Repeated and unwelcome sexual advances;
requests for sexual favors; verbal comments, gestures or actions of a
derogatory or offensive sexual nature by one detainee, prisoner or
resident that are directed toward another; repeated verbal comments
or gestures of a sexual nature to a detainee, prisoner or resident by a
staff member, contractor or volunteer, including demeaning
references to gender, sexually suggestive or derogatory comments
about body or clothing, or obscene language or gestures (28 CFR
115.6).
4) Transgender - A person whose gender identity (i.e., internal sense of
feeling male or female) is different from the person’s assigned sex at
birth (28 CFR 115.5).
6.5.15.2 POLICY
Revised January 26, 2016
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
203 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Long Beach Police Department has zero tolerance toward all forms of sexual
abuse and sexual harassment (28 CFR 115.111). The Department will not tolerate
retaliation against any person who reports sexual abuse or sexual harassment or
who cooperates with a sexual abuse or sexual harassment investigation.
The Long Beach Police Department will take immediate action to protect detainees
and prisoners who are reasonably believed to be subject to a substantial risk of
imminent sexual abuse (28 CFR 115.162).
6.5.15.3 PREA COORDINATOR
Revised January 26, 2016
The Chief of Police shall appoint an upper-level manager with sufficient time
and authority to develop, implement and oversee department efforts to comply
with PREA standards in the LBPD Jail (28 CFR 115.111). The PREA
Coordinator’s responsibilities shall include:
1) Developing and maintaining procedures to comply with the PREA Rule.
2) Ensuring that any contract for the confinement of detainees or prisoners
includes the requirement to adopt and comply with applicable PREA and the
PREA Rule, including the obligation to provide incident-based and
aggregated data, as required in 28 CFR 115.187 (28 CFR 115.112).
3) Developing a staffing plan to provide adequate levels of staffing and video
monitoring, where applicable, in order to protect detainees and prisoners from
sexual abuse (28 CFR 115.113). This includes documenting deviations and
the reasons for deviations from the staffing plan, as well as reviewing the
staffing plan a minimum of once per year.
4) Developing methods for staff to privately report sexual abuse and sexual
harassment of detainees and prisoners (28 CFR 115.151).
5) Developing a written plan to coordinate response among staff first
responders, medical and mental health practitioners, investigators and
department leadership to an incident of sexual abuse (28 CFR 115.165).
6) Ensuring a protocol is developed for investigating allegations of sexual
abuse in the LBPD Jail. The protocol shall include (28 CFR 115.121; 28
CFR 115.122):
a) Evidence collection practices that maximize the potential for
obtaining usable physical evidence based on the most recent edition
of the U.S. Department of Justice’s (DOJ) Office on Violence Against
Women publication, “A National Protocol for Sexual Assault Medical
Forensic Examinations, Adults/Adolescents” or a similarly
comprehensive and authoritative protocol.
b) A process to ensure a criminal or administrative investigation is
completed on all allegations of sexual abuse or sexual harassment.
c) A process to document all referrals to other law enforcement agencies.
d) Access to forensic medical examinations, without financial cost, for
all victims of sexual abuse where appropriate. Such examinations shall
be performed by Sexual Assault Forensic Examiners (SAFEs) or Sexual
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
204 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Assault Nurse Examiners (SANEs) where possible. If SAFEs or SANEs
cannot be made available, the examination can be performed by other
qualified medical practitioners. The efforts to provide SAFEs or SANEs
shall be documented.
e) In accordance with security needs, provisions to permit, to the extent
available, detainee and prisoner access to victim advocacy services if
the detainee or prisoner is transported for a forensic examination to an
outside hospital that offers such services.
7) Ensuring that detainees and prisoners with limited English proficiency and
disabilities have an equal opportunity to understand and benefit from efforts
to prevent, detect and respond to sexual abuse and sexual harassment. This
includes, as appropriate, access to interpreters and written materials in
formats or through methods that provide effective communication to those
with disabilities (e.g., limited reading skills, intellectual, hearing or vision
disabilities) (28 CFR 115.116).
a) The agency shall not rely on other detainees or prisoners for
assistance except in limited circumstances where an extended delay in
obtaining an interpreter could compromise the detainee’s or prisoner’s
safety, the performance of first-response duties under this policy, or the
investigation of a prisoner’s allegations of sexual abuse, harassment or
retaliation.
8) Publishing on the department’s website:
a) Information on how to report sexual abuse and sexual harassment on
behalf of a detainee or prisoner (28 CFR 115.154).
b) A protocol describing the responsibilities of the Department and any
other investigating agency that will be responsible for conducting sexual
abuse or sexual harassment investigations (28 CFR 115.122).
9) Establishing a process that includes the use of a standardized form and set
of definitions to ensure accurate, uniform data is collected for every allegation
of sexual abuse at facilities under this agency’s direct control (28 CFR
115.187).
a) The data collected shall include, at a minimum, the data necessary
to answer all questions from the most recent version of the Survey of
Sexual Violence, conducted by DOJ, or any subsequent form developed
by DOJ and designated for lockups.
b) The data shall be aggregated at least annually.
10) Ensuring audits are conducted pursuant to 28 CFR 115.401 through 28
CFR 115.405 for all LBPD Jail facilities used to house detainees or
prisoners overnight (28 CFR 115.193).
11) Ensuring contractors or others who work in the LBPD Jail are informed of
the agency’s zero-tolerance policy regarding sexual abuse and sexual
harassment (28 CFR 115.132).
6.5.15.4 REPORTING SEXUAL ABUSE AND HARASSMENT
Revised January 26, 2016
Detainees or prisoners may make reports verbally, or in writing, privately or
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
205 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
anonymously of any of the following (28 CFR 115.151):
1) Sexual abuse;
2) Sexual harassment;
3) Retaliation by other detainees or prisoners or staff for reporting sexual
abuse or sexual harassment;
4) Staff neglect or violation of responsibilities that may have contributed to
sexual abuse or sexual harassment.
During intake, the Department shall notify all detainees and prisoners of the zero-
tolerance policy regarding sexual abuse and sexual harassment, and of at least
one way to report abuse or harassment to a public or private entity that is not part
of the Department and that is able to receive and immediately forward detainee or
prisoner reports of sexual abuse and sexual harassment to agency officials. This
allows the detainee or prisoner to remain anonymous (28 CFR 115.132; 28 CFR
115.151).
A) Employee Responsibilities
Department employees shall accept reports from detainees, prisoners and third
parties and shall promptly document all reports (28 CFR 115.151). All employees
shall report immediately to the Jail Supervisor any knowledge, suspicion or
information regarding:
1) An incident of sexual abuse or sexual harassment that occurs in the
LBPD Jail.
2) Retaliation against detainees or the member who reports any such
incident.
3) Any neglect or violation of responsibilities on the part of any department
member that may have contributed to an incident or retaliation (28 CFR
115.161).
No member shall reveal any information related to a sexual abuse report to
anyone other than to the extent necessary to make treatment and investigation
decisions.
B) Jail Supervisor Responsibilities
The Jail Supervisor shall report to the department’s designated investigators all
allegations of sexual abuse, harassment, retaliation, neglect or violations leading
to sexual abuse, harassment or retaliation. This includes third-party and
anonymous reports (28 CFR 115.161).
If the alleged victim is under the age of 18 or considered a vulnerable adult, the Jail
Supervisor shall also report the allegation as required under mandatory reporting
laws and department policy.
Upon receiving an allegation that a detainee or prisoner was sexually abused
while confined at another facility, the Jail Supervisor shall notify the head of the
facility or the appropriate office of the agency where the alleged abuse occurred.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
206 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The notification shall be made as soon as possible but no later than 72 hours after
receiving the allegation. The Jail Supervisor shall document such notification (28
CFR 115.163).
If an alleged detainee or prisoner victim is transferred from the LBPD Jail to another
jail, prison or medical facility, the Department shall, as permitted by law, inform the
receiving facility of the incident and the prisoner’s potential need for medical or
social services, unless the prisoner requests otherwise (28 CFR 115.165).
The Jail Supervisor will ensure that the Watch Commander is notified regarding
allegations of sexual assault, harassment, retaliation, neglect or violations leading
to sexual assault, harassment or retaliation occurring within the LBPD Jail.
6.5.15.5 INVESTIGATIONS
Revised January 26, 2016
The Department shall promptly, thoroughly and objectively investigate all
allegations, including third-party and anonymous reports, of sexual abuse or sexual
harassment. Only investigators who have received department-approved special
training shall conduct sexual abuse investigations (28 CFR 115.171).
LBPD Manual sections 6.1.5 Sexual Assault – Media Policy, 8.1.9 Domestic
Violence/Sexual Assault Resources Form, 8.1.15 Sexual Assault Response Team
(SART), 8.1.16, Rape Evidence and Training Bulletins 78 Sex Crime Reports Part
I, 79 Sex Crime Reports Part II, 156 Rape Investigation Part I, 157 Rape
Investigation Part II, 188 Rape, Understanding Motivations – An Aid in
Investigations, comply with all the requirements identified in the following sections:
• 28 CFR 115.164
• 28 CFR 115.171
• 28 CFR 115.171(e)
• 28 CFR 115.172
• 28 CFR 115.176
• 28 CFR 115.177
• 28 CFR 115.178
• 28 CFR 115.182
6.5.15.6 RETALIATION PROHIBITED
Revised January 26, 2016
All detainees, prisoners and members who report sexual abuse or sexual
harassment or who cooperate with sexual abuse or sexual harassment
investigations shall be protected from retaliation (28 CFR 115.167). If any other
individual who cooperates with an investigation expresses a fear of retaliation,
appropriate measures shall be taken to protect that individual.
The Jail Administrator or the authorized designee shall employ multiple protection
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
207 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
measures, such as housing changes or transfers for detainee or prisoner
victims or abusers, removal of alleged abusers from contact with victims, and
emotional support services for detainees, prisoners or members who fear
retaliation for reporting sexual abuse or sexual harassment or for cooperating with
investigations.
The Jail Administrator or the authorized designee shall identify a staff member to
monitor the conduct and treatment of detainees, prisoners or members who have
reported sexual abuse and of detainees or prisoners who were reported to have
suffered sexual abuse. The staff member shall act promptly to remedy any such
retaliation. In the case of detainees or prisoners, such monitoring shall also
include periodic status checks.
6.5.15.7 REVIEWS AND AUDITS
Revised January 26, 2016
A) Incident Reviews
An incident review shall be conducted at the conclusion of every sexual abuse
investigation unless the allegation has been determined to be unfounded. The
review should occur within 30 days of the conclusion of the investigation. The
review team shall include upper-level management officials and seek input from
line supervisors and investigators (28 CFR 115.186).
The review shall (28 CFR 115.186):
(1) Consider whether the allegation or investigation indicates a need to
change policy or practice to better prevent, detect or respond to sexual
abuse.
(2) Consider whether the incident or allegation was motivated by race;
ethnicity; gender identity; lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender or intersex
identification, status or perceived status; gang affiliation; or was motivated
or otherwise caused by other group dynamics at the facility.
(3) Examine the area in the facility where the incident allegedly occurred
to assess whether physical barriers in the area may enable abuse.
(4) Assess the adequacy of staffing levels in that area during
different shifts.
(5) Assess whether monitoring technology should be deployed or
augmented to supplement supervision by staff.
The review team shall prepare a report of its findings, including any determinations
made pursuant to this section and any recommendations for improvement. The
report shall be submitted to the Chief of Police and the PREA Coordinator. The
Chief of Police or the authorized designee shall implement the recommendations
for improvement or shall document the reasons for not doing so (28 CFR
115.186).
B) Data Reviews
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
208 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The facility shall conduct an annual review of collected and aggregated incident-
based sexual abuse data. The review should include, as needed, data from
incident-based documents, including reports, investigation files and sexual abuse
incident reviews (28 CFR 115.187).
The purpose of these reviews is to assess and improve the effectiveness of sexual
abuse prevention, detection and response policies, practices and training. An
annual report shall be prepared that includes (28 CFR 115.188):
1) Identification of any potential problem areas.
2) Identification of any corrective actions taken.
3) Recommendations for any additional corrective actions.
4) A comparison of the current year’s data and corrective actions with
those from prior years.
5) An assessment of the department’s progress in addressing sexual
abuse.
The report shall be approved by the Chief of Police and made readily available to
the public through the department website or, if it does not have one, through other
means. Material may be redacted from the reports when publication would present
a clear and specific threat to the safety and security of the LBPD Jail. However,
the nature of the redacted material shall be indicated.
All aggregated sexual abuse data from Long Beach Police Department facilities
and private facilities with which it contracts shall be made readily available to the
public at least annually through the department website or, if it does not have one,
through other means. Before making aggregated sexual abuse data publicly
available, all personal identifiers shall be removed (28 CFR 115.189).
6.5.15.8 RECORDS
Revised January 26, 2016
The Department shall retain all written reports from administrative and criminal
investigations pursuant to this policy for as long as the alleged abuser is held or
employed by the Department, plus five years (28 CFR 115.171).
All other data collected pursuant to this policy shall be securely retained for at
least 10 years after the date of the initial collection unless federal, state or local
law requires otherwise (28 CFR 115.189).
6.5.15.9 TRAINING
Revised January 26, 2016
All employees, volunteers and contractors who may have contact with detainees or
prisoners shall receive department-approved training on the prevention and
detection of sexual abuse and sexual harassment within this facility.
The Training Division Commander shall be responsible for developing and
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department JAIL OPERATIONS
209 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
administering this training as appropriate, covering at a minimum (28 CFR
115.131):
1) The Department’s zero-tolerance policy and the right of detainees and
prisoners to be free from sexual abuse and sexual harassment, and from
retaliation for reporting sexual abuse or harassment.
2) The dynamics of sexual abuse and harassment in confinement settings,
including which detainees and prisoners are most vulnerable.
3) The right of detainees, prisoners and staff members to be free from sexual
abuse and sexual harassment, and from retaliation for reporting sexual
abuse or harassment.
4) Detecting and responding to signs of threatened and actual abuse.
5) Communicating effectively and professionally with all detainees and
prisoners.
6) Compliance with relevant laws related to mandatory reporting of sexual
abuse to outside authorities.
All sexual abuse investigators receive sexual abuse investigations training that
complies with 28 CFR 115.134.
The Communications and Training Division Commander shall maintain
documentation that employees, volunteers, contractors and investigators have
completed required training and that they understand the training. This
understanding shall be documented through individual signature or electronic
verification.
All current employees and volunteers who may have contact with detainees or
prisoners shall be trained within one year of the effective date of the PREA
standards. The agency shall provide annual refresher information to all such
employees and volunteers to ensure that they understand the current sexual
abuse and sexual harassment policies and procedures.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
210 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.6 PERSONNEL
6.6.1 PAYROLL TIME RECORDS & TIMECARDS
Employee Responsibilities
• Employees shall be responsible for completing and signing their timecard. The
ONLY exception to this policy is when an employee is absent due to approved
time off or illness. Employees shall record their exact time worked. Falsely
reporting hours worked is a violation of City and Department policy. Employees
shall not take time-off and report it as time worked to compensate for earlier
unreported time worked
• Timecards shall be submitted to the employee’s supervisor on a weekly basis,
based on assignment, and not later than Friday of each week
• Employees shall check the missing time card board, located in the 2nd floor
outside of the Department’s Payroll Office, on a weekly basis to ensure their
time cards were submitted
• Employees who know they will be on scheduled time-off shall ensure they have
completed, signed and submitted a timecard to their supervisor, prior to their
scheduled time off
Supervisor Responsibilities
• Supervisors shall ensure that all employees under their supervision accurately
complete their timecards, charging the appropriate accounts
• Supervisors shall check the missing time card board outside the Payroll Office
by the end of each pay period for personnel under their direction to ensure all
time cards have been submitted
• Supervisors shall ensure that any employee in an off-work status (IOD, sick
time, et cetera) has a timecard completed and submitted on their behalf
• Supervisors shall approve timecards for personnel under their direction and
submit them to Payroll not later than Monday at 0900 hours of each week
• Exception: Employees who work a different schedule with days off that fall on
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday; Thursday, Friday, Saturday; or Friday,
Saturday, Sunday, shall submit their timecards and have the supervisor
approve them on their last workday, each week
• Supervisors shall ensure that a checklist of all employees within the Division is
included with the submitted timecards
• Overtime cards shall be submitted daily
Division Commander Responsibilities
• Each Division shall assign a supervisor to coordinate the submission of
timecards
• Each Division Commander shall ensure timecards for their respective
command are completed and submitted in accordance with policy
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
211 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Patrol Bureau Responsibilities
The Patrol Bureau, with unique shifts and staffing requirements, shall adopt the
following procedures:
• Designate a supervisor for each Patrol Division as the Timecard Coordinator.
Coordinators shall ensure a timecard is submitted to the Payroll Office for every
employee in their Division by 2400 hours, each Friday of each week. A
checklist of all employees within the Division shall be submitted with the
completed timecards
Exception: Employees who work a different schedule with days off that fall on
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday; Thursday, Friday, Saturday; or Friday,
Saturday, Sunday, shall submit their timecards and have the supervisor
approve them on their last workday, each week
• Sergeants shall ensure that timecards for their employees are submitted to the
Division Timecard Coordinator on a weekly basis
• Each Division shall appoint an alternate supervisor to ensure timecards are
submitted in the absence of the Timecard Coordinator
• One-officer vehicle time sheets and overtime cards shall be submitted daily by
the approving supervisor
6.6.1.1 PAYROLL CHECK DISCREPANCIES
ALL problems or questions relative to payroll shall be directed to the Department
Payroll Office. Employees will not contact Central Payroll at City Hall unless
directed to do so by the Police Department Payroll Office
6.6.1.2 VACATION/OVERTIME/HOLIDAY REQUESTS FOR TIME OFF
It shall be the responsibility of the employee requesting a scheduled absence to
submit a written request to his/her supervisor on PD Form 1000.007,
“Vacation/Overtime/Holiday Request and Court Appearance Schedule”, indicating
the dates of the requested absence. The request shall be submitted a minimum
of 14-days prior to the requested time off.
The form shall be completed to include court dates during the requested absence
for which subpoenas were served, and the employee’s return to work date.
Upon approval by the supervisor, the employee shall ensure a signed copy of the
request is forwarded to the employee’s Division Commander. All officers shall also
ensure three copies of the signed request form are forwarded to the Court Affairs
Officer 14-days prior to the scheduled absence
6.6.1.3 REQUESTS FOR COMPENSATORY TIME OFF
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
212 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revised July 11, 2013
The Administration Bureau has audit responsibility.
This policy applies to all police officers, corporals, sergeants and lieutenants in the
Police Department.
Nonexempt, sworn employees of the Department may receive compensatory time
off for overtime work, in lieu of cash payment, in accordance with City of Long
Beach Personnel Ordinance 4.08.
A nonexempt, sworn employee, who has accrued compensatory time off and
requests the use of this time, shall be permitted to use such time in accordance
with this policy.
Requesting Compensatory Time Off
A nonexempt employee who wants to use accrued compensatory time off must
submit a written request to his/her immediate supervisor or the scheduling
supervisor by completing a day off request form.
Requests in excess of four (4) consecutive days off must be submitted at least one
(1) week in advance. All other requests must be submitted at least 48 hours in
advance. However, the immediate supervisor or scheduling supervisor may, at
his/her discretion, approve a request submitted with less than 48 hours’ notice
where the request is for one (1) day off.
Supervisor Evaluation of Requests for Compensatory Time Off
The fact that a replacement employee may be entitled to overtime compensation
shall not be used as a basis for denying a request to use compensatory time.
It will be the Department’s responsibility to find a qualified replacement employee
for the nonexempt, sworn employee requesting compensatory time off. However,
if the nonexempt, sworn employee has a suggestion or knows of someone willing
to work their shift, they should advise the appropriate supervisor.
A qualified replacement must be comparable to the employee to be replaced and
must be able to carry out the full functions of the employee to be replaced as
determined by the Department. A replacement employee cannot work two
consecutive full shifts.
The scheduling supervisor shall comply with the direction of the Chief of Police or
his/her designee to ensure bureau staffing needs are met before approving any
time off. If staffing levels are not met, then the request will be denied.
Compensatory overtime hours may not be used for the following days:
• New Year’s Day
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
213 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Independence Day
• Thanksgiving Day
• Christmas Eve
• Christmas Day
• New Year’s Eve
The Department reserves the right to deny a request for the use of compensatory
time in the case of a planned or spontaneous-critical event that requires maximum
resources, including, but not limited to, natural disasters, protests, demonstrations
or other significant events.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
214 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.6.2 OVERTIME ASSIGNMENT POLICY FOR SWORN PERSONNEL
Revised March 30, 2018
The Administration Bureau has audit responsibility.
6.6.2.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised March 30, 2018
Mass Notification System – Software system resource that facilitates customized
message calls or texts to targeted employees for notifications and alerts.
Overtime – Time worked beyond the employee’s regular schedule that does not
include normal scheduled hours that were voluntarily adjusted to work an overtime
shift. The Department has four major categories of overtime which include: 1)
Patrol Backfill Overtime; 2) Security Services/Specialized Functions Overtime; 3)
Special Events Overtime; and 4) Regular Job Duty Overtime including Court
Overtime.
• Voluntary Overtime – Non-compulsory worktime outside of an officer’s
normally scheduled work hours.
• Involuntary Overtime – Compulsory worktime outside of an officer’s
normally scheduled work hours.
Planned Time Off – Scheduled time away from duty including scheduled vacation,
banked overtime, pre-approved holidays, FMLA, and TTD/TMD but not including
regular days off.
6.6.2.2 GENERAL
Revised March 30, 2018
The Department’s goal is to reduce involuntary overtime by using an organized
process to fill critical positions with qualified officers who are willing to work
voluntarily. A qualified officer may volunteer for as many vacant shifts as desired,
and an officer may choose to work any shift that is vacant regardless of their
regular assignment.
Except in an emergency or in response to a subpoena, advance approval to work
overtime (including any off-duty, work-related activities) is required from a
supervisor. If advance approval is not obtained, employees must promptly report
all overtime worked to a supervisor and ensure the time is appropriately recorded
on his or her time report.
The Days Off Exchange program is encouraged to be utilized to facilitate meeting
scheduling vacancies; see LBPD Manual § 6.6.11 Days Off Exchange. This
overtime assignment policy will remain subject to annual re-evaluation.
6.6.2.3 OVERTIME CARDS
Revised March 30, 2018
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
215 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
All overtime should be documented to include the following:
• Overtime explanations must be completed on the employee’s time report;
• Include the actual hours worked and the employee’s DID number; and
• Initialed by a supervisor.
All Special Events Overtime cards are to be completed immediately and submitted
to the Special Events office within 24 hours after the overtime has been worked.
All Court Overtime cards are to be completed immediately and submitted to the
Court Affairs Office within 72 hours. In all instances, every effort should be made
to submit timecards before the weekly deadline set by Personnel Division for
regular and holiday work weeks.
6.6.3 VOLUNTARY OVERTIME PROCESS
Revised March 30, 2018
Officers are frequently required to work beyond their regularly scheduled work
hours to complete their assigned work tasks. An extension of a shift beyond
regularly scheduled work hours requires the permission of a supervisor.
Voluntary overtime outside of normal operational requirements typically exists in
three areas of operation: Patrol staffing needs, Security Services, and Special
Events.
6.6.3.1 PATROL STAFFING
Revised March 30, 2018
If required minimum staffing needs are not met, scheduling supervisors should use
the following protocol:
Step 1: Make every effort to find a volunteer from the assigned shift and/or division
who is currently off-duty and voluntarily willing to fill the vacancy.
Step 2: Air a citywide radio broadcast seeking a callback overtime shift from any
available unit currently working.
Step 3: Utilize the Department Mass Notification System to communicate the
request for volunteers. Once the Mass Notification System has been utilized,
overtime vacancies will be filled on a first-come first-served basis.
If the officer responding from the Mass Notification System request normally works
in the Investigations Bureau, the following rules apply:
a. Detectives assigned to the Investigations Bureau may adjust regularly
scheduled work days for a voluntary overtime shift if pre-approved by their
Section Lieutenant or Division Commander.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
216 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
b. Employees volunteering to work a single officer, Patrol Bureau overtime shift
will participate in the 40-hour re-acclimation training program or complete the
10-hour in-service Perishable Skills Refresher training and acknowledge and
sign a pre-authorization form when completed.
c. Training beyond the 10-hour in service Perishable Skills Refresher may be
mandated up to the 40-hour minimum of Patrol Officer Retraining contained
in LBPD Manual § 7.1.39.6 should the Patrol Bureau determine that additional
training is necessary to meet patrol duty proficiency.
d. Per LBPD Manual § 7.1.39.6 of the LBPD Manual, officers who have worked
a calls-for-service assignment within the past 365 days may be eligible for a
waiver of the training requirements as determined by the FTO Lieutenant or
FTO Coordinator Sergeant.
e. The Patrol Bureau Administration Office will be responsible for notifying the
employee’s respective Section Lieutenant or Division Commander by
memorandum of the need and/or completion of any prescribed training.
Step 4: If the supervisor still has no response, they are encouraged to utilize any
other means available to locate a volunteer to work a needed shift prior to
mandating an involuntary overtime shift.
Step 5: If the supervisor still has no response, they shall contact the Watch
Commander to see what other options are available prior to requiring an officer to
involuntarily work. The Watch Commander has the authority, based on the totality
of the circumstances and department needs, to adjust available staffing resources
from other parts of the City prior to requiring forced involuntary overtime.
6.6.3.2 SECURITY SERVICES STAFFING
Revised March 30, 2018
Security Services will primarily staff from a voluntary list of pre-qualified and trained
officers in accordance with the respective unit’s procedural manual. If no
volunteers can be located, officers may be inversed to meet required minimum
staffing needs based on the procedures in LBPD Manual § 6.6.4 INVOLUNTARY
OVERTIME PROCESS.
6.6.3.3 SPECIAL EVENTS STAFFING
Revised March 30, 2018
Special Events will primarily staff from a voluntary list of officers maintained within
the Special Events Unit, and in accordance with the selection procedures specified
within LBPD Manual § 7.1.40 SPECIAL EVENTS.
6.6.4 INVOLUNTARY OVERTIME PROCESS
Revised March 30, 2018
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
217 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The following process will apply if efforts to find a volunteer to cover a shift vacancy
are unsuccessful.
6.6.4.1 PATROL
Revised March 30, 2018
If no officers volunteer to work a staffing vacancy, the oncoming officers may be
involuntarily held over at the end of their shift in order to work the shortage on the
oncoming shift. This involuntary holdover applies to all officers currently working
the previous shift and slots shall be filled starting with the most junior officer in the
affected Division, taking into consideration the one-month goal outlined in LBPD
Manual § 6.6.4.5 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITY & AUTHORITY. The
Division scheduler will ensure that sworn personnel who worked the assignment
use the approved inverse overtime pay code and are credited appropriately
through reference to the Payroll Index Code Report tracking Inverse Overtime
generated through the financial system.
6.6.4.2 SECURITY SERVICES DIVISION
Revised March 30, 2018
All officers inversed for involuntary overtime in any of the Security Services
operations must be qualified to fill the involuntary vacancy assignment.
In the event of immediate unplanned vacancies that are unable to be filled
voluntarily, the Watch Commander shall be notified.
If an officer is involuntarily inversed to fill a Special Security position, the supervisor
ordering the involuntary overtime will send an email to the scheduler, the Watch
Commander and the affected employee noting the involuntary overtime
assignment and the date worked.
6.6.4.3 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITY & AUTHORITY
Revised March 30, 2018
Watch Commander notification and authorization will be required for the following
circumstances:
1) Shifting on-duty officers in one Division to fill vacancies in another;
2) Moving on-duty support officers within Patrol Bureau (motor officers, K-9
officers, PRO, Quality of Life Officer, etc.) to work a call for service unit;
3) Approval of any continuous shift over 18 hours;
4) Approval of involuntary overtime. Watch Commanders should work to
ensure that the same officer is not involuntarily forced to work more than
one shift per calendar month.
6.6.5 HIGHER CLASSIFICATION (HC) PAY
Revised May 2, 2013
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
218 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Administration Bureau will have audit responsibility.
Higher classification pay will be paid in accordance with policy established by the
City of Long Beach, Department of Human Resources, Personnel Policies and
Procedures, Higher Classification Pay 3.3.
6.6.6 SPECIAL DETAIL
If working “Special Detail” within the Department in a Division other than your own,
the Division shall handle your timecard where you are working. Your regular
Division shall note “Special Detail” on their daily assignment sheet as well as the
Division where the employee is assigned.
Prior to an employee taking vacation, a vacation schedule shall be sent to the
Payroll Office at least two weeks prior to the employee starting his/her time off. Do
not change an individual’s days off during the time he/she is off on vacation,
extended overtime off, IOD, et cetera.
6.6.7 SICK LEAVE
City of Long Beach Personnel Ordinance Section 2.06 states that a Department or
Division manager may require an employee to provide satisfactory evidence of
illness upon the employee’s return from sick leave. The Section further states that
the evidence should be in the form of a physician’s written report stating the nature,
duration, and extent of the illness. If a satisfactory report is not provided, wages
for the absence shall not be paid.
• In the event an employee requests sick leave for an absence in excess of five
consecutive sick days, the employee shall provide a written report from a
practicing physician regarding the absence
• His/her immediate supervisor shall advise any employee suspected of sick
leave misuse that a written physician’s report is required. The employee shall
not be paid for the period of absence until he/she provides a satisfactory written
physician’s report
• A satisfactory written physician’s report must include the nature, duration and
extent of the employee’s illness
• An employee is not entitled to compensation for either the time, or expense, of
obtaining a physician’s report
• If there is a valid suspicion that an employee is involved in the habitual or
planned use of sick leave, the following steps shall be taken:
• The employee shall be counseled by the supervisor regarding the suspected
misuse of sick leave and
• The employee shall be provided with a written notification that a physician’s
written report will be required for all future sick leave occurring during a
specified time of probation (i.e., six to twelve months) if the employee expects
to receive compensation for the absences
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
219 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.6.8 ABSENCE - UNAUTHORIZED
Whenever an employee is absent from duty three consecutive workdays without
authorization, the following procedure shall take place:
• The employee’s Division Commander shall forward a written notification to the
Commanding Officer of the Personnel Division on the first day immediately
following the third day of the employee’s absence
• The Administrator, Personnel Division, shall cause the “Absence without
Authorization” to be confirmed and prepare a letter to the Civil Service
Commission for the signature of the Chief of Police. The letter shall include the
exact consecutive dates of the employee’s unauthorized absence
• The letter to the Civil Service Commission and any other related documents
will then be forwarded to the Deputy Chief, Administration Bureau, for
processing
• A copy of a response from the Civil Service Commission shall be forwarded to
the Commander, Personnel Division
6.6.9 REPORTING OF ILLNESS/INJURY OFF-DUTY
All employees who become ill or injured when off-duty, to the extent they are
unable to report for work, shall adhere to the following procedures.
Employees assigned to Communications, Jail, Patrol and Information
Management shall notify a Division supervisor not later than 30-minutes prior to
the start of their shift of their inability to report to work. All other personnel shall
notify their Division/Section Supervisor not later than the beginning of their shift.
Employees shall notify a supervisor at least one rank level above their own.
Employees shall report their intended absence on a daily basis. Commanding
officers may notify a subordinate of their absence and report the absence the next
workday to a superior officer.
It shall be the responsibility of the supervisor receiving the call to complete a
“Report of Absence” card (PD form 2010.003) and forward it to the Personnel
Division. The Personnel Division will retain the cards for one year.
6.6.9.1 RETURN TO WORK
Personnel returning to work from an illness/injury assigned to Communication, Jail,
Patrol and Information Management shall notify a supervisor not later than 30
minutes prior to the start of their shift. All other personnel returning to work from
an illness/injury shall report at the prescribed time.
6.6.10 DEATH/SERIOUS ILLNESS - EMPLOYEES
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
220 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notifications
When an employee is killed, or becomes seriously ill/injured, immediate verbal
notification shall be made to the Chief of Police or the Duty Chief, depending on
time of notification. The first employee to become aware of such an incident shall
immediately notify his/her supervisor, who shall continue that notification through
the chain of command.
This notification shall be followed by a written report completed not later than the
following workday. Information shall include date of occurrence, location, cause,
nature and extent of injuries, prognosis, and any resulting property damage.
Notification shall be made regardless of whether the incident occurred on or off
duty (serious injury/illness denotes an injury/illness which may result in death or
disability)
If the occurrence is during the regular work shift of the employee’s Division
Commander, it shall be the responsibility of said Commander to provide verbal
notification as follows:
• Chief of Police
• Duty Officer On-Call
• Deputy Chief of the Employee
• Division Commander
• Administrator, Personnel Division
• Press Information Officer (PIO)
• Office of the City Manager
• City Safety Officer (on-duty death)
In the absence of the employee’s Division Commander, it shall be the responsibility
of the Watch Commander to complete the aforementioned notifications.
If the occurrence is during off-hours, the identical notification process shall apply
and shall be transmitted either by pager or telephone. In the event a member of
the notification chain of command is not available, notification shall proceed to the
next level.
6.6.10.1 NOTIFICATION OF FAMILY – SIGNIFICANT OTHERS
The immediate family or other significant individual and the person designated by
the employee, shall be notified immediately, in person, by the Commander or
Deputy Chief of the employee’s Division, if the Department employee is injured,
dying, or deceased on-duty (this information is available on the “Employee’s
Personal History” form in the employee’s Division files). If ranking Division
personnel are not available, a Deputy Chief from an alternate Bureau shall
accompany the designated person for notification to the family or other significant
individual.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
221 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Release of Identification
When an employee is killed or critically injured as a result of official duties, his/her
identification shall NOT be released to any individual outside the Department. All
inquiries from the media or other interested parties shall be referred to the Office
of the Chief of Police.
Administrator, Personnel Division
During regular business hours, 0800 to 1700 hours, the Administrator, Personnel
Division shall be contacted. During other hours, weekends or holidays, the
Commanding Officer shall be contacted. During other hours, weekends or
holidays, contact the Commanding Officer by pager or telephone.
In the event of an employee’s serious illness or injury, the Administrator, Personnel
Division, shall:
• Contact the City Human Resources Department, Office of Retirement
Counseling, at telephone number 562-570-6703
• Coordinate with the Office of Retirement Counseling and the family of the
employee
• File updated Watch Report items on the employee’s condition
• Notify the appropriate employee association
− Police Officers Association (POA), at telephone number 562-426-1201
• California Public Workers/City Employees Association (CEA), at telephone
number 437-7411
In the event of an employee’s serious illness or injury, the Administrator, Personnel
Division, shall:
• Assist the family of the deceased employee as required
• In accordance with the family’s request, have primary responsibility for the
planning and transaction of the employee’s funeral
• Coordinate with the Administration Bureau the activation of the Department
Honor Guard
• In those instances when employees have been killed in the line of duty or have
died as a direct result of injuries incurred while in the performance of official
duties, the flag shall be flown at half-staff from the time of death until sunset on
the day of the funeral
• Prepare and file a City Death Notification memorandum to City Central Payroll
• Obtain all City owned property issued to the deceased employee and return the
items to the Police Property Section
• Notify the appropriate employee association (POA, CEA)
6.6.11 VACATION DAYS EXCHANGE
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
222 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sworn personnel may exchange vacation days, subject to the following terms and
conditions:
• Both parties to the exchange shall be willing to make the exchange of vacation
days and shall complete revised vacation schedules (PD Form 1000.007)
• There shall be a limit of one such exchange per year for any officer
• Exchange of vacation days will be kept within the Division, Section, Watch
and/or Detail
• A minimum of five-days’ notice shall be given to each officer’s supervisor
• Supervisors shall approve the vacation days exchange
• Officers may exchange vacation days with officers of the same rank only
• Exchange shall be in exact blocks, with no single days exchanged. The
minimum block of vacation days that may be exchanged shall be five days.
(Four days if the officers are on the four-day work week)
6.6.12 DAYS OFF EXCHANGE
Days off Exchange forms shall be submitted to the Payroll Office at least one week
prior to the exchange-taking place. Additionally, labor cards should indicate in the
remarks column for whom they have exchanged with.
If the Payroll Office does not receive a “Duty Exchange Form” (PD Form 2000.004)
for an officer off without a labor card being submitted, the officer’s time will be
handled consistent with a missing card.
Sworn personnel may exchange days off, subject to the following terms and
conditions:
• Both parties to the exchange must be willing to make the exchange and must
complete PD Form 2000.004
• There will be a limit of one such exchange per month
• Exchanges of days off shall be kept within the Division, Section, Watch and/or
Detail
• A minimum of five-days’ notice must be given to each Officer’s supervisor and
the Payroll Office
• Supervisors shall approve the exchange of days off
• Officers may exchange days off with officers of the same rank only
• Except in the event of illness, an officer must report for the exchanged days off.
An officer who otherwise fails to report shall be carried “no work” and shall be
suspended from participation in the exchange program for one year. In the
event of illness, that officer will still owe the exchange
• Exchanges of days off must be repaid within one calendar year
• No overtime will be allowed when exchanging days off
• Supervisors approving the exchange are responsible for the distribution of the
completed form (PD Form 2000.004)
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
223 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.6.13 DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY – RESERVE POLICE OFFICERS
If a Reserve Police Officer is killed or seriously injured in the line of duty,
procedures out lined in Manual Section 6.6.8, Death/Serious Illness – Employees,
shall apply. In addition, the Police Reserve Coordinator at telephone number 570-
7034 shall be notified.
In the event of the death of an off-duty Reserve Police Officer, requests for
assistance and/or participation by uniformed Reserve Officers shall be directed to
the Reserve Coordinator.
6.6.14 DEATH OF RETIRED EMPLOYEES
In the event of the death of a retired employee, request for assistance or
participation by uniformed officers shall be directed to the Administrator, Personnel
Division. Participation of on-duty Police Officers shall approval and authorization
by the Chief of Police.
A Watch Report item shall be prepared by the Administrator, Personnel Division,
relative to the death and memorial or funeral services for a retired employee.
6.6.15 INJURIES - JOB-INCURRED (IOD)
Revised April 2004
The Administration Bureau has audit responsibility.
GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES OF INJURED EMPLOYEE
• Injured employees, if able, shall immediately report an injury or the recurrence
of a prior injury to their supervisor
• If an injury occurs during business hours and requires medical treatment, the
injured employee should immediately report to the City of Long Beach Health
and Human Services, Occupational Health Division, at 2525 Grand Avenue or,
in an emergency, to the nearest hospital emergency room. The employee shall
advise hospital staff that the injury is job-incurred and he/she is a City
employee. Treatment documentation from the hospital shall be taken, as soon
as practical, to the Occupational Health Division who will provide the employee
with an “Occupational Health Medical Examination Report,” form HL-733.
Upon release, the employee shall deliver the medical examination report to the
Personnel Division, as soon as practical, and a copy to his/her supervisor
• The injured employee shall read the “Occupational Health Medical Examination
Report” provided by the Occupational Health Division. The report will advise
of the work status and any work restrictions for the injured employee
• If an injury occurs after regular hours and requires medical treatment, the
injured employee should report to the nearest hospital emergency room for
treatment. The employee shall advise hospital staff that the injury is job-
incurred and that he/she is a City employee. Treatment documentation from
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
224 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
the hospital shall be taken to the Occupational Health Division, as soon as
practical
• When the injury is severe, paramedics should be requested and, when
necessary, they will transport the injured employee to the appropriate local
hospital
• The injured employee shall keep his/her supervisor(s) informed of his/her work
status
• When treatment is provided by other than Occupational Health, the injured
employee shall cause a written notice from the treating physician to be filed
with Occupational Health, as soon as practical
• The injured employee must obtain a return to work clearance from
Occupational Health (“Occupational Health Medical Examination Report”) prior
to returning to duty from a job-related injury for which medical treatment was
received or time from work was missed
PRIOR INJURY - RECURRENCE OF
• · An on-duty employee shall immediately report a suspected recurrence of an
injury to his/her supervisor. The supervisor shall then file both the State 5020
and SF-372 forms, and the City's "Supervisor's Report of Incident"
• · The date of injury shall be the date of the original injury. The suspected date
of recurrence shall be identified and explained in the body of the report
• · Supervisors should expedite this report by detailing what is known about the
injury without waiting for the doctor's report. On form 5020, item #26, and in
the "Supervisor's Report of Incident," the supervisor shall note any
circumstances that could have contributed to the recurrence. Any additional
information that could assist in determining the validity of a claim should be
included in the "Supervisor's Report of Incident"
• · If the employee is hospitalized, it is the responsibility of the employee's
supervisor to forward all correspondence from the hospital or private doctor to
the Personnel Division who will in turn forward to Occupational Health
OFF-WORK STATUS RESULTING FROM AN INJURY
• Every employee who is injured and off work for more than five work days shall
contact his/her Division Commander, or designee, at least once a week at a
time designated by the Division Commander. The employee shall provide the
Commander or designee with the location and telephone number where he/she
can be reached. It shall be the responsibility of the employee’s Commander,
or designee, to maintain contact with the employee and complete the "Weekly
follow-up Contact with Off-Work IOD Employee"
• An injured employee who is off work on IOD shall inform the treating physician
that modified-duty work is available. The Department is able to provide
modified work to accommodate restrictions
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
225 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• An injured employee who is off work on IOD shall not engage in collateral
employment or other business activities without written permission by the Chief
of Police or his designee
• Sworn employees who are off work on injury status, under certain
circumstances, may be relieved of their duties as a peace officer for the City of
Long Beach during the period of their injury and may not be considered as
acting within the course and scope of their employment. The determination to
relieve an injured employee of peace officer duties during the course of his/her
injury may be made after medical consultation and a Police Department
administrative review relative to the nature and extent of the injury. Relief of
peace officer status when not coupled with a suspension of employment would
not affect time accrued in the Public Employees Retirement System (PERS)
• An injured employee who is taken off work by an emergency room physician
shall retain a copy (original or photocopy) of the emergency room slip and
submit the copy to Occupational Health. If the employee is unable to submit a
copy of the slip due to injury or illness, the employee's supervisor shall deliver
the copy to Occupational Health
NOTE: Occupational Health cannot document an employee as being IOD
retroactively without a copy of the emergency room slip.
• An injured employee shall report from the emergency facility to Occupational
Health on the next business day if he/she is not hospitalized
• An injured employee who is off-work on injury status will remain subject to
discipline for violations of Department policy (refer to Department Manual,
Section 6.6.15)
PERSONAL PHYSICIAN - TREATMENT BY
• In all cases when medical treatment is sought, an injured employee is required
to report to Occupational Health as soon as practical after filing a claim
• Workers' Compensation laws allow an injured employee to be treated by
his/her personal physician provided the employee has previously filed an
authorized "Treatment by Personal Physician for Industrial Injuries" (Form L-
17). Employees with an "L-17" waiver on file shall report to Occupational Health
prior to treatment by their personal physician. An employee who has not filed
Form L-17 may see his/her personal physician 30 days after the injury was
reported
• Personal Physician Defined: A medical doctor who has treated the employee
in the past and retains the employee's past medical records
• Employees shall submit “off-work slips” or “return to work (modified or regular)
slips” received from personal physicians to Occupational Health who will issue
an "Occupational Health Medical Examination Report.” The employee will
deliver this report to the Personnel Division as soon as it is received, and
provide a copy to his/her supervisor
SUPERVISORY REPORTING & INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
226 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
ALL INJURY REPORTS SHALL BE FORWARDED TO THE PERSONNEL
DIVISION WITHIN 24-HOURS OF THE INJURY.
• Whenever an employee reports an injury as job-related, injury report forms
shall be completed by a supervisor with the assistance of the injured employee,
and completed whether or not medical treatment is obtained. Injuries incurred
as a result of collateral employment, or voluntary participation in any off-duty
recreational, social, or athletic activities are not job-related.
• The following reports shall be completed for job-incurred injuries and submitted
to the Personnel Division. Each report shall include all employee identifying
information.
• "Employer's Report of Occupational Injury or Illness" (Form 5020 - SF-314) -
Five, typed copies are required.
• "Supervisor's Report of Incident" - Submit the original and one copy as an
attachment to the "Employer's Report of Occupational Injury or Illness."
• "Employee's Claim for Workers' Compensation Benefits" (Form SF-372) - Form
shall be completed by injured employee and supervisor. If the injured
employee is unavailable or unable to complete the form, the supervisor may
act on the injured employee's behalf and complete the form. On the signature
line write "UNAVAILABLE" and ensure that the employee receives copies of
the benefits form.
• Vehicle Accident - employee injury: A copy of the accident report shall
accompany the forms to the Payroll Office. The "Fleet Safety Officer
Supervisor's Report of Collision" form shall be completed in lieu of the
“Supervisor's Report of Incident.”
• Vehicle Accident - outside jurisdiction: The employee’s supervisor shall obtain
a copy of the accident report from the foreign agency and accompany the forms
to the Payroll Office.
• Arrest Reports: When an injury is sustained as the direct result of making an
arrest, copies of the Arrest Report and Incident Report shall be attached.
• The supervisor shall conduct an investigation and complete the “Supervisor's
Report of Incident” for each reported job-incurred injury. If the injury occurs in
the course of a vehicle accident, the employee injury requires the completion
of the "Fleet Safety Officer Supervisor's Report of Collision" form.
• Supervisors should focus their investigative report on the cause and effect of
the current injury and provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers
of witnesses.
• Stress-related claims shall contain interview results from the injured
employee's supervisor and coworkers relative to the following:
− Changes in assignment, duties, work habits, productivity, or job
behavior;
− Non job-related events that may have contributed to the employee's
stress.
• The filing supervisor shall complete and distribute the forms prior to the end of
watch as follows:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
227 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
− Originals shall be delivered to the Personnel Division. (After normal
business hours, the forms should be deposited in the Personnel Division
door mail slot);
− Copies shall be delivered to the employee's Division Commander;
− Injury documentation is sensitive in nature and shall be treated
confidentially by supervisors. IOD documents and medical examination
reports are not for general viewing or discussion. Any medical
documentation not placed in the employee’s medical file should be
shredded and discarded accordingly.
EXPOSURES
• An exposure is an incident where an employee, in the course of his/her
employment, may ingest, inhale, absorb through the skin or eyes, or otherwise
come into contact with a hazardous substance;
• In all reported exposures, the investigating supervisor shall complete:
• "Employee's Claim for Workers' Compensation Benefits" (Form SF-372);
• "Employer's Report of Occupational Injury or Illness" (Form 5020 – SF-314);
• “Supervisor's Report of Incident.”
WORKERS' COMPENSATION
• The City has a self-insured and administered Workers' Compensation program.
Employees with questions may contact Workers' Compensation at 570-2245,
or the Police Department's Personnel Division at 570-7120.
6.6.15.1 PAY FOR COMPENSABLE TIME AT THE EXPIRATION OF 4850
PAY
Pursuant to Section 4850 of the California Labor Code, law enforcement officers,
firefighters and lifeguards are provided a leave of absence with salary in lieu of
temporary disability or maintenance allowance payment when injured on-duty.
Safety employees who are injured on-duty and exhaust the 4850 pay (maximum
of one year per specific injury) may continue to receive compensation by utilizing
their vacation, holiday, or overtime, if such a request is made in writing on the
approved Department form. Employees who do not make said request in writing
will be carried on a leave of absence until the Worker’s Compensation/Disability
Retirement action is concluded.
4850 Time
When a safety member, injured on-duty, has been placed on temporary disability
under California Labor Code 4850, has filed for disability retirement and exhausted
all time allotted under Section 4850 prior to the City determination as to either grant
or deny the disability retirement, will have his/her leave of absence continued
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
228 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
during the remainder of the period of said disability or until the effective date of
retirement.
Sick time
Section 1.03 of the City Personnel Ordinance prohibits the use of sick leave for
injuries that occur on-duty except where an employee has filed a Worker’s
Compensation claim and the City has yet to accept or reject such claim.
Continuing Compensation
The Department’s Personnel Division will notify an employee on 4850 time a
minimum of two pay periods prior to the expiration of 4850 pay. The employee at
that time may request in writing on the approved Department form to continue
being paid by utilizing any holiday, vacation, or overtime that he/she has
accumulated. In lieu if the signed request form, the employee will be carried on an
authorized leave of absence at the conclusion of the 4850 pay and in any event
after the exhaustion of all compensable time.
6.6.15.2 IOD Employees
Employees on IOD leave shall not engage in collateral employment without written
permission by the Chief of Police pursuant to reference Section 1.7 of the City
• Sworn employees on IOD leave may be relieved of their duties as a peace
officer for the City of Long Beach during the period of their injury and may not
be considered as acting within the course and scope of their employment
• Sworn employees on IOD leave may have their duties as a Peace Officer for
the City of Long Beach modified and shall perform their duties within those
limits
• The determination to relieve an injured employee of Peace Officer duties during
the course of the injury will be made after a medical determination and
administrative review relative to the nature and extent of the injury
• Employees on IOD leave remain subject to discipline for violations of
Department policy
6.6.15.3 MODIFIED DUTY
The Department has identified temporary and permanent modified-duty
assignments for employees who are partially or temporarily disabled.
Modified-duty assignments will be made at the discretion of the Chief of Police
after the Health Department has approved the employee’s return to work, with
medical restrictions.
The positions identified as modified-duty assignments shall be compatible with the
limitations of the employee and the best interest of the Department. The
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
229 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
assignment to a modified-duty position shall not adversely affect an employee’s
ability to promote.
6.6.15.4 TEMPORARY MODIFIED-DUTY (MATERNITY)
Revised April 2004
The Administration Bureau has Audit Responsibility
The Department has identified temporary modified-duty assignments for
employees who are partially or temporarily disabled.
Temporary modified-duty assignments will be made at the discretion of the Chief
of Police after the Health Department has approved the employee’s return to work
with medical restrictions.
The positions identified as modified-duty assignments shall be compatible with the
limitations of the employee and the best interest of the Department. The
assignment to a temporary modified-duty position shall not adversely affect an
employee’s ability to promote.
Procedures for Pregnant Employees
The Pregnancy Discrimination Act, an amendment to Title VII of the Civil Rights
Act of 1964, and the California Fair Employment and Housing Act (FEHA), prohibit
discrimination on the basis of pregnancy. The law prohibits employers from
excluding pregnant women from jobs because of the belief that they are incapable
of doing their jobs or to protect the unborn child. The law states in part:
• Women affected by pregnancy or related conditions must be treated in the
same manner as other employees with similar abilities or limitations
• An employer may not single out pregnancy related conditions for special
procedures to determine an employee’s ability to work
• Pregnant employees must be permitted to work as long as they are able and
willing to perform their duties
• It is unlawful to require or authorize the transfer of pregnant employees to less
strenuous or hazardous positions unless such employee requests a change of
assignment or, they can no longer perform the duties of the position
Determination of Ability to Work
A pregnant employee’s treating physician will determine how long the employee
may continue to work in her present assignment, e.g., Patrol, Jail, etc. and will also
determine job-related work restrictions and limitations. If the employee’s treating
physician imposes job-related restrictions or limitations, the employee is to provide
this information to the Occupational Health Physician who will provide a medical
status report to the Police Department.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
230 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Police Department will allow employees to continue to work in their
assignments as long as they can perform the duties of the job. This includes
continuing to wear the uniform and equipment assigned to them at the time of hire
or replacement through normal attrition. The Department will not provide special
uniforms or other equipment other than that provided to all officers under
Department policy. Supervisors should consult with the Personnel Division for
guidance in implementing this policy.
Confidentiality
It is unlawful to inquire about an employee’s specific medical condition, including
if someone is pregnant. Such medical information is confidential and cannot be
shared except for a strict need-to-know basis.
6.6.16 EMPLOYEE CONDUCT WHILE ON SUSPENSION OR INJURED
ON-DUTY (IOD) LEAVE
Employees on suspension or IOD leave shall retain their status as City of Long
Beach employees and remain subject to the rules, regulations, policies, and
procedures of the City of Long Beach Police Department. Such employees shall
adhere to the following procedures during the period of their suspension or injury
leave.
6.6.16.1 SUSPENDED EMPLOYEES
• Employees on suspension are relieved of their authority, power, and duties as
a Peace Officer for the City of Long Beach during the period of their suspension
and shall not be considered as acting within the course and scope of their
employment during said period
• Employees who are on suspension shall respond to subpoenas issued by a
court or administrative body. Employees may contact the Court Affairs Officer
to obtain the status of cases on which they have been subpoenaed
• Notice of status shall be submitted to the employee by inclusion of appropriate
language in the suspension letter
• Employees on suspension remain subject to discipline for violations of
Department policy
6.6.16.2 SUSPENSION - EMERGENCY
A supervisor or command officer may immediately suspend an employee until the
next business day if, in the considered opinion of that supervisor or command
officer, the integrity or best interest of the Department requires such action
because of the seriousness, peculiarity of circumstances, or possible criminal
nature of the infraction involved.
Follow-up Action
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
231 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
An employee receiving an emergency suspension shall be required to report to the
Administrator, Personnel Division, on the next business day at 0800 hours unless
otherwise directed by proper authority.
The supervisor or command officer imposing the suspension shall also report to
the Administrator, Personnel Division at the same time.
6.6.17 POLICE INVESTIGATOR NON-CAREER
PURPOSE
This revision is an amendment of policy and procedure relative to hiring retired,
non-career police officers.
POLICY
In accordance with the 1999/2000 Salary Resolution for the City, the title will be
Police Investigator, Non-Career. This position has a miscellaneous designation as
it pertains to the Public Employees Retirement System, (PERS) where the former
classification of Police Officer, Non-Career carried the safety designation.
The Police Investigator, Non-Career is designed to utilize the skills of retired or
resigned police personnel who have a desire to remain active in non-emergency
law enforcement duties. The department and community directly benefit from this
program as it relieves career police officers from performing non-emergency
responsibilities and allows them to be more responsive to high priority calls for
service and to allocate more time to proactive patrol.
POSITION DESCRIPTION
The Police Investigator, Non-Career Program provides supplemental support
services throughout the Department in the area of investigative follow-ups and
administrative duties. The Police Investigators, Non-Career will take specified
misdemeanor and felony crime reports, traffic accident reports and provide citizen
advisals/referrals as required. Police Investigators, Non-Career may also be
assigned other responsibilities as needed.
SELECTION PROCEDURES
Eligibility
• Any honorably retired or resigned police officer from this Department or outside
agency
Prior Service Documentation Requirements
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
232 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Applicants shall obtain a letter from their previous employer indicating that they are
an honorably retired or resigned police officer. The letter must also include the
following:
• Applicant is recommended by his/her Department
• Applicant is permitted to carry a concealed weapon (applicant must provide
proof)
• Applicant’s dates of police service
• Applicant’s rank at time of retirement or resignation
BACKGROUND AND INTERVIEW
Background
• Records review of policing agency or county sheriff’s office where applicant
resides
• Review of Department of Motor Vehicles files
• Review of personnel and internal affairs file of agency from which applicant
retired or resigned
• Successful completion of a polygraph exam
• The above requirements will be waived if the applicant was a former Police
Officer with the Long Beach Police Department, has not been separated more
than 90 calendar days, and is approved by the Chief of Police.
• Physical Exam
• A physical exam must be conducted and approved by the Long Beach Health
Department prior to employment for any applicant. This includes any former
City of Long Beach employee who has been separated from the City for more
than one calendar day.
• Interview
• A committee will be established to conduct interviews. The committee will be
comprised of the Personnel Administrator and at least one commander from
the within the Department.
Benefits and Work Hours
• May work up to forty hours per week
• Maximum of 960 hours per calendar year for PERS. retirees and 1000 hours in
a twelve-month period for non PERS employees
• Varied work schedules
• Employee pays into Social Security system
• Non-career employees are not entitled to any benefits, such as paid sick leave,
vacation, holidays, or insurance as provided by the City of Long Beach
6.6.18 SICK LEAVE INCENTIVE/RECOGNITION PROGRAM
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
233 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Department employees who do not use their sick leave for a specified six-month
period will receive a gift certificate for $25.00 from a participating restaurant or
grocery store of their choice. Under this program, an employee is eligible to
receive a maximum total of $50.00 per year, per employee.
The specified six-month periods will be tracked as follows:
• January 1 at 0001 hours through June 30 at 2400 hours
• July 1 at 0001 hours through December 31 at 2400 hours
Employee Qualifications
To qualify for this program, the employee must be in a permanent full time status.
The employee can use NO sick leave, sick family, authorized leave (no pay),
unauthorized leave (no pay), or leave of absence. Usage of vacation, holiday,
overtime, bereavement leave, or job injury will not affect the employee’s
attendance record.
Personnel Division Responsibilities
Personnel Division shall administer the process and notify eligible employees.
Upon notification, employees shall personally obtain the certificates from the
Payroll Office.
6.6.19 SAFETY POLICY & PROCEDURES
Revised 09/10, 2003
The Administration Bureau has audit responsibility.
Safety in the workplace is the responsibility of all employees. The Department
is committed to providing the safest possible working conditions for all
employees and recognizes that an effective safety program is an essential step
in achieving this goal.
Responsibility of Safety Program
The Personnel Division coordinates the Police Department's Safety Program with
the Division Administrator as the coordinator. The Police Department Safety
Coordinator is responsible for assisting with the implementation and maintenance
of the Safety Program, facilitating safety training and records maintenance. The
Safety Coordinator organizes meetings of the Department Safety Committee.
• The Safety Committee is composed of Lead Floor Wardens and other
designated personnel. The committee provides assistance in monitoring
the safety program, investigates and reviews assigned accidents, oversees
emergency preparedness, and advises management on safety and health
concerns
• Floor Wardens have the responsibility and authority to assist with the safe
and orderly evacuation of Police facilities during emergencies or safety
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
234 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
drills. The Personnel Division coordinates Floor Warden training
Safety Inspections
The Personnel Division coordinates monthly safety inspections. The purpose of
safety inspections is not to find fault, but to promote a safe and healthy work
environment for all employees. Occasional deficient areas are to be expected and,
in fact, will indicate a thorough inspection actually occurred.
Employee Responsibilities
• Every employee is responsible for compliance with safety regulations and
for continuously practicing safety while performing his or her duties
• Employees who willfully violate safety and health work practices may be
subject to disciplinary action
• Employees are required to report unsafe or unhealthful conditions to their
supervisor. See the Employee Hazard Notification form that follows
Supervisor Responsibilities
• Supervisors are responsible for promoting safe and healthful work practices
among employees under their supervision. Supervisors will communicate
occupational safety and health information to employees via written
procedures and other documentation, staff meetings, formal or informal
training, or postings
• Supervisors will ensure that employees receive appropriate training in their
assignment to accomplish assigned tasks in a safe manner. Employees will
not be assigned to potentially hazardous work until having completed
appropriate training. It is understood that different job classifications are
exposed to different hazards. Appropriate safety training will be provided in
all the following circumstances:
− To all new and recently transferred employees;
− Whenever new substances, processes, procedures, or equipment that
represent a hazard are introduced into the workplace;
− Whenever a new or previously unrecognized hazard is recognized to be
a hazard
• Supervisors will thoroughly investigate all reported injuries and health and
safety concerns, and will take the necessary action, in a timely manner, to
remedy reported conditions. Supervisors will take corrective action when
unsafe or unhealthful conditions are observed, discovered, or present an
imminent hazard
− When an imminent hazard exists that cannot be immediately abated
without endangering employees and/or property, the supervisor will
immediately evacuate all personnel from the area, except those
necessary to correct the hazardous condition. No employee may enter
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
235 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
such an area unless the employee is authorized, properly trained, and
utilizes protective equipment
• All corrective action will be documented. If such corrective action is beyond
the supervisor's authority or ability, the supervisor will promptly make
appropriate notification to the command officer who has the authority to
correct the hazard. When corrective action cannot be remedied during the
same shift, the information will be conveyed to the next shift
Whistle Blowing
If, after following established reporting procedures, the employee believes there is
a need for further notification, the employee may contact the City Safety Officer at
the Employee Safety Hotline, at telephone (562) 570-6476. Employees may also
fill out and submit the “Employee Hazard Notification Form;” copies should be
available on the facility bulletin board used for display of OSHA posters and safety
information. This form may also be found on the City Intranet under “Human
Resources,” “Safety,” “Forms,” “Employee Hazard Notification,” or a copy may be
requested from the Department Safety Coordinator (see sample form on next
page). Such reporting of unsafe conditions to the City Safety Officer is handled in
strict confidence and provides anonymity for the reporting employee. Employees
who report unsafe conditions will not be disciplined or otherwise harassed.
EMPLOYEE HAZARD NOTIFICATION
All City employees should use this form to anonymously report safety concerns,
unsafe conditions, or unsafe practices in their area. This form can be turned into
the Personnel Division or to the City Safety Officer in City Hall. Employees are
encouraged to report the hazard to their direct supervisor before reporting the
hazard to the City Safety Officer. The City will investigate any report or question
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
236 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
as required by the Injury and Illness Prevention Program Standard 8 CCR Section
3203.
To be completed by employee:
Department: Bureau/Section:
Describe in detail the nature of the safety concern:
Where is the exact location of the concern?
What are the causes or contributing factors of the concern?
Where appropriate, list names of individuals involved:
Employee suggestion for correction of safety concern:
To be completed by City Safety Officer:
City Safety Officer’s suggestions and/or corrective actions:
Person contacted for correction:
City Safety Officer’s Signature Date
Notification Procedures
The Administrator of the Personnel Division will be notified of all major safety-
related incidents that occur during regular business hours, and should be
consulted when safety issues arise in which appropriate corrective action is
difficult to determine or achieve. Routine, non-emergency safety maintenance
issues, such as open ceiling tiles, will be reported to the Personnel Division.
City Safety Officer
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
237 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Per established City guidelines, the handling supervisor will immediately, or as
soon as is practical, notify the City Safety Officer, during business hours at 570-
6476 or after hours at (888) 425-4707, when any of the following incidents
occur:
• Any time a Department employee is involved in a work-related incident and
paramedics respond, whether or not the employee is transported to the
hospital;
• Any time a City employee is involved in a work-related incident and the
employee receives treatment beyond simple first aid;
• Any time the Fire Department or Police Department responds to an
emergency such as a fire, bomb threat, hazardous material spill or rescue
at a City facility;
• Any incident involving major damage to City property, facilities, or
equipment (including vehicles);
• Any time a Cal/OSHA inspector arrives at a workplace;
• Any time an incident with serious potential liability to the City has occurred,
including on-duty injury traffic collisions.
Safety Records Retention
The Personnel Division maintains records of building safety inspections and
health and safety incidents.
• Records must be archived in active files for a minimum of three years and
in long-term storage indefinitely
• Bureau, Division, and individual offices will retain inspection checklists for
one year
6.6.20 MARITAL POLICY – WORK ASSIGNMENTS
POLICY
City of Long Beach Administrative Regulation Number 32-1, Article 5, Section D
states as follows:
"Except as provided hereunder, an employment decision shall not be based on
whether an individual has a spouse presently employed by the City. However, for
business reasons of supervision, safety, security or morale, as determined by the
City Manager, no spouse shall be appointed or promoted to a position in any
department in which the other spouse would be placed in an employment
relationship in which either would have the capacity or authority to control the
employment circumstances of the other, or where one spouse would be in a
position to audit or evaluate the performance of the other, or where a potential
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PERSONNEL
238 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
conflict of interest or other hazards greater for married couples than for other
persons."
Management Responsibility
Department managers shall ensure spouses, sworn or civilian, are not assigned to
the same Division or work in such close proximity to create a potential conflict of
interest for the Department. Management will be especially conscious of this policy
during the deployment process so as not to create undue stress upon spouses.
The deputy chiefs shall review any exceptions to this policy, with input from the
Long Beach City Attorney and Human Resources Department. The Chief of Police
will make the final decision.
SCOPE
This policy applies to all legally married spouses employed by the Long Beach
Police Department and includes all sworn ranks and civilian classifications.
REGULATION
Either spouse may voluntarily transfer from an assignment defined as conflictive
to another Department position approved by the Chief of Police. If neither spouse
volunteers, the involuntary transfer policy for POA members will apply to the junior
member in seniority. For civilian personnel, the Department will attempt to find an
assignment least disruptive to Department operations.
Future Marriages
If employees assigned to the same division marry, one spouse must transfer.
There will be no circumstances to invoke involuntary transfers from the effective
date of this policy. For personnel choosing to marry, one of the newly married
spouses will be required to transfer to another location within the Department.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
239 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.7 SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
6.7.1 PURCHASE REQUISITIONS
The Fiscal Division, shall review all requisitions. After review, the requisitions shall
either be forwarded to the Chief of Police or his designee for final authorization, or
returned to the requesting Division for further justification.
Requisitions for consultant/professional services over $20,000.00 require prior City
Council approval.
All requisitions shall be submitted on City of Long Beach “Requisition for Purchase”
form #SF-224, Rev. 10/81. Refer to the Budget Section at telephone number 570-
7445 for processing.
6.7.2 ASSIGNMENT & CONTROL OF PATROL VEHICLES
The Watch Commander will be responsible for the assignment if patrol vehicles for
the oncoming shift, logging vehicle assignments and recording any observed
damage.
The Administration Bureau, Fleet Section, will be responsible for patrol vehicle
maintenance, tracking patrol vehicles removed from the premises for maintenance
or repair.
Watch Commander Responsibility
• Evaluate all use requests. Approve or deny each request depending upon the
appropriateness of the request and the availability of patrol vehicles. All non-
patrol use of patrol vehicles will be subordinate to the requirements of
oncoming patrol shifts.
Patrol Officer Responsibilities
• If your choice of a vehicle is B.O., open the hood and place a note on the dash
indicating the problem
• If you already logged into service and discover a vehicle malfunction, request,
and obtain approval from a Field Sergeant or the Watch Commander to
exchange you assigned vehicle. Malfunctions, which do not affect the tactical
operation of the vehicle, will not be sufficient for requesting approval. Upon
receiving approval to exchange the vehicle, complete a “Vehicle Malfunction”
form (PD Form 4300.002) and have the form initialed by the approving
supervisor. Raise the hood of the disabled vehicle and place the white copy of
the malfunction form on the dash. Submit the yellow copy to the Watch
Commander who shall place it into the Fleet Officer’s box.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
240 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Fleet Officer/Lot Security Officers Responsibilities
• Ensure that an adequate number of patrol vehicles are serviced, cleaned, and
fueled for the oncoming patrol shifts. Vehicles with special equipment shall be
monitored closely to ensure an appropriate number is available for patrol at all
times
• Require individuals removing a patrol vehicle from the lot for service or repair
to check out the vehicle from the lot security officer. The lot security officer will
remove the shotgun from the vehicle and update the vehicle status board prior
to releasing the vehicle. The lot security officer shall promptly notify the Fleet
Officer of any unsafe vehicle or equipment identified during daily lot operations
6.7.3 VEHICLES – PATROL
Replacement - Black and White Vehicles
The first priority for assignment of new patrol vehicles will be to the Patrol Divisions.
Each Patrol Division is assigned a new patrol vehicle for each current vehicle taken
out of service after:
• Reaching its maximum life and mileage of four-years and 95,000 miles
• The vehicle is totaled from an accident, or
• The vehicle is deemed to not be pursuit capable by Fleet Services.
• Patrol Sergeant SUV's follow the same guidelines as above.
Decal Identifiers
Patrol vehicles shall be identified by decal markings on the roof of the vehicle and
on the left portion of the trunk showing the vehicle unit number. Decals with the
Patrol Division's name shall be placed on both rear quarter panels. Patrol
supervisor units shall be marked with the appropriate rank under the divisional
decals.
Replacement – Solid Vehicles
Solid (single paint color) vehicles are replaced on a seven-year, 95,000-mile
rotation or as deemed necessary by the PD fleet coordinators.
Decal Identifiers
These vehicles will have the vehicle unit numbers placed inside the fuel door.
Specialty Vehicles
All divisions, on an as needed basis, shall share vehicles such as booking vans
and community policing vehicles. Keys to these vehicles are to be obtained from
their assigned division.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
241 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Maintenance Deficiencies - "B.O.” Vehicles
Vehicles requiring service shall immediately be identified with a Condition Report
form. One copy of the form shall be left on top of the dashboard inside the car and
the other copy shall be delivered to the appropriate location as designated by each
division.
Mobile Work Station (MWS) Problems
If working dayshift, contact the Records and Technology Section to see if someone
is available to fix the problem. If someone is available to fix the MWS, take the
vehicle to be fixed during your shift. Afternoon units shall also attempt to get the
issues fixed before 1700 hours. If after-hours or on a holiday or weekend,
complete a Condition Report form and place one copy on the dash and the other
copy in the Divisional Administrative Officer's in-box.
Radio or Public Address System Problems
During normal business hours, take the car directly to the radio shop to be worked
on while you are on-duty. If after hours or on a holiday or weekend, park and lock
the vehicle with hood up and complete the Condition Report. Place one copy on
the dash and the other copy in the Divisional Administrative Officer's in-box.
Cleanliness
Each officer is responsible for keeping his/her vehicle's interior clean. At the end
of each shift, officers shall remove all trash and personal items from the vehicle.
Day and afternoon officers have the responsibility of taking vehicles to the contract
car wash locations for cleaning.
Coming Out of Service
Officers returning from their shift should fill the vehicle with fuel prior to their E.O.W.
This allows the on-coming shift to immediately respond to calls for service.
6.7.4 VEHICLE SYSTEM & MAINTENANCE
ALL Department employees requesting a Patrol Bureau vehicle, with the exception
of oncoming Patrol Shift Team Lieutenants/Sergeants, shall be directed to the
Watch Commander for authorization. All non-Patrol uses will be subordinate to
the needs of oncoming Patrol Shifts.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
242 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The scheduling Lieutenant/Sergeant will be contacted prior to each Section squad
meeting to determine the number of vehicles required. Instances of vehicle
shortages will be resolved prior to the conclusion of the squad meeting.
Ensure team officers deploy from the police parking lot and clear for calls for
service within 15 minutes subsequent to the Section squad meeting.
Scheduling Lieutenant/Sergeant Responsibilities
• Provide the Watch Commander with the number of vehicles required prior to
each Section squad meeting
• Provide an updated “Patrol Division Assignment” sheet to the Property Staff at
1130 hours, 1930 hours, and 2330 hours daily
Team Lieutenant Responsibilities
• Ensure that the Team Sergeants perform their function as outlined
• Conduct weekly audits and document the audit results in the Station
Commander’s log
Team Sergeant Responsibilities
• Perform a minimum of one audit during their Shift of a team officer’s vehicle
and determine any equipment problems or body damage. Ensure that the
vehicle matches the assigned vehicle number. Briefly describe the inspection
in the “Field Performance Audit” form
Team Officer Responsibilities
• Patrol vehicles shall be assigned at the completion of the Section squad
meeting. Specific vehicles will not be requested
• Immediately notify the Watch Commander if you are unable to locate the
vehicle assigned
• Prior to entering service, report any vehicle damage, and/or contraband found
in the vehicle to the Watch Commander
• Complete the procedure for logging on within 15 minutes subsequent to the
Section squad meeting
• The vehicle shall be returned to the line when filing until end of watch, training,
or assigned to Station duty until the end of watch
Gas Pump/Lot Security Officer Responsibilities
• Complete the “Vehicle Status Log” when other City Departments remove Patrol
Bureau vehicles for maintenance and sign off the log when vehicles are
returned. The Fleet Section Officer, Administration Bureau shall be advised of
any vehicle removed for more than 24 hours
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
243 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Promptly inform the Administration Bureau, Fleet Section Officer of any unsafe
vehicle or equipment conditions that are identified during daily parking lot
operations
Vehicle Maintenance or Exchange
• Request approval from the Station Commander or Team Sergeant/Lieutenant
to exchange the assigned vehicle. Malfunctions which do not affect the tactical
operation of the vehicle will not be sufficient reason for requesting approval
• Upon receiving approval to exchange the vehicle, the requesting officer will
complete a Vehicle Malfunction form (PD Form 4300.002) and have the form
initialed by the approving supervisor. The completed form will be submitted to
the Watch Commander and a copy placed in the vehicle, and vehicle’s hood
raised
6.7.5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF SURVEILLANCE VEHICLES
The Fleet Section shall be responsible for the purchase and assignment of
surveillance vehicles. Each detail, section, et cetera, assigned surveillance
vehicles shall designate a vehicle coordinator. Vehicle coordinators shall be
responsible for vehicle maintenance, conducting a weekly inspection of assigned
vehicles, completing a monthly mileage report, coordinating routine and preventive
maintenance and advising the Fleet Section of problems or circumstances that
require attention.
Procedure
The operation of surveillance vehicles shall adhere to the following guidelines:
• Vehicles shall be used for surveillance or undercover investigations only
• Vehicles should not be used for routine patrol, transporting prisoners or any
function that would destroy undercover capacity
• Officers shall contact patrol officers for assistance in the event that a suspect
vehicle must be stopped, unless impractical
• Vehicles shall not be taken home without prior written approval by the Bureau
Chief. The written approval will then be forwarded to the office of the Chief of
Police not later that the next business day
• Officers shall not use surveillance vehicles assigned to other details, sections,
et cetera, without cooperative authorization from respective coordinators
• Vehicles shall be driven in accordance with the California Vehicle Code and
within the parameters of the Long Beach Police Department rules and
regulations
• Keys and duplicate keys shall be maintained by the detail to which the vehicle
is assigned
Vehicle Repair & Maintenance
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
244 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Surveillance shall be fueled at the police station using fuel cards assigned to
officers using the vehicles. The City garage will not maintain surveillance vehicles.
The City garage will perform only minor or safety related repairs on request. All
other repair and maintenance shall be secured through a private vendor.
Information regarding fuel cards is available shall require prior approval from Fleet
Section.
Vehicle service and maintenance shall be the responsibility of each Detail’s vehicle
coordinator. It is recommended that the vehicles are service every 3,000 miles
and preventive maintenance completed every 18,000 miles. Preventive
maintenance includes checking fluid levels, belts, shocks, brakes, tires and
completion of a major tune up.
Traffic Accidents
Traffic accidents involving surveillance vehicles are processed consistent with the
procedures for other City owned vehicles. A copy of the accident report shall be
forwarded to the Administration Bureau.
6.7.6 DUAL PURPOSE VEHICLES
Dual-purpose vehicles are assigned to the Fleet Section. The vehicles are
authorized for use by sworn personnel only and shall be operated under the
following procedures.
Dual-purpose vehicles are plain vehicles equipped with a red beam spotlight to the
front, siren, and blue and amber warning lights to the rear.
• Personnel: Officers from the Detective and Patrol Bureaus may operate dual-
purpose vehicles. Other Departmental personnel may use the vehicles by
requesting them through the Budget Management Division, Fleet Management
Section
• Vehicle Log: Dual-purpose vehicles shall be checked out prior to use by
completing a log entry and obtaining vehicle keys. The vehicle log and keys
are maintained between 0600-1800 hours at the pump house and in the Watch
Commander’s Office between 1800-0600 hours. After using a vehicle, officers
shall return the vehicle to its assigned parking space, return the keys and
complete the log entry
• Parking: Designated parking spaces have been identified in the diagonal
parking between Magnolia Avenue and the fuel pumps to the rear of the Public
Safety Building. The vehicles shall be parked in their assigned spaces
6.7.6.1 EMERGENCY OPERATION
Vehicle Stops
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
245 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Dual-purpose vehicles shall not be primarily used for traffic violation
enforcement
• Uniformed personnel may initiate traffic stops for Vehicle Code violation as a
part of their regularly assigned duties
• Non-uniformed personnel shall request a black and white field unit prior to
investigative or traffic stops
6.7.7 TAKE HOME VEHICLES
The following personnel shall have the option of accepting an assigned police
vehicle on a permanent basis or being compensated per City Administrative
Regulation 4-2:
• Chief of Police
• Deputy Chief of Police
• Commander
• Food Services Administrator
• Information Management Administrator
Vehicle(s) may be assigned for take home use by the following personnel/section:
• Labor Relations Lieutenant
• Academy Lieutenant
• SWAT Tactical Sergeant
• Homicide Detail Sergeants/On-Call Teams
• Accident Investigation
• Internal Affairs Section
• Sex Crimes Detail On-Call Teams
A Bureau Chief may assign a vehicle to be taken home when such action will
satisfy a Department need. An assignment of a vehicle in this manner shall be on
a day-to-day basis. The involved Division Commander shall maintain a record of
all such assignments and a copy forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police.
This record shall include the date, vehicle number, officer to whom the vehicle was
assigned, and the purpose for which the vehicle was used.
6.7.8 DEPARTMENT VEHICLES
Employees shall not use any Department vehicles without the permission of a
Commanding Officer. Department vehicles shall not be used for personal business
or pleasure.
Transporting Citizens
Citizens will not be transported in Department vehicles except when necessary to
accomplish a police or official City purpose. Such transportation will be done in
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
246 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
conformance with Department policy or at the direction of a command officer,
immediate supervisor, or the employee in charge of Communications.
6.7.9 ACCIDENTS INVOLVING CITY VEHICLES
When a City vehicle is involved in an accident within the City limits, the City
Attorney’s Office shall be notified immediately. Whenever possible, officers shall
leave the accident scene “as is” until the arrival of investigators from the City
Attorney’s Office so that photographs can be taken. However, there may be some
instances where the discretion of the officer at the scene would dictate that traffic
flow is of more importance than preserving the evidence.
Whenever the presence of a City Attorney’s investigator is required, the call will be
placed to the Public Service dispatcher who will then be responsible for dispatching
an investigator. After hours, the Communications Center will contact the
investigator at his/her home. However, there will be instances when the City
Attorney’s investigator is not available or does not deem the accident to be serious
enough to warrant his/her presence. In such instances the dispatcher should
inform the unit or supervisor at the scene immediately.
When the accident occurs on the freeway system within the City limits, the City of
Signal Hill, or areas of close proximity to the City, such as, Wilmington or
Lakewood, the City Attorney’s Office should be called immediately and a
supervisor dispatched to the scene. It will be the responsibility of the supervisor
dispatched to the scene to secure the necessary information for a City Property
Damage Report and to make any further investigation necessary, taking into
consideration the investigation and reporting procedures of the police agency
handling.
If the accident occurs well beyond the City limits, do not contact the City Attorney
except in extreme situations. If the seriousness of the situation warrants it, where
police personnel are involved, the Watch Commander may send a supervisor to
the scene no matter how remote the location may be. Any injury accident
information is to be forwarded to the City Attorney’s office as soon as practicable.
When accident reports involving any City equipment are taken, officers shall refrain
from writing a “conclusion” or “opinion” as to whose fault the accident was, not
should either driver be cited.
6.7.10 ASSET INVENTORY, CONTROL & ACCOUNTABILITY
Revised 06-29-2009
The Administration Bureau has audit responsibility.
Background
The Police Department is allocated the resources and assets needed to perform
the mission of ensuring public safety. Each piece of equipment (subject to
valuation criteria defined below) procured for the use of the Police Department
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
247 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
should be maintained, managed and regularly inventoried by the Department.
While every employee of the Long Beach Police Department bears responsibility
for the proper use, care and custody of the equipment provided to them, the
ultimate responsibility and accountability for the assets assigned and/or
deployed within the Division rests with the Division Commander or
Administrator.
Purpose
The purpose of this Manual Section is to define the processes and procedures to
be used throughout the Police Department to identify, track, account for, and
manage the Department’s Asset Inventory. This section does not supersede or
take the place of existing City requirements for asset tracking and reporting.
Asset Identification
Police Department serialized asset criteria generally include items with a purchase
price or asset value of greater than fifty dollars ($50.00), or a high potential for
loss, theft, misuse or any serialized property. Examples of asset categories
covered by this Section include, but are not limited to the following:
• Any and all weapons, including less-lethal weapons, and ammunition stores
• Individually issued field use and protective equipment (including riot gear)
• Radios, batteries and battery chargers
• Vehicles, aircraft and boats (associated equipment and their contents)
• Consumable items purchased in bulk (aggregate cost qualifies the item)
• Bicycles and Segways (and associated equipment)
• Electronic analog and digital communications equipment (telephones, cellular
telephones, pagers, Blackberries, etc.)
• Office equipment and software (computers, peripherals, copiers, fax machines,
scanners, etc.)
• Audio-visual equipment (televisions, cable boxes, video cassette recorders
[VCR’s], DVD players, projectors, stereos, tape recorders, cameras and
recording devices, etc.)
• Furniture and appliances (refrigerators, microwaves, desks, chairs, credenzas,
file cabinets, workstations, lamps, tables, etc.)
• Specialized equipment such as forensic and/or crime scene equipment, K-9
training devices and/or narcotics, radar guns, intoximeters, radio scanners, bolt
cutters, bullhorns, etc.
• Homeland Security First Responder equipment and disaster stores
Assets in the categories listed above will be identified by serial number, asset
number, and/or owner applied number and listed in the Department’s (MCM
Technologies) Inventory Database (DIDB).
Acquisition
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
248 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Consistent with the procurement process, the new or replacement asset will be
delivered to the requesting division(s) prior to redistribution. Upon acceptance from
the vendor, the Shipping and Receiving Clerk/Storekeeper (Fiscal Division) or the
Division making the acquisition will complete the Equipment Inventory Control
Form (PD Form 2000.025) and will ensure qualifying assets be added to the DIDB.
Acquisition and distribution of perishable assets (toner, batteries, and cassette
tapes) shall be controlled and recorded as used in a manner consistent with the
direction of the appropriate Bureau.
Each Division Commander or Administrator will maintain their assets within the
DIDB, which lists, by category, each asset assigned to the Division. Bureau Chiefs
shall maintain the Bureau Office assets within the DIDB, as well as those assets
assigned to Sections reporting directly to the Bureau Chief. When new or
replacement assets are received from the Storekeeper, the asset information will
be added to the DIDB via Equipment Inventory Control Form (PD Form 2000.025).
The Equipment Inventory Control Form will be provided to the Administration
Bureau within four (4) working days of receipt; the appropriate Division and Bureau
shall retain a copy of each for inspection and audit purposes. New or replacement
assets shall be entered into the DIDB within four (4) days. These records shall be
maintained until the Bureau Chief or the Chief of Police authorizes disposal.
Tracking
Each Division Commander or Administrator is responsible for tracking all assigned
assets. The DIDB shall be kept current and made available for immediate
inspection. Tracking frequency shall be consistent with the type of item or type of
stores to be tracked. The process for establishing and maintaining the asset
tracking system in each Division is provided by the initial inventory and thereafter
updating the DIDB by completing the Equipment Inventory Control Form (PD Form
2000.025). Each Bureau shall ensure that corrections are performed in the DIDB
upon notice. This responsibility is non-transferable.
The inventory shall at minimum include:
• Description of equipment (manufacturer’s specification or plain language)
• Make
• Model
• Serial Number/City Asset Number/Owner Applied Number
• Physical location
• Division/Section/Detail
• Employee, Supervisor and/or Manager assigned the asset
• Expiration date (if applicable)
Inventory
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
249 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
In this manual section, the term “inventory” has two meanings, as it relates to asset
management. “Inventory” refers to the actual list of assets assigned to the Bureau
Chief, Division Commander, or Administrator. The second refers to the act of
physical counting or the verification of the individual assets, which is the focus of
this paragraph. The schedule of physical inventories is dictated by several factors,
including:
• The type of asset
• The value of the asset
• The potential impact of the loss or theft of the asset
• The frequency of change of sub custody of the asset
• The history of asset replacement due to loss or theft
• Items on a fixed replacement cycle (vests, filters, etc.)
At a minimum, a complete inventory of all assigned assets will be conducted
annually. Results of these annual inventories will be reported to the Chief of Police,
via the appropriate Bureau Chief, as an attachment to the Management
Performance Planning, Review and Appraisal (MPPRA) of each Bureau Chief,
Division Commander or Administrator. An inventory of department-issued personal
equipment shall be conducted at least semiannually.
A complete inventory of all assigned assets is also mandated prior to any
change of command for a Division or Bureau. The Change of Command
Inventory must be conducted jointly by the incoming and outgoing Bureau Chief,
Commander or Administrator, and forwarded to the Chief of Police, via the
appropriate Bureau Chief. The memo shall document discrepancies and
corrective measures taken for accountability.
Fixed asset inventories shall be conducted as requested by the Department of
Financial Management and are in addition to the Police Department's normal
inventory processes.
Accountability
While the overall responsibility and accountability for the asset inventory rests with
the Division Commander or Administrator, every Police Department employee who
is issued or otherwise provided an asset to carry out their assigned tasks assumes
a share of that responsibility and accountability.
Each Division Commander or Administrator shall track the individual employee’s
assets by having the employee complete the Personal Equipment Inventory Form
(PD Form 2000.026) on an annual basis or as scheduled. Upon transfer of an
employee to a new Division, the old Division/Detail shall retain and reissue the
Division/Detail asset. Upon transfer, reassignment or separation of employment,
the employee shall surrender all issued or assigned asset(s) unless prior written
authorization has been obtained by the Bureau Chief or the Chief of Police, or
designee.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
250 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Compliance
The Chief of Police has designated maintenance and control of inventory and
support systems a Command Staff responsibility. The Administration Bureau
shall be responsible to maintain the Police Department’s inventory record-keeping
system, coordinating the physical audit of the Department’s fixed assets and
forwarding recommendations. Periodic inspection and review requires the active
participation of a designated Lieutenant, Sergeant or Administrative Officer in each
Bureau/Division/Unit or office to focus on compliance with this policy. The
designated employee will facilitate a physical count and inspection as needed to
comply with this policy in accordance with reporting timelines. Administrative rights
of access to the DIDB will be restricted to employees and managers tasked with
reporting, maintenance, inspection and auditing the process. The Organizational
Review Unit or others will conduct independent compliance reviews, audits and
inspections as designated by the Chief of Police.
• It shall be the responsibility of each Bureau Chief to ensure a standardized
system of asset inventory accountability, control, and management is in place
and functioning in their Bureau. Bureau Chiefs, Division Commanders and
Administrators will be held accountable for the asset inventory assigned to their
Bureaus/Divisions. They shall designate an individual, by name, to coordinate
inventory, complete the Equipment Inventory Control Form (PD Form
2000.025) and to reconcile acquisitions not captured by the Storekeeper; this
includes transfer or disposal of equipment, or to report lost/missing equipment.
For lost or missing equipment, a crime or property report or memorandum shall
be filed as necessary. Technical support, maintenance, formatting and training
for the DIDB are the responsibility of the Information Technology Section.
6.7.11 DELETED PER PROJECT 20170042COP 11/10/17
6.7.12 AUTOMATED VEHICLE LOCATION (AVL) POLICY
It is the policy of this Department to use Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL)
technology for the purpose of officer safety, improved response to Calls for Service
(CFS) and improved command and control of critical Department resources.
AVL SYSTEM USE
Communications Personnel Responsibilities
• Maintain AVL location data as confidential information that will only be used for
officer safety and determining the nearest available units for CFS or otherwise
necessary. Specific unit location information shall not be discussed or
communicated to any other person unless directed by a Communications
Supervisor.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
251 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Utilize the AVL system to locate officers needing assistance
• Utilize the AVL system when possible to determine the nearest available unit
for high priority calls
• Utilize the AVL system to properly maintain field unit locations. Should a field
unit location in Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD) not properly match the AVL
location, the assigned dispatcher shall contact the field unit on their radio
channel and confirm the unit status and location information
Patrol Personnel Responsibilities
• Personnel shall not unplug, disconnect, or otherwise tamper with any AVL
system component that might render AVL non-functional
• Properly log onto the MDT utilizing the standard log-on process via the MDT
air card connection unless directed otherwise by the Watch Commander or
Communications. Logging onto an MDT via the Vehicle Radio Modem (“VRM”)
connection without authorization will constitute misconduct.
• Properly maintain their unit status and location information to prevent
discrepancies between CAD location information and AVL location information.
Management/Supervisory Personnel Responsibilities
• Ensure that the AVL system is primarily used for officer safety, improved
response to calls for service and enhanced command and control of field
resources
• Address any issues with field personnel not properly maintaining their status or
location information in CAD
• Address any issues of AVL users tampering with AVL equipment or otherwise
disabling or circumventing the functionality of the AVL system
AVL SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
Communications Section Responsibilities
• Maintain the AVL system in good working order
• Ensure that AVL system data is properly stored for a three-year record retention
period
• Ensure that AVL data is properly destroyed once the AVL data has exceeded
the three-year retention period
ACCESS TO HISTORICAL AVL INFORMATION (AVL PLAYBACK)
The AVL Playback Module allows the redisplay or playback of stored AVL history
data on a digital CAD map. This component of the AVL system can be used to
search historical data by time or unit. Either the Watch Commander or the
Emergency Operations Division Commander can grant supervisory access to the
AVL playback module. It should be noted that access to the AVL playback module
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department SUPPLIES & MAINTENANCE
252 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
during non-business hours requires the call-out of a Communications Section
system administrator.
6.7.13 TACTICAL BLANKETS
Revised January 30, 2013
Reviewed January 2020
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
DEFINITION
A tactical blanket, also referred to as a ballistic shield, is a lightweight ballistic fabric
designed to provide a protective barrier against most handgun ammunition up to
.44 magnum. Tactical blankets are designed for portability, and for quick and easy
deployment in high-risk situations.
POLICY
Tactical blankets will be distributed to the Patrol Bureau, Investigations Bureau and
Support Bureau. Each bureau will deploy all available assigned tactical blanket(s)
in the field for response to emergency situations. Sergeants and officers assigned
a tactical blanket shall note the presence of the tactical blanket in their unit history.
Bureaus will inspect their tactical blankets quarterly to ensure the equipment is in
good working order. Each division will be responsible for auditing tactical blankets
on their asset inventory.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
253 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.8 TRAINING
6.8.2 TRAINING – MANDATORY & REQUIRED
The Department shall ensure the scheduling of all personnel in mandatory and
required training. The Department shall fulfill the requirements of state law,
municipal ordinance, and Department training policy, including, but not limited to
California Penal Code Section 13518 which requires that all sworn personnel
receive retraining in Cardio-Pulmonary Resuscitation and First Aid every three
years. Additionally, supplemental training on Domestic Violence must be provided
not later than January 1, 1989, to sworn personnel. Excluded from this
requirement are officers whose duties are primarily clerical or administrative, a
minimum of 90% of the time.
Police Officers, Corporal and Sergeants shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of in-
service training every two years. Peace Officer Standards and Training (POST)
mandates that Sergeants have 80 hours of supervisory course training and
Lieutenants have 80 hours of management training. Every effort will be made to
ensure this training is provided immediately prior to promotion.
It shall be the responsibility of the Administrator, Personnel and the Commander,
Training Division, to ensure that all mandatory training is completed within the
prescribed period of time.
It shall be the responsibility of the Commander, Police Academy, to plan,
implement, coordinate, and provide written documentation of all Department
Training.
6.8.2(A) ATTENDANCE AT TRAINING
Attendance at training is a duty assignment. An employee’s conduct can bring
credit or discredit to the employee and the Department. Personnel attending
training, on- or off-site, will adhere to the following.
PROCEDURES
General Behavior
Prohibited Conduct
• Making obscene, racial, sexual, or insubordinate comments.
• Smoking or use of smokeless tobacco products in classrooms or office areas
at training locations
• Reading of non-course-related materials during training.
• Placing of feet on furniture.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
254 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Punctuality & Attendance
• Be at the training location and in class at the appointed time.
• Limit breaks and lunch to the prescribed time
• Obtain prior permission from the sergeant or supervisor coordinating the
training to be absent for any reason. The training sergeant or supervisor will
determine if the absent student needs to repeat the entire training or the training
module
• Any unexcused absence will be explained by the absent employee in a
memorandum written to the Academy Lieutenant, with a copy to the employee’s
Division Commander or Administrator
• Doctors’ appointments are not to be scheduled during training, if avoidable
Participation
• Bring writing materials and requested equipment.
• Participate in assignments as requested, including homework assignments.
• Complete evaluations and tests.
Dress Attire & Grooming
• Comply with the stated/provided dress code appropriate to the specified
training. If not specified, dress in a manner that presents a professional image.
• No tank tops, T-shirts with inappropriate logos or images, shorts, sandals, bare
feet, or other inappropriate attire.
• Grooming standards will be consistent with those required by the Bureau or
Division to which the employee is assigned.
• Personnel who report to training inappropriately attired or groomed will be
ordered to go home and make a suitable change. Any time incurred as absent
from training for this purpose will not be reflected as “scheduled hours” on the
“Employee Time Record”
6.8.3 TRAINING – EXECUTIVE LEVEL SELECTION PROCESS
Program Description
• Executive Training is limited to Command Officers and Civilian Managers
• The schools and institutions at which Executive Training takes place have their
own selection process which is separate and distinct from the process used by
sponsoring agencies
Examples of Executive Training includes, but is not limited to, the following:
• FBI National Academy
• FBI National Executive Institute
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
255 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• POST Command College
The Police Department conducts an in house selection process to identify and
present the best candidate(s) for the desired executive training.
The selection criteria will vary according to the school or institution to which the
candidate applies, however, the process of selection for each candidate within the
Police Department will be the same.
Selection Criteria
The Department will encourage Command Officers and Civilian Managers to
participate in the Executive Training Selection Program. The Program is voluntary
in nature.
Rank Consideration
• Sworn Command Officers (Chief of Police, Deputy Chief, Commander and
Lieutenant)
• Level II Civilian Managers and above (Department Psychologist; Administrator,
Information Technology; and Administrator, Food Services)
Educational Background
For the purpose of this program, it is recommended that all candidates possess a
minimum of an Associate of Arts degree, or have completed 60 semester units of
college credits.
Process of Selection
All Command Officers and Level II Civilian Managers and above will be made
aware of pending Executive Training in a timely manner through the
Academy/Training Section.
Interested candidates who wish to participate in the selection process will indicate
the desired school that he/she wishes to attend by filing a memorandum to his/her
respective Bureau Chief. The Bureau Chief shall forward all such requests to the
Standing Selection Panel, accompanied by the following:
• The employee will submit a current resume.
Funding
The funding for attendance of Executive Training Courses will be budgeted as a
single, executive training item. No additional funding source, with the exception of
scholarships and fully paid training items, will be available.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
256 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Employee/Department Responsibilities
Employee
Employees selected to attend Executive Training will agree to utilize his/her
maximum potential in completing necessary course work recognizing that the Long
Beach Police Department is being represented through their attendance and only
an image of excellence is acceptable.
Department
The Academy/Training Section will locate, maintain and disseminate a current list
of all available Executive Training.
6.8.4 DIVISIONAL TRAINING OFFICER
Each Division Commander shall appoint one Sergeant in his/her Division to the
position of Divisional Training Sergeant. It shall be the responsibility of the
appointed Training Sergeant to identify any need for specialized, in-service training
within his/her Division, and to work with the Academy’s In-Service Training
Coordinator to fill this requirement.
The Divisional Training Sergeant shall also be responsible for the following:
• Coordinating and attempting to fill requests for training which originates within
the Division
• Projecting the overall training requirements for employees in the Division
• Assisting the Academy in scheduling employees of the Division-level with the
assistance of the Academy
• Working with the Academy’s In-Service Training Coordinator to maintain an up
to date file of available programs of interest to Division personnel
• Keeping Division personnel informed of available training opportunities,
encouraging members of the Division to avail themselves of these
opportunities, and working with the Division Commander to schedule personnel
for training as practicable
• Instructing personnel on the appropriate filing of reimbursement
6.8.5 FIREARMS – SHOOTING POLICY
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility
See Special Order USE OF FORCE effective January 1, 2020.
6.8.6 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
257 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Training Division has approved, and the Chief of Police has authorized a list
of firearms as either primary uniform, non-uniform holster firearms, or back-up
firearms. All authorized personnel may exercise one of the options in the type of
firearm they carry on-duty.
Due to constant improvements in firearms and the many new models introduced
every year, addendums to this policy have been established.
The addendums will be maintained by the Training Division. The Rangemaster will
have the most current list of approved firearms. A new firearm or caliber may be
added at any time. If an addition or deletion is made, the Rangemaster will prepare
an addendum.
The criteria for adding new firearms are as follows:
A) The model has been in production for at least 2 years;
B) Over 1,000 units have been produced;
C) The manufacturer has a solid reputation in the law enforcement community;
D) The firearm has been evaluated by the Rangemaster, or the firearm has been
evaluated by another law enforcement agency and the evaluation meets the
standard of the Long Beach Police Department.
Prior to being deployed, a newly acquired firearm or firearm that has been modified
and will be used in a duty capacity, the following shall occur:
A) The firearm shall be inspected by the Rangemaster.
B) The firearm shall be test fired for function.
C) The officer shall pass the 50-round qualification course with a minimum 80%
score.
6.8.6.1 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – TRIGGER PULL WEIGHT
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
A) Minimum Trigger Pull Weight Requirement - The trigger pull weight for
all firearms shall be at factory minimum or greater, but in no case shall the
trigger pull weight be less than four pounds. Officers are responsible for
having the trigger pull weight tested every two years during the scheduled
qualification period by the Range staff. Officers will be responsible for
correcting any trigger pull weight discrepancies that do not meet factory
minimum standards or the four-pound minimum, whichever is greater.
B) Sig Sauer Exemption - Officers who carry a Sig Sauer firearm, as their
primary duty weapon, with a trigger pull weight that measures between four
and three and a half pounds, may continue to carry that weapon as a
primary duty weapon, if they have a current 50 round qualification score on
file as of 08/25/2015. The following exceptions will apply:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
258 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1) If the trigger pull weight falls below three and a half pounds, the officer
shall be responsible for correcting the trigger pull weight to a minimum
of three and a half pounds.
2) If the firearm is sold to another officer, this exemption will no longer
apply.
3) If an officer, who has qualified with and carried a Sig Sauer with a
trigger weight exemption, qualifies with another duty weapon that
meets the four-pound trigger pull requirement, this exemption will no
longer apply.
6.8.6.2 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – LASER SIGHTS
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The use of laser sights on firearms while on-duty is prohibited. SWAT is exempt
from this restriction.
6.8.6.3 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – MAINTENANCE, REPAIR &
MODIFICATIONS
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
Officers are responsible for the cleaning and maintenance of their firearms and are
required to properly maintain their duty firearm at all times.
The Rangemaster or SWAT armorer shall be the only persons authorized to repair
or modify any department-owned firearm.
Any modifications to an officer’s personally owned duty firearms shall be done at
his or her expense and must be approved by the Rangemaster.
6.8.6.4 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – SEMI-AUTOMATIC FIREARMS
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
All personnel transitioning from a revolver to a semi-automatic firearm must
complete semi-automatic transition training at the Long Beach Police Department
Pistol Range and pass the 50-round qualification course with a minimum 80%
proficiency prior to deploying the firearm.
Reserve officers must have permission from the full-time reserve program
coordinator prior to transitioning from a revolver to a semi-automatic firearm.
All officers who attend semi-automatic transition training must do so at their own
expense and on personal time.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
259 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.8.6.5 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – BACKUP FIREARMS
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
Uniform or plainclothes personnel are authorized to use backup firearms. The
backup firearm shall be easily concealed, readily obtainable and carried in a
holster.
Sworn personnel shall qualify annually with their backup firearm and must pass
the 25-round backup course with a minimum 80% proficiency.
6.8.6.6 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – PRIMARY UNIFORM HOLSTER
FIREARMS
See addendum maintained by the Training Division with the Rangemaster.
6.8.6.7 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – PRIMARY NON-UNIFORM HOLSTER
FIREARMS
See addendum maintained by the Training Division with the Rangemaster.
6.8.6.8 AUTHORIZED FIREARMS – BACKUP FIREARMS
See addendum maintained by the Training Division with the Rangemaster.
6.8.7 AMMUNITION – DEPARTMENT ISSUED & AUTHORIZED
MANUFACTURERS
Revised June 2, 2016
The Support Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed January 2020
The Long Beach Police Department will issue 50 rounds of Winchester Ranger
SXT JHP to each officer annually, during the first quarter qualification period.
All ammunition used or carried by members of this Department shall be new,
factory loaded, law enforcement, hollow-point ammunition from the following
Department approved manufacturers:
1) Winchester
2) Federal
3) SPEER (excluding Blazer)
4) Remington
5) Hornady TAP
6.8.7.1 AMMUNITION – AUTHORIZED BY CALIBER
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
260 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Below is a list of authorized ammunition by caliber, gun and bullet weight:
1) .45 Auto (ACP) – 185 to 230 grain, jacketed hollow-point and bonded jacketed
hollow-point.
2) .45 Long Colt (LC) – 225 to 255 grain, jacketed hollow-point and bonded
jacketed hollow-point.
3) .40 Cal – 160 to 185 grain, jacketed hollow-point and bonded jacketed hollow-
point.
4) 9MM Luger (Parabellum) – 115 to 147 grain, jacketed hollow-point and
bonded jacketed hollow-point.
5) .38 Special – 95 to 158 grain, jacketed hollow-point, bonded jacketed hollow-
point, +P is authorized for .38 Special only.
6) .357 J-frame using .38 special rounds in the specifications above; .38 +P+
are allowed in the .357.
7) .380 Auto (ACP) – 85 to 95 grain, jacketed hollow-point and bonded jacketed
hollow-point.
8) .25 Auto (ACP) – 45 to 50 grain, jacketed hollow-point and bonded jacketed
hollow-point;
a) Only authorized for firearms purchased and qualified with prior to
December 30, 2011.
9) .22 Rim fire Magnum – 40 grain, magnum hollow-point;
a) Only authorized for firearms purchased and qualified with prior to
December 30, 2011.
10) .22 Rim fire long rifle, 33 to 40 grain, hollow-point;
a) Only authorized for firearms purchased and qualified with prior to
December 30, 2011.
6.8.7.2 AMMUNITION – REPLACEMENT
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
All officers will replace the ammunition in their primary duty firearm annually, during
the first quarter qualification period.
Officers may purchase their own ammunition from one of the Department approved
manufacturers, see Long Beach Police Department Manual § 6.8.7 AMMUNITION
– DEPARTMENT ISSUED & AUTHORIZED MANUFACTURERS.
6.8.7.3 AMMUNITION – PROHIBITED
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
Officers are prohibited from utilizing the following ammunition in their firearm while
on-duty:
1) Magnum
a) With the exception that .22-caliber magnum hollow point rim fire is
allowed for backup firearms.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
261 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
b) Only authorized for firearms purchased and qualified with prior to
December 30, 2011.
2) Armor piercing
3) Full metal jacket (FMJ)
4) Tracer
5) Reloads
6) Wad-cutter
The following ammunition is prohibited for use at the Long Beach Police
Department Pistol Range:
1) Armor piercing
2) Tracer
3) Reloads
6.8.7.4 AMMUNITION – SHOTGUN
Reviewed January 2020
Revised June 2, 2016
Only 12-gauge buckshot (00 Buck) issued by the Long Beach Police Department
shall be carried on-duty. Specialized units may be approved to use slug
ammunition with the approval from their Division Commander and the Range
Master. Any approved users within the detail shall pass a qualification course for
slug ammunition at the Pistol Range.
6.8.7.5 AMMUNITION – AR-15
Revised June 2, 2016
Only Department authorized 223/5.56 caliber ammunition that has been approved
by the AR-15 cadre shall be carried on-duty. See also manual section 7.1.8.1.
6.8.7.6 AMMUNITION – SWAT
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The SWAT Team will not be limited to the above ammunition. The SWAT
Commander will make the determination of the appropriate ammunition to be used
by SWAT.
6.8.8 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT
Revised June 2, 2016
The Support Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed January 2020
Any employee, in a full- or light-duty assignment, authorized to carry a firearm must
meet all requirements set forth for firearms qualification.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
262 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Employees of all ranks are required to qualify on a regular and pre-determined
basis with a firearm approved for primary-duty use. The qualification shooting
schedule shall be established annually by the Training Division and distributed as
a Watch Report.
All employees authorized to carry firearms shall qualify each shooting period with
their primary-duty firearm(s). Each officer shall successfully complete the 50-round
qualification course, prior to carrying any firearm as a primary-duty firearm. Any
change in firearm shall require the employee to requalify with that firearm prior to
carrying it on-duty.
If an employee elects to carry a backup firearm as a primary-duty firearm in a non-
uniform assignment, he/she shall meet all qualification requirements established
for primary-duty firearm(s).
6.8.8.1 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – NON-
QUALIFICATION
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
A) Minimum Score - All armed personnel shall receive a passing score prior to
returning to duty.
1) Marksmanship Course Qualification – 80% minimum score for duty
firearms.
2) Combat Course Qualification – Pass/Fail.
B) Failure to Meet Minimum Standard
1) Officers who fail to obtain a passing score will be given remedial training
until proficiency is demonstrated and a passing score is achieved.
2) Additional range assignments may be required until consistent firearms
proficiency is demonstrated.
3) If a passing score is not obtained, the Range staff will notify the
employee’s Division Commander who will make the determination as to
the officer’s duty status.
a) If the employee is currently on-duty working in a patrol function the
Range Staff will notify the Watch Commander. The Watch
Commander will make a determination as to the officer’s duty
assignment.
C) Non-qualification – For reasons other than score.
1) If an officer does not qualify for reasons such as injury, illness, or duty
status, that officer shall submit a memorandum to Internal Affairs prior
to the end of the required shooting period.
D) AR-15
1) Marksmanship Course Qualification - All personnel trained to deploy an
AR-15 must achieve an 80% minimum qualification score prior to
deploying the AR-15. Any officer who does not meet the 80% minimum
score, shall not deploy an AR-15 until successfully passing the minimum
qualification requirement.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
263 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2) Combat Course Qualification – Pass/Fail – All personnel trained to
deploy an AR-15 must achieve a passing score in the combat course
qualification prior to deploying the AR-15. Any officer who does not meet
the minimum combat course requirement, shall not deploy an AR-15
until successfully passing the minimum combat course qualification
requirement.
6.8.8.2 QUALIFICATION – AMMUNITION ALLOTMENT
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
Qualifying employees shall be allotted 200 rounds of ammunition each qualification
period. Officers wanting to fire more than the 200-round allotment must do so at
their own expense and provide their own ammunition. All ammunition is subject to
inspection and must be approved by Range personnel.
6.8.8.3 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – RANGE SAFETY
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
All employees shall adhere to the following Range safety guidelines:
A) Officers shall review the posted Range safety guidelines before using the
Long Beach Police Department Pistol Range.
B) Officers shall check-in with Range staff prior to using the Range.
C) Shooters are not to draw, load, unload, or handle firearms inside the Range
building.
D) Loading and unloading of firearms shall occur on the firing line facing down-
range or using the provided bullet trap.
E) All firearms are to be treated as loaded at all times.
F) Shooters are to keep their finger off the trigger until they have target
acquisition and are ready to fire.
G) All firearms are to be cleared on the line after completing the course of fire.
H) All firearms are to be cleared at the provided bullet trap before entering the
cleaning area.
I) No ammunition or loaded firearms are to be brought into the cleaning area.
J) Any firearm authorized by the department to be carried that is found by an
officer to be malfunctioning or needing service shall not be carried. It shall be
promptly presented to the Rangemaster for inspection. Any firearm
determined to be in need of service or repair during an inspection by the
Rangemaster, will be immediately removed from service. If the firearm is the
officer’s primary duty firearm, a replacement firearm may be issued to the
officer until the duty firearm is serviceable.
6.8.8.4 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – SCHEDULE
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
264 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The firing schedule shall be established by the Commanding Officer, Training
Division, to be published annually. All qualifications shall be conducted at the Long
Beach Police Department Pistol Range. The Range Officer shall conduct the entire
qualification firing procedure.
6.8.8.5 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – SCORING AND
PAY/SHOOTING BADGES
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The Range Officer in charge of the qualification relay shall score the qualifying
targets and forward the scores for audit and determination of classification at the
end of the January/February qualification period. The highest qualifying score
during the shooting period of January/February will determine the classification for
the year. Marksmanship pay will be paid in accordance with the current applicable
Memorandums of Understanding. Marksmanship badges will be issued as follows:
1) 80.0 to 84.9 –Marksman badge
2) 85.0 to 89.9 –Sharpshooter badge
3) 90.0 to 94.9 –Expert badge
4) 95.0 to 100 –Master badge
6.8.8.6 FIREARMS QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT – CARRYING A
CONCEALED WEAPON (CCW) QUALIFICATION
REQUIREMENTS FOR RETIRED POLICE OFFICERS
Revised June 2, 2016
Every peace officer, as designated in PC §12027, employed by the City of Long
Beach who retires in good standing may request to receive on their retired
identification certificate an endorsement stating that the issuing agency approves
the officer carrying a concealed weapon. PC §12027.1 establishes the procedure
relative to the certification of retired peace officers to carry concealed firearms,
including procedures to deny or revoke such privilege.
Pursuant to the passage of HR 218, the “Law Enforcement Officers’ Safety Act,”
which exempts qualified retired state and local officers from prohibitions on the
carrying of concealed firearms, the following also applies:
1) A qualified retired law enforcement officer is defined as an individual who has
retired in good standing from service with a government agency as a law
enforcement officer for an aggregate of fifteen (15) years or more for reasons
other than mental instability or retired from such an agency due to a service-
connected disability after completing any applicable probationary period of
such service.
2) They were authorized by law to engage in or supervise the prevention,
detection, investigation, prosecution or the incarceration of any person for any
violation of law.
3) They had statutory powers of arrest.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
265 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4) They have a non-forfeitable right to benefits under the retirement plan of the
agency for which he or she was employed.
5) They must meet, at their own expense, the same standards for qualification
with a firearm as an active officer with the state in which they reside.
6) They may not be under the influence of alcohol or another intoxicating or
hallucinatory drug or substance.
7) Retired officers will be required to go through Live-Scan prior to receiving their
renewal.
8) If the retired officer lives out of state, they must have two ink fingerprint cards
completed.
9) They are not prohibited by Federal law from possessing a firearm.
Pursuant to the CCW endorsement, the retiree must conform to a range
qualification schedule. Retired officers must qualify every year with the concealed
weapon they carry. If the retired officer lives less than 400 miles from the Long
Beach Police Department Pistol Range, they must qualify at our range as part of
their CCW endorsement renewal.
If the retired officer lives more than 400 miles from the Long Beach Police
Department Pistol Range, they must qualify at a range that is part of a certified law
enforcement academy. The Long Beach Police Department Pistol Range will
validate the certification for the range used for qualification. Each application will
be reviewed on an individual basis.
The exception to this policy would be the retired officer who does not wish to be
CCW nationwide and therefore does not need to qualify every year or be in
compliance with HR 218. For those retirees, qualification every five years will be
sufficient for the City of Long Beach and the State of California.
All retired officer ID cards with the CCW endorsement will have an expiration date
corresponding to either a one-year qualification requirement or a five-year
qualification requirement.
Penal Code Section 12027.1(b)(2) says “a retired police officer may have his or
her privilege to carry a concealed firearm revoked or denied by violating any
departmental rule, or state or federal laws that, if violated by an officer on active
duty, would result in that officer’s arrest, suspension, or removal from the agency.”
6.8.9 FIREARM MOUNTED TACTICAL FLASHLIGHTS
Revised June 2, 2016
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
Reviewed January 2020
The primary purpose of a high intensity firearm mounted flashlight is to allow
officers to maintain better control of their weapon system during critical incidents
when illumination is needed.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
266 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
All officers must attend training at the Long Beach Police Department Pistol Range
prior to carrying a firearm mounted tactical light. This training may be accomplished
while on-duty during an officer’s normal qualification time for the quarter however,
no additional overtime is authorized for this training.
A holster designed for the firearm and light combination must be worn if an officer
is carrying a firearm mounted tactical light. Firearm mounted flashlights are not a
substitute for the officer’s hand-held light. Searches of persons, vehicles or
property, when no threat can be articulated, must be conducted with a hand-held
light. Firearm mounted tactical lights and holsters are optional equipment,
purchased at an officer’s own expense.
6.8.10 HIGH VELOCITY RIFLE FIRE
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
High velocity rifles, .223 and above, will be allowed at the Long Beach Police
Department Pistol Range, after obtaining the approval of the Rangemaster or
Range staff, by authorized personnel only and under specified conditions.
A) Authorized Personnel include:
1) Range staff,
2) Supervisors and officers who are authorized to deploy the AR-15 in the
field,
3) Supervisors and officers who are participating in department training
4) Port Security Detail,
5) SWAT members,
6) Outside agency Rangemaster, firearms instructor, or range safety officer
under contract with the Long Beach Police Department Pistol Range.
B) Conditions for high velocity rifle fire include:
1) High velocity rifle fire should be conducted from 0900 - 1700 hours when
possible,
2) Department training or qualification,
3) Test firing of firearms by Range staff or under Range staff supervision
4) Range demonstrations,
5) All high-velocity rifle fire must be conducted under the direct supervision
of either a Range officer, SWAT team leader or SWAT team safety
officer, or an outside agency rangemaster under contract with the Long
Beach Police Department Pistol Range.
6.8.11 FIREARMS – PURCHASE & SALE OF FIREARMS UNDER
LETTER OF AUTHORIZATION
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
267 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Under the following conditions, the Chief of Police or his designee will issue letters
of authorization for the purchase of weapons:
• The weapon(s) must be identified as “approved”
• Control on the number of authorized weapons which an officer may purchase
shall be at the discretion of the Chief of Police
• If a weapon is designated “for law enforcement personnel only," it shall not be
sold to anyone outside that designation
• Letters of authorization for the purpose of weapons within the State will be
approved by the Commanding Officer of the Training Division
• Letters of authorization for the purchase of weapons out of state will be
processed though the Commanding Officer of the Training Division and
forwarded to the Chief of Police for signature
• One copy of the letter of authorization will be retained in the officer’s training
file
• Any officer relinquishing ownership of a weapon, which has been purchased
under a letter of authorization, shall file a memorandum to the Chief of Police
6.8.11.1 FIREARMS – RECORD OF OFFICER’S
Revised June 2, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
An officer shall file a written report through established channels to the
Administrator, Information Technology, immediately following the purchase,
replacement, loss or other disposition of a firearm. The report shall include a
complete description including the serial number. A report concerning the loss
(including theft) of a firearm shall include all facts surrounding the loss. Changes
in approved duty weapons carried by officers shall be filed with the Administrator,
Personnel Division.
6.8.12 (INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
6.8.13 TRAINING BULLETINS
The preparation of training bulletins is not the sole responsibility of the Training
Division. Each Division Commander and his/her Divisional Training Officer shall
be responsible for reviewing existing training bulletins as they apply to their specific
area of command. It shall be the additional responsibility of each Division
Commander and Divisional Training Officer to identify outdated training bulletins
and furnish the Training Division with input to update the document. Research and
comments shall address the outdated portions of the training bulletins.
It shall be the responsibility of the Commanding Officer of the Training Division to
receive, edit, prepare for distribution, and distribute all training bulletins. It shall be
the additional responsibility of the Training Commander and staff to assist in the
final drafting of all Police Department Training Bulletins; however, primary
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
268 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
responsibility for research and development will remain within the Division or
Section that possess the specific expertise.
6.8.14 IMPACT WEAPONS – BATON, POLICE UTILITY TYPE
FLASHLIGHT & SAP
Authorization
The wooden baton, police utility flashlight, and sap are authorized for use as
defensive weapons:
• Commencing with Recruit Class #47 (June 1978), each officer hired by this
Department will be trained in the use of the baton, sap, and police utility type
flashlight. No further certification is required
• It is acknowledged that officers hired and trained prior to this date, including
those in Recruit Class #46, have received appropriate training in the use of the
police baton
• The sap and police utility type flashlight are optional equipment, privately
purchased at the officer’s own expense
Definitions
Sap - The sap is described as a blackjack in Section 12020 of the Penal Code. Its
use is forbidden by anyone except peace officers, and then only if authorized by
the officer’s department or agency.
Police Utility Type Flashlight - The police utility type flashlight is manufactured
as a lifetime flashlight. Its construction permits its use as an optional defensive
weapon.
Baton - In the protection of life and property and in the defense of the police
officer’s person, the baton has its specific place. Use of the police baton is proper
in lawful situations requiring a degree of force greater than that readily provided by
weaponless control techniques, but less than that provided by resorting to the use
of deadly force. It is a felony for a citizen to possess a baton under Section 12020
PC.
Training
• The baton, sap and the utility type flashlight are defensive weapons
• The purpose is to strike a blow that will stop an immediate threat from your
opponent, or will cause the opponent to cease the attack or resistance
• The baton and utility flashlight, in their capacity as impact weapons, may also
be used as a lever in controlling a suspect's movements
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
269 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Examples of situations in which an impact weapon may be justified as an effective
tool or due to the totality of circumstances, the use of an impact weapon would be
practical:
• When an officer is confronted with a violently resisting suspect and the officer
has either attempted lower levels of force or control, and was unable to control
or stop the suspect, or the lower levels of force were not practical or effective
• The suspect attacks the officer or someone else and tactically there is no other
way to practically prevent the suspect from injuring the officer or someone else
• The use of chemical or electronic devices is not feasible or practical to gain
control of the suspect
• Deadly force is not called for at the time
• The officer is out numbered
• The suspect has displayed superior skill, ability and/or strength for the officer
to overcome with weaponless control techniques
• When an officer is a member of a tactical squad in a crowd or riot control
formation, a baton may be used to move, separate, disperse or deny a person
access to a structure or through an area
• When a suspect armed with a weapon attacks an officer, the officer may use
an impact weapon to disarm, distract, or disable the suspect, or to hold the
suspect at bay until additional assistance arrives
• When the officer is confronted by several suspects who are threatening the
officer, the suspects are capable of carrying out the threats, and they make an
overt act to carry out the threats; the officer may use the impact weapon to fend
off an attack or assault
• When the officer is confronted by a suspect or suspects who he/she has
reasonable cause to believe committed a crime, and the suspect or suspects
refuse or fail to comply with the officer's direction prior to searching or
handcuffing, an impact weapon may be used to obtain compliance
• When an officer has legal justification to detain a suspect and the suspect
refuses or fails to comply with the officer's direction prior to searching or
handcuffing, impact weapons may be used to obtain compliance
The officer is responsible for articulating and documenting the use of an impact
weapon by the totality of circumstances.
Facts tending to justify the impact weapon's use are:
• The physical stature of the suspect as compared to the officer
• The need for immediate control of the suspect or situation due to a tactical
consideration; the officer's perception of the suspect's knowledge or apparent
knowledge of a martial art form; or, the suspect assumes an aggressive stance;
or the inability to control the suspect by lesser means
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
270 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Remember that impact weapons may be used to gain control of a suspect. Once
resistance has ceased and the suspect is under control, the use of the impact
weapon should be immediately stopped.
Target areas:
• Arms
• Lower legs
• Chest
• Midsection
• Ribcage
There are several areas of the body that are recommended to AVOID striking with
impact weapons. When impact weapons are used against certain parts of the
human body, they can cause serious injury. It is up to the officer to use caution.
Do not intentionally use impact weapons to strike the following areas:
• Head - Striking the head may not be effective. Instead of stopping the suspect
it may merely numb his senses and make him more difficult to control. The
suspect can easily defend his head area by ducking, using his arms, or he can
use his hands to grab the impact weapon. Also a scalp wound often bleeds
profusely, making the injury appear more serious
• Neck - The neck is vulnerable because of the vertebra, spinal cord, veins,
arteries, and nerves that could be damaged
• Throat - Perhaps the most vulnerable area of the neck is the throat. The
cartilages, trachea, or larynx could be fractured, crushed, ruptured or could
collapse. A baton or flashlight should not be used to apply pressure to the neck
or throat as they have no sensitivity, and it is impossible to judge the amount
of pressure you are applying
• Spine - A direct blow to the spine could cause damage to the vertebrae or
spinal cord
• Kidneys - The lower rear torso area where the kidneys are located is not well
protected. A direct blow to the area could result in kidney damage or internal
bleeding
• Heart - Direct blows to the heart could cause heart stoppage
• Groin - A strike to the groin area could cause severe injury to the reproductive
process. Striking the groin area also may not be effective
• Knee Joints - Direct strikes to the knee joints may cause permanent damage
Other Uses
Impact weapons may be used for other purposes, including but not limited to,
breaking glass in an emergency.
Report Writing
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
271 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
After an officer has used an impact weapon (or any force) against a suspect, the
appropriate incident reports shall be filed. The report shall include a detailed
account of the circumstances leading up to and including the use of the impact
weapon. It is the officer’s responsibility to notify his/her Field Supervisor
(Sergeant) and the Watch Commander of his/her actions. An allegation of
excessive force can be refuted by a detailed report (refer to Manual Section, Use
of Force).
6.8.14.1 BATON SPECIFICATIONS
The Support Bureau will have audit authority.
Revised May 8, 2015
The specifications for the standard issue wood baton are as follows:
• The baton blank stock can be second year growth hickory or other similar
hardwood that is suitable for this use and will accept a dark stain or black paint
• The length is 26 to 29 inches
• The diameter is 1¼ inches
• The weight is between 15 and 22 ounces
• A black rubber sleeve grommet, tapered, approximately 15/8 inches in diameter,
should fit snuggly around the baton
As an alternative to the above baton, officers at their own expense shall be allowed
to buy a baton manufactured from epoxy wood laminate such as one manufactured
under the trade name “Dymond Wood”.
• The length is 26 to 29 inches
• Diameter specifications will be 11/8 inches
• The weight will not exceed 22 ounces
• A black rubber sleeve grommet, tapered, approximately 1½ inches in diameter,
should fit snuggly around the baton
RIOT BATON
Riot batons will be issued to every sworn officer on the department. Riot batons
will only be deployed for use during situations of civil unrest, violent crowd
demonstrations, or any other critical situation determined by the Chief of Police or
his designee to require riot batons. The only approved riot baton is the one issued
by the Department and the specifications are as follows:
• The length is 42 inches
• The baton blank stock will be second year growth hickory
• The diameter is 1¼ inches
• The weight will not exceed 32 ounces
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
272 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.8.14.2 USE OF CHEMICAL AGENTS
Mace/Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) may be used, when feasible, in lieu of other
forceful methods of subduing a subject (i.e., firearm, impact weapon, or other
authorized police restraint equipment) when a situation develops where it is
probable that either an arrestee or officer may be injured.
Officer/Authorized Employee Responsibilities
When an officer/authorized employee is involved in an incident where reportable
force using a chemical agent (Mace/OC) is used, he/she shall adhere to the
following:
• Immediately notify supervisor
• Document use of force and justification for use in the Arrest and/or Incident
Report, and write “Use of Force” across the top of the report
• Document which supervisor was notified in the Arrest and/or Incident Report
• In all cases where a chemical agent is used, the subject shall be evaluated at
the contract hospital immediately. It shall be the responsibility of the
officer/employee who used the chemical agent to ensure the medical
evaluation is conducted
Supervisor Responsibilities
• Supervisor shall assess the incident and review the Arrest and/or Incident
Report
• If the officer/employee is injured to the extent that hospitalization is necessary,
it shall be the supervisor’s responsibility to ensure the Arrest and/or Incident
Report is submitted prior to the end of Watch
• Supervisor shall notify the Watch Commander of the use of force incident
• Supervisor shall report the incident and his/her actions in the supervisor’s log
Watch Commander Responsibility
• Watch Commander shall report the incident and his/her actions in the Watch
Commander’s Log
6.8.15 ACQUIRED IMMUNE DEFICIENCY SYNDROME (AIDS) -
TRAINING
Since AIDS is a blood-borne virus, employees are required to provide all members
of the community with immediate protective care (including CPR and mouth-to-
mouth resuscitation) unless there is an immediate danger to the employee. No
person has ever been infected by performing mouth-to-mouth resuscitation.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
273 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Employees are reminded that failure to perform first aid care or CPR may result in
personal litigation since state law provides immunity for good faith errors and state
law requires that they be trained in First Aid/CPR.
Risk Reduction
Since the virus must have a port of entry into a new host, the most logical method
of breaking the chain of infection is to prevent the entry of the virus into one's
system.
Employees will take appropriate precautions and use appropriate equipment when
contacting all members of the community. Officers will use disposable gloves, or
leather gloves that have been treated with a water resistant substance, if there is
any possibility of contact with blood.
Employees will practice sound personal hygiene habits by washing their hands for
at least 15 seconds after they come into physical contact with any member of the
community. If hand washing is not practical, an alcohol towelette or germicidal
solution shall be used followed by a thorough hand washing as soon as possible.
Employees aware of cuts or openings in their skin will wear bandages over the cut
or effected area while working. The bandage shall be made of material that
prevents moisture from entering the skin area.
Precaution must be taken to prevent injuries caused by hypodermic needles and
syringes, or other sharp objects, which may be contaminated with blood or other
body secretions. All sharp objects which are placed into evidence will be stored in
puncture proof containers clearly marked with a warning, and placed in a special
section of the evidence storage area.
Safety Equipment
To meet operational and sound hygienic requirements, all Divisions/Sections of
this Department will maintain a supply of:
• Disposable gloves
• Resuscitation masks with one-way valves
• Disposable face masks
• Disposable alcohol towelettes
• Plastic storage bags
• Chlorine bleach (for 1 to 10 solution)
• Disinfectant spray or germicides
• Leather gloves which have been treated with water-proofing solution
• Eye protection
All marked and unmarked vehicles will contain:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
274 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Disposable gloves
• Resuscitation masks with one-way valves
• Disposable face masks
• Disposable alcohol towelettes
• Plastic storage bags
Division Commanders shall ensure that adequate supplies are maintained and
distributed to employees, vehicles, and work locations.
Decontamination
Hands should be washed for 15 seconds after each citizen contact. This includes
any time gloves are used and removed. Gloves should be turned inside out on
removal and placed into a receptacle designated for contaminated materials.
Contaminated surfaces (vehicle interior/exterior, personal equipment) should be
cleansed with soap and water or a disinfectant spray followed by a 30-second
cleaning of the area with a solution of household bleach to water, diluted 1 to 10.
Reporting Infections, Disease or Exposure
AIDS exposure is broken down into two areas:
• Any physical contact or injury which results in a direct contact between the
employee and the blood or body fluids of another person suspected of having
AIDS, or a person identified as being in the "high risk group"
• Physical contact only, where there was no contact between the employee and
the blood or body fluids of the suspected person
The report of any exposure is to be completed by the employee's supervisor using
the State of California Employer's Report of Occupational Injury or Illness Forms,
SF-312 (3/82), and SF-312a (5/82 work copy). The forms should be completed as
outlined in Administrative Directive 2-86, IOD Report to Employer.
If the exposure results in contact with the blood or body fluids of a person
suspected of having AIDS, both forms SF-312a (5/82 work copy), and SF-312
(3/82) must be completed.
If the exposure was physical contact only, and there was no blood or body fluid
contact, complete form SF-312a (5/82 work copy) only.
HIV or AIDS Testing
The Health Department provides anonymous and free in-house testing programs
for employees and citizens of the community concerned about HIV and AIDS
exposure. If any employee elects to take advantage of the program, confidentiality
of test results is ensured by using coded names.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department TRAINING
275 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Release of Information about AIDS Infection
Current State Law (199.20 Health and Safety Code) prohibits the release of any
information concerning the blood test results of AIDS patients or HIV-infected
persons. Disclosure is permissible only on specifically written authorization from
the affected patient and a separate written release must be obtained each and
every time a release of information is desired.
There are civil damages for accidental release of AIDS-related information and
severe civil and criminal penalties for the intentional release of information if done
with the intent to harm or harass the victims.
6.8.16 RESERVE POLICE OFFICER SELECTION PROCESS
The Commanding Officer of the Training Division and his/her staff will assume
responsibility for the selection of Police Reserve Officers. The procedure for
selection is as follows:
• The officer assigned as coordinator/liaison to the Reserve Corps Unit will
maintain a current list of interested candidates
• Once a need for additional Reserve Officers has been determined, the Training
Division will notify applicants of the time, date and location of the written
examination. Training personnel will be responsible for administering the
written examination
• Candidates successfully completing the written examination will be notified
relative to the date, time and location of the physical ability examination
• Candidates successfully completing both the written and physical ability tests
will be scheduled for an oral interview. The interview board will consist of a
minimum of two sworn officers, at least one of which will be a member of the
Training Staff. The other board member shall be from the Patrol Bureau
• Candidates eligible for selection after successfully completing the
aforementioned tests will be subject to an extensive background investigation.
This investigation will be conducted by Background Investigators assigned to
the Commanding Officer, Training Division
• Final selection shall be determined by the Chief of Police in the same manner
as the selection process for regular police officers
• Reserve Officers selected for service shall attend a POST certified Reserve
Academy Course conducted by the Training Division
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
276 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.9 UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
6.9.1 GENERAL UNIFORM REQUIREMENTS
All police employees of the Department, except non-uniformed civilian employees,
shall maintain a regulation uniform in good order.
All articles of uniform shall conform to the Long Beach Police Department Uniform
and Equipment Specifications Manual. Civilian clothing will not be worn with any
distinguishable part of the uniform. Employees shall not wear the uniform off duty
without the permission of a commanding officer, with the exception of traveling to
and from work. The Personnel Division maintains detailed written uniform
specifications.
Wearing the Uniform
Uniforms shall be kept neat, clean and well pressed at all times; leather and shoes
polished, badges and metal shined.
6.9.1.1 INSPECTIONS - UNIFORM
From time to time the Chief of Police may call for full dress inspections of the
Department or any part thereof. Employees directed to attend inspections shall
report in the uniform prescribed carrying the equipment specified. Unauthorized
absence from such inspection is chargeable as “absent without leave”.
6.9.2 APPEARANCE - ON-DUTY
Normally, sworn employees will wear the duty uniform on-duty; however,
commanding officers may prescribe other clothing as required by the nature of the
employee’s assignment. Civilian employees will wear and maintain an employee
uniform when so directed by the Chief of Police.
6.9.2.1 HELMETS - GENERAL PROVISIONS
• The regulation safety helmet shall be the property of the Department and shall
be issued and controlled by the Property Clerk, Personnel Division
• Personnel, when separated from the Department, shall the helmet to the
Property Clerk
• The regulation safety helmet may be issued to lieutenants, Sergeants,
Corporals, and Police Officers assigned to the Patrol Bureau, and to any
another person so designated by the Chief of Police
6.9.2.2 CIVILIAN CLOTHING
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
277 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Male employees permitted to wear civilian clothing on-duty shall wear either a
business suit or sports coat and trousers. A dress-type shirt with tie shall be worn.
Commanding officers may prescribe other types of clothing to their employees
when required to meet a particular police objective.
Female employees permitted to wear civilian clothing shall conform to the
standards normally worn by office personnel in private business firms, unless
otherwise directed by their commanding officer. Shorts, t-shirts, jeans, bare
midriffs, revealing necklines, athletic shoes or thongs, are NOT considered suitable
work attire and will not be permitted.
6.9.3 UNIFORM & EQUIPMENT REPLACEMENT
All requests for uniform and equipment (PD Form 2200.002, revised 2/85) will be
submitted to the Personnel Division for processing. The request form will not be
processed without the employee’s full name, photo number, work assignment and
approval signature of the employee’s Division Commander.
Personnel will prepare the necessary Purchase Order Requisition form for the
employee’s use and forward the form, in triplicate, to the employee through his/her
Bureau Chief’s Office for distribution.
Within 24 hours after the uniform and/or equipment have been received, the
employee will acknowledge receipt with his/her signature and date on the triplicate
form, and return the “pink” copy to the Personnel Division.
Employees shall not sign the Purchase Order Requisition until all the items
requested have been received. If any of the items are not available within two
weeks from the date of order, the employee shall contact the Personnel Division
relative to uniform/equipment status.
6.9.4 CORRECT WEARING OF INSIGNIA OF GRADE
To ensure uniformity within the Department, officers shall adhere to the following
procedures relative to the wearing of insignia of grade.
Correct placement of collar and shoulder insignia for all sworn officers:
Chief of Police
The insignia of Chief of Police has four, gold-colored five pointed stars, each star
measuring 5/8 inch in diameter. The insignia shall be worn on the Class “A”
uniform on both collars. The insignia shall be centered, 3/8 inch from the leading
edge of the collar, parallel to the lower edge of the collar. On the command officer’s
dress uniform, the one-inch diameter insignia stars shall be worn centered on the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
278 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
epaulet. Also, for all stars, the single point side of the stars should face the upper
edge of the collar.
Deputy Chief of Police
The insignia for Deputy Chief of Police has two, gold-colored five pointed stars,
each measuring 5/8 inch in diameter. The insignia shall be worn on the Class “A”
uniform on both collars. The insignia shall be centered, 3/8 inch from the leading
edge of the collar, parallel to the lower edge of the collar. On the command officer’s
dress uniform, the insignia shall be worn centered on the epaulets.
Police Commander
The insignia for Police Commander has one, gold-colored five pointed star,
measuring 5/8 inch in diameter. The insignia is worn on the Class “A” uniform on
both collars. The insignia shall be centered, 3/8 inch from the leading edge of the
collar, parallel to the lower edge of the collar.
Police Lieutenant
The insignia for Police Lieutenant consists of a plain, flat silver bar, measuring 3/8-
inch wide and ¾-inch long. The insignia shall be worn on the Class “A” uniform on
both collars. The front edge (long side) of the bar shall be 3/8 inch from the leading
edge of the collar parallel to the front edge and centered on the collar.
Police Sergeant
The insignia for Police Sergeant shall be three, royal-blue silk thread chevrons
bound to a black cloth background with a border of yellow silk thread. Chevrons
shall be worn on each sleeve with the point of the chevrons 1 ½ inches below the
bottom edge of the shoulder emblems. Horizontal width of the chevrons shall be
2 5/8 inches with a vertical distance from apex to apex of 2 5/8 inches.
Police Corporal
The insignia for Police Corporal shall be two, royal-blue silk thread chevrons bound
to a black cloth background with a border of yellow silk thread. Chevrons shall be
worn on each sleeve with the point of the chevrons 1 ½ inches below the bottom
edge of the shoulder emblem. Horizontal width of the chevrons shall be 2 5/8
inches with a vertical distance from apex to apex of 1 7/8 inches.
6.9.5 ISSUE AND SEIZURE OF BADGE, CAP PIECE, NAME PLATE &
IDENTIFICATION CARD
The following Department employees may be issued a badge:
• Chief of Police
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
279 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Deputy Chief of Police
• Commander
• Lieutenant
• Sergeant
• Corporal
• Detective
• Police Officer
• Motor Officer
• Reserve Officer
• Identification Officer
• Security Officer
• Institutional Cook
• Police Service Assistant
Issuance
• The Personnel Division shall be responsible for procurement of Department
badges, cap pieces, nameplates and identification cards
• The Personnel Division shall issue all Department badges, cap piece, name
plate and identification cards
• Badges shall be permanently serialized with the applicable employee photo
number
• Personnel Division shall maintain a permanent record of badge, cap piece,
name plate and identification card assignment/issuance
• The employee shall sign for badges, cap pieces, nameplates and identification
cards. A copy of the signed document shall be placed in the employee’s
personnel file
• A comprehensive inventory of all issued and replacement items shall be
maintained commencing from the employee’s date of appointment
Maintenance & Replacement
Employees shall be responsible for maintenance and requesting replacement of
issued uniform and equipment items.
• Items shall not be altered
• Loss or theft of an issued badge, name plate, cap piece or identification card
shall be reported and the appropriate report filed (see Section 6.9.5.2, Lost,
Stolen or Damaged Badges, Cap Pieces, Name Plates and Identification
Cards)
• When City-issued personal equipment is lost, stolen, damaged, or worn to the
point of being unserviceable during the period of City ownership, and the loss
or damage is not the result of negligence on the part of the employee, the
employee may request replacement or repair according to current procedures
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
280 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.9.5.1 ISSUANCE OF RETIREMENT BADGES
• The Personnel Division shall contact retiring employee to coordinate their
retirement date
• Have the retirement badge ready for the employee’s last day
• Schedule a retirement ceremony with the Chief of Police’s officer using the
same process as promotions
• Issue the retirement badge when the regular badge has been returned
6.9.5.2 LOST, STOLEN OR DAMAGED BADGES, CAP PIECES,
NAMEPLATES & IDENTIFICATION CARDS
• Lost or stolen badges, cap pieces, nameplates and identification cards shall be
reported to the employee’s supervisor immediately. The supervisor shall
determine if the loss or damage was a result of negligence on the part of the
employee. The supervisor shall ensure that a lost or stolen report is completed.
The supervisor’s report and the lost or stolen report shall be forwarded to the
Personnel Division
• Replacement of a lost or stolen badge, cap piece, nameplate or identification
card shall be obtained from the Personnel Division. The employee shall file an
Affidavit of Lost/Stolen Official Badge Form and a copy of the lost or stolen of
negligence on the part of the employee, replacement of the item shall be at the
employee’s expense. The Personnel Division shall maintain a current log of all
lost or stolen badges, cap pieces, name plates, identification cards, et cetera,
in the Personnel Division for the purpose of facilitating recovery and
identification of items
• When a badge or identification card is lost or stolen, the supervisor approving
a lost or stolen report shall transmit a teletype indicating the missing property
and listing the owner’s name, serial number, rank and badge number to all
California law enforcement agencies
6.9.5.3 MEMORIAL BADGES
Badges as a memorial to a Police Officer killed in the line of duty shall be mounted
in an appropriate display and presented to the officer’s family at Department
expense (PD Form 2000.14).
6.9.5.4 RESERVE POLICE OFFICER BADGES AND IDENTIFICATION
CARDS
Revised May 2003
The Personnel Division has audit responsibility.
Police Officer Badge:
Level I Long Beach Reserve Police Officers will be issued the silver and gold Police
Officer badge provided they are in good standing with the Reserve Unit, possess
a POST Reserve Officer Certificate and meet one or more of the following criteria:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
281 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Level I Reserve Police Officer who has completed the Level l Field Training
Program and is qualified to work alone as a designated beat unit
Level I Reserve Police Officer who has been a member of the Reserve Unit a
minimum of three years and primarily works a specialty assignment; e.g., Juvenile
Section, Traffic or Reserve Unit administration
Level I Reserve Police Officer who has completed the "Module D" Basic Academy
Transitional Course, has the training equivalent to a Basic Academy or has a Basic
Academy Certificate
Level I Reserve Police Officer who has been consistently in good standing with the
Reserve Unit for five years
Level II Long Beach Reserve Police Officers will be issued the silver and gold
Police Officer badge provided they are in good standing with the Reserve Unit and
meet the following criteria:
Level II Reserve Police Officer who has consistently been in good standing with
the Reserve Unit for five years
Level II Reserve Police Officer who has consistently worked in a patrol unit in
excess of the 20 hours required of the Level l Reserve Police Officer
Identification Card:
The Police Officer identification card, with the notation "Reserve Police Officer"
and the deletion of the words "duly compensated", will be issued to Level I or Level
II Reserve Police Officers as is issued to full-time officers in conjunction with the
Police Officer badge.
PROCEDURE
The Personnel Division will maintain Reserve and Police Officer badges and
identification cards for distribution. The below described procedures shall be
adhered to for issuance of the Police Officer badge and identification card to
qualified Level I Reserve Police Officers.
The Reserve Police Officer who qualifies for the Police Officer badge and
identification card will submit a memorandum to the Reserve Unit Coordinator for
consideration. Qualifications shall be in accordance with the below listed criteria
The Field Support Division Commander will file a memorandum to the
Administrator of the Personnel Division requesting that a Police Officer badge and
identification card be issued to the requesting Reserve Police Officer. This
memorandum will include a statement listing the specific criteria qualifying the
Level I Reserve Police Officer for the badge and identification card
The Field Support Division Commander will have the discretion to either approve
the request by forwarding the memorandum to the Administrator of the Personnel
Division or deny the request by returning the memorandum to the Reserve Unit
Coordinator
The Personnel Division will issue the badge and identification card
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
282 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.9.6 EQUIPMENT
All equipment must be clean and in good working order and shall conform to
Department specifications.
6.9.7 UNIFORM EQUIPMENT COMMITTEE
The Uniform and Equipment Committee shall research and review uniform and
equipment suggestions submitted by Department Personnel. The Committee may
also initiate research and a review process regarding Department uniform and
equipment.
The Committee will:
• Review all suggestions for uniform equipment
• Prepare a report relative to findings and recommendations
• Submit the final report to the Chief of Police for approval/denial
Committee Membership & Meetings
• The Commanding Officer, Personnel Division, shall act as Chairperson for the
Committee, and will review final Committee reports prior to review by
commanders and above
• Members of the Committee will be a Commander from each Bureau, selected
by their respective Bureau Chief
• The Committee will meet quarterly with an option to meet more often, if
necessary
6.9.8 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEPARTMENT PROPERTY
Employees are responsible for the proper care of Department property and
equipment assigned to them. Damaged or lost property may subject the
responsible individual to reimbursement charges and appropriate disciplinary
action of the damage or loss is due to negligence.
6.9.9 DAMAGED/INOPERATIVE PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT
Employees shall immediately report to their Commanding Officer on designated
forms any loss or damage to Department property assigned to or used by then.
The immediate supervisor will be notified of any defects or hazardous conditions
existing in any Department equipment or property.
6.9.10 CITY-OWNED PROPERTY – PRESUMPTION OF
RESPONSIBILITY
In the event that City-owned property is found damaged, it shall be prima facie
evidence that the last person using the property or vehicle was responsible unless
otherwise indicated.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department UNIFORMS & PERSONAL EQUIPMENT
283 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.9.11 SURRENDER OF DEPARTMENT PROPERTY
Employees are required to return all Department property in their possession to
the Commanding Officer, Personnel/Training Division, upon separation from
service. Failure to return non-expendable items may cause the person to
reimburse the Department for the fair market value of the article. Employees
suspended from employment shall be required to surrender their Department-
issue badge, weapon and identification to the Commanding Officer,
Personnel/Training Division.
6.9.12 RETURNING CITY-OWNED PROPERTY
An employee shall return all City-owned property in their possession under the
following circumstances:
• Resignation or Termination – An employee who resigns or is terminated from
the Department shall deliver all City-owned property in his/her possession to
the Personnel Division. Property obtained from an employee who is terminated
or has resigned shall be reported to the Personnel Division
• EXCEPTION: Any supervisor may take possession of City-owned property
from a terminated or separated employee when circumstances indicated that it
would be in the best interest of the Department
• Suspension – An officer who is suspended shall relinquish his/her Department
issued badge, weapon and identification card to their Division Commanding
Officer. It shall be the responsibility of the Commanding Officer to obtain the
property from the suspended officer and ensure that it is forwarded to the
Internal Affairs, Commanding Officer. The property shall then be forwarded to
the Personnel Division, Manager for inventory and maintenance control.
• The Personnel Division, Manager is responsible for securing the return of
outstanding City-owned items from separated employees
• An officer shall seize any City of Long Beach badge, cap piece, name plate and
identification card, et cetera, in the possession of an individual other that the
person authorized to carry these items in the line of duty
6.9.13 CITY-OWNED EQUIPMENT ITEMS - RECOVERED
• When City-owned personal equipment items are recovered, standard
Department procedures
• An officer taking custody of a badge, cap piece, nameplate or identification
card, et cetera, shall ensure that the item is properly placed into Property using
PD Form 224009, “Report of Property”. The filing officer shall forward a copy
of the report to the Personnel Division Commanding Officer
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
284 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7 PATROL BUREAU – FIELD OPERATIONS
7.1 FIELD OPERATIONS
7.1.1 CALLS FOR SERVICE – RESPONSE TO
Priority One Calls
Field Officers shall be subject to dispatch for their entire Watch and shall always
monitor their radios. When Communications Division personnel review a priority
one call, they will assign it to a unit based on the CAD system suggestion process.
If units are not available in the entire area, the dispatcher will air the call on the
primary channel for “any unit.”
If there is no response, the dispatcher will attempt to notify an area sergeant. The
dispatcher and/or the field sergeant will determine which area unit has a call of
lesser magnitude and request they clear to handle a priority one call. If the unit is
unable to clear, the dispatcher will then simulcast the call sending the closest
available unit from another area and advise the concerned area sergeant.
The sergeant will be advised that a unit is being dispatched to handle a priority one
call out of their assigned area. The dispatcher will send all call information via KDT
to the concerned sergeant.
Upon receiving a dispatch, the assigned unit will respond to the call, giving the
dispatcher the location they are responding from.
If an area unit clears prior to the assigned unit’s arrival, the dispatcher will advise
the area unit of the call. If the area unit is closer, they will advise the dispatcher
and handle the call. The dispatcher will then cancel the responding out of area
unit.
7.1.1 a SQUAD MEETINGS
Squad meetings are to be conducted at the beginning of the patrol shift by a sergeant
or designee. They are designed to disseminate information, share crime trends, and
develop planned response to current crime trends or special events.
Topics for Squad Meeting
• Formal In-Service Training (as scheduled from the Training Division)
• Strategies to impact current crime trends; both with info from Divisional Crime Analyst
and from personal knowledge of the Beat Officers **AV equipment in squad rooms
should be used when available/appropriate
• Watch Reports – DCC locations
• Discuss Current/Relevant Issues (department issues and training issues such as
officer safety, timecards, report writing, washing cars, etc.)
• Uniform & Equipment Inspections (follow Bureau’s uniform inspections schedule)
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
285 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Interactive/Hands-on Training (Mobile Field Force, Arrest & Control, searching
techniques, legal updates/case-law, officer safety videos, etc.)
Lieutenants and Sergeants should ensure that each squad meeting is informative and
meets the needs of that watch for that day.
7.1.2 USE OF FORCE
Revised October 20, 2015
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
See Special Order USE OF FORCE issued January 10, 2019.
Related to §§ 7.1.2.8-7.1.2.13
7.1.2.1 USE OF FORCE – LEGAL AUTHORITY TO USE FORCE
See Special Order USE OF FORCE effective January 16, 2020.
7.1.2.2 USE OF FORCE – FORCE DEFINED
See Special Order USE OF FORCE effective January 16, 2020.
7.1.2.3 USE OF FORCE – FORCE POLICY
See Special Order USE OF FORCE effective January 16, 2020.
7.1.2.4 USE OF FORCE – FORCE OPTIONS
Revised October 20, 2015
The Department utilizes a use of force paradigm, which allows officers to select
the level of reasonable force necessary to control the situation. Should an officer
use a force option outside of department training, the officer must fully articulate
the necessity of such force and why department trained force options were not
utilized.
7.1.2.5 USE OF FORCE – REPORTABLE USE OF FORCE
Revised October 20, 2015
A reportable use of force occurs when any officer, in the course and scope of his
or her employment, whether on or off duty, uses any physical force upon a non-
compliant person, for purposes other than training. A reportable use of force
includes, but is not limited to the following:
1) Takedowns
2) Impact weapons
3) Chemical agents
4) Less lethal systems
5) K-9 bites
6) Carotid control hold
7) Deadly force
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
286 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.2.6 USE OF FORCE – NON-REPORTABLE USE OF FORCE
Revised October 20, 2015
The following force options are non-reportable:
1) Controlling force when there is no complaint of ongoing pain or injury after
the force has stopped;
a) Controlling force ranges from exerting a firm grip on a subject, to pain
compliance control holds, to an actual physical hold or lock;
2) Use of the hobble or expectorant shield when the subject is compliant during
its application.
7.1.2.7 USE OF FORCE – EMPLOYEE RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
An employee will immediately notify a supervisor regarding a use of force incident,
unless exigent circumstances delay the notification. Employees are responsible
for the following:
1) All on-duty employees must complete a report detailing the use of force by
the end of the officer's shift, unless exigent circumstances prevent the officer
from filing his/her own report;
a) Any employee that uses force must personally document their actions in
a police report;
b) Any officer not directly involved, but a witness to a reportable use of force
will have their observations recorded in a police report;
2) If an employee is off-duty, out of jurisdiction, and involved in a reportable use
of force incident, the employee shall notify the Watch Commander as soon
as practicable, and file a memorandum to their Division Commander
articulating the circumstances surrounding the use of force incident no later
than the end of their next work shift; and
3) In all cases where the carotid control hold has been applied, it shall be the
responsibility of the employee using the control hold to ensure that a medical
evaluation is conducted as soon as practicable.
7.1.2.8 USE OF FORCE – SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
Sergeants may not investigate or approve their own use of force. After a use of
force, a supervisor will respond to the scene to evaluate the incident and is
responsible for the following:
1) Review the criminal charges against the subject;
2) Ensure that a detailed investigation is conducted surrounding the incident;
3) Ensure witnesses are identified and statements obtained;
4) Ensure all evidence pertaining to the criminal investigation and use of force
has been collected;
5) Ensure photographs are taken of all injuries or lack of injuries to the suspect
and employee;
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
287 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
6) Notify the Watch Commander of the use of force incident as soon as possible,
prior to the end of the work shift;
7) Notify the on-call Internal Affairs Sergeant on all reportable use of force
incidents involving potential misconduct or incidents resulting in the subject
being admitted to the hospital or transported for treatment to a hospital for the
following:
a) Injuries requiring sutures
b) Broken bones
c) All head injuries
d) Any injury deemed as serious
8) Respond to the medical facility where the subject is transported;
9) Consider arranging for other officer(s) to transport and book the subject, if the
subject continues to display hostile or confrontational behavior toward the
arresting officer(s)
10) Direct who will file supplemental reports;
11) Review the incident/arrest report and all supplemental reports to the use of
force incident as well as any digital evidence available at the time of filing
involving a level 1, 2, or 3 use of force; [Special Order – Use of Force, 1/10/19]
and
12) Complete the Supervisor’s Use of Force report via BlueTeam.
The Homicide supervisor will file a Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam
on all force, including but not limited to, firearms used during an officer involved
shooting, an in-custody death incident, or as determined by the Homicide
supervisor. The investigation conducted by Homicide will be used by the Officer
Involved Shooting Board to review the incident.
During an officer involved shooting or an in-custody death incident, if force other
than a firearm was used, the Homicide Supervisor will ensure a Supervisor’s Use
of Force Report is completed via BlueTeam; the supervisory investigation and
narrative of the form will contain generic information only about the incident.
7.1.2.9 USE OF FORCE – BOOKING SERGEANT RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
Booking sergeants will assist field sergeants with their responsibility to investigate
reportable use of force incidents occurring in the Booking area. This includes the
Booking tunnel, the main Booking area including the holding cell, jail elevator, and
the hallway on the fourth floor leading to the Women’s jail from the elevator.
The Booking Sergeant is responsible for the following:
1) Ensure employee(s) involved in the use of force immediately notify their Field
Sergeant regarding the use of force;
2) Notify the Watch Commander regarding the use of force;
3) Assist the Field Sergeant in conducting the investigation, including assisting
with interviews of witnesses and involved officers;
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
288 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4) Remain in the Booking area while assisting with the investigation;
5) Ensure any audio or video evidence captured by the security camera system
is reviewed and copied;
6) File a supplemental report documenting their actions and observations
regarding the use of force and make sure they are included in the DR for the
incident; and
7) Complete the Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam for any use of
force incidents involving police officers and detention supervisors occurring
inside the Jail after the prisoner has been released to jail detention officers.
In use of force incidents involving detention officers, detention supervisors will file
the Supervisor’s Use of Force Report.
7.1.2.10 USE OF FORCE – WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
Upon notification of a use of force occurring outside the Long Beach Police
Department jurisdiction, the Watch Commander will determine whether a
supervisor will respond to the scene. The Watch Commander will evaluate the
need for further investigation and take appropriate action on all use of force
incidents.
When a Watch Commander is directly involved in a use of force incident, the Watch
Commander will direct another supervisor to respond and handle the investigation
and reports.
The Watch Commander is responsible for the following:
1) Review the incident/arrest reports, along with all connecting reports regarding
the use of force incident and either approve or send them back to the author
for corrections or a supplemental report [Special Order – Use of Force,
1/10/19];
2) Ensure the incident and level of force used is entered in the Watch
Commander’s Log;
3) Notify the on-call Internal Affairs Sergeant on all reportable use of force
incidents involving potential misconduct, or incidents resulting in the subject
being admitted to the hospital or transported for treatment to a hospital for the
following:
a) Injuries requiring sutures
b) Broken bones
c) All head injuries
d) Any injury deemed as serious
4) Review the Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam involving a level
1, 2, or 3 use of force as well as any digital evidence (i.e., photos/video)
available, provide recommendations if any, and recommend whether the use
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
289 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
of force is in policy or, refer to Internal Affairs for further investigation, and/or
take other corrective action [Special Order – Use of Force, 1/10/19];
5) Forward the Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam to the involved
employee’s Lieutenant within a timely manner.
7.1.2.11 USE OF FORCE – INVOLVED EMPLOYEE LIEUTENANT
RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
Review the Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via Blue Team involving a level 1, 2,
or 3 use of force per this special order, including any police reports and digital
evidence (i.e., photos/video), provide recommendations if any, and recommend
whether the use of force is in policy or, refer to Internal Affairs for further
investigation, and/or take other corrective action. Forward the Supervisors Use of
Force Report via BlueTeam to the involved employee’s Commander within a timely
manner. [Special Order – Use of Force, 1/10/19]
7.1.2.12 USE OF FORCE – DIVISION COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
Review any level 1 Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam, which shall
include reviewing any police reports and digital evidence (i.e., photos/video). Make
a final determination whether the use of force is in policy or, recommend refer to
Internal Affairs for further investigation, and/or take other corrective action.
Forward the completed Use of Force report via BlueTeam to the Internal Division
in a timely manner.
If a level 1 use of force results in serious injury including, but not limited to an injury
requiring ten or more sutures/staples, broken bones, head injury or any other
serious injury, it shall be forwarded to the involved employees Bureau Office for
review and approval. Any Bureau Chief reserves the right to review a level 1 use
of force to make a final determination on the incident.
Review any level 2 or 3 Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam including
any police reports and digital evidence (i.e., photos/video). Provide
recommendations if any and determine whether the use of force is in policy or,
refer to Internal Affairs for further investigation, and/or take other correction action.
Forward the Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam to the involved
employee’s Bureau Deputy Chief within a timely manner. [Special Order – Use of
Force, 1/10/19]
7.1.2.13 USE OF FORCE – BUREAU RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
Review level 2 or 3 Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam including any
police reports and digital evidence (i.e., photos/video). Provide final
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
290 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
recommendations if any and make a final determination on all level 2 use of force
reports as to whether the use of force is in policy or, refer to Internal Affairs for
further investigation, and/or take other corrective actions.
The Deputy Chief, or his/her designee of the involved employee shall forward the
Supervisor’s Use of Force Report via BlueTeam to the Internal Affairs Division in
a timely manner.
If the use of force was part of a significant tactical event, the Deputy Chief, or
his/her designee, should consider notifying the Tactical Operation Committee
(TOC) or the Critical Incident Debrief Committee for review. [Special Order – Use
of Force, 1/10/19]
7.1.2.14 USE OF FORCE – INTERNAL AFFAIRS RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
Internal Affairs will maintain all Supervisor’s Use of Force reports and ensure
compliance with any findings or recommendations.
7.1.2.15 USE OF FORCE – TRAINING SECTION RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised October 20, 2015
When requested, the Training Section will evaluate the use of force to determine
the need for future training.
7.1.3 ARRESTS – FORCE
Revised October 20, 2015
When making an arrest, Officers shall strictly observe the laws of arrest and adhere
to the following provisions:
1) The arresting officer shall use only the amount of restraint necessary to
assure the safe custody of the prisoner and his/her own safety.
2) The arresting officer is responsible for the safety and protection of the
arrested person in his/her custody.
3) The arresting officer shall notify Booking Desk personnel or transportation
officers, if involved, of any injury, apparent illness or other condition which
may indicate that the arrestee would require any special medical care.
4) The arresting officer is responsible for the security of all personal property in
the possession or under the control of the arrestee at the time of arrest. With
the exception of vehicles, this responsibility is transferred to Booking Desk
personnel or transporting officers when they accept custody of the arrestee.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
291 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.4 PHYSICAL SURVEILLANCE AND PLANNED ARREST
OPERATIONS
Revised March 25, 2021
The Investigations Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year cycle.
Reviewed March 25, 2021
Officers conducting physical surveillance or planned arrest operations shall do so
with the utmost awareness of the risks to bystanders, officers, and the suspect(s).
Officers shall continually assess the dangers and risks posed by the operation and
whether the need to immediately apprehend the suspect outweighs the risks.
These risk factors include but are not limited to the following:
• Location of arrest,
• Severity of the crime,
• Known weapons,
• Suspect’s criminal history.
For operations outside the City of Long Beach, refer to LBPD Manual § 7.3.7
FOREIGN JURISDICTION – POLICE INVESTIGATIONS OUTSIDE THE CITY OF
LONG BEACH.
7.1.4.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised March 25, 2021
Officers shall do the following prior to the operation:
• Develop a plan and brief involved officers,
• Notify their supervisor.
7.1.4.2 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised March 25, 2021
Supervisors shall do the following prior to the operation:
• Review the plan,
• Ensure adequate resources are available,
• Notify the Watch Commander when enforcement action is anticipated,
• Notify the Communications Center, unless otherwise approved by the Watch
Commander.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
292 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.5 CODE THREE RESPONSE
All priority 1 calls will normally be dispatched Code Three. A code three response
may be cancelled at the direction of a command officer, supervisor or the
communications center.
Definitions
Priority 1 – Calls with the possibility of loss of life, serious injury, major property
damage, or other emergencies of a similar magnitude.
Code Three Response – A Code Three response is a response to a priority 1 call
during which a police vehicle displays a lighted red lamp, visible from the front, and
sounds a siren as may be reasonably necessary. A properly performed “Code
Three” response exempts the operator of an emergency vehicle from complying
with certain rules of the road as defined in §21055 CVC and §21056 CVC.
Procedures
Employees shall adhere to the following procedures when authorizing, dispatching
and responding to “Code Three” emergency calls. A supervisor or command
officer will specify the number of units initially responding to a dispatch “Code
Three”.
Police units may be dispatched “Code Three” under the following circumstances:
• Calls with the possibility of loss of life, serious injury, major property damage,
or other emergencies of a similar magnitude
• No detail (possible injury) traffic collisions
• A specific request by a field officer for a specified number of units to respond
“Code Three” as approved by a supervisor or command officer
• Firefighter needs help – URGENT – 997
• Officer needs help – SHOTS FIRED – 998
• Officer needs help – URGENT – 999
• As directed /authorized by a field supervisor
The communications center dispatcher shall inform the units that they are to
respond to the call “Code Three”. The communication center
dispatcher/supervisor should notify units when other units are responding Code
Three.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
293 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.6 CODE THREE – AUTHORITY TO INITIATE/CANCEL
Revised October 24, 2014
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
The following personnel have the authority to initiate or cancel a code three
response:
1) Field officers responding to a priority one incident after notifying
communications and/or a supervisor
2) Field officers initiating a traffic stop or a pursuit
3) A supervisor or command officer
4) Communications personnel dispatching a priority one incident
5) Field officers may initiate a code three response without notifying
Communications or a supervisor when the notification will interfere with an
ongoing emergency situation
6) Cancellation of a code three response should be based on the following criteria:
a) Nature of the emergency
b) Weather conditions (fog, heavy rain or slippery road conditions)
c) Traffic conditions (vehicular and pedestrian)
d) Time of day
e) Highway conditions
f) Area traveled (schools or residential)
g) The emergency no longer exists
Upon arrival at the location, officers will advise Communications that they are on
scene.
Officers operating a vehicle code three shall use proper defensive driving practices
and be aware of other emergency vehicles that may be driving code three.
Officers operating an emergency vehicle must drive with due regard for the safety
of all persons using the highway and should, therefore, use caution (§21056 C.V.C.
and §21807 C.V.C).
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
294 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.7 VEHICLE PURSUITS
Revised June 2, 2016
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
7.1.7.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised June 2, 2016
A) Pursuit – An event involving one or more law enforcement officers attempting
to apprehend a suspected or actual violator of the law in a motor vehicle while
the driver is using evasive tactics, including, but not limited to, high speed
driving, driving off a highway, turning suddenly, or driving in a legal manner
but failing to yield to the officer’s signal to stop.
B) Actively involved units – The primary unit, the secondary unit, and any other
unit pursuing the suspect vehicle.
C) Other Involved units, including, but not limited to:
1) Units requested by supervisor for traffic control
2) Units needed to set perimeter
3) Units needed for rescue or arrest teams
4) Units for evidence collection and transportation
5) Air support
D) Supervisor – A sworn employee with the rank of Sergeant or higher.
E) Surveillance mode – Observation of the suspect vehicle, by the Air Support
Unit (ASU), after a pursuit has been terminated by ground units.
F) Pursuit rated vehicle – Pursuant to California Vehicle Code (CVC) § 21806,
vehicles with the following:
1) Alternating headlights that flash on and off;
2) A forward facing, fixed red light; and
3) A siren sounding.
7.1.7.2 INITIATING PURSUITS
Revised June 2, 2016
The duty of a suspect to yield to the lawful authority of an officer is defined in CVC
§ 21806 and requires the police unit's red light and siren to be activated at all times.
Officers are authorized to initiate a pursuit in the following circumstances:
1) The officer has reasonable cause to believe that the suspect he or she is
attempting to arrest has committed, is about to commit, or is threatening to
commit a felony crime.
2) The officer, prior to initiating the pursuit, has reasonable cause to believe that
the driving ability of the suspect is so impaired that the suspect may cause
death or serious injury to another person.
An officer initiating a pursuit should, as soon as reasonably possible, notify the
Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Communications Department
(Communications Center) of the following:
1) Location;
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
295 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2) Direction of travel;
3) Speed;
4) Reason for initiating the pursuit;
5) Vehicle description and license plate, if available;
6) Number of additional units reasonably needed to join the pursuit to safely
effect the arrest;
7) Other facts relating to the suspect(s) that may present an increased danger;
When approval for continuation cannot be obtained by a supervisor, officers shall
cancel the pursuit.
7.1.7.3 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised June 2, 2016
A vehicle pursuit shall be conducted with red light and siren for exemption from
compliance with the rules of the road, as required by CVC § 21055. Officers shall
drive with due regard and caution for the safety of all persons using the highway,
as required by CVC § 21056.
7.1.7.4 ASSESSMENT OF RISK FACTORS
Revised June 2, 2016
A police pursuit is a dangerous activity that should be engaged in with the utmost
awareness of the risks to other drivers, bystanders, the officers, and the
suspect(s). The primary purpose of a motor vehicle pursuit is to arrest fleeing
suspects with the minimum amount of force necessary and to minimize the risk of
harm to people and property. Even when a pursuit is justified, everyone involved
must continually evaluate whether the dangers or risks of a pursuit outweigh the
need to immediately apprehend the suspect.
Some factors which should be considered and evaluated when initiating,
authorizing, continuing, or terminating a pursuit include, but are not limited to:
1) Time of day;
2) Vehicular traffic conditions;
3) Pedestrian traffic conditions;
4) Weather conditions;
5) Roadway conditions, e.g., slippery or under construction;
6) Area of pursuit, e.g., near school or residential area;
7) Severity of crime;
8) Whether the suspect has been identified and/or can be located, making later
apprehension probable;
9) Speed and recklessness of suspect;
10) Capabilities and limitations of pursuing vehicle;
11) Availability of backup;
12) Officer's familiarity with area of pursuit;
13) Quality of radio communications with the dispatcher, pursuing units, and the
authorizing supervisor;
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
296 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
14) Whether the suspect is known to be a juvenile; and
15) Involvement of the Air Support Unit.
7.1.7.5 PURSUIT COORDINATION
Revised June 2, 2016
The unit that initiates the pursuit shall be the primary unit and shall broadcast all
pertinent information regarding the pursuit, unless the primary unit specifically
requests the ASU or another actively involved unit to broadcast.
The primary unit may request as many units as necessary to allow for control and
arrest of the suspect(s). The field supervisor in charge of the pursuit will authorize
the number of units to engage, or assist, in the pursuit. This decision will be based
upon an assessment of the risk factors and information received from the primary
unit.
7.1.7.6 AIR SUPPORT UNIT (ASU) RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised June 2, 2016
When available, the ASU shall respond to the scene of a pursuit and shall assist
pursuing units and the supervisor as follows:
1) Notify the Communications Center when they have visual contact with a
pursuit;
2) If requested, assume responsibility for broadcasting locations and the
direction of travel of the pursuit;
3) Assist ground units and the supervisor monitoring the pursuit by identifying
and broadcasting all potential safety risks;
4) Once visual contact is made, provide the supervisor with the number of
ground units involved;
5) When possible, identify units participating in the pursuit for the purpose of
management and control;
6) Stay in radio contact with assisting ground units to aid in the capture of the
suspect(s);
7) Electronically record the pursuit and the termination point (the recording shall
be placed into evidence);
8) When a supervisor terminates a pursuit and surveillance mode is initiated,
the ASU will assume a position that affords the suspect little possibility of
detecting the ASU. The searchlight will not be used during the surveillance
mode. The ASU will follow the suspect vehicle until the vehicle stops, or the
surveillance is canceled.
7.1.7.7 FOREIGN JURISDICTION PURSUITS
Revised June 2, 2016
LBPD units, including the ASU, shall not engage in pursuits initiated by foreign
jurisdictions, unless the pursuit meets the criteria of the LBPD pursuit policy and
assistance is requested by the pursuing agency.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
297 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
LBPD units engaged in a foreign jurisdiction’s pursuit shall terminate their
involvement if the pursuit leaves the Long Beach city limits, unless directed to
continue by an LBPD supervisor.
If a foreign jurisdiction pursuit terminates within the Long Beach city limits, the
LBPD supervisor who approved the pursuit shall verify which agency will
coordinate pursuit termination activities.
7.1.7.8 PURSUITS LEAVING CITY LIMITS
Revised June 2, 2016
If an LBPD pursuit leaves the city limits, the unit broadcasting the pursuit shall
immediately notify the supervisor. The supervisor will direct the Communications
Center to inform other affected agencies of the pursuit.
Supervisors may request an outside agency to take over a pursuit if it reasonably
appears the other agency is better able or equipped to continue the pursuit. If a
pursuit is turned over to another agency, LBPD units shall verify that agency has
assumed control and then shall terminate participation; however, the primary unit
and field supervisor will remain available to cooperate with the arresting agency if
the suspect(s) is apprehended.
If a request is made by another agency for the LBPD to abandon a pursuit within
that agency's jurisdiction, that request shall be complied with immediately.
7.1.7.9 PURSUIT LIMITATIONS
Revised March 2, 2018
1) Police vehicles not equipped for pursuits shall not engage in a pursuit;
2) When the ASU is ordered to perform in a surveillance mode, all units will
attempt to stay clear of the area in which the suspect vehicle is operating;
3) Vehicles transporting prisoners shall not engage in pursuits under any
circumstances;
4) Officers shall not use a vehicle as a barricade, or to make intentional contact
with a suspect vehicle during a pursuit, unless using an authorized pursuit
intervention technique (PIT), or the use of deadly force is justified. The use
of a vehicle as a force option is governed by LBPD Manual § 7.1.2 USE OF
FORCE.
7.1.7.10 MOTORCYCLE UNITS
Revised June 2, 2016
A motorcycle unit may only initiate a vehicle pursuit for a violent felony or in other
extreme circumstances. The supervisor shall acknowledge that a motorcycle unit
is involved and approve or cancel the pursuit. The supervisor must explain the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
298 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
necessity of the motorcycle unit’s involvement, per LBPD Manual § 7.1.7.14
SUPERVISOR POST-PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES.
Unless otherwise directed by a supervisor, motorcycle units shall cease their
involvement when a four-wheeled, pursuit rated vehicle joins the pursuit and takes
over as the primary unit. Once a motorcycle unit ceases involvement in the pursuit,
they shall follow all requirements in LBPD Manual § 7.1.7.12 PURSUIT
TERMINATION.
7.1.7.11 TIRE DEFLATION DEVICE
Revised June 2, 2016
Tire deflation devices should be used whenever possible to safely end vehicle
pursuits. Only personnel who are trained in the operation and deployment of tire
deflation devices shall be permitted to deploy these devices. Use of a tire deflation
device shall be documented on a Supervisor's Vehicle Pursuit Report.
The Collision Investigation Detail will be responsible for the following:
1) Maintaining liaison with manufacturing companies for equipment purchase
and replacement;
2) Training existing and newly assigned personnel in the use of tire deflation
devices;
3) Distributing tire deflation devices throughout the Patrol Divisions;
4) Ensuring tire deflation devices issued to the Divisions are properly
maintained;
5) Maintaining expertise regarding the tire deflation device, usage, and
procedural issues.
Unless the use of deadly force is justified, tire deflation devices shall not be used
to stop the following vehicles:
1) Motorcycles, mopeds, or other similar type vehicles
2) Vehicles transporting hazardous materials
3) Buses with passengers
7.1.7.12 PURSUIT TERMINATION
Revised June 2, 2016
A pursuit shall be immediately terminated under the following conditions:
1) A field supervisor orders the pursuit terminated;
2) Officers lose visual contact with the suspect vehicle and the ASU is not in a
position to provide immediate directions;
3) Officers lose clear radio contact with the Communications Center;
4) Officers lose clear radio contact with the field supervisor authorizing the
pursuit.
Once the decision is made to terminate the pursuit, pursuing units shall:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
299 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1) Obey the rules of the road;
2) Deactivate their red lights and siren;
3) Turn off from the pursued vehicle's direction of travel (do not follow);
4) Notify the Communications Center of the termination;
5) ASU will not continue to follow the vehicle unless placed into surveillance
mode.
7.1.7.13 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised June 2, 2016
A field supervisor shall be notified immediately when a unit initiates a pursuit. After
evaluation of the circumstances surrounding the pursuit, the field supervisor shall
make a decision on whether to allow the pursuit to continue and shall transmit that
decision to the pursuing unit. If possible, the supervisor should not be actively
involved in the pursuit but shall monitor radio transmissions and be responsible for
the progress of the pursuit. The supervisor may terminate the pursuit at any time.
Any supervisor initiating a pursuit shall be considered the primary unit and subject
to the duties of a primary unit, including seeking authorization for the pursuit from
another supervisor. The supervisor should relinquish his or her role as the primary
unit to the first assisting unit on scene.
7.1.7.14 SUPERVISOR POST-PURSUIT RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised June 2, 2016
A field supervisor shall go to the scene of a terminated pursuit and take command.
The supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring all appropriate crime and arrest
reports are filed.
On each pursuit, the supervisor shall complete a Supervisor’s Vehicle Pursuit
Review, which will include the following:
1) Identification of all personnel involved both authorized and unauthorized;
2) Summary of the events leading up to the pursuit;
3) Chronological events of the pursuit;
4) Pertinent events occurring after the pursuit;
5) Any retraining.
A supervisor who was actively involved in a pursuit shall not file the Supervisor’s
Vehicle Pursuit Review.
7.1.7.15 DISASTER PREPAREDNESS AND EMERGENCY
COMMUNICATIONS DEPARTMENT (COMMUNICATIONS
CENTER) RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised June 2, 2016
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
300 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Upon notification by a unit that he or she is in pursuit, the Communications Center
will contact a sworn field supervisor to take supervisory control of the pursuit. The
supervisor will be informed of all available information including the units involved.
The dispatcher handling communications for the pursuit will provide all necessary
information to the field units. All units will be advised when the pursuit is terminated
or a supervisor requests a surveillance mode. Any necessary information will then
be conveyed to the ground units to avoid unnecessary contact with the suspect
during the surveillance operation.
The cancellation of a pursuit will be broadcast to all units along with the suspect's
direction of travel, so units may stay clear of the suspect vehicle.
7.1.7.16 REVIEW OF PURSUITS – POLICE VEHICLE AND AIR SUPPORT
UNIT
Revised June 2, 2016
The Collision Investigation Detail shall gather all pertinent pursuit information and
generate a Pursuit Review Report. This report shall contain an analysis summary
of the pursuit reports, supervisor’s report, video recordings, audio recordings, and
any other information related to the pursuit.
7.1.7.17 REVIEW OF PURSUITS – TIME PERIOD
Revised June 2, 2016
Pursuant to CVC § 14602.1, the Collision Investigation Detail shall complete all
State-mandated reporting requirements within 30 days.
7.1.7.18 REVIEW OF PURSUITS – COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised June 2, 2016
The involved employee’s Commander will review the Pursuit Review Report,
provide recommendations and administrative insight for the recommended action,
and forward the Pursuit Review Report to the involved employee’s Bureau Deputy
Chief.
7.1.7.19 REVIEW OF PURSUITS – BUREAU RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised June 2, 2016
The involved employee’s Bureau Chief will review the Pursuit Review Report, and
forward the Pursuit Review Report to the Internal Affairs Division.
The involved employee’s Division Commander and the CID supervisor will be
notified of any action to be taken.
7.1.7.20 TRAINING
Revised June 2, 2016
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
301 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
All sworn personnel will participate in Annual training that shall include, at
minimum, a review of this policy.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
302 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.8 DEPLOYMENT OF FIELD RESOURCES
Revised October 24, 2014
7.1.8.1 DEPLOYMENT OF AR-15 RIFLES
Revised: 2011
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
See Special Order DEPLOYMENT OF AR-15 RIFLES issued October 12, 2017.
The deployment of the AR-15 rifle will provide authorized personnel an immediate
response capability when confronted with compelling situations involving heavily
armed suspects. “Deployment” is defined as removing, loading, and charging the
AR-15 by an authorized officer during a tactical event to be used as directed by
policy.
Authorized Personnel for Deployment and Use of AR-15 Rifles
The responsibility for the appropriate deployment and use of the AR-15 rifle shall
reside with qualified personnel. Qualified personnel who have completed the
prescribed training in the use of the AR-15 rifle, under the supervision of the AR-
15 Cadre, and who successfully complete the current prescribed qualification
process are the only personnel authorized to utilize the AR-15 rifle. Authorized
personnel shall qualify during the periods designated for the AR-15 qualification
per the qualification calendar and attend any scheduled advanced rifle course.
Failure to qualify will result in de-certification and the officer will not be able
to carry/deploy the AR-15 rifle until they re-qualify. The involved officer may
be subject to discipline outlined in Manual section 6.8.6
All policies and procedures shall be adhered to, including: Manual section 6.8.5,
"Shooting Policy," section 7.1.3 "Force - Use of," section 8.1.1 "Homicide Detail
Call-Outs," section 8.1.2 "Firearms - Discharge Resulting in No-Hit," and section
8.1.3 "Firearms - Discharge Resulting in Injury or Death."
PROCEDURES
When to Deploy the AR-15 Rifle
The AR-15 rifle may be deployed when officers have reason to believe that a
suspect is engaged in any of the following acts:
• Armed and barricaded
• Sniper fire endangering officers or citizens
• Armed robbery in progress (or silent robbery alarm)
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
303 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Armed with a firearm or other dangerous life threatening weapon and
wearing protective body armor; armed with high-powered weaponry, or
has immediate access to weapons that surpass the capability of those
normally carried by field officers
• Actively participating in a random or systematic shooting spree,
demonstrating intent to inflict death or serious bodily harm on others
• Situated in a tactically advantageous position (due to distance or a fortified
location) and the deployment may neutralize the threat and minimize the
risk of serious bodily injury or death to officers and members of the
community
• Discharging a high-powered weapon(s)
• High-risk vehicle stops. The field supervisor or the on scene officer in
charge will determine the number of rifles deployed
• Other instances where, based upon the totality of the circumstances,
deployment would be reasonable. These circumstances may include, but
are not limited to: the need for greater firepower, accuracy, distance of
threat, number of suspects, seriousness of suspect offense and/or threat,
danger to the public, risk of escape, or other exigent circumstances
Officer Responsibility
As with any policy force option, the use of this weapons system must be justified
based upon this policy, as well as our force policy (7.1.2 Dept. Manual), and the
legal concept of objective reasonableness. Officers must account for every round
fired based upon the time they had to react and respond.
Officers encountering a situation that warrants the deployment of the AR-15 rifle
will notify a field supervisor of the circumstances. The only exception will be an
emergency situation when time for notification is not feasible.
Officers carrying an AR-15 rifle in their patrol vehicle shall notify the
Communications Center at the beginning of their shift of their status as AR-15
equipped.
Officers deploying an AR-15 rifle shall immediately notify the Communications
Center, or as soon as practical, of a “Code Adam Robert”. This will alert all
personnel that the rifle is deployed and will ensure the deployment is entered in
the call history.
Field Supervisor Responsibilities
At least one sergeant's vehicle per division will be equipped with two AR-15 rifles
and ammunition. These designated vehicles will be deployed as a first priority and
shall always be assigned to a field supervisor. The weapons shall be accessible
only by the field supervisor and shall remain locked in his/her assigned vehicle until
deployment is required.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
304 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
A sergeant shall respond to all calls where an AR-15 rifle has been
deployed/requested.
The field supervisor and Watch Commander will consider the deployment of SWAT
when circumstances dictate the use of these weapons. The deployment of the AR-
15 rifle will not circumvent the need to activate SWAT.
At the Conclusion of the Incident
After deployment, the AR-15 shall be returned to the assigned field supervisor or
assigned officer who shall ensure it is cleared, rendered safe, and secured in the
designated sergeant’s vehicle or officer’s vehicle.
Watch Commander Responsibilities
Upon notification, the Watch Commander shall immediately respond to the scene
and assume responsibility of the operation as the Incident Commander, unless
otherwise delegated.
Ensure the incident is documented in the Watch Commander Log including date,
time, and circumstances of the deployment.
Ensure all proper notifications are made.
Consider SWAT when the rifle is deployed.
Loading and Unloading the AR-15 Rifle
The weapon is only to be loaded or unloaded during deployment at an incident.
When loading the rifle in the field, the officer deploying should attempt to do one
of the following while chambering a round, when feasible:
• Have the muzzled pointed at an object that will absorb the round in the
event of accidental discharge or weapon malfunction
• Point the muzzle at grass or dirt
• Point the muzzle at a large tree trunk
When unloading, the same practices mentioned above should be utilized.
Reporting Procedures
The date, time, and circumstances of the AR-15 deployment will be entered into
the Watch Commander Log whether or not the weapon is actually fired. The log
entry shall also include the dispatch number and information relative to the arrest
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
305 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
of the suspect. When the weapon is fired, personnel shall adhere to established
policy. Each AR-15 deployment, not resulting in the discharge of the weapon, shall
be reviewed by the Tactical Operations Committee to ensure compliance with this
policy and to identify training needs. If the AR-15 is discharged during a
deployment, the Shooting Review Board will perform the review.
Equipment
Officers who legally own their own AR-15 rifles, have successfully completed the
AR-15 course, and are current in their AR-15 qualification may deploy the rifle in
the field within the guidelines of this policy. The rifle must be outfitted with
equipment described within the policy. Officers will be required to purchase a
scope, sling, magazine and deployment ammunition approved by the department.
Officers who have successfully completed the AR-15 course and are currently
qualified will be allowed to purchase a rifle with a Department letter. The rifle must
be equipped with a 3-point, 2-point, or single-point sling, scope and at least two
30-round magazines.
Officers will be required to qualify with their own rifle and have all of the accessories
attached to verify the rifle operates and is sighted in properly. The configuration of
the rifle will be documented and no changes can be performed without inspection
by the AR-15 Cadre. The qualification must be performed with duty ammo and the
rifle must not have any malfunctions. If the rifle is found to be inoperable, the officer
will be required to have the necessary repairs made and re-qualify, meeting all
described standards.
Officers can only purchase and deploy weapons with barrel lengths of 16” to 20”
and 30-round magazines, in caliber .223/5.56MM, with a Department letter.
The Department requires all officers deploying their own rifles to affix a quality
scope. If a red dot electronic scope is affixed, the officer must have a co-witness,
dual sight system that employs fixed or flip up sights. This would ensure that the
rifle is deployable even if the electronic scope is inoperable.
A list of approved manufactures will be maintained by the Range and the AR-15
Cadre. The following criteria for the selection of an approved manufacture must
be met:
Rifles
• Manufactured AR-15 rifles for over 3 years
• Established a good reputation in the firearms community
• Produced over 1000 units
Scopes
• Manufactured scopes for over 3 years
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
306 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Established a good reputation in the firearms community
• Produced over 1000 units.
If available, the department may issue department-owned rifles to qualified
personnel. The rifles will be configured to the standards outlined in the policy.
All rifles must be inspected by the AR-15 Cadre. No rifle can be deployed
until all of the equipment is acquired and inspected.
Magazines
Officers will be required to purchase 30-round high quality magazines. The
magazines must be inspected by the AR-15 Cadre. No drum magazines will be
allowed, except for SWAT. The AR-15 Cadre must approve any other types of
magazines.
Light Mounts
Light mounts can be added to the AR-15 only after receiving the prescribed
training. The light mount must be of good quality and units with momentary
switches, constant “On” switch capabilities and lock “Off” ability should be
considered. The light mount cannot be deployed until it is approved by the AR-
15 Cadre.
Ammunition
The authorized AR-15 is the Winchester 55 Grain Ballistic Silver-Tip. If other
rounds become available that are more advantageous or the current round is no
longer available, the AR-15 Cadre can authorize the usage of an alternative.
Magazine Pouches
Officers may carry a magazine pouch with additional magazines. The type of
pouch will be one that quickly attaches to the officer’s gun belt when the rifle is
deployed. The pouch can only be worn during an AR-15 rifle deployment. A “rapid
response bag” may also be utilized and can be worn during deployment.
Unauthorized Equipment
The following items will not be allowed or approved for deployment:
• Forward pistol grips
• Bipods or mono pods
Selection Process
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
307 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Commanders from Divisions who deploy field units should consider the following
when selecting personnel to attend the Patrol Rifle Course:
• Shift coverage of qualified Patrol Rifle officers
• Highly motivated officers
• Officer’s handgun qualification score
• Officer’s safety while handling all firearms
• Minimum of two years’ experience
• Prior military or SWAT experience
Weapon Maintenance
The Range staff, AR-15 training cadre, or trained division personnel, will ensure
department owned AR-15 rifles are inspected on a regular basis and in good
working order. That includes regular oiling of the weapons and checking the
sites/scopes for accuracy. Officers who deploy their own rifles are required to
maintain the rifle and keep it in good working order.
7.1.8.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK
7.1.8.3 DEPLOYMENT OF EXPECTORANT SHIELD
DEFINITION
This policy is intended to provide a guideline for the use of an expectorant shield
also known as the "Spit Net”. This shield is made from nylon mesh and has a one
size fits all design. The shield fits over the head of the wearer and is tied in the
back. This hooded style shield allows unrestricted breathing and keeps
expectorant or blood contained within the material.
POLICY
For the purposes of health and safety, the expectorant shields can be utilized with
in-custody subjects who are spitting or are violent and bleeding from the mouth or
head.
Officers wishing to deploy the shield shall contact a field supervisor. Supervisor’s
vehicles shall have a supply of shields at all times. The field supervisor shall
evaluate the circumstances and, if deemed necessary, the expectorant shield will
be issued to the requesting officer.
Once the shield has been applied, an employee shall continuously monitor the
subject. The expectorant shield shall be removed from the subject as soon as it is
safe to do so.
REPORTING
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
308 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Officer Responsibility
• Officers shall document in their reports all circumstances that led to use of the
expectorant shield
• Officers shall include in their reports both the names of the authorizing field
supervisor and watch commander who were notified regarding usage of the
expectorant shield
Field Supervisor Responsibility
• Field supervisors shall contact the watch commander and advise of the
circumstances that led to the application of the expectorant shield
• Field supervisors shall notify the officer of the name of the watch commander
for inclusion into the police report(s)
Watch Commander Responsibility
• The Watch Commander shall ensure that an entry is made into the watch
commander’s log
7.1.8.4 HOBBLE RESTRAINT DEVICE
Revised October 20, 2015
A) Use
1) The hobble restraint device shall be used only if a prisoner is combative,
violent, or if an officer reasonably believes the prisoner may pose a
threat to themselves or transporting officers.
2) When the hobble restraint device is used, officers should make every
attempt to use the technique in which the prisoner's legs are immobilized
and the prisoner is seated in an upright position in the rear of the police
vehicle.
3) Once the hobble restraint device is properly secured around both of the
prisoner's legs, it should be secured to the eyebolt on the vehicle’s rear
floorboard. In the event an eyebolt is not present, the strap should be
pulled out of the rear door of the vehicle, the loose end of the strap (hook
end) should then be placed on the front passenger floorboard, and both
doors closed to secure the strap.
4) Officers shall not allow the loose end of the hobble restraint device to
hang loose outside of the vehicle while it is in motion.
B) Reporting
1) The mere application of the hobble restraint device does not constitute
a reportable use of force; however, officers shall document in their report
the circumstances that led to the use of the hobble restraint device.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
309 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2) In the event force is used in the application of the hobble restraint device,
officers are required to comply with the use of force reporting
requirements.
7.1.9 FIELD SERGEANT RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised July 1, 2019
The Patrol Bureau has review responsibility.
Field sergeants will monitor the daily activities of their employees, and conduct
reviews as necessary. Field sergeants shall be responsible for approving units
checking out of service in the following circumstances:
1) Any station detail (924) that renders a unit unavailable to handle calls for
service;
2) Out-of-service for an extended period of time (e.g., firearms qualification,
training, special assignment, etc.);
3) Early end of watch;
4) Request to leave city limits for any reason.
The approving sergeant’s unit designator shall be entered into CAD for the above
requests.
7.1.9.1 SITUATIONS REQUIRING FIELD SERGEANT RESPONSE
Revised July 1, 2019
Unless an exception applies and is granted per LBPD Manual § 7.1.9.2, a field
sergeant shall respond to the following incidents:
a) Deployment of, or request for a patrol rifle;
b) Bias-motivated incidents;
c) Incidents involving critical missing subjects;
d) Explosives - threats, devices or detonation;
e) Homicides and/or in-custody death incidents;
f) Violent crimes with serious injury;
g) Request for emergency assistance by law enforcement or public safety
personnel (997, 998, 999);
h) Radio emergency via computer when there is no response from the officer
(Code 1000);
i) Situations involving barricaded suspects;
j) Situations involving hostages;
k) Fatal traffic collisions;
l) Incidents involving forced entry;
m) Incidents involving sworn personnel, from any jurisdiction, or any City of Long
Beach employee, in the following situations:
1) Any discharge of a firearm;
2) Incidents involving a use of force;
3) On-duty traffic collisions;
4) Off-duty incidents with an allegation of misconduct, or the seriousness
of the incident requires a supervisor response;
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
310 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
5) Traffic collisions where the employee was driving after having consumed
an alcoholic beverage;
n) Occupational injuries requiring hospitalization or emergency treatment;
o) Pursuits;
p) Airplane crashes;
q) Any incident that requires a substantial commitment of resources over a
sustained period of time;
r) Hazardous material incidents;
s) Any major Fire Department incident which requires a unified command, a
sergeant will be dispatched to the Fire Department command post to manage
Police Department resources;
t) Labor disputes, or a public assembly which causes a disruption or
disturbance to the public;
u) Arrest or detention of public figures, or foreign delegates;
v) Anytime a person refuses to sign a citation;
w) Any request from the public for a supervisor to respond.
7.1.9.2 EXCEPTION TO MANDATORY RESPONSE
Revised July 1, 2019
The Watch Commander may make an exception to a field sergeant’s obligation to
respond to any item listed in § 7.1.9.1 SITUATIONS REQUIRING FIELD
SERGEANT RESPONSE.
7.1.9.3 SITUATIONS REQUIRING FIELD SERGEANT NOTIFICATION
Revised July 1, 2019
Field sergeants will be advised of, and respond at their discretion to the following:
a) Unit at lunch (Code 7) in excess of the allotted time;
b) When a Communications Center dispatcher checks on the well-being of an
officer who has been out-of-service for an extended period of time;
c) When three or more units respond to a call;
d) Collisions involving the A-Line train;
e) When an officer encounters any subject who displays unusual, strange, or
violent behavior that presents a threat to the safety of an officer(s) or the
public;
f) Impending suicide or suicide that has just occurred.
7.1.10 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised July 1, 2019
The Watch Commander shall ensure the following:
a) Each Patrol Division has a supervisor assigned for every shift;
b) Field sergeants monitor their radio;
c) Field sergeants enter all applicable critical incidents in the electronic Watch
Commander Log.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
311 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.11 BEAT INTEGRITY/REDEPLOYMENT
In order to provide the highest level of police service to the public, there will be
times when units will be re-deployed into areas and beats other than their own.
The redeployment of units may be requested by the communications supervisor
and ordered by a field sergeant or command officer. The reallocation of units will
occur in instances where: (1) an area is experiencing a high volume of calls for
service/field activity and a low volume of calls for service/field activities or (2) for
accomplishing a directed patrol mission.
A unit's primary patrol responsibility is to its assigned beat
Officers shall remain in their beat EXCEPT for the following circumstances:
• The response is necessary to provide officer safety
• The response of an additional unit would increase the possibility of
apprehension, saving a life or reducing property damage
• The response is necessary to preserve a crime scene or other evidence
• When re-deployed or reassigned
7.1.12 CAD TRACKING
End of watch “logging off” by officers and supervisors shall be done by radio.
“Logging off” prior to EOW shall be accomplished by a field supervisor advising
communications that a unit is approved for EOW.
Reports
Arrest reports shall be filed prior to officers returning to the field unless:
• The watch commander directs them to return to the field
• The report is handwritten or tape-recorded with the prior approval of the watch
commander
• There are no Reporting Office personnel available for direct dictation
• Field officers who have complex or lengthy reports to file, which will require
working past the end of watch, shall request permission to file from a field
sergeant/command officer. Decisions to allow or deny the request will be
based upon:
− Unit availability
− Calls for service waiting
− The circumstances of the case
7.1.13 DRIVING UNDER THE INFLUENCE (DUI) ARREST
Revised December 21, 2016
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
7.1.13.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
Revised December 21, 2016
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
312 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
This policy provides guidance to those department members who play a role in the
detection and investigation of driving under the influence (DUI). The Long Beach
Police Department is committed to the safety of the roadways and the community
and will pursue fair but aggressive enforcement of California’s impaired driving
laws.
7.1.13.2 FIELD TESTS
Revised December 21, 2016
Based on National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recognized
testing protocols, the Traffic Section Lieutenant shall identify the standardized
field sobriety tests (SFSTs) and any approved alternate tests for officers to use
when investigating violations of DUI laws.
7.1.13.3 TRANSPORTATION PRIOR TO ARREST
Revised December 21, 2016
An officer may transport a driver suspected of impaired driving to a safer location
to conduct an SFST. Officers should not transport suspected DUI drivers to DUI
checkpoint locations for evaluation. If an officer needs assistance with an
investigation, the officer may contact the DUI checkpoint command post. If an
officer assigned to the DUI checkpoint is available, the DUI checkpoint supervisor
may send the available officer to assist.
7.1.13.4 CHEMICAL TESTS
Revised December 21, 2016
A person is deemed to have consented to a chemical test(s) under any of the
following (Vehicle Code § 23612):
1) The person is arrested for driving a vehicle while under the influence
(Vehicle Code § 23152).
2) The person is under 21 years of age and is arrested by an officer having
reasonable cause to believe that the person’s blood alcohol content is 0.05%
or more (Vehicle Code § 23140).
3) The person is under 21 years of age and detained by an officer having
reasonable cause to believe that the person was driving a vehicle while
having a blood alcohol content of 0.01% or more (Vehicle Code § 23136).
4) The person was operating a vehicle while under the influence and proximately
caused bodily injury to another person (Vehicle Code § 23153).
5) The person is dead, unconscious or otherwise in a condition that renders him
or her incapable of refusal (Vehicle Code § 23612(a)(5)).
7.1.13.5 CHOICE OF TEST
Revised December 21, 2016
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
313 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
A person arrested for DUI has the choice of whether the test is of his or her
blood or breath, and the officer shall advise the person that he or she has that
choice. If the person arrested is incapable, or states that he or she is incapable, of
completing the chosen test, the person shall submit to the remaining alternative
test.
An officer requesting that a person submit to chemical testing shall provide the
person with the mandatory warning pursuant to Vehicle Code § 23612(a)(1)(D)
and Vehicle Code § 23612(a)(4).
If the person chooses to submit to a breath test and there is reasonable cause
to believe that the person is under the influence of a drug or the combined
influence of alcohol and any drug, the officer may also request that the person
submit to a blood test.
7.1.13.6 BREATH TEST
Revised December 21, 2016
The Forensic Science Services Division Administrator shall ensure that all devices
used for the collection and analysis of breath samples are properly serviced and
tested and that a record of such service and testing is properly maintained.
Officers obtaining a breath sample shall monitor the device for any sign of
malfunction. Any anomalies or equipment failures must be noted in the
appropriate report and promptly reported to the Forensic Science Services
Division.
When the arrested person chooses a breath test, the handling officer shall make
the Trombetta Advisement to the person informing them that the breath-testing
equipment does not retain a sample, and the person may, if desired, provide a
blood specimen, which will be retained to facilitate subsequent verification testing
(Vehicle Code § 23614).
The officer should also require the person to submit to a blood test if the officer
has a clear indication that a blood test will reveal evidence of any drug or the
combined influence of an alcoholic beverage and any drug. Evidence of the
officer’s belief shall be included in the officer’s report (Vehicle Code §
23612(a)(2)(C)).
7.1.13.7 BLOOD TEST
Revised December 21, 2016
Only persons authorized by law to withdraw blood shall collect blood samples
(Vehicle Code § 23158). The assigned officer should witness the withdrawal of
the blood sample. No officer, even if properly certified, should conduct the blood
withdrawal.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
314 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Officers should inform an arrestee that if he or she chooses to provide a blood
sample; a separate sample can be drawn for alternate testing (Vehicle Code §
23614). If a second sample is drawn, the second sample must be placed in a
separate evidence package.
If an arrestee cannot submit to a blood test because he or she is a hemophiliac or
is using an anticoagulant, he or she shall not be required to take a blood test. Such
inability to take a blood test should not be treated as a refusal. However, the
person may be required to complete another available and viable test.
7.1.13.8 REFUSALS
Revised December 21, 2016
When a person refuses to provide a viable chemical sample, officers should:
1) Advise the person of the requirement to provide a sample (Vehicle Code §
23612);
2) Audio-record the admonishment and the response, if practicable; and
3) Document the refusal in the arrest report.
Upon refusal to submit to a chemical test, as required by law, officers shall
personally serve the notice of order of suspension or revocation of the person's
privilege to operate a motor vehicle upon the person and take possession of
any driver's license, issued by this state, that is held by that person (Vehicle
Code § 23612(e) and Vehicle Code§ 23612(f)).
7.1.13.9 BLOOD SAMPLE WITHOUT CONSENT
Revised December 21, 2016
A blood sample may be obtained from a person who refuses a chemical test
when one of the following conditions exist:
1) A search warrant has been obtained (Penal Code § 1524);
or
2) The officer can articulate that exigent circumstances exist. Exigency does
not exist solely because of the short time-period associated with the natural
dissipation of alcohol in the person’s blood stream. The totality of the
circumstances must establish that the need to obtain the blood sample is so
compelling that a warrantless blood draw is objectively reasonable. For
example, exigency can be established by a lengthy delay in obtaining a blood
sample due to an accident investigation or medical treatment of the person.
If a person indicates by word or action that he or she will physically resist a
blood draw, the officer shall request a supervisor to respond. The responding
supervisor should:
1) Ensure the withdrawal is recorded on audio and/or video when
practicable; and
2) Ensure the methods used to accomplish the blood sample draw are
documented in the related report.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
315 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.13.10 WARRANTLESS ARREST
Revised December 21, 2016
In addition to the arrest authority granted to officers pursuant to Penal Code § 836,
an officer may make a warrantless arrest of a person that the officer has
reasonable cause to believe has been driving under the influence of an alcoholic
beverage or any drug, or under the combined influence of the same, when (Vehicle
Code § 40300.5):
1) The person is involved in a traffic
accident.
2) The person is observed in or about a vehicle that is obstructing the
roadway.
3) The person will not be apprehended unless immediately arrested.
4) The person may cause injury to him or herself or damage property
unless immediately arrested.
5) The person may destroy or conceal evidence of a crime unless immediately
arrested.
7.1.13.11 PRELIMINARY ALCOHOL SCREENING
Revised December 21, 2016
Officers may use a preliminary alcohol screening device (PAS) test to assist in
establishing reasonable cause to believe a person is DUI. The PAS is a field
sobriety test under the California Vehicle Code. The officer shall advise the
person that the PAS test is being requested to assist in determining whether the
person is under the influence of alcohol. Unless the person is under the age of
21, he or she shall be advised that the PAS test is voluntary. The officer shall also
advise the person that submitting to a PAS test does not satisfy his or her
obligation to submit to a chemical test as otherwise required by law (Vehicle Code
§ 23612).
7.1.13.12 PRELIMINARY ALCOHOL SCREENING FOR INDIVIDUALS
UNDER 21 YEARS OF AGE
Revised December 21, 2016
If an officer lawfully detains a person under 21 years of age who is driving a motor
vehicle, the officer has reasonable cause to believe that the person has a blood
alcohol content of 0.01% or more, and a PAS test device is immediately available,
the officer shall request that the person take a PAS test. If a PAS test device is
not immediately available, the officer may request that the person submit to
chemical testing of his or her blood or breath conducted pursuant to Vehicle Code
§ 23612 (Vehicle Code § 13388).
If the person refuses to take or fails to complete the PAS test or other chemical test,
or if the result of either test reveals a blood alcohol content of 0.01% or more, the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
316 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
officer shall proceed to serve the person with a notice of order of suspension
pursuant to this policy (Vehicle Code § 13388).
7.1.13.13 PRELIMINARY ALCOHOL SCREENING (PAS) DEVICE
MAINTENANCE
Revised November 19, 2020
Reviewed November 19, 2020
A PAS device shall be calibrated each month to confirm the accuracy of the
device. Monthly testing of a PAS device is a necessary component of a successful
prosecution in a DUI case in which the device was used.
Personnel issued a PAS device will be notified by email from the Forensic Science
Services Division a week prior to calibration testing being conducted. It is the
officer's responsibility to submit the device issued to them for calibration each
month. PAS devices that have missed two successive calibrations will be
removed from the field by the Traffic Section.
Once calibration testing is completed, the Forensic Science Services Division will
forward a list of PAS devices that were submitted for calibration and the results to
the Traffic Section Lieutenant. The Traffic Section Lieutenant or designee will
review the list and take appropriate action for any devices that were not calibrated.
If an issued PAS device is found to be inoperative, the officer issued the device
shall contact the Traffic Section to request a replacement. At no time should a
PAS device be used that could not be calibrated or is inoperative.
A yearly review of PAS device usage will be conducted by the Traffic Section
Lieutenant, or designee. Those devices found to be used infrequently, may be
reassigned at the discretion of the Traffic Section Lieutenant, or designee.
7.1.13.14 DUI PROBATION/COURT ORDERED IGNITION INTERLOCK
DEVICE
Revised December 21, 2016
If an officer lawfully detains a driver with a prior DUI conviction, and is determined
to be on DUI Probation at the time of the detention (Vehicle Code 23154), or is
required to have an ignition interlock device installed (Vehicle Code 23247(e)),
officers should ensure the driver is complying. DUI Probation restrictions can be
found on the driver's CDL return. A driver on DUI probation is required to provide
a chemical sample if the officer has reasonable cause to believe the driver has a
blood alcohol content of 0.01% or more. If the person refuses to provide a
chemical sample, officers shall proceed to serve the person a notice of order of
suspension.
7.1.14 VICTIMS OF VIOLENT CRIMES NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
Revised May 10, 2021
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
317 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Investigation Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed May 10, 2121
The Long Beach Police Department is committed to ensuring victims of crime are
treated with compassion and understanding, while providing guidance and
assistance in the reporting process. This policy establishes requirements of related
legal mandates and how Department personnel will facilitate such assistance
through available governmental assistance.
It is in the public interest to assist residents of the State of California in obtaining
restitution for financial losses they suffer as a direct result of criminal acts
(Government Code §13950).
This section establishes a program to indemnify and assist in the rehabilitation of
residents of California who have, as the direct result of a crime, suffered a financial
loss that they are unable to recoup without suffering serious financial hardship.
Claims must be filed with the California Victim Compensation Board.
Requirements
It shall be the duty of every local law enforcement agency to inform victims of
violent crimes of the provisions of this chapter, and to provide application forms to
victims who desire to seek assistance (Government Code §13962(b)).
The LBPD Report Receipt (PD Form 2310-004) provides instructions to victims
regarding who is eligible and how to apply for victim compensation. The Report
Receipt also supplies victims with an application to obtain a copy of the related
crime report. Filing officers shall provide a Report Receipt to all crime victims.
Filing officers shall indicate in their reports that the victim, or potential victim, was
notified of these available benefits. The report shall indicate the date this
notification was made. In a case where the notification was made to a person
other than the victim, this shall also be noted in the report.
In the event the victim is deceased, and their dependents are not immediately
available for notification, it shall be the responsibility of the assigned detective to
ensure the notification is made.
7.1.15 CRIMES AGAINST POLICE OFFICERS – ARREST APPROVAL
REVISED DATED 04/15/97
The Booking Sergeant will be responsible to review the arrest circumstances for
each of the following crimes against officers:
• §245 PC - Assault with a deadly weapon (against a police officer)
• §243(b) PC- Battery against a police officer (misdemeanor)
• §243(c) PC - Battery against a police officer (felony)
• §148 PC - Resisting a police officer in the discharge of his/her duties
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
318 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• §148.9 PC - Falsely reporting self as another person to a police officer
• §69 PC - Resisting executive officers
• §31 CVC - False information to a police officer
The Booking Sergeant shall then make notification to the watch commander. The
watch commander will approve or deny the arrest and make an appropriate entry
in the watch commander’s log.
The arresting officers shall include the names of both the booking sergeant and
the approving watch commander in the arrest report. The arresting officers shall
also include in the arrest report any observations and/or comments made during
the booking review.
7.1.16 GANG RELATED - CRIME
All gang definitions, to follow later, shall be used to standardize and document the
investigative crime reports assigned to the gang detail.
The department shall recognize a homicide as gang-related if one of the following
factors are present:
• The suspect is a known, identified gang member
• The victim of the crime is a known, identified gang member
• The victim of the homicide is killed in any type of gang related crime
Situations may occur where a gang member is a victim of a crime, but where gang
affiliation has no bearing on preparation or victimization. In incidents such as
these, discretion should be used in recognizing this killing as gang related.
Employees of this Department shall not release the names of involved gangs to
members of the media/press in an effort to prevent retaliation and glorification of
criminal gang activity.
The Department shall ascribe to the following gang and gang-related definitions as
used by the California State Task Force on Youth Gang Violence.
7.1.16.1 GANG - DEFINED
A gang is a group of individuals who form an allegiance for a common purpose.
The individuals engage in acts injurious to public health and public morals, and
obstruct justice or the due administration of laws, or engage in (or have engaged
in) criminal activity, either individually or collectively, and they can create an
atmosphere of fear and intimidation within the community.
Definition of “Gang Activity”
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
319 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• An incident wherein all or a majority of participants are identified gang members
or associates, and the incident is consistent with usual gang activity
• An incident or aggression occurs wherein the perpetrators are identified gang
members or associates, and it is known that a state of conflict exists between
their gang and another, and the incident is consistent with such conflict
• An informant of previously untested reliability identifies an incident as gang
activity, and is corroborated by other attendant circumstances or independent
information
• There are strong indications that an incident is gang-related but it does not fit
the above criteria, it shall be termed “possible gang activity”
Definition of “Gang-Related Crime”
A reported homicide, attempt murder, assault with a deadly weapon, robbery, rape,
kidnapping, shooting at an inhabited dwelling, battery on a police officer, or arson,
and the suspect or victim is on file as an active gang or associate gang member.
An investigation reveals that the incident involved a gang member, although
neither the victim nor the suspect is known to be an active or associate gang
member; i.e., “A” shoots “B” and yells the name of a gang during the commission
of the crime, et cetera.
Distribution of Crime Reports
The Reporting Office will route copies of crime reports to the Gang Detail. Criteria
for distribution shall include any one of the following circumstances:
• Drive-by shooting
• 594 Graffiti
• Any report involving a possible gang member
Identification of a Gang Member
• The subject admits or claims to be a member of a certain gang
• The subject had distinctive gang tattoos identifying the subject as a gang
member
• The subject’s mode of dress, in gang attire, identifies the subject as a gang
member
• The subject’s associates are known identified gang members
• The subject is a victim or suspect of an identifiable gang-related crime
• The subject is identified as a gang member by other reliable source
• The subject frequently uses identifiable gang hand signs
There shall be two classifications for gang homicide tabulation:
• Gang homicides – A homicide in which the suspect or victim had a connection
with a street gang crime or occurrence
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
320 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Gang-related homicides – A traditional drive-by shooting in which gang
members shout gang slogans and murder a rival gang member
Additionally, the Gang Violence Suppression Grant (G.V.S.) is subject to Penal
Code Sections §13826.3, Individuals Subject to Gang Violence Prosecution
Efforts, and §13826.4, Enhanced Law Enforcement Efforts. Applicable excerpts
are as follows:
§13826.3 Individuals Subject to Gang Violence Prosecution Efforts
An individual shall be subject to gang violence prosecution efforts who is under
arrest for the commission or attempted commission of any gang-related violent
crime where the individual is (1) a known member of a gang, and (2) has exhibited
a prior criminal background.
For purposes of this chapter, gang-related means that the suspect or victim of the
crime is a known member of a gang.
For purposes of this chapter, gang violence prosecution includes both criminal
prosecutions and proceedings in Juvenile Court in which a petition is filed pursuant
to §602 of the Welfare and Institutions Code (1981 Chapter 1030.1).
7.1.17 ARREST – PRIVATE PERSONS
A “Private Person’s Arrest Report” (PD Form 4100.021) will be completed and
signed by any person making such an arrest. The Private Person’s Arrest Report
will accompany the regular arrest report or misdemeanor citation completed by the
officer taking custody of the arrestee.
All officers called to take custody of an individual who has been arrested by a
private person shall ascertain that:
• Such arrest is lawful and at the time of taking into police custody, the officer
had reasonable cause to believe such arrest was lawful, or
• Such arrest is made pursuant to a charge made, upon reasonable cause, of
the commission of a felony by the person to be arrested, or
• Such arrest is made pursuant to the requirements of Penal Code Section 837
(Circumstances Authorizing Arrests by Private Persons)
If it is determined the citizen’s arrest meets the above criteria, the officer shall:
• Explain the Private Person’s Arrest Report to the person making the arrest and
have them complete and sign the form
• Take the arrestee into custody and complete an arrest report as with any other
arrest
• The arrest report and Private Person’s Arrest Report will be fastened together
and forwarded to the Records Section for processing
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
321 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
If in the case of a felony, the private person refuses to sign the form and there
appears to the police officer to be sufficient probable cause to arrest the prisoner,
the officer should take the prisoner into custody. Write “refused to sign” on the line
for the signature of the arresting party. The circumstances surrounding the refusal
to sign should be included in the body of the officer’s arrest report.
7.1.18 PUBLIC INTOXICATION – ARRESTS OF SUBJECTS
Revised July 22, 2021
The Patrol Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed July 22, 2021
Officers may arrest subjects who are found in any public place intoxicated and in
such condition that they are unable to care for their own safety or the safety of
others, or by reason of their intoxication interferes with, obstructs, or prevents the
free use of any street, sidewalk, or other public way (Penal Code §647(f)).
Officers shall adhere to the following procedures when booking a subject for public
intoxication:
• Attempt to corroborate an arrested subject’s intoxication by obtaining a blood
alcohol level (BAC) through administering an Intoxilyzer test.
• The on-duty booking sergeant must observe the arrested subject and approve
all bookings for Penal Code §647(f). The decision will be based on the arrested
subject’s objective signs/symptoms, behavior, and BAC, if known.
• Arrested subjects believed to be under the influence of any drug, controlled
substance, toluene, or any combination thereof should be examined by a Drug
Recognition Expert (DRE) officer, if one is available.
• Arrest reports shall provide a detailed account of how officers came in contact
with the arrestee, probable cause for the arrest, signs and symptoms of
impairment, a summary of any field sobriety test(s) administered, by whom, and
results/opinions thereof. Copies of all Intoxilyzer results, completed or not,
must accompany the arrest report.
• If the subject is not booked, a Release Not Booked (RNB) report shall be filed
consistent with Departmental policy.
7.1.19 INTENTIONALLY BLANK – HELD FOR NEW POLICY
7.1.20 SEARCH, SEIZURE & ARREST
When two or more officers are at the scene of a crime or location of an arrest, and
when practical, only one officer shall handle all aspects of the incident relating to
court documentation and presentation. This officer shall complete all forms and/or
required reports and adhere to the following procedures:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
322 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• If possible, observe the violation(s), make the arrest, conduct searches and
collect all evidence
• Advise the arrestee that he/she is under arrest
• Advise the arrestee of his/her constitutional rights and other required
admonishments
• Question the arrestee and record and record statements for inclusion in the
arrest report
• Administer tests as required
• Conduct inventory search at booking
• Maintain, mark and deliver any evidence to the property section
• File appropriate reports (Crime Report, Arrest Report, Evidence, et cetera)
• Include a statement in the arrest report as to his/her ability to testify to all the
facts that are related to the crime and/or arrest
In the event that more than one officer is present (two-person unit or assisting unit),
the second officer shall assist with non-critical tasks including, but not limited to:
• Providing back up during the arrest, handcuffing and transporting of an arrestee
• Requesting tow truck and completing the necessary stored/impound report
form
• Complete the booking form
• If an arrest occurs near the end of watch (EOW), the second officer shall utilize
his/her time to complete any unfinished reports or tasks accumulated during
their shift
Examples of exceptions, which may require officers to deviate from this standard
procedure, are:
• Arrest involving drug or narcotic influence (narcotic expert)
• Arrest of combative or violent subjects
• Arrest of non-English speaking persons
• Arrest by probationary officers while in training
• Arrest made by field sergeants or lieutenants
• Additional crimes which the handling officer did not observe
• Accident (injury or non-injury) involving DUI arrest
7.1.21 CRIME SCENES – GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES
The first officer to arrive at the scene of a crime or other police incident is
responsible for the following actions as they may apply to the situation:
• Summoning emergency equipment necessary to prevent loss of life and/or
property
• Summoning medical assistance and the administration of first aid as required
to prevent further injury or loss of life
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
323 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Arrest of violator(s)
• Securing the scene
• Completion of Crime Scene Log, PD Form 3111.001(A)
• Completion of Witness list, PD Form 3111.001(B)
• Completion of Chronological Record, PD Form 3111.001(C)
NOTE: These forms shall be used at all major incidents such as homicides, officer
involved shootings, barricaded suspects, natural disasters, et cetera.
7.1.21.1 CRIME SCENES – ASSIGNED OFFICER
Officers assigned to perform the preliminary or other investigation of an alleged
crime scene or other incident are responsible for the duties described in section
7.1.21, entitled “Crime Scenes – General Responsibilities”, and the completion of
the preliminary or other investigations, as directed.
7.1.21.2 RELIEF OF ASSIGNED OFFICER
Upon completion of the preliminary investigation, the assigned officer shall stand
relieved of that particular assignment and shall be available for further
assignments, unless otherwise directed by a superior officer or other officer
specifically assigned to the investigation.
7.1.21.3 DETECTIVE NOTIFICATION
All officers and/or supervisors who respond to or discover a major crime, shall
notify the watch commander that a detective team is required if any of the following
circumstances exist:
• Actual or suspected explosive device is located – notify the Violent Crimes
Detail and the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department Arson/Explosives
Detail (See Training Bulletin #120)
• Bank and Savings & Loan robberies – Notify the Robbery Detail Monday
through Friday, 0800-1700 hours only
• Incidents involving political figures as victims or suspects and acts considered
terrorist in nature – Notify the Chief of Police, Deputy Chief of Detective Bureau
and appropriate Detail sergeant
• Sexual assaults – Notify the Sexual Assault Response Team (SART) per
criteria set forth in Manual Section 8.4.10
• Homicides/officer involved shootings (officers are fired upon and/or shots are
exchanged between officers and suspects, hit or no-hit) – Notify the Homicide
Detail per criteria set forth in Manual Section 8.1.3
• Crimes involving an extensive loss of $20,000 or more, excluding vehicle, boat
and aircraft thefts – Notify appropriate Detail sergeant
• Critical Missing where foul play is suspected – Notify the Homicide Detail
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
324 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• In-Custody Deaths – Notify the Homicide Detail
Between 0800-1700 hours, Monday through Friday, the watch commander shall
notify the appropriate investigative Detail and advise detectives of the situation.
During other hours, the watch commander shall make an incident evaluation and
determine if detectives shall be called. The watch commander is to log all such
incidents and notifications in the watch commander’s log.
The watch commander shall also make notification to the Office of the Chief of
Police during normal business hours from 0800-1700 hours when any of the above
are reported.
7.1.21.4 DEATH DETERMINATION
Police Personnel on scene of a possible death shall request Long Beach Fire
Department Paramedics to confirm death.
EXCEPTIONS: Victims having one or more of the following signs:
• Decapitation
• Incineration
• Decomposition
• Evisceration of a heart, lung or brain
Authority for dealing with a crime scene is vested in law enforcement. In these
sensitive crime scene situations, Emergency Medical Services (EMS) personnel
should be careful not to disturb possible evidence. Law enforcement should assist
in creating a “safe path” into the scene to access the patient and minimize scene
contamination. One paramedic is sufficient to confirm death.
7.1.21.5 PHOTOGRAPHY AND DIGITAL IMAGES
Revised October 20, 2015
The Investigations Bureau has audit responsibility.
See Special Order MOBILE DEVICES issued December 6, 2018.
Digital cameras will be issued to select members of the Long Beach Police
Department and may be used to document injuries or evidence during criminal or
administrative investigations. All images taken during the course and scope of an
employee’s job are the property of the Long Beach Police Department.
Employees who take photographs, digital images, or video during an investigation
will document in a report that images were captured. Employees SHALL NOT take
personal photographs, digital images, or video of any crime scene or potential
evidence.
A) Uploading and deleting images, video and audio
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
325 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1) Employees taking photographs, video or audio recordings are
responsible for ensuring this data is inputted into the Digital Imaging
Management System (DIMS).
2) Once data is uploaded from the media card to the DIMS, the reusable
media card shall be formatted to remove all previous files in preparation
for reuse.
3) Employees SHALL NOT make personal copies of images, video or
audio recordings and if the employee used their personal device, the
data must be deleted after uploading.
Note: Use of personal devices could result in subpoenas and/or warrants being
issued for those devices.
B) Distribution of images
1) Employees shall not distribute images to anyone not involved in official
police business.
2) Images shall not be distributed to the media or any non-law enforcement
entity without the approval of a Command Officer.
3) All printing and copying must be done through the DIMS to ensure an
audit log of the images.
For additional information on distribution refer to manual sections 6.1.1.2 and
6.1.1.3.
C) Editing and deleting images
1) To preserve the integrity of the process, no images shall be deleted once
uploaded in DIMS. This includes images that were inadvertently taken
or that are of poor quality, such as images that are too dark to see detail.
The images should be left intact on that storage media to preserve the
continuity of the imaging session. The only exception is prior
authorization from the DIMS Administrator.
7.1.22 RELEASED NOT BOOKED (RNB)
Revised January 26, 2016
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
Arresting officers shall complete a Long Beach Police Arrest/Released Not Booked
Form (PD 4102.013 (A)), FI/RNB Card (PD 4100.007), or complete an RNB on the
Automated Reporting System (ARS) whenever a subject is arrested or handcuffed
and subsequently released prior to booking; this form shall be forwarded to the
Records Section.
This policy shall pertain to field releases, station releases and conditions of exigent
circumstances; in all of these cases a field supervisor shall be notified.
7.1.23 TRANSPORTATION OF PRISONERS IN POLICE VEHICLES
Revised October 20, 2015
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
326 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
Prisoners shall be transported in police vehicles in a manner compatible with the
safety and security of both the prisoner and transporting personnel. All persons
arrested by officers and transported to the station for booking shall be handcuffed.
There is no room for discretion when the subject is charged with a criminal offense.
The only viable exception to this policy is when a person is taken into custody for
something other than a criminal offense and exigent circumstances apply. For
example:
1) The person suffers from Alzheimer’s or is senile;
2) The person is seriously ill;
3) The person is a victim being transported.
In such cases, the transporting officer must be reasonably certain a decision not
to handcuff will not place him/her or the prisoner at any increased risk. In no event
shall a prisoner be restrained with a leg hobble in a hog-tied position (feet hobbled
to the handcuffs), nor shall officers transport a prisoner in the prone position, since
it can increase the risk of positional asphyxia.
The handcuffing provision shall not apply to the transporting of inmate workers to
their off-site work assignments. Applicable vehicle passenger safety sections of
the California Vehicle Code shall be followed.
7.1.23.1 NONVIOLENT PRISONERS WITH ONE OFFICER
Revised October 20, 2015
Nonviolent prisoners transported by one officer shall be:
1) Handcuffed;
2) Seat belted in the rear seat of a caged transporting vehicle;
3) Seat belted in the front seat of a non-caged transporting vehicle.
Discretion should be used when one officer transports more than one nonviolent
prisoner.
7.1.23.2 NONVIOLENT PRISONERS WITH TWO OFFICERS
Revised October 20, 2015
Nonviolent prisoners transported by two officers shall be:
1) Handcuffed;
2) Seat belted in the rear seat of a caged transporting vehicle;
3) Monitored by the assisting officer, who shall ride in the front seat of a caged
transporting vehicle;
4) Monitored by the assisting officer, who shall ride in the rear seat of a non-
caged transporting vehicle, with the prisoner;
5) Observed by the assisting officer, who will monitoring the prisoner’s color,
breathing, and level of consciousness; during the hours of darkness, an
internal light source (flashlight, dome light, et cetera), can be used to maintain
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
327 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
a clear view of the prisoner, as long as the light does not interfere with the
driver.
7.1.23.3 VIOLENT PRISONERS WITH ONE OFFICER – WITHIN THE CITY
Revised October 20, 2015
Violent prisoners transported by one officer shall be:
1) Handcuffed;
2) Hobble restrained;
3) Seat belted in the rear seat of a caged transporting vehicle.
In all cases, a second officer must follow the transporting officer during the
transportation of a violent prisoner. If at any time the prisoner becomes
uncontrollable, the transporting officer shall stop the vehicle and the second officer
will assist with controlling the violent prisoner.
7.1.23.4 VIOLENT PRISONERS WITH TWO OFFICERS – WITHIN THE
CITY
Revised October 20, 2015
Violent prisoners transported by two officers shall be:
1) Handcuffed;
2) Hobble restrained;
3) Seat belted in the rear seat of a caged transporting vehicle;
4) Monitored by the assisting officer, who shall ride in the front seat of a caged
transporting vehicle;
5) Monitored by the assisting officer, who shall ride in the rear seat of a non-
caged transporting vehicle, with the prisoner;
6) Observed by the assisting officer, who will monitor the prisoner’s color,
breathing, and level of consciousness; during the hours of darkness, an
internal light source (flashlight, dome light, et cetera), can be used to maintain
a clear view of the prisoner, as long as the light does not interfere with the
driver.
7.1.23.5 TRANSPORTATION OF PRISONERS OUTSIDE OF THE CITY
Revised October 20, 2015
When transporting prisoners outside of the City, including the pick-up of warrant
subjects, a two-officer transport is required, unless otherwise approved by the
Watch Commander. One officer must be armed.
7.1.23.6 CARE OF IN-CUSTODY PRISONERS
Revised October 20, 2015
Prior to transport, in cases where a prisoner is controlled and handcuffed in the
prone position, the prisoner shall be placed in the seated position as soon as
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
328 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
reasonably possible. In no event shall a prisoner be handcuffed in a prone position
and left unmonitored.
It is the officer's responsibility to ensure the prisoner is breathing adequately once
the prisoner is controlled and handcuffed. Officers shall monitor the prisoner's
color, breathing, and the level of consciousness throughout their contact with the
prisoner.
7.1.23.7 PREEMPTING PRISONER TRANSPORTATION TO RESPOND TO
A CALL
Revised October 20, 2015
Exceptional circumstances, such as a life-threatening situation, may arise
requiring response to a call by a unit transporting a prisoner. Prior to responding
to any call while transporting a prisoner, consideration must be given to the nature
and urgency of the call.
The transporting unit shall:
1) Obtain PRIOR permission from a supervisor to preempt. Immediately contact
a supervisor if the decision is made to postpone a prisoner’s transportation to
respond to a call. Upon being advised of the circumstances, the supervisor,
will evaluate the need and approve or disapprove the request. If the request
is approved, the involved unit must provide supervision for the safety and
custody of the prisoner and resume transportation as soon as practicable.
The unit shall document all of the details of the preemption in the arrest report,
documenting the name of the approving supervisor.
2) Obtain PRIOR permission from a supervisor for a Code 3 response.
3) Consider the charges facing the prisoner, the prisoner’s demeanor and
attitude, and the number of officers in the transporting unit.
4) NOT be allowed to preempt if the prisoner requires medical treatment or
evaluation prior to booking.
5) NOT go in pursuit under any circumstances.
6) Follow all the rules of the road, per 21052 C.V.C.
7) Maintain proper custody and ensure the safety of the prisoner.
7.1.24 ARRESTEES TRANSPORTATION OF UNCONSCIOUS –
UNRESPONSIVE
The transportation of unconscious of unresponsive arrestees by employees of this
Department is PROHIBITED.
• Officers shall not transport unconscious/unresponsive arrestees
• Officers confronted with an unconscious/unresponsive arrestee situation shall
summon Paramedics for arrestee transport to a local hospital
• Medical personnel shall be called immediately to evaluate an arrestee who
becomes unconscious en route to jail. Officers shall use discretion dependent
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
329 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
on time and medical circumstances whether to transport the arrestee to the
nearest hospital or request Paramedic response to the scene or specified
location. Officers shall advise the communications center and request
supervisory authorization to proceed “Code 3” or regular, dependent on
medical and traffic conditions.
• In all incidents where an arrestee is unconscious/unresponsive, medical
personnel shall immediately evaluate the arrestee
• The aforementioned shall apply to the transport of all other individuals (ride-
alongs, City employees, et cetera)
7.1.25 DISPOSITION OF DEPENDENT CHILDREN TAKEN INTO
PROTECTIVE CUSTODY
Dependent and found children will NOT be temporarily housed in the Public Safety
Building while awaiting final disposition by a County of Los Angeles Department of
Children’s Service (DCS) employee. All dependent children, as described in §300
of the Welfare and Institutions Code and taken into temporary custody under
authority of §305 of the Welfare and Institutions Code, shall be delivered directly
to DCS in the manner prescribed in the following procedure section.
All found children that are in custody of the police may be released to their parent
or legal guardian. If a parent or legal guardian cannot be found, the found child
shall be released to Department of Children’s Services in the manner prescribed
in the following procedure section. Officers shall not direct a citizen who has found
a child to take the found child back to the parent. A police unit shall be dispatched
to take care of the child.
Procedure
Police officers who take into custody dependent children described in §300 of the
Welfare and Institutions Code, and non-dependents in temporary custody pursuant
to Welfare and Institutions Code §305, shall, while at the scene, or as soon as
practical, call the Youth Services Division, at telephone number 570-1425. During
off hours, contact the Department of Children’s Services 24 Hour Hotline at 800
540-4000.
The Youth Services Division shall assess the incident and advise the officer of an
appropriate disposition. In cases of severe physical abuse or sexual molestation,
a Child Abuse Investigator may respond to direct a coordinated investigation with
Patrol personnel.
Weekdays/Business Hours 0800-1700: Dependent children shall be taken to the
Department of Children Services regional office, 4060 Watson Plaza Dr.,
Lakewood CA, 90712, phone number 562 497-3500.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
330 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Officers shall release dependent children to the DCS supervisor on-duty and
submit all related police reports not later than the end of watch. All protective
custodies of dependent children require an arrest report.
If a DCS Employee is not available, the officer shall call MacLaren Children’s
Center Command Post, telephone number (818) 575-4196, for instructions.
Children shall remain in police custody until their release to a DCS employee.
7.1.26 MEDICAL RECORDS FOR PERSON IN CUSTODY
(ARRESTEES)
A “Medical Record for Person In-Custody” form, PD Form 2100.56 (revised 6/87),
shall be initiated by the arresting or transporting officer each time a person in-
custody (or a person to be taken into custody) is examined or treated by a
physician outside of the Department jail facility.
All medical treatment and/or examination of obvious injuries/illnesses to recently
arrested individuals shall be completed PRIOR TO BOOKING AT THE LONG
BEACH JAIL. These shall include, but not be limited to, injuries or medical
conditions; i.e., complaints of pain. Officers shall not book a person in the Long
Beach City Jail knowing that he/she requires immediate medical attention.
“Medical Records for Persons In-Custody” Form Procedure
Personnel involved in the arrest, booking or processing of a prisoner who receives
medical treatment shall:
Officer Responsibility
Prepare a copy of the Long Beach Police Department “Medical Record for Person
In-Custody” form (PD Form 2100.56). Officers shall complete the first portion.
Officers shall advise the hospital admittance clerk as to whether the treatment is
prior to booking or subsequent to booking. This shall determine the responsible
party relative to the Los Angeles County Payment for Treatment Policy. Officers
shall call the booking sergeant at 570-7431 or 570-7234 and obtain a Booking
Number for the form when the treatment is being given prior to booking.
Officer/Hospital Employee Responsibility
• Ensure that the hospital employee receiving the individual for treatment
completes the second portion of the report. The hospital employee receiving
the individual for treatment will give the on-duty physician the form.
• Officer/Physician Responsibility
• Ensure that the third portion of the report is completed and signed by the
physician who examined the person-in-custody. The physician, prior to the
patient leaving the facility, must complete this part of the form. The treating
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
331 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
physician shall determine whether the person in-custody is acceptable for
booking at the Long Beach City Jail of should be transferred to the Los Angeles
County Jail Ward (USC Medical Center) or the Los Angeles County Main Jail.
Booking Supervisor Responsibility
• · Ensure at the time of booking the treated arrestee that the “Medical Record
for Person In-Custody” form is presented by the transporting/arresting officer.
The Booking Supervisor shall review, initial and write his/her photo number on
the form, if booking is approved. The “Medical Record for Person In-Custody”
form shall be taken with the prisoner to the jail floor and reviewed by the on-
duty supervisor
Jail Supervisor Responsibility
• The jail supervisor shall write his/her name and photo number on the form. The
supervisor shall ensure that the “Medical Record for Person In-Custody” form
remains in jail with the prisoner until his/her release so that the Jail Physician
may refer to the form and record any follow-up treatment or medication. The
Jail Division will make a copy of the form and forward it to the Long Beach
Health Department, Attention: Manager, Medical Service Bureau, via inter-city
mail. The original copy of the form shall be forwarded to the Information
Management Division upon the prisoner’s release or transfer and placed in the
prisoner’s record jacket.
Information Management Division Responsibility
• Ensure that the original of the “Medical Record for Person In-Custody” form is
filed in the prisoner’s record jacket
7.1.27 MOTORIST – DISABLED
§20018 of the California Vehicle Code, entitled to “Assistance to Motorists”, reads
in part:
“Every law enforcement agency having traffic law enforcement responsibility as
specified in subdivision (a) of §830.1 and in subdivision (a) of Section 830.2 of the
Penal Code shall develop, adopt, and implement a written policy for its officers to
provide assistance to disabled motorists on highways within its primary
jurisdiction…”
It is the policy of the Department that uniformed officers shall respond and assist,
whether dispatched or observed, any disabled motorist on a street or highway
within the City. Officers shall request assistance if appropriate and shall remain at
the scene until motorists and bystanders are no longer subjected to hazardous
conditions.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
332 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
When assistance is required on a freeway bordering or within the City, officers
shall provide assistance as required. Officers may advise the Communications
Center to request that CHP unit responds to the location.
7.1.28 DEATH NOTIFICATION
When the identity of a decedent has been established, every attempt to notify the
next of kin shall be made. Notification shall be made. Notification shall not be
made by telephone to the family by any member of this Department unless the
family is already aware of the death and is only awaiting positive identification or if
in-person notification is impossible.
When a dead body report is completed, the reporting officer, irrespective of his/her
assignment within the Department, shall make every reasonable attempt to identify
the decedent and notify his/her next of kin. The officer shall contact the Information
Management Division, researching files for any reports listing the decedent as
either a victim or a suspect. Information may be obtained from these documents
that will assist in the notification. ALL INFORMATION REGARDING WHETHER
THE NEXT OF KIN HAS BEEN NOTIFIED OR WHAT ATTEMPTS WERE MADE
WHICH WERE UNSUCCESSFUL SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE REPORT. The
officer shall include in the Crime Report narrative to whom the death notification
was made and who made the notification.
If the next of kin does not reside in Long Beach or have not been identified, all
available pertinent information will be provided to the Los Angeles County
Coroner’s Office Investigator, who in turn will assume responsibility for making
death notification to the next of kin or other police agency.
When the watch commander receives a request from the Coroner’s Office to notify
the next of kin of a death, a uniformed patrol unit shall be contacted. The watch
commander shall advise the patrol officer of the circumstances involving the death
notification and the individual or individuals to be contacted. DO NOT
BROADCAST.
• Police Officer(s) making a death notification shall ascertain with certainty that
the individual concerned is the individual to whom the notification shall be given
• Officers should attempt to have a relative or friend present at the time of
notification
• Officers should utilize tact and diplomacy when notifying family or friends of a
death. Particular consideration should be used when the individual informed is
elderly or in poor health
• Officers should, when appropriate, have the individual seated prior to
notification
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
333 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Pertinent instructions for the individual being notified (such as who to contact,
where, when, phone numbers, et cetera) shall be provided in written from by
the officer after he/she has personally made the notification
• When notifications are requested by the Los Angeles County Coroner’s Office,
it is required that the Coroner’s Officer be immediately informed by the watch
commander of the disposition at telephone number (213) 343 0711, or (213)
343 0714
• Death notifications are not made by letter or telephone, except with the
authorization of the watch commander and only in situations where in person
notification is impossible, or the family is already aware of the death and is only
awaiting positive identification
• Officers shall use courtesy and compassion when making a death notification
7.1.29 ANIMAL BITES
Reporting Bites
Long Beach Animal Control acts on behalf of the Long Beach Health Department,
receiving reports of animal bites and posting quarantines.
Citizens who are bitten or scratched by an animal, and doctors and hospitals that
treat bite victims are required by law to report the bite to their local Health
Department or Animal Control agency.
Citizens, doctors or hospital who contact members of the Police Department to
report bites should be advised to call Animal Control during regular business hours,
0800 to 1700 hours on week days and 0800 to 1600 hours on Saturday at
telephone number 570 7387. Sunday, Animal Control may be reached during the
day 1000 to 1600 hours at the same number.
The aforementioned does not apply if unusual bite circumstances are involved
requiring immediate response from police and/or Animal Control.
Animal Control will handle animal bites that apply to the following circumstances:
• Bites that occur in the City of Long Beach involving Long Beach animals
• Bites that occur in the City of Long Beach, but the animal lives outside the City
• Bites that occur outside the City of Long Beach, but the animal lives in Long
Beach
Routine Bites – Procedures for Handling & Reporting
A routine bite is one where the animal bites a person (minor bite), the animal
owner’s address is known and the animal is confined.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
334 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Routine bites are to be reported to Animal Control at telephone number 570 7387
during business hours, 1000 to 1700 hours weekdays and 0800 to 1600 hours on
Saturday. A bite report will be taken and an Animal Control Officer will follow it up
and quarantine the animal.
For Animal Control Officer Assistance
If Animal Control assistance is needed during the day hours, 0800 to 1700 hours,
Animal Control Officers will be dispatched from the Animal Control Center to the
location.
Between the hours of 1530 and 0800, one Animal Control Officer is on-duty and
may be contacted until 1700 hours at telephone number 570 7387 and after 1700
hours through the communications center.
Police Assistance
Police Assistance is needed when requested by Animal Control Officers for back
up or when an animal is attacking people and causing an immediate hazard to the
community.
Unusual Bites
• Cases involving severe wounds caused by dogs or other animals
• Cases involving animal bites about the neck or head of the victim
• Cases involving bites caused by skunks, fox or coyotes
An all-out effort should be made to locate the biting animals in the situations
described above. It is very important to locate stray animals involved in bites.
Loose/Stray/Free Roaming Animals
Usually police officers will either provide assistance for Animal Control Officers or
just keep the peace.
Citizens who have questions on the aforementioned should be referred to Animal
Control at 570 7387.
7.1.30 POST STORAGE HEARING (PSH)
Revised November 19, 2020
The Patrol Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed November 19, 2020
California Vehicle Code (CVC) § 22852, requires an agency that stores vehicles
to have a PSH process to determine the validity of a storage. This hearing will be
conducted within 48 hours of the request, excluding weekends and holidays. The
agency employing the person who directed the storage will be responsible for the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
335 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
costs incurred for towing and storage, if it is determined in the PSH that reasonable
grounds for storage were not established.
CVC § 22655.5(c) dictates that an impounded vehicle shall be released to the
owner and all fees waived whenever the vehicle was taken as evidence in a crime
and there is no indication that the owner was involved in the crime, has participated
in the crime, or loaned the vehicle knowing it was to be used in the crime. CVC
§22655.5(c) also requires that the costs of towing and storage shall be borne by
the agency ordering the impoundment.
Impounding is discouraged if the registered owner of the vehicle is not involved
and there are other satisfactory means of preserving the evidence of vehicle use
with the exception of vehicles impounded for §14602.6 CVC.
7.1.30.1 FEE WAIVER REQUEST
Revised November 19, 2020
During normal business hours, any request to waive tow or storage fees shall be
directed to the Collision Investigation Detail (CID). An Authorization to Waive
Storage and/or Towing Fees (PD Form 4100.024) form shall be completed when
towing or storage fees are waived.
Fees may be waived under the following circumstances:
• A vehicle has been improperly stored or impounded due to error or invalid
information.
• The Department failed to notify the registered owner of the storage causing
additional storage fees to incur.
• Special circumstances exist causing the Watch Commander or CID Lieutenant
to waive all or part of the towing or storage fees.
7.1.30.2 COLLISION INVESTIGATION DETAIL (CID) RESPONSIBILITY
Revised November 19, 2020
CID is responsible for the following:
• Conducting all PSHs during normal business hours.
• Contacting Fleet Services Division, Towing Operations regarding additional
holds on the vehicle.
• If a crime is involved, contact the applicable Detective Division Lieutenant for
waiver approval.
• If storage is deemed invalid or fees should be waived, contact the CID Sergeant
or Lieutenant for waiver approval.
• Conduct monthly post storage reviews.
7.1.30.3 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITY
Revised November 19, 2020
The Watch Commander is responsible for the following:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
336 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Conducting a PSH if exigent circumstances exist where there is an immediate
need to release a vehicle or refer non-exigent PSH requests to CID.
• Approve waiver requests.
• Ensure the original form is routed to the Patrol Bureau.
• Ensure that a copy of the form is sent to the Fleet Services tow yard.
7.1.30.4 PATROL BUREAU RESPONSIBLITY
Revised November 19, 2020
The Patrol Bureau Deputy Chief, or designee will ensure that the Authorization to
Waive Storage and/or Fees form is reviewed, and the original forwarded to CID for
document retention.
7.1.31 MARIJUANA POSSESSION - ISSUANCE OF CITATIONS
Revision: February 9 2009
The following procedures shall apply when citing subjects in possession of one ounce
or less of marijuana. If the offender is not driving a motor vehicle, he/she shall be cited
using Section 11357(b) of the Health & Safety Code.
The date to appear for arraignment in Municipal Court shall be set for 1300 hours on
the 60th day following the date on which the citation was issued. If the 60th day falls
on a weekend or legal holiday, the court date shall be set for the first business day
following that weekend or legal holiday.
A DR Follow-up and an Evidence Report shall be filed with each citation issued. In the
event that a subject in possession of one ounce or less of marijuana is the driver of a
vehicle, he/she shall be cited using Section 23222(b) of the California Vehicle Code.
The procedure used in completing the associated paper work will be similar to that
used for citing under Section 11357(b) H&S. If the driver is cited for additional Vehicle
Code violations, he/she will be cited on the same citation, and a follow up must be
included for the 23222(b) charge.
7.1.31.1 Medical Marijuana – Proposition 215 – The Compassionate Use Act of
1996
Background
In October 2003 new State Legislation (SB420) was signed which clarified the scope
and application of the Compassionate Use Act of 1996. Proposition 215 allows the
medicinal use of marijuana by ill Californians where such use would be beneficial in
the treatment of any illness where marijuana would provide relief. The rights granted
to "patients" also extend to persons identified as patient "caregivers."
In addition, the State Department of Health Services (SDHS) must establish a
voluntary program for the issuance of medical marijuana identification cards to
qualified patients. These identification cards and guidelines have yet to be developed
by the SDHS; however, the new laws are in effect.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
337 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Purpose
The purpose of this manual section is to provide officers with procedures related
to enforcing marijuana laws when the issue of medical possession has been
presented. This procedure is not intended to discourage illegal drug enforcement
in the city of Long Beach. In contrast, the procedure is to provide clear direction
for a convoluted law.
Procedure
This procedure does not apply to those incidents where there is evidence of
possession of marijuana for sale. This activity does not fall under the medical
marijuana criteria. In these incidents, the suspect will be arrested and the
contraband seized.
It is not incumbent on a police officer to inquire whether a suspect cultivating,
possessing, or using marijuana is doing so for medicinal purposes. It is the
responsibility of the suspect to claim an affirmative defense under the law as either a
“qualified patient” or “caregiver’. Should the person make such a claim, the officer
should detain the person and conduct an investigation.
Upon encountering a person (patient or caregiver) in possession of medical marijuana
and the person has “oral or written documentation” authorizing medical use of the
drug, an officer shall:
• Request a field supervisor respond to the location
• Contact the attending physician to verify authorization
– When verification cannot be accomplished, document such in the Incident Report
– If authorization is verified, officers should not ask any further questions of a
medical nature
• File an Incident Report detailing circumstances of the incident. The report will include
information received from asking the following questions of a “qualified patient”:
– Are you taking medication and if so, what medication?
– For what condition are you taking medication?
– What is the name, office address and office telephone number of the prescribing
physician?
– What is the duration of treatment?
• The report will include information received from asking the following questions of a
“primary caregiver”:
– For whom are you a primary caregiver?
– How long have you been a primary caregiver?
– What type of primary caregiver services do you provide?
– For what condition is the patient being treated?
– What is the name, office address and office telephone number of the prescribing
physician?
If after a thorough investigation, officers and supervisor determine that a person is
in possession of marijuana for medical reasons as described and authorized under
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
338 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
the law, the marijuana shall not be seized. In lieu of arrest or citation, the officer
shall file an Incident Report documenting the contact and actions.
If the person does not claim a medical affirmative defense, the investigation will
be handled in the normal manner. Possession of marijuana is still illegal in the
State of California.
Upon encountering a person claiming to be in possession of medical marijuana and
the possession is questionable, officers shall follow the same investigative procedure
as described for persons with oral or written authorization. If after a thorough
investigation, officers and supervisor determine that a person is not in possession of
marijuana for medical reasons as described and authorized under the law, the Watch
Commander will be notified and respond to the scene.
The Watch Commander shall evaluate the facts and exercise the discretion required
to resolve the incident in accordance with this policy.
If enforcement action is necessary, officers shall not arrest the individual without the
approval of the Watch Commander. Officers should obtain the necessary information
to complete an Incident Report that will be forwarded to the appropriate prosecuting
agency for consideration.
If a court orders the return of marijuana to a person who has successfully established
a medical marijuana defense and the department is ordered to return the seized
marijuana, the officer handling the marijuana will have immunity from liability.
Procedure for Return of Marijuana
• Only the property sergeant can release marijuana
− The subject receiving a court order for return of marijuana must take the
order to the detective handling the case
− The detective will fill out the Department’s release form which must then
be signed by the Division Lieutenant, the Division Commander and the
Bureau Chief
− The signed form is faxed to property sergeant
− The subject is notified that he has 90 days to pick up his marijuana or it
will be destroyed
Health & Safety (H&S) Laws Related to Medical Marijuana
H&S §11362.5 provides that seriously ill Californians have the right to obtain and
use marijuana for medical purposes where that medical use is deemed appropriate
and has been recommended by a physician. It also ensures that patients, and their
primary caregivers, who cultivate, possess and use marijuana for medical
purposes upon the oral or written recommendation of a physician are not subject
to criminal prosecution or sanction.
H&S §11362.71(a) requires the State Department of Health Services (SDHS) to
establish a voluntary program for the issuance of medical marijuana identification
cards to qualified patients and would establish procedures under which a qualified
patient with an identification card may use marijuana for medical purposes. However,
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
339 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
a qualified patient need not possess such an identification card in order to claim
protection by the act. The SDHS has yet to work out the procedures for issuing of
identification cards and our Health Department is awaiting their guidelines before
acting.
H&S §11362.71(e) states that no person or designated primary caregiver in
possession of a valid identification card shall be subject to arrest for possession,
transportation, delivery, or cultivation of medical marijuana in the established amount,
unless there is reasonable cause to believe that the information contained in the card
is false, falsified, the card has been obtained by fraud, or the person is otherwise in
violation of the provisions of this article. Subsection (f) states that it is not necessary
for a person to obtain an identification card in order to claim protections of H&S
§11362.5.
H&S §11362.71(g) defines an Identification Card. Identification Card means a
document issued by the State Department of Health Services. The document
identifies a person authorized to engage in the medical use of marijuana.
H&S §11362.735 (a) an identification card issued by the county health department
shall be serially numbered and shall contain all of the following:
• A unique user identification number of the cardholder
• The date of expiration of the identification card
• The name and telephone number of the county health department or the county's
designee that has approved the application
• A 24-hour, toll-free telephone number, to be maintained by the department, that will
enable state and local law enforcement officers to have immediate access to
information necessary to verify the validity of the card
• Photo identification of the cardholder
(b) A separate identification card shall be issued to the person's designated primary
caregiver, if any, and shall include a photo identification of the caregiver.
H&S §11362.77 establishes that:
• A qualified patient or primary caregiver may possess no more than eight ounces of
dried marijuana per qualified patient
• A qualified patient or primary caregiver may also maintain no more than six mature
or 12 immature marijuana plants per qualified patient
• If the qualified patient or primary caregiver has a doctor’s recommendation that
this quantity does not meet the qualified patient’s needs, the qualified patient
or primary caregiver may possess an amount of marijuana consistent with the
patient’s needs
H&S §11362.785(a) states the law does not require accommodation of medical use
of marijuana at places of employment, or during the hours of employment, or on the
premises of any jail.
H&S §11362.79 states the law does not authorize the smoking of medical marijuana
in any place where smoking is prohibited by law; within 1,000 feet of a school,
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
340 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
recreation center or youth center unless the use occurs within a residence; on a school
bus; while in a motor vehicle that is being operated; or while operating a boat.
Definitions
“Qualified Patient” H&S §11362.7(f) – To qualify as a patient, a person must be a
seriously ill California resident and have been examined by a physician, where the
physician has determined that the specific patient’s health would benefit from
marijuana as a treatment for a specific illness.
“Serious Medical Condition” H&S §11362.7(h) – means all of the following:
• Acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS)
• Anorexia
• Arthritis
• Cachexia
• Cancer
• Chronic Pain
• Glaucoma
• Migraine
• Persistent muscle spasms, including, but not limited to, spasm associated with
multiple sclerosis
• Seizures, including, but not limited to, seizures associated with epilepsy
• Severe nausea
• Any other chronic or persistent medical symptom that either:
– Substantially limits the ability of the person to conduct one or more major life
activities as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990
– If not alleviated, may cause serious harm to the patient's safety or physical or
mental health
“Primary Caregiver” H&S §11362.7(d) – means the individual designated by the
person exempted under H&S §11362.5 who has consistently assumed responsibility
for the housing, health, or safety of that person.
“Written Documentation” H&S §11362.7(i) – means accurate reproductions of
those portions of a patient's medical records that have been created by the
attending physician stating that the subject has been diagnosed with a serious
medical condition and that the medical use of marijuana is appropriate.
“Acceptable” amount of marijuana for qualified patients to possess – eight (8) ounces
of dried marijuana and up to six (6) mature or twelve (12) immature plants unless the
patient or primary caregiver has a doctor’s recommendation stating that the patients
need is great.
• Business Forms – Any group that is collectively or cooperatively cultivating and
distributing marijuana for medical purpose should be organized and operated in a
manner that ensures the security of the crop and safeguards against diversion for
non-medical purposes. There is to be no profit from the sale of marijuana whether
it is a collective, cooperative or individuals distributing marijuana.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
341 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.33 DRUGS FOR K-9 RECOGNITION TRAINING
The K-9 Unit shall provide the Crime Lab with an estimate of annual controlled
substance requirements. This request shall be completed during the annual
budget preparation (B-prep) process. Amounts of controlled substances
requisitioned for K-9 training shall be kept to a minimum.
The Crime Lab will obtain the needed controlled substances by purchase, transfer
from closed cases (court order secured by K-9 Unit sergeant), or transfer from
other agencies. Controlled substances shall be maintained in a secured and
inventory controlled environment by the crime lab. (Purchase shall be the option
only when all other avenues have been exhausted.)
Release of Controlled Substances
As needed, the Deputy Chief, Patrol Bureau, shall prepare a memorandum to the
Deputy Chief, Detective Bureau, with approval of the Chief of Police, requesting
the transfer of controlled substances from the Crime Lab to the K-9 Lieutenant or
designee. This transfer request shall specify the type of drug, packaging size and
number of packages needed. Due to security and toxicity, a minimum size
package of drugs shall be used for K-9 training.
To assure accountability prior to transfer, the controlled substance shall be
documented as to its weight and purity. The Crime Lab shall maintain a
representative sample of weight and purity documentation for future comparison.
Transfer of all controlled substances shall be documented. The documented
release shall be prepared and signed by the issuing criminalist and signed by the
receiving officer. The release shall document the type of drug, weight, and number
of packages. The Crime Lab shall maintain the original “Document of Release”.
Copies shall be provided to the receiving officer, Chief of Police, Deputy Chief of
Detective Bureau, Deputy Chief of Patrol Bureau and Crime Lab.
K-9 Accountability
All controlled substances shall be distributed to K-9 officers by the K-9 Lieutenant.
Each package of controlled substance shall be labeled with the receiving officer’s
name, date of issuance and shall be initialed by the receiving K-9 officer. The K-
9 Lieutenant shall maintain a log, which documents the receiving officer’s name,
date, time, amount of packages, and type of drug issued. A copy of this log shall
be provided to each officer and maintained with the controlled substance.
All controlled substances in the K-9 officer’s possession not being used for training
purposes shall be maintained in a locked metal box secured within the trunk of the
officer’s vehicle.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
342 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
All controlled substances possessed by K-9 officers shall be inspected monthly by
the K-9 sergeant and a report filed to the Deputy Chief, Patrol Bureau.
All losses or destruction/damage to controlled substances shall be reported
immediately to the K-9 supervisor. The K-9 supervisor shall file a memorandum
to the Deputy Chief, Patrol Bureau, relative to the loss or destruction/damage and
forward a copy to the Chief of Police.
Return of Controlled Substances to the Crime Lab
The K-9 Lieutenant shall return all expired, or no longer needed, controlled
substances to the Crime Lab. The Deputy Chief, Patrol Bureau, shall prepare a
memorandum to the Crime Lab documenting the type of controlled substances and
number of packages being returned.
The receiving Criminalist shall compare the returned drugs to the memorandum of
returned controlled substances and sign the memorandum if they are in
agreement. A copy of the “documented return” shall be provided to the K-9
Lieutenant, Chief of Police, Deputy Chief of Detective Bureau, and Crime Lab.
All returned packages shall be inspected for broken seals or tampering.
Quantitative analysis shall be performed on all returned packages. Once the
returned controlled substances have been tested and their contents confirmed,
they shall be transferred to property for destruction. A copy of the Laboratory
Analysis shall be forwarded to the Chief of Police, Deputy Chief of Detective
Bureau, and Deputy Chief of Patrol Bureau.
Training
The K-9 Lieutenant shall be responsible for training K-9 officers on the proper
handling of controlled substances.
7.1.34 POLICE OFFICERS ASSOCIATION (POA) DIRECTORS
SPEAKING AT SQUAD MEETINGS
It shall be the policy of the Long Beach Police Department to allow POA Directors
address the Patrol Division squad meetings under the following conditions:
• The POA Director shall obtain permission to address the squad meeting from
the ranking Patrol Command Officer on-duty. Permission and topic advisement
shall be accomplished prior to the beginning of the squad meetings
• At the conclusion of the regular squad meeting, the ranking Patrol Command
Officer shall announce that a member of the Board of Directors of the POA will
make a presentation. Attendance is not mandatory
• Presentations by POA Directors shall not exceed 10 minutes unless permission
is granted by the ranking Patrol Command Officer on-duty. The POA director
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
343 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
shall not speak to a point that would cause delay in relief of the Watch going
off-duty
• Topics shall be related to wages, hours and working conditions
• At no time shall a POA Director ridicule members or organizational units of the
Department by name. This does not preclude legitimate constructive criticism
regarding police departmental policies, practices and procedures
The above procedures shall be subject to the existing grievance procedure.
7.1.35 RIDE-ALONG OBSERVER PROGRAM
Revised November 19, 2020
The Patrol Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed November 19, 2020
This policy provides guidelines for the Ride-Along Observer Program. The
program provides an opportunity for eligible citizens to experience law
enforcement functions firsthand by accompanying a uniformed police officer during
a work shift. Ride-along observers will be limited to riding in marked police cars,
aircraft, and vessels.
This program may be suspended during special events, occasions where
resources are at a premium or during instances of a tactical alert, citywide
emergency, or at the sole discretion of the Chief of Police, his or her designee, or
the Patrol Bureau.
7.1.35.1 ELIGIBILITY – COMMUNITY MEMBERS
Revised November 19, 2020
A ride-along may be denied or an applicant disqualified from participation for any
of, but not limited to, the following reasons:
1) Outstanding warrants,
2) Convicted, under indictment, or currently charged with any felony offense,
3) Convicted for any sexual related offense,
4) Convicted for any domestic violence related offense,
5) Suspended driver's license,
6) Applicant is a named suspect in a crime report by any law enforcement
agency,
7) Applicant is a known member of, or associated with any person or
organization that advocates hatred, prejudice, or oppression of any person or
group or which disseminates such material,
8) Applicant is a known member of, or associated with any organization,
association, movement, or group which advocates the commission of acts of
force or violence to deny others of their rights under the Constitution of the
United States, or which seeks to alter the form of government of the United
States by unconstitutional means,
9) Any other indications of criminal history or criminal involvement,
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
344 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
10) Persons under the age of fifteen (15) shall not be permitted to participate,
11) Persons who have a pending lawsuit against the City of Long Beach or Police
Department shall not be allowed to ride as an observer while the lawsuit is
active,
12) The Chief of Police, or designee, may deny a ride-along at his or her sole
discretion.
7.1.35.2 ELIGIBILITY – CIVILIAN EMPLOYEES, LAW ENFORCEMENT
VOLUNTEERS, OR OTHER LAW ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES
Revised November 19, 2020
On-duty LBPD civilian employees may ride as an observer with the approval of
their supervisor; a signed waiver is not required.
Off-duty LBPD civilian employees may ride as an observer; a signed waiver is
required.
Long Beach Police Department employees shall not ride as an observer while on
IOD, modified duty, transitional duty, during a suspension, or under administrative
or criminal investigation.
Active Police or Search and Rescue Explorers must have permission from their
Explorer Advisor or Post Coordinator prior to participation in a ride-along.
Sworn or civilian employees from other law enforcement agencies may ride with
on-duty LBPD employees only if they are engaged in active operations and
approved by the Patrol Bureau.
If an off-duty peace officer from another law enforcement agency wishes to ride as
an off-duty observer, they must comply with all regulations set out in this policy as
a citizen observer. If such a ride-along is permitted, the off-duty peace officer shall
not be considered on-duty and shall not represent themselves as a peace officer
or participate in any law enforcement activity except as emergency circumstances
require.
7.1.35.3 REQUESTING A RIDE-ALONG
Revised November 19, 2020
The Patrol Bureau is responsible for evaluating all potential ride-along participants
for eligibility. Once eligibility has been determined the ride-along will be scheduled
as follows:
1) The Patrol Bureau will schedule any citizen request to ride with a Patrol Bureau
resource.
2) The Patrol Bureau will evaluate for eligibility, any citizen request to ride with
any LBPD resource. Once preliminarily approved, the Patrol Bureau will
forward the request to the appropriate bureau for final approval and scheduling.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
345 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3) The Office of the Chief of Police has the sole discretion to approve special
and/or VIP requests to ride.
Eligible citizens may participate in a ride-along once every six (6) months, unless
otherwise approved by the Patrol Bureau.
Participants of Department programs such as Police Explorers, Senior Police
Partners, Police Chaplains, or other similar programs may participate more
frequently with the approval of the Patrol Bureau.
7.1.35.4 RIDE-ALONG WAIVERS
Revised November 19, 2020
All ride-along participants shall complete and sign a Ride-Along Waiver Form prior
to the start of the ride-along.
In order to maintain consistency and proper recordkeeping of the Ride-Along
Observer Program, signed waivers for all ride-along participants shall be forwarded
to the Patrol Bureau; this includes waivers for ride-along participants personally
known to and arranged by an employee.
The Patrol Bureau will retain all signed Ride-Along Waiver Forms for two years.
7.1.35.5 RIDE-ALONG GUIDELINES
Revised November 19, 2020
The following guidelines will apply to all ride-alongs:
1) Only one ride-along participant may accompany a unit at a time, unless
otherwise approved by a supervisor.
2) When an employee is transporting a prisoner in a one-officer unit with a
security screen, the ride-along participant shall ride in the front.
a) Employees with a ride-along participant may not transport a prisoner in
a car not equipped with a security screen.
3) A ride-along may not accompany any probationary employee.
7.1.35.6 RIDE-ALONG PARTICIPANT RULES
Revised November 19, 2020
If a ride-along observer violates any direction of the host officer, or a ride-along is
terminated, the host officer shall immediately notify a supervisor. The supervisor
will ensure that the Patrol Bureau is notified regarding the circumstances of the
ride-along termination.
7.1.35.7 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 19, 2020
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
346 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Officers will provide the ride-along participant with an identification badge at the
start of the ride-along. It is the officer’s responsibility to collect the identification
badge at the end of the ride-along. Officers will ensure that the ride-along
participant, or his or her parent or legal guardian, has signed the Ride-Along
Waiver Form prior to starting the ride-along. Officers will provide the ride-along
participant with a copy of the ride-along participation rules prior to starting the ride-
along.
Officers will notify Communications or indicate in their unit history the presence of
a ride-along.
7.1.36 WORKPLACE VIOLENCE INVOLVING CITY EMPLOYEES
PURPOSE
The purpose of this addendum is to establish policy and procedure relative to the
response documentation of any City employee involved in a potential or actual
workplace violence incident.
POLICY
In an effort to more effectively respond to potential or actual workplace violence
incidents where city employees are involved as victims or suspects, the following
policy will apply:
• A unit and a sergeant will be dispatched to the scene
• The unit, under the supervision of the sergeant, will investigate the incident,
determine whether a crime has been committed, and ensure that all appropriate
reports are filed
• The sergeant will ensure that, as a minimum level, a memorandum is filed
and/or a copy of all other related reports are forwarded to the Chief of Police
prior to his/her end of watch
• If the incident occurs Monday through Friday between 0800-1700 hours, the
Chief of Police will be notified telephonically by the assigned field sergeant at
the incident
• The Watch Commander will be notified and cause an entry to be made in the
Watch Commander’s log
7.1.37 ARRESTS BY CITY SECURITY OFFICERS
Revised May 1, 1998
PURPOSE
The purpose of this General Order is to define policy and procedure relating to the
responsibility and/or authority of security officers. This includes security officers
employed by the Police, Public Works/Airport and Harbor Departments and park
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
347 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
rangers employed by the Parks, Recreation and Marine Department. The policy
pertains to transporting, booking, and filing Incident and Arrest Reports.
POLICY
Each department (Police, Public Works/Airport, Harbor, and Parks, Recreation and
Marine) derives its power of arrest from various provisions of the California Penal
Code, the Long Beach Municipal Code, and the Code of Federal Regulations.
These departments are not equal in regard to their powers to arrest, detain, or
transport subjects.
JAIL DIVISION SECURITY OFFICERS (DETENTION OFFICERS) - POLICE
DEPARTMENT
Detention Officers (Security Officers) in the Jail Division are Custodial Officers as
described in Section 831 (a) of the Penal Code. A custodial officer is a public
officer, not a peace officer, who has the authority and responsibility for maintaining
the custody of prisoners and performs tasks related to the operation of a local
detention facility. Penal Code Section 831 (b) states that a custodial officer shall
have no right to carry or possess firearms in the performance of his or her
prescribed duties.
Police Powers
Private citizen arrest powers. Jail Division Custodial Officers (Security Officers)
do not have peace officer powers of arrest. Section 831 (f) of the Penal Code
states that custodial officers may make arrests for misdemeanors and felonies
within the Jail Division pursuant to a warrant.
MARINE PATROL SECURITY OFFICERS - POLICE DEPARTMENT
Security officers employed by the Police Department are not peace officers within
the meaning of the Penal Code. Police Department security officers have the
power to make a "citizen’s arrest" pursuant to Penal Code Section 837.
Limited Police Powers
• Private citizen arrest powers, however, can issue citations and complete
Incident and Arrest Reports pertaining to citations.
• Will not transport - Long Beach Police Department will transport.
• All reports involving arrests, as well as serious and sensitive reports, will be
filed by Long Beach Police Department police officers.
CITY HALL SECURITY OFFICERS - POLICE DEPARTMENT
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
348 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
City Hall security officers employed by the Police Department are not peace
officers within the meaning of the Penal Code. Police Department security officers
have the power to make a "citizen’s arrest" pursuant to Penal Code Section 837.
Limited Police Powers
• Private citizen arrest powers pursuant to Penal Code Section 837.
• Will not transport - Long Beach Police Department will transport.
• The Long Beach Police Department will file all reports.
SUB-STATION SECURITY OFFICERS - POLICE DEPARTMENT
Sub-station security officers employed by the Police Department are not peace
officers within the meaning of the Penal Code. Police Department security officers
have the power to make a "citizen’s arrest" pursuant to Penal Code Section 837.
Limited Police Powers
• Private citizen arrest powers pursuant to Penal Code Section 837.
• Can transport, if equipped and trained.
• All reports involving arrests, as well as serious and sensitive reports, will be
filed by Long Beach Police Department police officers.
AIRPORT SECURITY OFFICERS - PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
Airport Security Officers are "peace officers" within the meaning of Section 830.33
of the Penal Code, which became effective on May 3, 1990.
Full Police Powers - While On-Duty
• Can make detentions and arrests.
• Has authority to transport, but in most cases, the Long Beach Police
Department will transport.
• Will take their own reports (both Incident and Arrest Reports).
HARBOR SECURITY OFFICERS - HARBOR DEPARTMENT
Security officers employed by the Harbor Department are not peace officers within
the meaning of the Penal Code. However, Penal Code Section 836.5 empowers
Harbor Department security officers to make misdemeanor arrests when
authorized to do so by local ordinance. Harbor Department Ordinances 1295 and
1401 set forth numerous Vehicle Code, Penal Code and Long Beach Municipal
Code sections that are to be enforced by Harbor Department security officers. In
addition, the security officers have the power to make a 'citizen's arrest" pursuant
to Penal Code Section 837.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
349 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
When an arrest is made by Harbor Department security officers, pursuant to Penal
Code Section 836.5, the security officer generally is obligated to "cite and release”.
If the arrestee demands to be taken immediately before a Magistrate, the Long
Beach police will respond to transport. In the case of a citizen’s arrest, the Harbor
Department security officer should detain the suspect until the Long Beach police
officer(s) arrives to provide the necessary transportation.
In most instances, it would be inappropriate for Harbor Department security officers
to transport arrestees. There is no specific authorization in the Penal Code for such
transportation and, in many cases, issues of employee safety would preclude such
transportation.
Limited Police Powers
• Private citizen arrest powers, however, can issue citations and complete
Incident and Arrest Reports pertaining to citations.
• Will not transport - Long Beach Police Department will transport.
• Long Beach Police Department officers will file all reports involving arrests, as
well as serious and sensitive reports.
PARK RANGERS - PARKS, RECREATION AND MARINE DEPARTMENT
• Park Rangers are "peace officers” pursuant to Section 830.31(b) of the Penal
Code. Peace officer status for Park Rangers is also recognized in Section
16.16.080 of the Long Beach Municipal Code.
• Full Police Powers - Limited to Designated City Parks Only While On-Duty (Per
City Policy)
• Can make detentions and arrests while providing peace officer services at
designated City parks.
• Can transport, if equipped and trained.
• Will take own reports (both Incident and Arrest Reports).
PROCEDURE
If the Police Department is requested to respond and assist the involved City park
ranger or security officer(s), the responding police officer should carefully evaluate
the information and, if necessary, follow through with the investigation and take the
appropriate action.
If the involved City security officer does not have the level of training or ability to
complete reports at an acceptable level, the Police Department will assume
responsibility and ensure the reports are properly completed in a timely manner.
Should a conflict arise, a police supervisor will be dispatched and have the ultimate
responsibility and authority to resolve conflicts.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
350 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Report Review Sergeant is responsible for ensuring all forms are complete
and accurate prior to the security officer going back in service after an arrest.
7.1.38 CODE 7 (MEAL) POLICY
The following Code 7 guidelines are meant to ensure adequate patrol coverage
and address officer safety considerations.
Officer’s requests for a meal period shall be approved if:
• The request is not within the first 45 or last 45 minutes of the shift
• There are no priority 1 calls holding in the division
• The request does not exceed the maximum number of units allowed per
division:
− South Division: 2 units
− East Division: 2 units
− North Division: 2 units
− West Division: 2 units
• Other division units are available for dispatch
• The primary or secondary units within a beat are not already Code 7
Code 7 locations:
• Ten minutes of travel time shall be allowed after receiving clearance
• Thirty minutes shall be allowed for the meal break
• Meals shall be taken within the officer’s beat or a neighboring beat
• The Code 7 location will be identified by exact address and business name
• The only exception is Code 7 at home. If the residence is within the guidelines,
the location may be reported as “Code 7H”
• Officers shall monitor the radio while on meal break
• No more than two units are allowed to eat at the same location at the same
time
• Deviations from this policy shall be approved by the field or communications
supervisor and noted in the supervisor’s daily log.
Audit Responsibility
The Patrol Bureau will monitor compliance with this section.
7.1.39 FIELD TRAINING PROGRAM
Section numbers revised October 24, 2014
7.1.39.1 PHASE I - ACADEMY
Reviewed by Training Division January 21, 2020
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
351 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The evaluation of a Police Recruit while at the Academy is the responsibility of the
Training Division.
7.1.39.2 PHASE II – FIELD TRAINING & EVALUATION PROGRAM
Field Training Program
The Department shall maintain a Peace Officer Standards and Training (POST)
approved Field Training Program as required by the POST Administrative Manual
Procedure D-13 – Field Training.
Program Description
The Field Training Program is designed to educate, evaluate and supervise Police
Officer Trainees and Field Training Officers. The Field Training Program's role is
as follows:
• Select Field Training Officers
• Train Field Training Officers (FTO)
• Supervise Police Officer Trainees
Program Requirements
• The Police Officer Trainee shall have successfully completed a Regular Basic
Course
• The Field Training Program shall be delivered over a 52-week period and be
based on structured learning content approved by POST
• The Program shall have a Field Training Supervisor – Administrator -
Coordinator who:
– Has been awarded or is eligible for a POST Supervisory Certificate or
has been appointed by the Chief of Police and;
– Has successfully completed a POST certified Field Training
Supervisor/Administrator/Coordinator Course prior to or within 12
months of appointment, promotion or transfer to position
Field Training Officers shall meet the following criteria:
• Possess a POST Basic Certificate
• Have a minimum of four years’ general law enforcement uniformed patrol
experience (exceptions to the time limit can be approved by the FTO staff); and
• Been selected using a Department-specific selection process; and
• Successfully completed a POST certified Field Training Course
FTO Divisional Sergeants
• Directly supervise and monitor FTOs and their trainees within their Division
• Read all DORs filed on trainees in their Division and keep FTO Coordinator and
Administrator apprised of the results
• Attend bi-weekly meetings
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
352 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
FTO Selection Process
A selection committee will convene to select potential Field Training Officers. The
selection committee will consist of the following:
• Field Training Program Administrator (Lieutenant)
• Field Training Coordinator
• Four Division Field Training Program Sergeants
• An Academy representative
• A minimum of one peer FTO from each of the four patrol divisions
The selection committee will review each officer’s name and credentials for
participation in the Field Training Program. The committee must positively
recommend each potential FTO for the position.
The list of potential FTOs will be submitted to each of the four Patrol Division
Commanders for review and approval. The approved list of potential FTOs will
then be submitted to the Deputy Chief of Police, Patrol Bureau for final review and
approval.
FTO Responsibilities
• Complete a daily, written evaluation on the recruit’s performance according to
standardized evaluation guidelines
• Provide remedial and weekly, in-service training using the recruit checklist
• Keep his/her FTO Sergeant apprised of the recruit’s progress
• Promptly notify his/her FTO Sergeant if the recruit exhibits a lack of
performance in the area of officer safety
• On an alternate week basis, the FTO shall prepare a verbal and written report
on the relative progress of the recruit officer and present this report to the
training team in the bi-weekly assessment session
Field Training Sergeant Responsibilities
• Schedule, supervise, and assist all field patrol units in accomplishing the overall
police mission in addition to the responsibilities of the Field Training Program
• Insure that the training and evaluation goals are accomplished. Various
sources of information must be utilized to achieve these goals. Daily
observation reports and oral communications will be used to summarize the
recruit’s weekly progress. This summary will be filed by the Sergeant each
week
• Weekly review of the recruit’s training guide to determine if it is being used
according to the schedule provided
• Coordinate alternate week FTO meeting. The Sergeant will ensure that
personnel attend these meetings and bring all required documentation for the
assessment session. The Sergeant will assist the FTOs in areas of remedial
training required by the recruit officer
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
353 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Address areas of unsatisfactory work performance individually with trainees on
an as needed basis
Patrol Bureau Training Lieutenant Responsibilities
• Command responsibility for the Field Training and Evaluation Program. The
Lieutenant has staff responsibility for the supervision of all Field Training
Sergeants during the field training and evaluation of the recruit class
• Maintaining all records relative to the recruit’s development
• Coordinate with the Training Division areas of mutual responsibility
• Monitor the evaluation program
• Develop a recruit training guide for weekly in-service training and remedial
training for recruit officers
• Coordinate a bi-weekly meeting for FTOs to discuss the progress of trainees
and develop individual remedial training plan for recruits identified as having
problems
• Oversee, review and evaluate the program and, if necessary, implement any
organizational changes during the period when recruits are not assigned to the
Field Training Program
• Ensure compliance with the POST Administrative Manual’s guidelines
Evaluation of the FTO
The Police Officer Trainee shall anonymously evaluate each assigned FTO at the
end of the Field Training Program.
Evaluation of the Field Training Program
The Police Officer Trainee shall anonymously evaluate the Field Training Program
at the end of the program.
Training Division Responsibilities
The Training Division shall provide input to the FTO Program by:
• Attending bi-weekly assessment meetings as requested by the Patrol Training
Lieutenant to provide transitional information from Phase I to Phase II of the
recruit's training
7.1.39.3 PHASE III – PROBATIONARY OFFICER
A Phase III officer is a probationary officer who has successfully graduated from
the Academy and completed the requirements of the Field Training and Evaluation
Program. While on probation, the officer will have limited supervision and be under
the functional supervision of the Patrol Training Sergeant and Lieutenant. The
following officers will have supervisory responsibility over Phase III – Probationary
Officers while in training.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
354 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Senior Patrol Officer
The Phase III recruit will be assigned, on a monthly basis, to a senior patrol officer
who must be a qualified FTO. The senior officer will provide a limited amount of
supervision. At the end of the month assignment, the senior officer will file an
evaluation. The senior officer has the responsibility to notify the assigned Patrol
Sergeant if a problem arises that should be resolved by remedial training, placing
the recruit back into the Field Training Program, or through administrative action.
FTO Divisional Sergeant
The FTO sergeant shall routinely evaluate the performance of the Phase III officer
and read the weekly reports by FTOs and summarize and grade their performance.
Field Training Lieutenant
The responsibility of the Field Training Lieutenant shall remain the same for Phase
III officers as it does for Phase II officers. The Field Lieutenant may return the
Phase III officer into Phase II at any time that he/she feels it would benefit the
recruit officer and the Department. The Lieutenant may call for an evaluation panel
if termination of the probationary officer appears necessary.
Recruit Evaluation Panel
The responsibility of the Recruit Evaluation Panel is to review the performance of
recruits working at a level unacceptable to the standards of the FTO Program. The
Panel shall meet on an as-needed basis and shall consist of the Deputy Chief of
Patrol, the FTO Administrator, FTO Coordinator and Academy Lieutenant. The
Panel will review all of the recruits training records and make a recommendation
to the Chief of Police as to whether or not the recruit should be dismissed.
The Recruit Evaluation Panel may recommend:
• Additional documentation or verbal statements from the FTO
• Remedial training
• Dismissal
• The Panel will then submit the recommendations to the Chief of Police for
approval. The Panel shall ensure that adequate documentation is provided to
the Chief of Police so that the Chief can make an immediate decision in
situations where dismissal is recommended
Security of Training Records
Probationary employees training records shall be maintained in a secure location
within the Patrol Bureau. Access to individual records shall be limited to Patrol
Supervisors, FTOs, and Field Training Supervisors. Trainees shall be permitted
to review their own records when supervised. Trainees may not review the records
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
355 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
of other recruit officers. Violation by a trainee can result in termination. Training
records that are compiled during the probationary period shall be transferred to the
Training Division upon completion of probation or, upon resignation or termination
of the employee; the records shall be transferred to the Personnel Division.
7.1.39.4 PATROL SERGEANT & LIEUTENANT FIELD TRAINING
PROGRAM
All newly promoted sergeants and lieutenants assigned to the Patrol Bureau, and
those transferred from another bureau to the Patrol Bureau, are required to
complete the Patrol Sergeant Field Training Program or Patrol Lieutenant Field
Training Program. The training program is mandatory and scheduled immediately
upon assignment to the Patrol Bureau. A training matrix will be completed and the
original will be maintained by the Training Division, with copies to the employee’s
divisional file and Personnel file.
Divisional Senior Sergeant & Lieutenant Responsibility
Newly-promoted or transferred Patrol Sergeants and Lieutenants will be assigned
to a Divisional senior sergeant or lieutenant for a period of not less than one work
week (40 hours). The senior sergeant or lieutenant will be responsible for
reviewing and demonstrating all tasks and duties outlined in the appropriate
training matrix.
Patrol Bureau Lieutenant Responsibility
The Patrol Bureau Lieutenant, assigned the responsibility of the Sergeant &
Lieutenant Field Training Program, will monitor the assignment and training
progress of all participants.
Patrol Division Commander Responsibility
Each Patrol Division Commander will be responsible for ensuring the affected
sergeants and lieutenants are assigned to the program and the required training
and matrix is completed.
7.1.39.5 PATROL SERGEANT & LIEUTENANT MENTOR
PROGRAM
The program is designed to assist officers awaiting promotion while on a current
sergeant or lieutenant Civil Service eligibility list.
The goals of the Sergeant & Lieutenant Mentor Training Program are:
• Familiarize candidates with Patrol Bureau supervisory responsibilities
• Familiarize candidates with the department’s policies and procedures
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
356 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Familiarize candidates with basic supervisory tools that will enable them to
make effective decisions
The Sergeant & Lieutenant Mentor Program is voluntary and will be coordinated
by a lieutenant assigned by the Deputy Chief of Patrol. This person will:
• Identify candidates on the sergeant and/or lieutenant eligibility list who are likely
to be promoted
• Meet with the candidates and review the program to determine if the candidate
wishes to participate
• If the candidate chooses to participate, find a mutually agreed upon Mentor
• Plan the training program to meet the candidate’s needs
• The length of the mentoring process will also be tailored to the candidate’s
needs
• The program will be coordinated with the candidate’s Division Commander
7.1.39.6 PATROL OFFICER RETRAINING
The Patrol Bureau is responsible for maintaining a standardized and proper level
of training for all assigned personnel. All officers returning to the Patrol Bureau for
a uniformed duty assignment shall participate in a re-acclimation, re-training
program. This is a mandatory duty assignment and all officers shall complete the
assignment prior to working in the field in a solo officer capacity.
Patrol Bureau Field Training Lieutenant’s Responsibility
• The Field Training Officer Program (FTO) Lieutenant will be notified by either
Personnel or the Patrol Bureau Deputy Chief of the pending transfer or return
to patrol of any officer from another assignment, extended leave or return from
a leave of absence
• The FTO Lieutenant will be responsible for evaluating and facilitating the
necessary training to re-acclimate officers returning to patrol from other duty
assignments
• The FTO Lieutenant or FTO Coordinator Sergeant will meet with the officer that
is returning to determine the exact training needs of the individual
• Each returning officer who has not worked in patrol for more than one year will
be evaluated on an individual basis
Minimum guidelines are as follows:
• 40 hours of structured training is recommended for officers returning from other
than a semi-patrol related assignment (i.e., SES or GES)
• Officers returning from field enforcement assignments may not require a full
40-hour re-acclimation period. It will be the discretion of the FTO Lieutenant to
determine any modification to the above referenced schedule
• Officers assigned to patrol retraining will be required to work with another senior
officer from their assigned watch, not necessarily an FTO
• Officers who provide this retraining will be eligible for FTO pay
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
357 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• The FTO Lieutenant will be responsible for notifying the respective Division
Commander by memorandum for officer’s completion of training
Patrol Division Commander’s Responsibility
Each Patrol Division Commander is responsible for ensuring the affected officers
are assigned to the program and that the required training has been completed.
7.1.40 SPECIAL EVENTS
The Special Events unit coordinates the Police Department's involvement by
providing officers for preplanned community and commercial events such as
security or traffic control for parades, movie filming, sporting events, etc. The
Special Events unit shall maintain a fair system for identifying and contracting
officers who wish to work an overtime Special Events assignment. A written
description of the selection procedures for working a special event shall be
contained within the Division Manual of the Field Support Division.
Duty Assignment
Once assigned by the Special Events Coordinator to work a Special Event it
becomes a temporary Patrol Bureau duty assignment and assigned personnel
shall conform to all Police Department rules and regulations. As with all duty
assignments, personnel assigned to a Special Event shall report to the assignment
as instructed. Unless instructed otherwise by Special events personnel, officers
will wear the standard issue Sam Browne and navy blue wool uniform.
Should an officer wish to cancel working a Special Event, that desire shall be made
known to the Special Events coordinator well in advance of the event so as to allow
the coordinator to find a replacement. In a non-emergency, the Special Events
coordinator is under no obligation to find a replacement if it is short notice. If the
Special Events coordinator is unable to find a replacement, the officer shall report
to the Special Event as instructed. An officer assigned to work a Special Event
shall not arrange for a substitute replacement.
7.1.41 PROPER USE OF THE SEGWAY
Section 313 CVC - Defines the term "electric personal assistive mobility device"
and establishes that the two-wheeled SEGWAY transportation device is not a
motor vehicle and that it can be used on pedestrian walkways.
All personnel who are trained on the Segway follow the same rules and regulations
as if they were working Bike Patrol. Only those personnel trained on how to
properly operate the Segway shall be allowed to use it.
• All riders are required to wear bike helmet during operation of the Segway
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
358 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• All riders are subject to the same California Vehicle Code sections as a bicyclist
• If ridden at night, the Segway must be equipped with a lighting system (similar
to the Night Rider System) that uses a nickel cadmium rechargeable battery
system visible from 300 ft. away
The following is prohibited on the Segway:
• Jumping off when the Segway is near or at top speed
• Any use of the Segway other than what is authorized or intended through
applicable policy and California Vehicle Codes
TRAFFIC (NOW INCORPORATED IN SECTION 7.4 ACCIDENT
INVESTIGATION)
7.1.42 PARADE PARTICIPATION
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility
Long Beach Police Department employees who wish to attend or participate in an
authorized community parade may do so with the following provisions:
• Approval to attend must be obtained from the employee’s Division Commander
and attendance must not require overtime. The employee will be allowed a
maximum of four hours for their participation, which includes any and all work-
related activities performed before or after the shift
• A maximum of six employees will be allowed to attend in an on-duty status
(excluding Command Staff) or may be permitted to adjust their schedules to attend.
The adjusted work hours must be completed within the same workweek
• Any employee wishing to attend, beyond the maximum allowed to attend on-duty,
may not participate in uniform and must be on a volunteer basis. If an employee
participates on their own time they must not wear any department related apparel
• Employee participation for a parade shall be coordinated through the Patrol Bureau
Office
7.1.43 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
The following procedures will be used when modifying Patrol schedules to
accommodate daylight saving time. On the first Sunday in November, clocks will
be moved back one hour at 0200 hrs. On the second Sunday in March, clocks
will be moved ahead one hour at 0200 hrs.
FALL
Watch I: The Watch will work a 10-hour shift. The end time of the
shift will be moved from 0745 to 0645
Watch II: The Watch will start their shift one hour earlier, 0550 instead
of 0650, and will have a new end of watch at 1545 instead of
1645
Watch III: The Watch will work their normal scheduled time
SPRING
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department PATROL
359 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Watch I: The Watch will work a 10-hour shift. The end time of the shift
will be moved from 0745 to 0845
Watch II: The Watch will work their normal scheduled time
Watch III: The Watch will work their normal scheduled time
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE
360 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.2 CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE SECTION (CIS)
7.2.1 SUSPICIOUS ACTIVITY REPORTING (SAR) INCIDENTS
POTENTIALLY RELATED TO FOREIGN OR DOMESTIC
TERRORISM
Revised July 1, 2013
The Investigations Bureau has audit responsibility.
PURPOSE
Current anti-terrorism philosophy embraces the concept that, in the United States,
law enforcement officers fill a critical position in terrorism prevention. Law
enforcement authorities must carry out counterterrorism responsibilities within a
broader context of the core mission of providing emergency and non-emergency
services in order to prevent crime, violence and disorder. In support of this, the
Criminal Intelligence Section (CIS) is engaging in an effort to more thoroughly
gather, analyze and disseminate information and observations, of either a criminal
or suspicious nature, which may prove critical to the intelligence cycle.
POLICY
It is the policy of the Long Beach Police Department to make every effort to
accurately and appropriately gather, record, and analyze information, which could
indicate activity or intentions related to terrorism. These efforts shall be carried out
in a manner that protects the information privacy and legal rights of Americans,
and therefore such information shall be recorded and maintained in strict
compliance with existing federal, state and department guidelines regarding
Criminal Intelligence Systems (28 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), part 23 and
applicable California State Guidelines).
A Suspicious Activity Report (SAR) is used to document any reported or observed
activity, or any criminal act or attempted criminal act, which an officer believes may
reveal a nexus to terrorism. The information reported in a SAR may be the result
of observations or investigations by police officers, or may be reported by private
parties.
Any employee receiving information regarding suspicious activity, with a potential
nexus to terrorism, shall investigate and take appropriate action, which may
include a tactical response or notification to specialized entities.
If the activity is not directly related to a reportable crime, employees shall submit a
SAR to CIS.
Should officers come across information that indicates possible terrorism related
activity while investigating a crime or incident, or conducting an impound or found
property investigation which is suspicious in nature, the officer shall make no
mention of this potential terrorism related activity or material in the written report.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE
361 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Under these circumstances, the officer will file the main incident report, and a SAR.
The officer shall cross-reference the criminal investigation, impound or found
property report in the SAR. However, officers shall not cross-reference a SAR in
any written police report.
If the report involves an arrest or a crime with follow-up potential, officers shall
immediately notify CIS.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
362 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.3 COMMUNICATIONS
7.3.1 COMMUNICATIONS POLICIES
General Radio Procedures
• The Communications Division is authorized Patrol “Code 7” requests based on
the Patrol Bureau “Code 7” policy
• Relative to Disturbing the Peace Calls (415) when units are not available, nor
dispatched within one hour of the original request, Communications personnel
will call the citizen to determine if a police unit is still required
• The patrol Field Sergeant or any Patrol Command Officer directing the
Communications Division will have the final decision in all field-related matters.
All directions will be recorded in the call history of the affected calls and logged
in the Communication Division shift notes. This Division serves as a clearing
and coordinating center, but at no time will assume control over Field Sergeants
or Command Officers
Call Code Changes
The Communications Division will continue to dispatch priority calls based on
existing procedures with the following modifications:
Priority 1 Calls:
• 273.5 P Felony Spouse Beating in Progress
• 920C Missing Critical Child Under 12
• Unknown Trouble
• SHOTS Shots Fired – “Just Occurred” with Suspect Information, or exact
location known
• 242P Battery In Progress
• 246P Shooting Into an Inhabited Dwelling Just Occurred
Priority 2 Calls
• Child Concealment
• Arson
• CCW Carrying a Concealed Weapon
• 22500E Vehicle Blocking Driveway
• SHOTS – H - Shots Heard – No suspect description, exact location unknown
• 647F Intoxicated Person
• 10851R Stolen Vehicle Reports
Priority 3 Calls
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
363 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• 5150 - Psycho Investigation Non-Violent
• 919 - Keep the Peace No Violence
• 920J - Missing or Found Juvenile Over 12 Years
• AST-NU - Assistance Request: Non-Urgent
• ACIT - Assist the Citizen: No Other Information
• SHOTS – F - Possible Shots Heard in Area: No Further
Information/Information Only – No Unit Dispatched
Eliminated Calls:
• 921P Peeping Tom – 921 Call replaces this
• 500J BB Gun – handled in other calls
• 907B Baseball Game in Street
Channel Four Utilization
The Communications Division is responsible for coordinating and advising Patrol
personnel regarding radio channel utilization. In an effort to minimize radio
channel overcrowding, the following policy is to be implemented with the
Communications Division responsible to coordinate and allocate the use of all
radio channels based upon need from the field.
• Radio Channel Four is no longer to be utilized as a car-to-car channel by
Department personnel between 0600 and 2400 hours unless approved by
Communications. Channel Four is to be routinely utilized by the Special
Investigations Division, Gang Task Force, and in tactical situations when
directed by a Field Sergeant of Command Officer; or when specifically reserved
through the Communications Supervisor for special operations. Channel Four
is not for general use by field personnel
7.3.2 KDT USAGE
Available radio airtime is a major concern. Officer safety can be adversely affected
by saturation of radio frequencies.
In an effort to provide increased radio airtime, the KDT shall be utilized as a primary
method of dispatch. It shall be used for official police communications only. Unless
officer safety is jeopardized, field officers are required to use their KDT’s to:
• Change location on a current call
• Go 10-15
• Check 10-97
• Look at their current call
• Check out of service
• Initiate field requests
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
364 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Clear calls for service (except calls involving information of a life-threatening
nature, suspect information or hazardous locations)
• Running subjects/vehicles
• Transmit business messages only
• Check-out on or clear “Code 7” (after obtaining 913 clearance from
communications)
Non-business “to” messages are an FCC violation
Officers shall take KDT-equipped vehicles, when available, and promptly complete
a Vehicle Malfunction Form (PD Form 4300.002) for vehicles with KDT
malfunctions. This shall be in accordance with General Order 26/90, Patrol Bureau
Vehicle System and Maintenance Policy.
The Communications Division shall dispatch units on non-emergency calls as
follows:
• Unit designator: 1A2
• Broadcast type of call: 459 report
• Broadcast location of call: 123 Pine
• Send all other information via KDT: Copy KDT
7.3.3 COMMUNICATIONS – MUTUAL AID WITH ORANGE COUNTY
LAW ENFORCEMENT
Long Beach Police Department Supervisors and Command Officers will be
provided specially programmed portable radios, which can access Orange County
emergency radio channels. This communications link will be established only for
incidents which include both Long Beach Police Department and one or more
Orange County law enforcement agencies. All radio communications will be under
the authority and control of the Orange County Communications Division (Control-
1).
Only Long Beach Police Field Supervisors and Command Personnel shall
communicate with Orange County law enforcement agencies. This includes:
• Orange County Control-1
• Individual Police Dispatch Centers
• Law Enforcement Field Personnel
Orange County Incident Involving Long Beach
• Long Beach Department contacted via direct ring down or telephone line
• Orange County requests assistance through Long Beach Police Department
Communications Center
• Orange County identifies which radio frequency will handle
• Communications Supervisor notifies Field Supervisor
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
365 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Field Supervisor will be directed to switch to the designated Orange County
radio frequency and contact either the Control-1 Dispatcher, or the individual
agency Incident Commander, if so designated
• The Field Supervisor will utilized portable radio for accessing Orange County
frequencies and remain in contact at all times with our Communications Center
by using the vehicle’s mobile radio
Long Beach Incident Involving Orange County
• Field Supervisor or Command-Level Officer contacts Communications Center
and requests communications link to Orange County
• The request shall include:
• Nature of incident
• Type and amount of assistance required
• Long Beach Police Department Communications Center Supervisor will
contact Orange County Communications (Control-1) and advise of incident
• Orange County Communications will establish a “conference call” for purposes
of coordination between agencies
• The involved, Orange County agencies will direct their field personnel to
contact the designated Incident Commander on the radio channel specified by
Orange County Control-1
Transmitting Wanted Information
Be specific. State the type of crime and whether or not the request is for a field
interrogation, or for an arrest. Ensure after transmitting that the request was
understood. This may prevent a suspect from being unlawfully arrested.
Receiving Wanted Information
Obtain specific information relative to the type of crime and what is requested, e.g.,
field interrogation, probable cause arrest, or arrest warrant. Receiver of
information must understand completely what is requested before any action shall
be taken.
7.3.4 TRANSLATOR PROGRAM – VOLUNTEER BILINGUAL
EMERGENCY TRANSLATORS (ET)
Operational Procedure
Police personnel shall determine if there is an on-duty employee who can provide
the required language translation. If personnel are not available for the requested
translation, the requesting employee shall contact the Communications Center for
the use of an emergency translator.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
366 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The employee should advise if the translation could be conducted by the
telephone. If so, the telephone number for the emergency translator to call will be
provided to the Communications Center. Translation in the field may involve the
transportation of a non-English speaking person to a telephone location.
Patrol officers shall provide a location and any data the volunteer should be made
aware of prior to the volunteer responding to the scene. In field situations where
translation by telephone is not feasible, officers should alert the facility, such as a
hospital emergency room or the Police Department, of the pending arrival of an
emergency translator volunteer.
Personnel using volunteer translators should be aware that volunteers are not
police employees. A volunteer translator does have the right to refuse to translate.
Both officers and Communications Center personnel should remember that
volunteers are not trained in police procedures of police terminology, and should
not expect such performance from them.
The Communications Center will maintain the volunteer on-call list and will be
responsible for all calls to the volunteers for their services.
Each time a translator is called, Communications personnel will send a message,
via “electronic mail” system, to the coordinator of the program so that a record can
be maintained.
7.3.4.1 COMMUNICATING WITH PEOPLE WHO ARE DEAF OR HARD
OF HEARING
Revised June 2012
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
The Long Beach Police Department shall ensure that a consistently high level of
service is provided to all community members, including people who are deaf or
hard of hearing. LBPD has specific legal obligations under the Americans with
Disabilities Act and the Rehabilitation Act to communicate effectively with people
who are deaf or hard of hearing.
A qualified sign language interpreter can be obtained at any time by contacting the
LBPD Communications Division. Officers should provide the following information,
if known:
• The nature of the interaction for which the interpreter is needed
• When and for how long the interpreter is needed
• The location where the interpreter is needed
• A contact person who will be available at the location when the interpreter
arrives
• Any other special requirements
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
367 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
ON-CALL INTERPRETING SERVICES
The LBPD Communications Section maintains a list of sign language and oral
interpreting services that are available and on-call 24-hours per day and willing to
provide interpretive services. The LBPD Communications Section will update this
list annually.
TTY/TDD, VIDEO RELAY SERVICE AND CALIFORNIA RELAY SERVICE
Where warranted, officers must provide people who are deaf or hard of hearing
the opportunity to place telecommunications calls. These calls may be made using
a teletypewriter (TTY, also known as a telecommunications device for deaf people
(TDD)), a Video Relay Service (VRS system) or the California Relay Service
(CRS).
LBPD will ensure an operable TTY/TDD device is available at the main station.
TTY/TDD phones will comply with requirements for TTY/TDD phones as set forth
in the ADA Accessibility Guidelines.
Personnel assigned to the main station front business desk duties will be trained
in the answering, handling, and placing of text telephone calls. Officers must be
familiar with the usage of TTY/TDD and recognize the unique tones emitted by
TTY/TDD devices. Officers must also accept telephone calls placed by persons
who are deaf or hard of hearing through the Telecommunications Relay Service.
TTY/TDD devices are located in 4th and 6th floor jails and at the main police station
business desk. TTY/TDD devices are portable and can be requested from the jail
supervisor for use where needed. TTY/TDD devices will work with pay phones in
the station and also with house phones.
If an officer needs to use a TTY/TDD device with a juvenile subject/suspect, the
device must be used in an area other than booking or the jail because juveniles
may not have contact with adult inmates.
Video Relay Service or VRS allows a subject to communicate through sign
language via video conferencing, which is relayed by an interpreter to a third party.
VRS systems are located on the first floor lobby of the main station and the 6th floor
men’s jail.
The California Relay Service (CRS) enables a person using a text telephone
device to communicate by phone with a person who does not use a text telephone
device. The service also works in reverse, allowing a non-text telephone user to
call a person utilizing such a device. To reach a toll-free CRS operator, dial 7-1-
1. Additional information about the services provided by CRS is available on-line
at http://www.ddtp.org.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
368 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
People who are deaf or hard of hearing must not be charged for the cost of an
auxiliary aid or service needed for effective communication.
For further, refer to Training Bulletin 186 “Communicating with People Who Are
Deaf or Hard of Hearing”
7.3.5 MONITORING OR RECORDING RADIO & TELEPHONIC
TRANSMISSIONS BY COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION
The Communications Section will NOT make taped copies of telephone and radio
calls for individual officers for training purposes.
Taped copies of telephone and radio calls can be made for the following:
• City Attorney’s Office
• City Prosecutor’s Office
• Response to Subpoenas
• Internal Affairs
• Homicide
• Accident Investigation
Officers who feel they need additional training may contact the Lieutenant,
Communications Section, who will provide appropriate training opportunities.
When an investigating officer or the officer’s supervisor determines the necessity
of monitoring or acquiring a tape-recorded transcript of information contained on
our Communications Center tapes, the following rules and procedures shall be
followed:
• To monitor, or tape-record specific information, an investigating officer will
contact the Watch Commander and make his request known
• The Watch Commander will then notify the Communication Supervisor by direct
line of the officer’s name and the time and date requested to obtain the
information
• The investigating officer will proceed to Communications at the appointed time
where he will be assisted by the Communications staff in obtaining the
requested information. If a tape-recorded copy is needed, the investigating
officer will take a clean cassette tape with him to the Communications Center.
During the daytime hours, tapes may be acquired from Internal Affairs
• If City Hall is locked, arrangements must be made to have a Communications
employee allow the officer access to the building
An Attorney (including a District Attorney or City Prosecutor) will not be provided a
tape recording or information acquired from such tape recording without a
subpoena duces tecum. The investigator should prepare a memorandum to
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
369 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Communications (for the signature of the Chief of Police) requesting the particular
tape to be held for evidence. This memorandum should contain the investigator’s
name, the case name and number, the prosecutor handling the case, and the
Deputy City Attorney authorizing the release of the taped information. The
Communications Center will then store the tape until needed for court.
Investigators should notify Communications, by memorandum through the Chief
of Police, at such time that an impounded evidence tape can be released for reuse.
7.3.6 COMPUTER AIDED DISPATCH (CAD) PREMISE HISTORY FILE
Introduction
Premise History information is automatically searched and displayed to the
dispatcher each time an address is accessed at a telephone position or a dispatch
is received at a radio position. Those units equipped with KDT’s may also receive
Premise History information. Information may be entered by exact location
(numerical address) or 100-block for a period of:
• 72 hours
• 30 days
NOTE: Retention period is based on type of information, nature of prior, degree of
hazard, et cetera:
• 60 days
• 90 days
• 180 days
Premise History
Premise History File provides officers with information concerning a specific
address or location. In addition to “Code 9” locations, the following examples are
some of the types of information that would be appropriate for Premise History
entry:
• Threats to witness involved in a court case
• An officer’s residence, due to threats received
• Chronic, Complaining Parties wherein there is a reason to carefully question
the complaint
NOTE: Under no circumstances shall an entry be made indicating, “DO NOT
SEND UNIT” or “DISREGARD ADDITIONAL CALLS”. The entry should rather
read “SCREEN CALLS CAREFULLY.”
• Any general information about a specific location that assist the field officer in
the performance of duty (i.e., guard dogs on the premise, crime MO, stored
hazardous materials, et cetera.)
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
370 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Criteria for Declaring a Location Dangerous
• Where an officer was attacked, or threatened with firearms or other weapons
and the danger may be ongoing
• Where firearms or weapons were observed inside a premise which is inhabited
or frequented by individual that are generally hostile to officers
• A residence or location that is inhabited by an emotionally unstable individual
(5150) who has posed a threat to officers in the past
• A location where acts of vandalism have been committed on police vehicle(s)
Premise History Entry Procedures
Following are the procedures for entering a message:
NOTE: The computer-stored message cannot exceed 300 words.
• 72-Hour Entry:
• Field Officers can make an entry, as a result of a dispatch, by radio. All officers
may make an entry by phoning Communications Supervisor, telephone number
570-7491. This information will be automatically purged after 72 hours.
• 30/60/90/180-Day Entry:
Entry for longer than 72 hours requires a memorandum directed to the
Commanding Officer, Communications Division and approved by a Lieutenant or
above. The memorandum should give a brief description of the problem and
indicate the desired length of retention in the system.
NOTE: Allow time for memorandum entry by also making 72-hour telephone entry.
Purging & Re-Entry of Information
• The CAD system will not display Premise History data after the programmed
retention period is completed
• The purged Premise History information will be forwarded weekly to the Deputy
Chief, Patrol Bureau
• To effect a re-entry of a purged location the Deputy Chief, Patrol Bureau, will
return the CAD printout indicating those locations where re-entry into the
system is desired, and also indicate retention period of 30, 60, 90 of 180 days
• Each item will be re-entered exactly as shown on the original entry unless there
is a notation indicating a desired change or supplement
It is the intent of the Department to provide the most convenient and reliable
information available for the purpose of decreasing the likelihood of serious injury
to officers. Strict adherence to the above procedures will ensure the integrity of
this system.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
371 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE: Under no circumstances, will officers consider a broadcast of a premise
history information to be probable cause to approach a situation in any other
manner than would be acceptable under critical review. Do not react in a manner
that would create a problem in itself.
Under no circumstances, will a Communications Dispatcher consider premise
history information to be probable cause to process a call for service in any other
manner than would be acceptable under critical review.
7.3.7 FOREIGN JURISDICTION – POLICE INVESTIGATIONS OUTSIDE
THE CITY OF LONG BEACH
Section 830.1(a)(2) of the California Penal Code empowers a police officer to
perform police activities outside his/her jurisdiction with the consent of the Chief of
Police/Sheriff of that jurisdiction, the jurisdiction being within the State of California.
Procedures
Officer Responsibilities
• Patrol officer required to conduct an investigation outside the City of Long
Beach shall have the authorization of the Watch Commander. A field
Supervisor shall accompany the officers to the location
• Detectives required to conduct an investigation outside the City of Long Beach
shall notify their supervisor as soon as practical. Notification shall be made
(prior notification, whenever practical) to the Watch Commander, or equivalent,
at the local law enforcement agency whenever the Long Beach Police
Department conducts or anticipates conducting investigations within that
agency’s jurisdiction
• Officer may request the Communications Division to make the supervisory
notification if personal notification is not practical
• The on-duty Communications Division Supervisor shall be advised, as soon as
practical, of any on-duty personnel operating in a foreign jurisdiction
The Gang and Violent Crimes Division, Criminal Intelligence Section and Internal
Affairs Division are excluded from the requirement to advise the Long Beach Police
Department Communications Division.
Supervisory Responsibilities
• Evaluate requests to conduct investigation in foreign jurisdictions, and provide
supervision for those investigations
7.3.8 REVERSE 911
Reverse 911 is the brand name for an automatic dialer system recently purchased
by the City. This project is administered and managed by the City Hall Information
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
372 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Technology Division. The police Department is authorized as a program user in
the system,
Reverse 911 functions as a community alert system, which can be used during
emergency situations. Program users first record a phone message to be played
for citizens in the city. Using Reverse 911 software, program users can then
identify specific geographical areas of the city to receive this phone message.
Once activated, the system will call every Verizon phone number within that area
and play the pre-recorded message once the phone line has been answered.
The automatic dialer system utilizes 48 phone lines to call Verizon numbers with a
pre-recorded message. The system can normally place approximately 4,860 calls
per hour. Depending on the severity of the incident, Reverse 911 offers the
capability for the department to increase the number of out-going calls per hour.
This feature is known as "mass calling" and can be used to reach approximately
30,000 phones per hour. Additional fees are imposed upon the city for activation
of this feature.
Situations Warranting Use of the Automatic Dialer System
The Reverse 911 software can be used in the following situations:
• Tactical situations requiring information dissemination to nearby residents
(e.g.. SWAT grid-searches for armed suspects)
• HAZMAT emergencies
• Missing/abducted juveniles (in situations similar to those that would generate
an Amber Alert)
• Critical Missing Persons alert (at the discretion of the Watch Commander)
• Information regarding on-going serial crimes in an identified area
• Other emergency situations as deemed appropriate by the on-duty Watch
Commander
Requests from City Departments
Other city departments (e.g. Fire, Public Service, Health) are users on this system
as well and may record their own messages to be disseminated in the event of an
emergency. If personnel from these departments are unable to utilize the system
themselves, they may request, through the on-duty Watch Commander, that the
Police Department Communications Supervisor record the message and activate
the system.
Officer Responsibilities
• If an officer is involved in a situation which might warrant the activation of the
automatic dialer system, the officer must notify his/her field sergeant of all the
facts justifying request of the activation,
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
373 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Supervisor Responsibilities
• Evaluate the situation to determine if application of the Reverse 911 system is
warranted
• If warranted, notified the Watch Commander requesting activation
• Provide the Watch Commander with all facts pertinent to the content of the
recorded message as well as the specific geographical area to be notified
Watch Commander Responsibilities
• Evaluate the situation to determine if application of the Reverse 911 system is
appropriate
• If approved, he/she will call on the on-duty Communications Center supervisor
at extension 9650 and provide all facts and information to be included in the
pre-recorded message as well as the specific geographical area to be notified
• Notify the Duty Chief of a reverse 911 activation
• Ensure a notation is made in the Watch Commander's Log identifying the
reason for the Reverse 911 activation, the geographic location called and any
other facts pertinent to the event
• Approve or deny requests from other city departments that Police
Communication Center personnel activate the Reverse 911 system on their
behalf. If approved, the Watch Commander must verify that the situation is
emergent in nature
Communications Center Supervisor Responsibilities:
• At the direction of the Watch Commander, the Communications Center
supervisor will ensure that the necessary phone message is recorded in
English and Spanish and then activate the Reverse 911 system
Duty Chief Responsibilities
• In a situation where the Watch Commander requests that the mass calling
feature be used, the Duty Chief will be responsible for authorizing its use.
7.3.9 SILENT DISPATCHING
Effective date, June 12, 2012
Silent dispatching is the method of dispatching a unit without making a radio
broadcast, traditionally accomplished by utilizing a police unit's mobile data center
(MDC). The implementation of a silent dispatch prevents suspects who are
monitoring police radio frequencies from becoming forewarned of a police
response.
The use of silent dispatching has proven its effectiveness as a field response tactic
when responding to crimes being committed by organized criminals, such as
responding to robberies, gang activity or the sales of narcotics, etc. Silent
dispatching should also be considered when responding to calls believed to be
connected to a series of crimes with identifiable modus operandi or suspect
information. The type of crime, factors associated with the crime and current crime
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department COMMUNICATIONS
374 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
trends should all be taken into consideration before implementing the silent
dispatch technique.
Only the watch commander, lieutenant, or command officer may authorize the use
of silent dispatching. The Communications Center will facilitate and ensure the
silent dispatching procedure is followed on a short-term basis.
To request silent dispatching, a memorandum shall be sent to the Communications
Center lieutenant for implementation. The memorandum will minimally contain the
following:
• Affected time period
• Hours of operation (start - end)
• Crime classification(s) to be silently dispatched
• Specifics of crime spree (if possible/applicable)
• Field supervisor(s) to be notified when the dispatch is generated and their
responsibilities
• Identification of what field units are to be sent (city wide or division response)
• The watch commander or field lieutenant to be notified
• Evaluation period
An evaluation period shall be in place at each situation where silent dispatching is
requested. The initiating watch commander, lieutenant, command officer or their
designee shall review the use of the silent dispatches and determine whether or
not to continue its use.
Additional Consideration
Response training should be considered and given prior to the use of this tactic.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
375 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.4 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
7.4.1 TRAFFIC COLLISIONS – CITY VEHICLES
All traffic collisions involving vehicles driven by Department employees and
authorized for Department use or City business shall be reported immediately by
the employee. These collisions shall be subject to review by a supervisor, AID
Fleet Safety Unit, and management. It is the responsibility of Communications to
dispatch a field supervisor to any such collision and notify the Watch Commander.
7.4.1.1 CITY ATTORNEY RESPONSE
When a City vehicle is involved in an accident within the City limits, the City
Attorney’s Office shall be notified immediately. Whenever possible, officers shall
leave the accident scene “as is” until the arrival of investigators from the City
Attorney’s Office so that photographs can be taken. However, there may be some
instances where the discretion of the officer at the scene would dictate that traffic
flow is of more importance than preserving the evidence.
Whenever the presence of a City Attorney’s investigator is required, the call will be
placed to the Public Service dispatcher who will then be responsible for dispatching
an investigator. After hours, the Communications Center will contact the
investigator at his/her home. When the City Attorney’s investigator is not available
or does not deem the accident to be serious enough to warrant his/her presence,
the dispatcher should immediately inform the unit or supervisor at the scene and
provide them the name of the investigator.
When the accident occurs within close proximity to the City, the City Attorney’s
Office should be called immediately, and a police supervisor dispatched to the
scene. It will be the responsibility of the supervisor dispatched to the scene to
secure the necessary information for a City Property Damage Report and to make
any further investigation necessary, taking into consideration the investigation and
reporting procedures of the handling police agency.
Even if the accident occurs well beyond the City limits, contact the City Attorney.
If the seriousness of the situation warrants it, the Watch Commander may send a
supervisor to the scene no matter how remote the location may be.
When accident reports involving any City equipment are taken, officers shall
refrain from writing a primary collision factor, conclusion, or opinion as to who
was at fault. Neither driver should be cited for the violation that caused the
accident; however, officers may cite or arrest for administrative or other criminal
violations. For example: 12500, 14601, 16025, etc., or arrest for 20002, 23152,
etc.
Watch Commander Responsibilities
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
376 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
If a collision occurs outside the City, the Watch Commander shall be notified and
determine whether or not to dispatch a supervisor to the scene. The Watch
Commander’s determination shall be based on the following factors:
• Geographical location
• Severity of injury/damage
• Request by law enforcement jurisdiction where the collision occurred
Supervisory Responsibility at the Scene
The supervisor shall assume command of all operations at the scene of a collision.
He/she shall ensure a complete and thorough investigation is conducted in
compliance with Training Bulletin #122. The supervisor shall be responsible for
reviewing all collision reports and ensuring they are complete, consistent, and
concise. The reports shall be completed prior to the end of shift.
Supervisor’s Report of Collision
The supervisor must personally deliver the original Supervisor’s Report of Collision
memorandum and original (pink) Collision Report to the Accident Investigation
Detail (AID) No copies of the original collision report shall be made or distributed.
A copy of the Supervisor’s Report of Collision memorandum must be forwarded to
the Chief of Police, the Deputy Chief of Patrol Bureau, and Division Commander(s)
of personnel involved.
The completed Collision Report will be available ONLY through AID upon request.
Supervisor’s Report of Collision MUST include the following:
• The events leading to the collision, call number, en route to dispatch/on routine
patrol, dispatched Code Three, pursuit, etc.
• Unusual events and associated factors that will enable the Vehicle Accident
Review Board (VARB) to have a complete understanding of the collision scene
and events; i.e., weather conditions, during criminal apprehension, mechanical
defects, medical/mental condition
• Injuries to Department personnel and other individuals, including the status of
hospitalized employees
Accident Investigation Detail
The AID supervisor will review the Supervisor’s Report of Collision memorandum
and Traffic Collision Report, and consider the following factors:
• Completeness and accuracy of the Collision Report
• Deficiency in employee performance
• Deficiency in Department equipment
• Training problems
The AID supervisor shall prepare a report of the collision, which shall include the
employee’s department traffic accident record for the previous three years. The
completed report shall be forwarded to the VARB.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
377 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Push-Bar Incidents
A supervisor shall be notified in any incident involving the use of a Police Vehicle's
push-bar that results in any damage to another vehicle.
• City Property Damage Form must be filled out listing all party's information and
damage
• All damage should be photographed
• Push-bar incidents shall not be presented to the VARB and shall not go on the
officer's driving record
• Officers shall document in their unit history all push-bar incidents resulting in
NO damage to vehicles. If the unit is not logged on, the officer shall immediately
notify a field supervisor, who shall complete the log entry for the officer.
7.4.1.2 COLLISION INVESTIGATION DETAIL (CID)
Revised April 29, 2011
CALL-OUT PROCEDURE
Department employees shall adhere to the following conditions and procedures for
the occurrence of a serious, or fatal injury collision, and serious injury collision
involving City personnel and property.
Procedures
The supervisor at the scene must make notification to the Collision Investigation
Detail (CID) when advised of any of the following circumstances:
• Fatal injuries or serious injuries (or death appears imminent)
• Fatal injuries involving a vehicle or a pedestrian and the A-Line LRV
(excluding a pedestrian suicide)
• Serious injury collisions involving City vehicles, personnel, or property;
i.e., pursuit
• Any Command Officer at the scene requests AID to respond
Considerations on whether to make a notification:
• The age of the victim
• Any previous medical conditions
• Vehicle versus pedestrian or bicycle (possible unknown internal injuries
at the scene)
If an CID Detective responds, the Watch Commander shall:
• Coordinate with the field supervisor at the scene and ensure the collision
scene remains intact
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
378 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Request Public Works as necessary; i.e., barricades
• Request Crime Lab to respond and standby for photographs
• Provide continual updates of injuries to AID Detectives
When a Police Department vehicle is involved, or there may be City liability due to
some sort of Police involvement prior to the accident (i.e., pursuit or any other
associated factor), and the accident results in a serious injury or fatality, the AID
Sergeant shall be notified to respond along with the on-call AID Detectives.
7.4.1.3 VEHICLE ACCIDENT REVIEW BOARD (VARB)
The Vehicle Accident Review Board (VARB) shall determine if the accident was
preventable or non-preventable and make recommendations for counseling or
retraining. The recommendations of the Board, as to counseling, retraining, and
discipline shall be reviewed by the Traffic Section Lieutenant and Division
Commander of the involved employee, then forwarded to the Deputy Chief of the
involved employee for final approval. The completed package will then be returned
to the AID supervisor for final disposition.
The voting members of the VARB are the sergeant of the Accident Investigation
Detail and the assigned investigators. The Fleet Safety Officer shall serve as a
resource, but not as a voting member of the Board unless a tie occurs. The Review
Board shall convene as needed. The Sergeant of the Accident Investigation Detail
shall officiate at the Board meetings.
Employee Accidents
Employee accidents will be classified as:
• Preventable
• Non-preventable
Any of the findings may require training or counseling depending on the total
collision analysis by the VARB. The training may require involvement in a formal
driver-training course or behind-the-wheel training session by a POST certified
Department Driver Awareness Instructor.
All counseling and training will be coordinated, in a timely manner, by the Fleet
Safety Officer through the employee’s Division Commander.
In cases where an employee’s retraining has shown no effect in correcting
his/her driving habits, or where actions of the employee in the collision were
flagrant misconduct, review through the disciplinary process will be requested.
7.4.2 CITATIONS – ACCOUNTABILITY & VOIDING
Revised October 24, 2014
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
379 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Financial Bureau Supply Section shall be responsible for issuing all
Department citation books (traffic/misdemeanor and parking) to each of the
Divisions. It is the responsibility of each Division to track the issuance of citations
to their respective officers.
Officers issuing moving and/or parking citations shall turn them in at the completion
of their shift. All officers, excluding Traffic Section officers, shall deposit completed
citations in the designated container. Traffic Section officers shall return citations
to their supervisor as directed.
7.4.2.1 ACCOUNTING FOR CITATIONS
Revised October 24, 2014
The disposition of all citations is documented in the Department’s RMS/ARS
system. Under no circumstances shall officers destroy or dispose of citations in a
manner not in accordance with this policy. Unused, outdated citation books shall
be returned to the Financial Bureau Supply Section.
7.4.2.2 PROCEDURE FOR VOIDING CITATIONS ISSUED BY THE
POLICE DEPARTMENT
Revised October 24, 2014
Requests to void citations shall be submitted on PD Form 2314.001, "Request to
Void Citation," with all available copies of the citation and related reports attached.
Completed "Request to Void Citation" forms shall be provided to the requesting
officer's immediate supervisor. After review, the form shall be forwarded to the
officer's Division Commander for approval. In cases where the intended recipient
is unaware the citation is being voided, a notice shall be mailed to the violator. A
copy of this notice shall be attached to the "Request to Void Citation" form.
After approval by the officer's Division Commander, "Request to Void" forms and
attached documents shall be forwarded to the officer's Bureau Chief for approval
and then sent to the Administration Bureau, Records Division, Warrants Section
for processing. For additional information relative to misdemeanor citations, refer
to Training Bulletin #123. The Administration Bureau, Records Division, Warrants
Section will forward traffic citations to the County of Los Angeles, Long Beach
Superior Court, Traffic Section.
7.4.2.3 LOST OR STOLEN CITATIONS
Revised October 24, 2014
If a citation is lost or stolen, the officer shall immediately advise his/her supervisor
and file the appropriate lost or stolen report. Copies of the reports shall be
forwarded to the Records Division.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
380 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.4.2.4 CITATION ISSUED BY OTHER CITY DEPARTMENTS
Revised October 24, 2014
With the exception of parking citations issued to stolen vehicles, all requests to
void citations issued by other City departments should be forwarded with a cover
letter signed by either a Bureau Chief or the Chief of Police to the Department
Head.
7.4.2.5 PARKING CITATIONS
Revised October 24, 2014
The Records Division will forward parking citations to the Commercial Services
Bureau/City Hall. Requests to void parking citations should be forwarded to the
Traffic Section for review. This includes parking citations issued to stolen vehicles.
7.4.2.6 THUMBPRINT ON TRAFFIC & MISDEMEANOR CITATIONS
Revised October 24, 2014
In the case of a vehicle code infraction, a thumbprint may only be obtained when
“there is a question in the officer’s mind as to the true identity of the defendant.”
Thumbprints may be obtained in all non-vehicle code misdemeanor situations.
Officers will be issued stamp pads through the Department’s Property Section and
the thumbprint shall be placed in the designated area on the Court’s copy of the
citation form.
A) Vehicle Code Infractions
If an officer is confident in the identity of the person committing a vehicle code
infraction, the officer should not seek to obtain a thumbprint on the citation form.
The Judicial Council has not formulated any guidelines to deal with a situation of
a violator’s refusal to provide a thumbprint where the person’s identity is in
question.
California Vehicle Code §40302 requires an officer to transport a suspect to a
Magistrate without unnecessary delay “when the person arrested fails to present
his/her driver’s license or other satisfactory evidence of his/her identity for
examination” (California Vehicle Code §40303(a)). If a magistrate is unavailable,
the suspect may be transported to jail for the purpose of posting bail or being
released on his/her written promise to appear. Once transported to jail, the
suspect may be detained for a reasonable period of time, not to exceed two hours,
in order to verify his/her identity (California Vehicle Code §40307). Requesting
that a thumbprint be given at this stage in order to verify identity is not an
unreasonable request. Current case law indicates that fingerprinting in order to
establish identity does not improperly infringe upon an individual’s right to privacy
B) Misdemeanors
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
381 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Thumbprints may be obtained in all non-vehicle code misdemeanor situations. If a
misdemeanor defendant refuses to provide a thumbprint in the field, the arresting
officer could simply invoke his/her discretionary power pursuant to California Penal
Code §853.6(g) and transport the suspect to jail for a full booking process. This
procedure would encompass a fingerprinting procedure. In other words, the officer
could give the defendant the option of being fingerprinted in the field, or subjecting
himself/herself to the entire booking process at a jail facility.
7.4.3 DISPATCHING TRAFFIC UNITS
While the Traffic Section is primarily responsible for the enforcement of traffic laws,
they support Patrol by handling traffic collisions, when available.
Traffic units should be dispatched under the following circumstances:
• All reported injury traffic collisions
• Any traffic collision encountered while on-duty
Traffic units should NOT be dispatched to "Special Accidents" (non-collision
related accidents)
Traffic units are assigned to specific areas and have specific traffic enforcement
responsibilities in addition to being available to support Patrol by handling traffic
collisions. Consequently they should not randomly be removed from their station
detail status to be dispatched to traffic collisions or dispatched out of their area.
However, when Patrol units are not available, they may be dispatched to injury
collisions. When in-service, Traffic Section officers should be dispatched to ALL
traffic collisions. If there is a requirement for a motor unit due to traffic congestion,
a Field Sergeant or Watch Commander may request their assistance.
Patrol units will NOT request a traffic unit to take a report they have been
dispatched to handle or come across while on patrol.
When traffic units are unavailable for dispatch due to assignment from their
supervisors, they shall advise Communications to place them on station detail
status. However, Traffic Section officers shall monitor the radio at all times and
when available, based on the nature of their assignment, should clear and respond
to the reported traffic collision. Traffic units may be removed from a station detail
for injury accidents or life-threatening situation when units are not available in a
specific area with the approval of a Traffic Enforcement Section Sergeant,
Communications Supervisor, Patrol Sergeant or Watch Commander.
7.4.4 HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY VESTS
Approved: 04/10/09
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION & TRAFFIC
382 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Federal mandate Section 23 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 634,
effective November 24, 2008, requires all public safety personnel to wear a high
visibility safety vest. These vests must meet specific requirements of the American
National Standard Institute (ANSI), and must be worn while handling certain duties
within the right-of-way of Federal-aid highways (most streets in Long Beach) either
in the daytime or nighttime hours.
Wearing the High Visibility Safety Vest
The High Visibility Safety Vest shall be worn while:
• Directing traffic or handling lane closures
• Investigating collisions, while in traffic
• Handling a disaster scene
• Clearing any roadway obstructions
Note: Not wearing the issued safety vest when required would be a violation of
OSHA regulations and may subject the City to fines. Additionally, if an officer is
injured while not utilizing proper issued safety equipment Worker’s Compensation
benefits could be denied
The High Visibility Safety Vest may be worn anytime it may increase safety.
Officers are not required to wear the High Visibility Safety Vest during:
• Traffic stops or incidents involving criminal activity where the vest would
jeopardize the officer’s safety
• Activities that place an officer at a personal risk level greater than the potential
risk of exposure to traffic conditions
• Incidents that require immediate action to perform life-saving measures
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
383 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.5 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS/CRITICAL INCIDENTS
7.5.1 CRITICAL INCIDENT CONTINGENCY PLANNING & REPORTING
All critical incidents have both distinctive and common characteristics.
Contingency planning requirements are essentially the same. These requirements
cover the three basic phases of Pre-Incident Planning, Incident Operations and
Post-Incident Planning.
Pre-Incident Planning
The availability of lead-time to properly pre-plan is a significant advantage in critical
incident management.
• Tactical intelligence gathering is the initial step in preparing a contingency plan
and one of the most important. All major preparations including, allocation of
Department resources and establishing the enforcement posture, are
predicated upon intelligence date. Incorporated into the planning steps should
be: Historical background, meeting, and site examination
• Staffing: Delegated to the staff are those tasks associated with the organization
of personnel, making assignments, briefings, and equipment procurement and
issuance
• Incident evaluation: is the review and evaluation of all tactical intelligence data,
and general information with the objective of identifying and prioritizing
anticipated problems within the critical incident. The evaluation should be
carried out by the ranking officer in charge and a pre-selected decision-making
staff responsible for management of the incident
• Assessment of resources: needed to resolve the incident problems
• Staff briefing: The contingency plan is modified, finalized and approved for
implementation during the initial briefing phase. The supervisors then conduct
“roll down” briefings for all personnel. These briefings ensure the
understanding of the plan and eliminate concerns
Incident Operations
• Preparation requires individual supervisors to develop “sub-plans”
• For pre-planned contingencies, the overall operations program is compiled into
a written contingency plan
Contingency Plan Format
• State the problems
• State the historical background and tactical intelligence information
• Define Department objectives and philosophy governing the plan
• State the planned allocation of resources
• Describe the phases of the contingency plan whereby additional resources will
be committed for control purposes
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
384 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Phase I Control is maintained; control measures are described. Moderate
staffing requirements
• Phase II Staging of personnel occurs. Mobilization of respective personnel
occurs to some degree
• Phase III Mobilization of ALL on-duty personnel; shifts may be extended
• Phase IV Full mobilization of the Department occurs
• Phase V Appropriate notifications are made to the City staff and administrative
executives. The Los Angeles County Sheriffs and other law enforcement
agencies are notified/alerted
• Describe the procedures for withdrawal and reduction of committed resources
Post-Incident Planning
• The primary objective in the planned phase down is to ensure that further
problems or disorders will not occur, nor will control be lost.
• Critical Incident Review Board
• Purpose - to identify methods for enhancing officer safety, preventing injuries,
and improving efficiency.
• The Deputy Chief, Patrol Bureau, is responsible for establishing the Critical
Incident Review Board
7.5.2 UNUSUAL OCCURRENCES
In order to ensure that vital information concerning occurrences is consistently
reported to the Office of the Chief of Police and other levels of command, the
following guidelines are to be adhered to:
· Whenever any major incident or unusual occurrence takes place, it shall be the
responsibility of the Field Commander, Field Supervisor, or Officer in Charge at
the scene to provide information of the incident to the on-duty Watch Commander.
This notification should be made as soon as practical after the occurrence is under
control or resolved.
A major incident or unusual occurrence may be defined, but not limited to the
following:
• SWAT Team call-outs
• Hostage situations
• Officer-involved shootings
• Multi-homicides
• Sex crimes involving juvenile victims
• Kidnappings
• Critical missing juveniles
• Natural disaster
• Labor disputes involving criminal violence
• Arrest or detention of VIPs
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
385 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Any other major incident in which the gravity of the situation warrants prompt
notification of the Chief of Police
Watch Commander Responsibilities
It shall be the responsibility of the on-duty Watch Commander to prepare a
memorandum describing, in detail, the circumstances of the event.
The Watch Commander will forward the memorandum to the Office of the Chief of
Police and copies to the three Bureaus and the Community Relations Division. A
file copy of the memorandum shall be maintained in the Watch Commander’s office
for future reference.
Definitions
• Unusual Occurrence (UO) – An event which involves the probability of, or
actual injury or property damage arising either from natural or man-caused
incidents which necessitates the use of a Tactical Alert
• Minor Unusual Occurrence – Handled by on-duty field personnel without
depleting field strength beyond the point where supplemental staffing is needed
• Serious Unusual Occurrence – On-duty field personnel insufficient to control
the occurrence and maintain routine police service. Other on-duty Divisions
must be called upon for assistance
• Major Unusual Occurrence – Threatens public safety to the degree that all or a
major portion of the Department must be mobilized to exercise control.
Supplemental support may be required
7.5.2.1 SPECIAL DEPLOYMENT
Mobile Field Force Concept
Experience dictates that whenever an event has the potential for mass civil
disobedience, the Department must respond with a highly mobile field force
capable of fulfilling a variety of missions including mass arrests and bookings. The
orderly depletion of available, on-duty personnel ensures the effective use of
Department resources. A focused and directed approach contribution to resolving
the problem in the most expedient manner possible.
The Mobile Field Force Concept has been developed to provide a fast and effective
method to assemble and control a platoon-size tactical force from on-duty
personnel. It is adaptable to both pre-planned and spontaneous events that
require the rapid assembly of large numbers of personnel. The Mobile Field Force
may respond to field situations directly from its staging area, yet remains
subordinate to the Mission Group Officer.
During pre-planned events, the Mobile Field Force may be assembled from the
involved Division and assembled at the Field Command Post for immediate
response. Depending upon operational considerations, it can also be deployed to
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
386 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
the Field Command Post as a ready reserve, broken into squads and assigned
specific missions. The Mobile Field Force may also be disbanded after its initial
mission and reformed into ready reserve elements.
7.5.2.2 CALL-OUT PROCEDURES
Upon notification to report for duty in an emergency, the authority to activate a call-
out will rest with the on-duty, ranking Command Officer or Watch Commander
during a Stage 2 or Stage 3 Tactical Alert.
Tactical Alert Stages – Authority to Activate
• Stage 1 – Field Commander/Field Supervisor
• Stage 2 – Ranking Command Officer/Watch Commander
• Stage 3 – Chief of Police/Duty Command Officer
7.5.2.3 TACTICAL ALERT STAGES
Stage 1
• Command Post established
• Radio frequency assigned to handle the unusual occurrence
• Watch Commander notified
• All units stay in service
• Only those units assigned to report to Command Post; all other units stay in
their beats
• Radio traffic kept to a minimum
Stage 2
• Tactical Alert Stage 1, plus:
• Only “emergency” dispatches answered
• No Code 7
• Other Watches or Divisions may held over or called to report to work early
• 12-hours shifts may be used
Stage 3
• Tactical Alert Stage 2, plus:
• The Department is placed on 12-hour shifts
• Days off are cancelled, if necessary
• At this point, the mission of the Department will be to control the unusual
occurrence and maintain public safety
• Consideration of requesting services from other department and other services
outside the City
Information Technology will produce an Emergency Call-Out Roster monthly. The
roster will be reduced to an 8 ½ x 11-inch document by Information Technology
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
387 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
and distributed. The roster will list pertinent data of all personnel, grouping them
by zip code areas.
Utilization of Call-Out Roster
Contained Emergency
The ranking Command Officer or the Watch Commander shall utilize Information
Technology personnel from the North Police Substation. MOC-1, located at the
Heliport, will be the third back up for workable telephone lines.
Major Disaster
Knowledge of a major disaster is self-notifying. The Emergency Call-Out Roster
will be used to setup 12-hour, work schedules if the event is to be of extended
duration.
Distribution of Call-Roster
Each person holding the following ranks/positions will receive a copy of the
Emergency Call-Out Roster, updated and distributed monthly:
• Chief of Police
• Deputy Chiefs
• Commanders
• Administrator, Information Technology Division
• Watch Commander
• MOC-1 Officer
Reporting
Contained Emergency
When reporting to work in response to a contained emergency, fire, explosion,
plane crash, et cetera, personnel will report to the primary assembly point (Public
Safety Building) unless otherwise directed.
Disaster
In response to a disaster, major earthquake, flood, et cetera, officers will report to
any designated assembly point using public media reports of damage as a basis
for their decision on where to report.
Assembly Points
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
388 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Primary Public Safety Building, 400 West Broadway
• Secondary Police Heliport, 2609 East Spring
• Secondary North Police Substation, 4891 Atlantic
General Emergency Operating Procedures
An officer answering a call of a serious nature will, as soon as practical, inform
his/her immediate supervisor and the Watch Commander of the nature and
circumstances of the call.
A supervisory officer at the scene shall keep the Watch Commander updated as
to required equipment and personnel.
Each officer or supervisor assigned duties at the scene or any other place directly
related to the incident, will as soon as practical at the conclusion of such incident,
write a supplementary report describing the time spent and the duties performed.
Unnecessary officers at the scene will be discharged from duty by the ranking
supervisory officer, and resume regular duties.
Officers will not leave an assigned beat to respond to the scene of an incident
without authorization, unless officer safety is jeopardized.
The Incident Commander will authorize any additional personnel, equipment or
operations necessary.
All organizational Bureaus shall coordinate their activities through the Officer in
charge or the Watch Commander, unless another ranking supervisor is designated
to coordinate activities at the Station.
The Watch Commander or other ranking supervisor shall inform the Duty Officer
and the Chief of Police of the nature and circumstances of the ongoing event, as
often as necessary.
If necessary, officers will cordon off the area to maintain both the safety of the
officers and the public until a plan of action can be worked out and implemented.
7.5.2.4 INCIDENT DEBRIEFING
Psychological trauma may occur when an officer causes the serious injury or death
of another human being.
The officer’s immediate supervisor shall refer an officer who has caused injury or
death, in the performance of his/her duty as a peace officer, to the Department
Psychologist. The referral shall be automatic, by telephone or in person,
confidential and without prejudice to the officer.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
389 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Referrals will be mandatory in the following situation:
• When an officer, in the course of duty, had injured seriously or caused the death
of a human being
• When an officer is seriously injured, but is physically able to receive counseling
• When an officer experiences an incident involving mass casualties such as the
scene of a major disaster
• When an officer’s partner is killed or seriously injured
Optional referral:
• When an officer experiences emotional stress as a result of having been
involved in a serious incident
7.5.2.5 CRITICAL INCIDENT DEBRIEF COMMITTEE
The Investigations Bureau has Audit Responsibility
The Chief of Police or their designee, at their discretion, will conduct a Critical
Incident Debrief of officer-involved shootings, in-custody deaths, and other
significant incidents or events. The debrief should be scheduled within 72 hours
after the incident and provide the committee with preliminary information about
the incident.
The committee will be comprised of the following members:
• Chief of Police
• Deputy Chiefs
• City Attorney
• Involved Employee(s) Division Commander
• Training Division Commander
• Tactical Operations Committee Commander
• Gang and Violent Crimes Division Commander
• Employee Association Representative
• Internal Affairs Representative
The Critical Incident Debrief Committee will discuss employed tactics, the
performance of equipment, the need for additional or specialized equipment, and
an evaluation of applicable department policy.
In the case of an officer involved shooting or in-custody death, employees involved
in these critical incidents will not return to field duty until the Critical Incident Debrief
has occurred and/or the Chief of Police or designee has approved their return to
field duty.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
390 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
On- Duty Personnel
In the event of a mobilization, the following shall occur:
• On-duty personnel shall remain at their assignments until properly relieved
Off-duty Personnel
• In the event of a mobilization, the following guidelines have been established:
• Off-duty personnel who are scheduled for the next shift or who are called into
work shall respond to their Incident Command System (ICS) as soon as
possible after stabilizing their families
• All other off-duty personnel shall monitor radio and television for emergency
broadcast system instructions. Then contact their assigned Supervisor or the
Emergency Mobilization telephone, when able, at telephone number 570-7492
• If telephone or travel to one’s unit assignment is impossible, personnel shall
report to the nearest operational Police or Sheriff’s Department facility. The
officer shall then request that agency to notify the Department for direction
Emergency Mobilization Shifts
The Department will institute its 12-hours shifts as follows:
• Shift A 0600-1800 hours
• Shift B 1800-0600 hours
• Overlap 1200-2400 hours
7.5.4 REACT RESPONSE
Revised January 27, 2022
Patrol Bureau shall review this policy on a two-year review cycle.
Reviewed January 27, 2022
REACT is available to support tactical operations with a small team that can rapidly
respond, and utilize SWAT training, experience, and equipment to help resolve an
incident.
REACT shall consist of one team sergeant and typically six (6) officers who can
respond with limited SWAT tactical equipment.
REACT is a minimal force multiplier and is not a substitute for a SWAT team
activation. REACT shall not be used when a SWAT team activation is required
per manual § 7.5.5.1 CRITERIA FOR SWAT ACTIVATION.
7.5.4.1 REACT RESPONSE CRITERIA
Revised January 27, 2022
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
391 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
REACT may be requested for tactical incidents such as:
• Those that exceed the capabilities of deployed Department resources, and
• When additional tactical equipment and expertise are desired.
7.5.4.2 REQUEST FOR REACT
Revised January 27, 2022
Requests for a REACT response shall be made by an Incident Commander.
REACT can be requested by contacting the SES Lieutenant, Tactical Sergeant, or
their designee. The Incident Commander shall notify the Communications Center
of all REACT call-outs.
The SES Lieutenant, Tactical Sergeant, or their designee will evaluate the
circumstances and determine the appropriate level of response (i.e., REACT or
SWAT Team activation).
7.5.4.3 REACT RESPONSE ROLE
Revised January 27, 2022
Once on scene, the REACT sergeant or their designee shall contact the Incident
Commander unless exigency necessitates immediate action.
The Incident Commander retains operational control of the incident and all
personnel on scene. REACT shall not be utilized to manage an incident. REACT’s
role includes, but is not limited to:
• Supplementing the incident response
• Coordinating searches
• Providing tactical advice to the Incident Commander
• Leading, advising, and/or supporting Emergency Action Teams
7.5.5 SPECIAL WEAPONS AND TACTICS (SWAT)
Revised August 17, 2017
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility
Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) is a specialized unit of officers and public
safety dispatchers who are trained and equipped to respond to situations that
exceed the capability of detectives and patrol officers.
Requests to activate SWAT shall be made by an Incident Commander. In select
emergent situations, such as items 1-5 of Manual § 7.5.5.1 CRITERIA FOR SWAT
ACTIVATION, the Communications Supervisor is authorized to activate SWAT
prior to receiving a request from an Incident Commander. A request for activation
may only be changed by:
1) The supervisor who made the original request; or,
2) A higher-ranking officer who has assumed the role of Incident Commander.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
392 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
When SWAT responds, the Incident Commander shall remain in charge of the
incident; SWAT shall maintain responsibility for SWAT tactics.
7.5.5.1 CRITERIA FOR SWAT ACTIVATION
Revised August 17, 2017
An Incident Commander shall immediately notify SWAT when faced with any of
the following circumstances:
• Hostage Situation
• Sniper
• Active Shooter
• Skyjacking – The FBI may assume command of the situation, however, the
Department shall supply support personnel, including SWAT, for security of
the immediate area.
• Terrorism – SWAT shall be activated immediately when there is reason to
believe an act of terror has occurred. If there is a credible pending threat of
a terrorist assault, SWAT should be contacted to determine the need for
deployment.
• Barricaded Suspect – If an armed or dangerous suspect is barricaded or
concealed within a perimeter, and shots have been fired, SWAT shall be
activated. If an armed or dangerous suspect is barricaded or concealed within
a perimeter and, after a reasonable period of time fails to surrender, SWAT
shall be activated.
• Event Action Plan (EAP) – SWAT shall be requested when a planned
tactical operation indicates the necessity for SWAT assistance.
• Search Warrants – When scouting and planning a search warrant, the
warrant checklist shall be incorporated into the plan and shall be used to
evaluate the need for SWAT assistance, refer to Manual § 7.5.5.2 SWAT
THREAT ASSESSMENT MATRIX.
• Dignitary Security – SWAT may be utilized when requested for dignitary
security.
• Other – If a supervisor believes an incident requires the special skills of
SWAT, he or she should request a SWAT activation.
7.5.5.2 SWAT THREAT ASSESSMENT MATRIX
Revised August 17, 2017
If a proposed operation, pre-planned arrest or search warrant contains one or more
of the gray shaded hazards listed in the SWAT Threat Assessment Matrix, service
by SWAT shall be required. If a proposed operation, pre-planned arrest or search
warrant contains three of the unshaded hazards listed in the SWAT Threat
Assessment Matrix, the SWAT Tactical Sergeant or Lieutenant shall be contacted
regarding SWAT utilization.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
393 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
YES NO
1. Heavily fortified location (sally port, internal fortification,
multiple gates, etc.)
2. Automatic weapons believed to be on the premises (C.I.
information, probable cause, etc.)
3. Suspect wanted for armed assault on a police officer
4. Assault weapons, superior armament (high power rifles,
scoped rifles, etc.), or ballistic protection (body armor, building
fortification, etc.) believed to be on the premises (C.I.
information, probable cause, etc.)
5. Barred doors and windows
6. Counter surveillance (closed circuit TV, intrusion devices,
etc.)
7. Dog(s)
8. Third strike candidate
9. Violent criminal history (armed violence against the public or
police)
10. Firearms believed to be at the location
11. Threats by suspect against officers
12. Suspect wanted for armed assault
Detectives and patrol officers may encounter additional threats not listed above.
Detectives and patrol supervisors are encouraged to contact SWAT personnel
whenever questions arise in evaluating service options and criteria.
7.5.5.3 SWAT ACTIVATION
Revised August 17, 2017
The requesting supervisor will advise the Communications Center to begin the
activation process and the Watch Commander will be notified.
The Communications Center will use the notification system to activate SWAT. In
the event of a notification system failure, the Communications Center will contact
the SWAT Lieutenant or SWAT Tactical Sergeant.
The SWAT Tactical Team and SWAT Hostage Negotiating Team are normally
activated together when responding to tactical situations. However, the SWAT
Hostage Negotiating Team may be activated separately for the purpose of crisis
intervention and will respond without the tactical unit. This requires the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
394 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
authorization of the SWAT Lieutenant or SWAT Tactical Sergeant who will
evaluate any tactical issues and determine the appropriate level of response.
7.5.5.4 SWAT REACTIONARY (REACT) DEPLOYMENT
Revised August 17, 2017
If an event falls outside of the mandatory SWAT activation criteria, but may exceed
the capabilities of patrol, or where additional tactical expertise, short of a full SWAT
activation, is desired then REACT may be requested
The response will cause REACT personnel to deploy with SWAT tactical
equipment. Responding REACT personnel will contact the Watch Commander or
Incident Commander for direction unless the exigency of the situation requires
immediate action.
The Incident Commander should consider REACT in any of the following
situations, or other situation where additional tactical expertise is desired; the
Communications Center may immediately notify REACT regarding any of the
following events:
1) Officer involved shooting, where the suspect is not in custody;
2) Assault with a deadly weapon on a police officer, where the suspect is not in
custody;
3) Barricaded or open area searches for felony suspects;
4) Any suspected act of terrorism or credible pending threat of terrorist assault.
The SWAT Lieutenant, SWAT Tactical Sergeant, or their designee, will make a
determination if a REACT response is appropriate and what resources may be
deployed.
7.5.6 BARRICADED SUSPECT – SEARCH WARRANT REQUIREMENT
Whenever a special weapons arrest team, such as SWAT, is deployed in a
barricaded suspect incident, a “Ramey”, arrest, and/or search warrant shall be
obtained under the following circumstances:
• An individual is barricaded in his/her own residence and a clear, unequivocal,
signed Entry and Search Waiver cannot be obtained from another competent
adult member of the household
• An individual is barricaded in any third party residence and a clear,
unequivocal, signed Entry and Search Waiver cannot be obtained from a
competent adult in possession or control of said dwelling
• An individual is barricaded in any structure, business, or location where
possession or control of the location is unclear
• No entry into a barricaded suspect location shall be made by any member of
this Department without exigent circumstances, a signed entry/search warrant
or a “Ramey” warrant. However, activity required responding to an exigent
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
395 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
circumstance shall not be postponed or avoided, pending the issuance of the
appropriate warranting.
For the purpose of this requirement, an exigent circumstance is defined as an
emergency situation requiring swift action to prevent any of the following
conditions:
• Imminent danger to life
• Serious damage to property
• Imminent escape of a suspect
• Destruction of evidence
If any entry is made pursuant to exigent circumstances, under Federal law it must
be demonstrated that there was not sufficient time to obtain a warrant prior to entry.
In the absence of a signed Entry and Search Waiver, a warrant shall be secured
even if the emergency has concluded prior to the issuance of the warrant. The
warrant will ensure access the location for follow-up investigation.
The Incident Commander or his/her designees will initially attempt to obtain an
Entry and Search and Waiver form, PD Form 4000.21 A or B (Attachment A-
English or B-Spanish). The original Entry and Search Waiver will accompany the
original report package. A copy will be attached to the Unusual Occurrence
Report.
Entry and Search Waiver forms will be maintained in the Watch Commander’s
Officer and in the Command Post Tactical Van. If the Entry and Search Waiver
form is not obtained, the Incident Commander or his/her designee shall obtain a
“Felony Warrant of Arrest Upon Probable Cause Complaint” form, PD Form
1000.012, and include the Affidavit form, PD Form 1000.011.
In the event assistance is required for a legal opinion or warrant preparation, the
Los Angeles County District Attorney’s Command Post should be contacted at
telephone number (213) 974-3607. The District Attorney’s Command Post shall
also be used for telephonic warrants.
The original PD Form 1000.011 and PD Form 1000.012 will be packaged and
duplicated. Both packages will be submitted to the court for review. The Watch
Commander will maintain a roster of on-call court judges. The judge shall sign the
original copy. The signed warrant is valid for 10 days.
Entry to arrest the suspect is now possible. The Incident Commander shall retain
the original warrant and a copy retained by the SWAT Commander who will give
the copy to the suspect, subsequent to his/her arrest. Following service, a copy of
the booking slip will be secured and retained with a copy of the warrant. The
Incident Commander or his/her designee shall return the package within 10 days
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
396 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
to the Felony Complaint Desk, Criminal Division, Los Angeles County Court, 415
West Ocean Boulevard, Long Beach. An “F” (felony) number will be stamped on
the copy of the booking slip and warrant. The complete package will be placed
with the original warrant and become part of the original reports required for filing.
7.5.7 EMERGENCY FOOD AND WATER SUPPLIES
The Commander, Personnel/Training Division, shall be designated the
Departmental Logistics Officer. The Logistics Officer shall be responsible for the
maintenance and inventory of Department emergency food and water supplies.
He/she shall be responsible for confirming that supplies are adequate and
maintained in a safe and secure environment. The Logistics Officer shall report to
the Chief of Police and apprise him/her as to the status of the food and water
appropriations.
Division Commanders shall be responsible for providing the Logistics Officer with
a biannual transmittal indicating the location, quantity, and condition of their
emergency food and water supplies. Division Commanders shall provide written
notification to the Logistics Officer as soon as possible after emergency food or
water supplies are used or discovered missing.
The Chief of Police has primary rationing authority. A command officer or designee
may authorize the distribution and utilization of emergency food and water supplies
within their command.
Emergency food and water supplies shall be stored at specific locations within the
City under the auspices of the Police Department. The Chief of Police shall have
the authority to vary the locations and quantities of the food and water supplies.
The Chief shall notify the Logistics Officer of any changes so that a current
inventory can be maintained.
The following is a current list, effective May 1995, of storage locations and the
quantities of emergency food and water supplies at the designated sites.
LOCATION CASES OF DRIED FOOD
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT MODULES
(12 MEALS PER CASE) (FOOD/WATER/TOOLS)
Chief of Police 3 6
Station–cargo container in parking lot 24 13
Communications 12 6
Academy 20 9
North Division 18 8
Heliport 12 8
East Division 18 8
Total 107 58
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
397 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
LOCATION WATER STORAGE
WATER STORAGE 55-GALLON DRUM 30-GALLON DRUM
Chief of Police 0 0
Station-cargo container in parking lot 5 0
Communication Center 0 3
Academy 2 0
North Division 1 2
Heliport 1 2
East Division 1 2
Totals 10 7
7.5.8 LABOR RELATIONS MONITORING LOG
The Patrol Bureau shall monitor on-scene activities during strikes. The objectives
of all police activities at labor dispute locations are to:
• Maintain law and order
• Protect life and property
• Maintain impartiality and guarantee the civil rights of both parties to dispute
The Watch Commander will ensure police response to any labor dispute and will
maintain a record of all police action taken during his/her watch.
The Watch Commander of each Watch is responsible for the initiation and
distribution of the “Labor Relations Monitoring Log” prior to the end of his/her
watch. This will ensure Watch-to-Watch coordination and a continual update and
distribution of pertinent information.
Copies of the Department Labor Relations Unit of the Community Relations
Division, Administration Bureau, to establish and maintain positive liaison with
labor and management representatives. The Labor Relations Unit will provide
assistance to Department personnel during labor disputes. The Commander of
the Community Relations Division will submit the names of the Labor Relations
Unit officers to the Station Commander for discretionary utilization in labor-related
cases. The Watch Commander may call Labor Relation Officers into the field.
7.5.9 FLASH/SOUND DIVERSION DEVICES
The use of flash/sound diversionary devices, also referred to as “flash-bangs”,
shall be restricted to certified/authorized personnel from the SWAT Team.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
398 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
SWAT Team personnel who have successfully completed a Department approved
training course in the proper use and deployment of flash/sound diversionary
devices shall be authorized to deploy the devices during actual operations.
Except in extreme emergencies (i.e., life-threatening situations), flash sound
diversionary devices shall not be used without prior authorization by the SWAT
Team Lieutenant or Tactical Sergeant. In their absence, the Tactical Team Leader
may authorize their use.
Procedures
• Flash/sound diversionary devices may be considered whenever the use of a
less lethal diversion would facilitate entry, enable arrest, and potentially reduce
the risk of injury to citizens, suspects and officers
• Circumstances justifying the use flash/sound diversionary devices shall
include, but not be limited to:
• Barricaded suspects
• Hostage rescue operations
• High risk warrant service
• Circumstances where distraction of violent and/or mentally deranged persons,
or those under the influence of alcohol/drugs are believed necessary to
facilitate apprehension
• Situations where the authorizing person deems the use necessary to resolve
the incident safely
• Except in life-threatening situation, certain conditions may exist in which more
care should be exercised when deploying flash/sound diversionary devices.
These may include, but are not limited to:
• If intelligence information indicates the possible presence of children or elderly
persons
• Small rooms, closets or areas containing predominately ceramic/hard-type tile
walls or floors
• The suspected presence of highly combustible materials, or flammable vapors
or chemicals
DEPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Because flash/sound diversionary devices have the potential to ignite flammable
materials, when possible a portable fire extinguisher should be accessible
whenever devices are to be deployed.
Whenever possible, flash/sound diversionary device should be deployed in an area
visible to the deploying officer.
These devices shall not be used solely for the preservation of evidence.
REVIEW PROCESS
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
399 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The SWAT Lieutenant or Tactical Sergeant shall review the use of flash/sound
diversionary devices, as soon as practical, following each incident or operation to
ensure the devices were used according to policy and the devices functioned
properly. This information should then be documented in the SWAT After–Action
Report.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
400 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.5.10 DEPLOYMENT OF LESS LETHAL MUNITIONS
Revised July 18, 2013
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
See Special Order Signed 5/15/14
7.5.10.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised July 18, 2013
Less lethal force is an application of force, which is less likely to cause death or
serious injury. Less lethal munitions may be used to compel an individual to comply
with lawful direction.
In this policy, less lethal munition is used to describe any weapon platform used to
launch 37mm/40mm less lethal projectiles and the projectiles used within the
platform.
7.5.10.2 APPROVED MUNITIONS
Revised July 18, 2013
Only department supplied less lethal munitions shall be carried and deployed. Less
lethal munitions include specifically marked 12-gauge shotguns and 37mm/40mm
launchers; both target specific and non-target specific munitions can be deployed
in these platforms.
• Target specific munitions deploy a single munition and are intended to impact
an individual where the officer aims; target specific munitions may be deployed
in field situations and during crowd control situations
• Non-target specific munitions deploy multiple projectiles, they may be aimed at
a specific individual, however more than one individual may be impacted; non-
target specific munitions are intended for crowd control situations
7.5.10.3 MEDICAL TREATMENT
Revised July 18, 2013
Although classified as less lethal weapons, the potential to inflict serious or fatal
injuries exists. In all cases where a less lethal munition strikes a suspect, and the
suspect is taken into custody, officers shall transport the suspect to the hospital or
if necessary the suspect shall be transported to the closest emergency room by
ambulance before being booked.
7.5.10.4 CRITERIA FOR LAUNCHING LESS LETHAL MUNITIONS
Revised July 18, 2013
• The subject makes credible threats to harm officers, others, or himself/herself
• The subject states or exhibits intent to violently resist being taken into custody
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
401 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• The subject's violent actions or potential for use of weapons dictate the need
for an immediate response and the use of less lethal munitions is appropriate;
especially when the only other viable option may be the use of deadly force
• The subject engages in riotous, aggressive or combative behavior to include
throwing rocks, bottles, or other dangerous projectiles at citizens or officers
• Approved training sessions
7.5.10.5 DEPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Revised July 18, 2013
Supervisors and officers deploying less lethal munitions shall ensure there is a
minimum of one additional officer in a position to provide lethal cover to the officer
that is using less lethal munitions, except in riot and crowd control formations.
In field situations, supervisors shall assume a supervisory role, while a trained
officer uses a less lethal munition. However, if circumstances necessitate, a field
supervisor may deploy and use less lethal munitions.
Before discharging munitions, an officer should consider the following factors:
• Distance and angle to the target
• Type and thickness of subject’s clothing
• Subject’s size
• Mental state and physical health of the subject, if known
• Weather conditions
• Physical environment between the shooter and the suspect such as,
windows, shrubbery or anything that may deflect a munition
• Urgency to safely resolve the situation
This list is not all inclusive and other factors may be considered.
7.5.10.6 ARREST PLAN
Revised July 18, 2013
When feasible, a plan to take an individual(s) into custody should be discussed
prior to the deployment of less lethal munitions.
7.5.10.7 DEPLOYMENT DISTANCES
Revised July 18, 2013
Officers should keep in mind the manufacturer recommendations and their training
regarding deployment distances. However, officers are not restricted solely to use
according to manufacturer recommendations, each situation must be evaluated on
the totality of circumstances at the time of deployment.
7.5.10.8 TARGET AREAS
Revised July 18, 2013
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
402 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The user should avoid striking a subject in the head, neck, chest, groin, spine and
lower back. The only exception is when the user is faced with a threat warranting
the use of deadly force.
It is recommended that target specific munitions be aimed at selected target areas
to reduce serious or fatal injury. The extremities should be the primary target area
when deploying target specific munitions at close distance.
Primary target areas for target specific munitions:
• Arms below the elbow
• Stomach
• Legs
Secondary target areas for target specific munitions:
• Knees
• Upper arms
Target area for non-target specific munitions:
• Legs
7.5.10.9 AUTHORIZATION FOR DEPLOYMENT
Revised July 18, 2013
Authorization to deploy less lethal munitions in field situations shall be approved
by a supervisor.
Authorization to deploy less lethal munitions in a crowd control situation shall be
approved by the incident commander or the mobile field force commanding officer.
In extreme circumstances, the platoon sergeant or squad sergeant may authorize
the use of less lethal munitions in a crowd control situation.
7.5.10.10 WARNINGS
Revised July 18, 2013
A verbal warning of the intended use of less lethal munitions shall precede its
application, unless it would otherwise endanger the safety of officers, or when it is
not feasible due to the circumstances. The purpose of the warning is to give
individuals a reasonable opportunity to comply with the officer’s direction.
7.5.10.11 STORAGE AND LOADING
Revised July 18, 2013
All less lethal launchers shall be stored unloaded. The officer assigned to use the
less lethal launcher shall inspect the cartridge to ensure that only less lethal
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
403 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
munitions are loaded and are in good condition. When feasible, the munitions
should be verified by another officer prior to deployment.
7.5.10.12 TRAINING REQUIRED FOR USE
Revised July 18, 2013 Less lethal munitions are approved for use by personnel who have successfully
completed a department approved training course. All authorized users of less
lethal munitions will qualify annually and receive annual refresher training provided by the Training Division.
7.5.10.13 SPECIAL WEAPONS AND TACTICS TEAM (SWAT)
Revised July 18, 2013
All less lethal munitions described in this policy are authorized for use by SWAT.
The SWAT commander, lieutenant, tactical sergeant, or team leader may
authorize their deployment.
In addition to the previously outlined deployment criteria, SWAT may utilize less
lethal munitions in situations where the authorizing person deemed their use
necessary to safely resolve a SWAT incident.
Hand-deployed, multi-rubber ball grenades (non-target specific) may be deployed
by SWAT personnel during crowd control situations and tactical incidents when approved by the SWAT commander, lieutenant, tactical sergeant or team leader.
7.5.10.14 RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised July 18, 2013
Supervisor
It shall be the responsibility of the supervisor or incident commander authorizing
the deployment of the less lethal munitions to ensure that when less lethal munitions strike a suspect, and the suspect is taken into custody, the suspect is
transported to the hospital prior to booking.
The incident commander or supervisor authorizing the use of the less lethal
munition(s) will ensure a follow-up investigation is conducted. All less lethal deployments will be documented in the Supervisor’s Use of Force Report, PD 1040.007.
If a subject sustains a fatal or life-threatening injury due to the use of less lethal
munitions, the Homicide Detail shall be notified.
In all cases involving the use of less lethal munitions, the Watch Commander shall
be notified. The incident must be documented in the electronic Watch
Commander's Log.
Officer
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
404 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
All incidents of less lethal deployment require documentation relative to all events
surrounding the incident. Officers will follow all use of force reporting guidelines
found in the Long Beach Police Department Manual Section 7.1.2 – Use of Force.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
405 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.5.11 ELECTRONIC CONTROL DEVICE
Revised: January 2010
The Patrol Bureau has audit responsibility.
See Special Order CONDUCTED ELECTRICAL WEAPON Issued 2/9/2016
The Electronic Control Device (ECD) is a hand held, battery-powered weapon. It
is designed to override the sensory and motor nervous functions of the central
nervous system, and temporarily incapacitate violent or potentially violent subjects
via uncontrollable contractions of the muscle tissue. The ECD is a force option
and is governed by the Use of Force policy outlined in Long Beach Police
Department Manual Section 7.1.2.
Officers may use the ECD as a viable option when command presence alone is
ineffective and the use of the ECD is reasonable and necessary to accomplish a
lawful objective. It shall be the individual responsibility of the officer to use the
ECD only when reasonable and justified under the circumstances. The ECD may
also be used during Department approved training sessions.
The use of the ECD shall be restricted to authorized personnel who have
completed a Department approved training course. Officers shall qualify annually
with the ECD.
Although classified as a less lethal weapon, the potential exists to inflict serious
injuries. The user should avoid targeting a subject in the head, neck and upper
torso/chest area. If feasible, a suspect will be warned prior to any use of force that
is reasonably likely to cause serious injury.
In all cases when the ECD cartridge probes are used, striking the subject or his/her
clothing, and a subject is taken into custody, medical personnel shall evaluate the
subject before being transported for booking. The subject shall be taken to the
contract hospital or, in an emergency, to the nearest hospital emergency room for
evaluation and booking approval. When the drive stun feature of the ECD is used
and the subject is taken into custody, the subject shall be evaluated by medical
personnel prior to booking. With the drive stun feature, Jail Division medical
personnel (i.e. jail nurse) can assess the need for further medical treatment or
authorize booking. If Jail Division medical personnel are not available, the subject
shall be transported to the contract hospital for medical clearance prior to booking.
Whenever an arrestee sustains a fatal or life-threatening injury and/or experiences
fatal or life-threatening medical complications, the Homicide Detail shall be
notified. The Homicide Detail will assign a team of detectives to respond and
assume control of the investigation.
PROCEDURES
Deployment Criteria
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
406 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• To defend any person from aggressive action by a subject
• The subject has made credible threats to harm officers, others, or him/herself
• The subject stated or exhibited the intent to actively resist being taken into
custody
• The subject’s violent actions, or potential for weapons, dictate the need for an
immediate response and the use of the ECD is appropriate
• When the subject is engaged in a riotous, unlawful assembly
• The ECD should not be used on non-violent suspects who passively resist
detention (fail to follow verbal commands only) without prior authorization from
an on-scene supervisor
• The ECD may be used to subdue aggressive or attacking animals
• Approved training sessions
ECD Deployment Guidelines
Factors to consider for obtaining accuracy and effectiveness with the ECD:
• Accuracy: Officers must hit the suspect with both probes in order for the
weapon to function properly
• Distance: The ECD can be fired from distances of 0 to 25 feet. The
recommended firing distances for optimum probe spread and accuracy are 7
to 15 feet
• Targeting: In addition to the abdominal area of the front torso, officers should
consider targeting other areas of the body containing large muscle groups such
as the back and/or legs
• Clothing: Clothing over two inches thick and/or the presence of hard objects
in pockets or on the subject’s person, if struck, will inhibit the effectiveness of
the weapon
• Drive Stun: The drive stun feature of the ECD is primarily a pain compliance
tool and is minimally effective when compared to conventional cartridge
discharge. It is designed as an emergency back-up feature and/or as a
reasonable force option in close quarter altercations
Safety facts to consider when deploying the ECD:
• Targeting: Officers should avoid targeting the subject’s head, neck, and the
upper torso/chest area when firing the probes and/or using the drive stun
feature of the weapon
• Pregnant women: Officers shall not use the ECD against a pregnant woman
unless reasonable alternatives would pose a greater safety risk to the suspect
and/or cause serious injury to the officers. If the ECD is determined to be the
only reasonable alternative the back and/or lower extremities should be
targeted when possible
• Falls: The ECD shall not be used when the subject is in a position where a fall
may cause substantial injury or death unless reasonable alternatives would
pose a greater safety risk to the suspect and/or cause serious injury to officers
• Flammables: The ECD can ignite flammable and/or combustible products and
their accompanying fumes. Therefore, it should not be deployed in
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
407 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
environments where these are present. This also includes a subject who has
been exposed to Cap Stun Pepper Spray and/or Mace, as these products are
discharged with an alcohol-based propellant
• Armed individuals: Absent compelling reasons to do so, officers shall not use
the ECD against subjects who are holding a firearm. The uncontrollable muscle
contractions caused by the ECD could potentially cause the suspect to depress
the trigger
• Vehicle Operators: The ECD should not be used on subjects who are
operating vehicles in motion, including automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
ATV’s, bicycles and scooters absent exigent circumstances
Administrative Controls
• Mandatory deployment: All uniformed personnel issued an ECD shall carry
it while working field assignments. The only exceptions are when the issued
ECD is unavailable due to maintenance and/or repair. Only the Department-
issued ECD shall be carried
• Holstering: On-duty uniformed personnel shall carry the ECD, fully armed, on
the support side of the body in a Department approved holster with the safety
on. The holster shall be attached to the officer’s duty belt. Officers should carry
at least one additional cartridge in case additional applications are necessary
• Non-uniformed personnel: Those authorized to use the ECD who are not
assigned to uniformed patrol may use other Department approved holsters and
carry and deploy the weapon consistent with Department training and Bureau
guidelines
• Multiple applications: Officers shall energize the subject the least number of
times and no longer than necessary to accomplish the lawful objective. When
compliance and/or effective incapacitation is not gained by the use of the ECD,
officers shall give special consideration to securing the subject via other
reasonable force options as soon as practical
• Handcuffed prisoners: The ECD shall not be used against handcuffed
prisoners, absent overtly assaultive behavior that cannot be controlled by
lesser force options, without the prior approval of an on-scene supervisor or in
exigent circumstances where reasonable alternatives would pose a greater
safety risk to the subject and/or cause serious injuries to officers
• Pre-teen children: The ECD shall not be used against pre-teen children
unless reasonable alternatives would pose a greater safety risk to the child
and/or cause serious injuries to officers
• Elderly/Physically disabled: The ECD shall not be used against known
elderly subjects or visibly disabled subjects unless reasonable alternatives
would pose a greater safety risk to the subject and/or cause serious injuries to
officers
Officer Responsibilities
Request a Lab Unit, or qualified officer, to photograph the scene and all injuries.
Locate any evidence, including: the ECD cartridge(s), probes and wires, any
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
408 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
recoverable AFID(s), and place them into evidence. The probes shall be treated
in accordance with Department biohazard evidence packaging procedures
The following information shall be documented in the officer’s report:
• The subject’s actions and/or behavior prior to deployment of the ECD
• The use of force attempted and the results, if any, prior to the deployment of
the ECD
• The names of the supervisor and Watch Commander who were notified
• The names of medical personnel and location treated
• The names of any citizens and/or officers who were injured prior to, or during,
deployment
• The names of any witnesses to the incident and their statement
Supervisor Responsibilities
• Ensure a medical evaluation is conducted
• Ensure a follow-up investigation and documentation of all events surrounding
the use of the ECD is completed
• Complete the “Supervisor’s Use of Force Report”
• Before the end of shift, forward copies of all pertinent reports to the Chief of
Police, Deputy Chief of the Support Bureau, the involved-employee’s Bureau
Chief and Division Commander
• Notify the Watch Commander
• Document the incident in the electronic Watch Commander’s Log
Annual Maintenance
• Every ECD issued will be serviced once per year
• This maintenance will be performed during annual re-certification
7.5.12 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
The Police Department will perform in a subordinate role to the Fire Department in
all hazardous materials incidents.
When officers are dispatched to a hazardous material “incident” and, after arrival,
have determined that a hazardous material may be involved, the responding officer
should immediately summon the Fire Department to act as the command authority.
The officer shall request that a police supervisor respond to the scene. The Police
Supervisor will notify the Watch Commander of the incident. The Watch
Commander will notify the Office of the Chief of Police.
The Police Supervisor will assist the Fire Department by providing the following:
• A liaison officer for the Fire Department Incident Commander
• Control of emergency vehicle access routes
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
409 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Perimeter traffic control
• Evacuation, if necessary
Hazardous material incidents may include overturned tanker trunks, underground
pipeline breaks, oil spills on waterways, radio-active material leakage, responses
to unmarked/unknown containers that have been abandoned, and possible
hazardous unidentified narcotics, drugs, chemicals or substances.
Officers are advised to adhere to the following guidelines.
A Hazardous Materials Incident Exists When:
A substance, because of quantity, concentration, or physical, chemical, or
infectious characteristics may either:
• Cause or contribute to death or an increase in serious illness; or
• Pose a substantial hazard to human health or environment when improperly
treated, stored, transported or disposed of; or
• If human exposure should occur, may result in death, disabling injury or serious
illness
• Any material identified as a hazardous waste or material in §66680 of Title 22
of the California Administrative Code which causes or contributes to any of the
aforementioned circumstances
Guidelines for Determining if the Material is of a Significant Quantity to be a Threat
to the Environment or Public Health
When there is a hazardous waste incident, the on-scene Fire Department Incident
Commander may contact the Health Department whenever a determination is
necessary.
The following criteria may be used by the Fire Department Incident Commander
when determining if significant quantities of hazardous waste have been involved
and threaten the environment or public health, necessitating immediate Health
Department consultation:
• Human or animal mortality (sickness or death)
• Fire, explosion or odor (airborne)
• Discharge into, or a conduit to usable surface water (beaches, recreational
water, or storm drain)
• Unsecured residential area (populated)
Procedures
• Do not enter any suspect clouds, vapor areas or spills, especially if the
substance is unidentified.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
410 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Do not attempt any rescue actions if the risk of exposure will be detrimental to
Department personnel.
• Establish a perimeter line and keep all individuals out until a positive product
identification has been made.
• The Fire Department will determine the need for areas of “downwind”
evacuation and request police assistance if evacuation is required.
• In incidents where hazardous materials must be retained and analyzed for
evidence, the Fire Department Incident Commander will advise the designee
who removes the hazardous materials to retain and secure the material until
contacted by the Long Beach Police Department Criminalist. The Criminalist
will contact the holder of the evidence and determine what steps to take to
analyze and identify the material. The Criminalist will also determine whom
and where the evidence will be stored. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SAMPLES
WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED FOR STORAGE IN THE POLICE PROPERTY
SECTION.
• Under no circumstances will personnel from this Department handle or
transport hazardous waste. (This does not preclude a Criminalist transporting
samples for analysis.) The Criminalist will be responsible for the safe storage
of hazardous materials.
Scene Management
Incidents on State highways or freeways are the responsibility of the California
Highway Patrol (CHP). Cal Trans is responsible for clean ups and removal. Until
arrival of the CHP, the Fire Department will assume command of the incident and
initiate any action necessary. If the CHP is on scene first, the Fire Department will
provide resources/services requested.
Incidents occurring in the City of Long Beach on County roads or City streets are
the responsibility of the Long Beach Police Department; however, the Fire
Department will act as command authority during hazardous materials incidents.
Fire Department Incident Commanders will utilize Police Department personnel for
law enforcement, traffic control, evacuation, and other police–related functions.
Incidents occurring on waterways are the responsibility of the Coast Guard and/or
the Department of Fish and Game (DFG). Until arrival of either organization, the
Fire Department will assume command of the incident and initiate necessary
actions. If the Coast Guard is on-scene first, the Fire Department will provide
resources/services as required.
Incidents on other City property and all private property are the responsibility of the
Fire Department. Fire Department Incident Commanders are directed to initiate
actions and remain in control AS LONG as a threat to life and property exists.
Once the incident is stabilized (safe), the responsible parties will assume cleanup
and removal functions.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
411 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Cleanup Procedures
All costs associated with cleanup and removal is the responsibility of the product
owner and/or handler. Cleanup of abandoned materials on private property is the
responsibility of the property owner.
The Fire Department Incident Commander will request dispatchers to notify the
Office of Emergency Services (OES) when products have been abandoned or
there is no responsible party. Notification to OES is the first step in applying for
State cleanup funds. Incident Commanders must provide specific spill information
to the dispatchers.
Fire Department dispatchers will be following specific procedures for notifying the
OES City Health Department and other necessary resources. Fire Department
Incident Commanders will be required to supply all required scene information to
ensure compliance with City and State mandates.
Containment resources may be required from Public Service; i.e., skip loaders,
clay and sand, barricades, et cetera. The Fire Department Incident Commander
should not hesitate to secure the services of Public Service and/or private
resources when a life-threatening situation exists.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
412 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.6 EQUIPMENT ISSUE
7.6.1 ISSUANCE & MAINTENANCE OF RADIOS
Issuing Police Radios
Employees who desire to check out a hand held radio shall exchange their metal
tags imprinted with their photo number for the radio. Watch I shall use RED metal
tags, Watch II GREEN metal tags, and Watch III BLUE metal tags. The metal tag
shall be placed on a tag board matching the issue number of the radio. When the
radio is returned, the metal tag shall be returned to the individual who checked out
the radio. In the radio is returned, the metal tag shall be returned to the individual
who checked the radio out. In the even an employee is unable to locate the
appropriate tag, the paper sign-out system will be used.
Employees shall receive one radio per person. All radios shall be returned to the
Issue Room at the end of watch.
Maintenance & Care
Defective or malfunctioning radios shall be reported to the Issue Room. The Issue
Room shall forward the information and the radio to the Public Service Bureau,
Electronics Systems, for repair and/or maintenance.
Radios requiring repair shall be delivered to Electronic Systems each workday.
Repaired radios shall be returned to the Issue Room.
Lost or Damaged Radios
Lost, stolen, or damaged radios shall be reported to the employee’s supervisor as
soon as possible. The supervisor shall determine whether the damage was the
result of negligence or carelessness on the part of the employee. The supervisor
shall ensure that a lost or stolen report is completed. A copy of the supervisor’s
report and a copy of the lost or stolen report shall be forwarded to the Patrol
Bureau.
In the event that the loss or damage of the radio was a direct result of negligence
on the part of the employee, replacement of the radio shall be at the employee’s
expense.
Radios Not in the Physical Control of the Issue Room
Details that maintain separate radios on a permanent basis shall implement their
own issue and maintenance policy. Each Bureau, however, shall be subject to an
inventory audit performed by the Budget Section, a minimum of three times per
year.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
413 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Patrol Watch I & III
The Issue Room shall notify the Watch Commander when assistance is required.
7.6.2 SHOTGUNS
Revised November 16, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The Support Bureau has audit responsibility.
The Long Beach Police Pistol Range (Pistol Range) is responsible for issuing
shotguns to each Division. The approved shotgun for the Long Beach Police
Department is a Remington, 12-gauge, Model 870 Wingmaster Pump. Only
shotguns issued by the Pistol Range may be deployed. Shotguns issued by the
Pistol Range may not be modified without the approval of the Range Master.
Shotguns shall be permanently placed in black and white police vehicles. Officers
will confirm that the shotgun is locked in the shotgun rack. If a black and white
vehicle is without a shotgun, a new shotgun shall be obtained from the issue room.
If a vehicle is left unattended, officers will ensure that the vehicle is locked and that
the shotgun is locked in the shotgun rack.
In the event a vehicle must be towed, the shotgun will be removed from the vehicle
and returned to the division issue room or shotgun locker.
7.6.2.1 PRE-SHIFT SHOTGUN INSPECTION
Revised November 16, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
Prior to going into service, or as soon as practical, officers will inspect the shotgun
assigned to them for their shift to determine if the shotgun is ready for deployment.
Officers shall not complete shotgun inspections while seated in a vehicle.
If the shotgun requires cleaning or repairs, officers shall return the shotgun to the
division issue room or shotgun locker, tag the shotgun noting any issues, notify the
division administrative officer, and checkout another shotgun.
7.6.2.2 SHOTGUN LOADING AND UNLOADING
Revised November 16, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
Officers shall not load or unload shotguns while seated in a vehicle. The shotgun
shall be unloaded from the loading port only. Officers will unload the shotgun using
current approved unloading procedures. Officers shall not unload shotguns by
repeatedly racking the slide.
7.6.2.3 INSPECTION OF EXISTING AMMUNITION
Revised November 16, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department EMERGENCY OPERATIONS - CRITICAL INCIDENTS
414 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Prior to going into service, or as soon as practical, officers will inspect their shotgun
ammunition. If there is any wear on the lip of the brass, the round shall be replaced
with a new round. The division administrative officer will ensure that worn rounds
are returned to the Range for replacement.
7.6.2.4 ROTATION OF SHOTGUN AMMUNITION
Revised November 16, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
Shotgun ammunition will be replaced during each Division’s designated
maintenance period and returned to the Pistol Range. Rotation of Division
ammunition will be managed by the Division Commander.
7.6.2.5 INVENTORY AND MAINTENANCE
Revised November 16, 2016
Reviewed January 2020
The Pistol Range shall be responsible for annual maintenance and inventory of all
Department owned shotguns, with the exception of SWAT shotguns. A
maintenance log shall be kept detailing all work completed on the shotguns. All
shotgun maintenance will be done at the Pistol Range by Range staff.
Each division shall rotate their patrol shotguns through the Pistol Range following
the schedule below.
South Division January – March
West Division April – June
East Division July – September
North Division October – December
Investigations Bureau January – June
Support Bureau July – December
Field Support July - December
Each Division Commander will be responsible for ensuring that division shotguns
are brought to the Range for maintenance and then returned to the division.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT
415 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.7 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT (PSDU)
7.7.1 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT PURPOSE AND SCOPE
Revised April 14, 2015
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
The PSDU was established to supplement police services to the community.
Highly skilled and trained teams of handlers and canines are used to assist police
operations to locate individuals and contraband, and to apprehend criminal
offenders.
7.7.1.1 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT FUNCTION
Revised April 14, 2015
The PSDU operates as a support police unit, and provides the following general
and specialized law enforcement services:
a) Searches for missing persons, suspects, and evidence
b) General patrol functions
c) Crowd control
d) Specialized security assignments
e) Public relations appearances and demonstrations
f) SWAT activations and other activities as may be deemed appropriate by
the Department
g) Assists other agencies
h) Detection of narcotics, dangerous drugs, explosives, and firearms
7.7.1.2 POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT DISPATCH
Revised April 14, 2015
A PSDU operates as a one officer patrol unit and should be dispatched according
to those procedures.
7.7.2 POLICE SERVICE DOG (PSD) DEPLOYMENT
Revised April 14, 2015
The prompt and proper utilization of a trained PSD has proven to be a valuable
resource in law enforcement. A PSD greatly increases the degree of safety to
citizens within a contained search area, enhances individual officer safety,
significantly increases the likelihood of suspect apprehension, and dramatically
reduces the amount of time necessary to conduct a search. The decision to use a
PSD in accordance with this policy shall be deemed an act of discretion and shall
be reviewed in light of information reasonably available to the officer(s) at the time
the decision was made.
7.7.2.1 DEPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Revised April 14, 2015
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT
416 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Prior to the deployment of a PSD to search for, or apprehend any individual, the
handler and/or supervisor at the scene shall carefully consider all pertinent
information reasonably available at the time. This information shall include, but is
not limited to:
a) The nature and severity of the suspected offense
b) Potential danger to the public that may result from the release of a PSD
c) Potential risk to the suspect(s)
In all instances, a field supervisor shall be notified of an incident when a PSD has
been requested. When feasible, a PSDU should respond to the Incident
Commander’s location for briefing prior to deployment.
In all cases where cover officers are assigned to assist with a PSD search, the
cover officer(s) shall remain with the handler, unless directed otherwise by the
handler.
The PSD handler will determine the search tactics to be utilized and coordinate the
deployment of assisting officers. The final decision to deploy a PSD shall rest with
the handler; however, an Incident Commander or Supervisor may order a PSD not
to deploy.
A PSD may be used to apprehend an individual if any of the following conditions
exist:
a) The handler reasonably believes that the individual has either committed or
has threatened to commit any felony or violent misdemeanor offense
b) There is a reasonable belief that the individual poses an immediate threat of
violence or serious harm to the public or any officer
c) The individual is physically resisting or is threatening to resist arrest and the
use of a PSD appears necessary to overcome such resistance
d) The individual is believed to be concealed in an area where entry by other than
a PSD would pose a threat to the safety of officers or the public
e) Searches for suspects wanted for grand theft auto shall be limited to those
who are reasonably believed to be adults, and are reasonably believed to be
the driver of a confirmed stolen vehicle; known passengers, absent
extenuating circumstances, should not be searched for with the use of a PSD
f) Searches for juvenile offenders, whether or not the subject is believed to be
armed, shall be limited to those instances where the severity of the crime, the
subject’s age, propensity for violence or other factors, would reasonably justify
the use of a PSD search team; an on-scene field supervisor must first
authorize the use of a PSD on a known juvenile
7.7.2.2 ANNOUNCEMENTS
Revised April 14, 2015
A clear, loud and audible verbal search announcement followed by a reasonable
period of compliance shall precede the release of any PSD. When appropriate and
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT
417 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
when resources are available, the announcement will be made in accordance with
the City of Long Beach Language Access Policy.
When feasible, PSDU personnel will drive the perimeter of an incident and make
a PSD search announcement utilizing the public address system of their police
vehicle. The use of stationary vehicles’ public address systems and the
helicopter’s public address system may also be used.
7.7.2.3 ANNOUNCEMENT EXCEPTION
Revised April 14, 2015
When conducting searches for suspects believed to be armed, concerns for the
safety of search personnel may dictate that a PSD search announcement not be
made. Any exception to this announcement policy must be fully justified by
conditions and circumstances in a specific incident that create officer or public
safety concerns exceeding those that may typically be associated with PSD
deployment operations.
The decision not to make a PSD search announcement must be approved by the
Incident Commander.
7.7.3 POLICE SERVICE DOG CONTACTS AND INVESTIGATIONS
Revised April 14, 2015
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
A PSD contact is defined as any occasion where a PSD bites any person, or is the
proximate cause of any injury to a person outside of a training environment.
In situations where a PSD finds and contacts a suspect, the handler will call off the
PSD at the first reasonable moment the PSD can be safely released. When
deciding to call off the PSD, particular attention must be given to the perceived
threat or actual resistance presented by the suspect.
7.7.3.1 PSDU HANDLER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised April 14, 2015
If a PSD contact occurs, the PSD handler will ensure the subject receives medical
treatment. The PSDU handler will request the PSDU Sergeant or their designee to
respond to the incident.
Prior to going off duty, the PSD handler shall complete all necessary reports
associated with the deployment of a PSD when appropriate. The reports shall
include:
a) The circumstances surrounding the deployment and contact by the PSD
b) Method of announcements
c) The justification for not making a PSD search announcement, if an
announcement is not conducted
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT
418 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
d) The duration of the PSD contact with a suspect
e) The name of the involved field supervisor and Watch Commander
f) The PSD handler will advise assisting officers to make reference to the
supplemental report(s) written by the PSD handler in their report and advise
assisting officer they are not to describe PSD contact incidents in their
respective reports
7.7.3.2 PSDU SERGEANT RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised April 14, 2015
After notification of a PSD contact, the PSDU Sergeant, or their designee, will
immediately respond to the incident and conduct a use of force investigation. All
other UOF policies and requirements apply to PSD contacts. For further
information see 7.1.2 USE OF FORCE.
The PSDU Sergeant will track all PSD contacts and monitor the PSDU's contact
ratio.
7.7.3.3 ASSISTANCE TO OTHER AGENCIES
Revised April 14, 2015
The Watch Commander or an on-duty lieutenant is authorized to approve requests
from outside agencies for assistance from the PSDU. In all situations involving the
deployment of a Long Beach PSDU for another jurisdiction, Long Beach Police
Department deployment policies shall apply.
7.7.4 USE OF A POLICE SERVICE DOG TEAM FROM OUTSIDE
AGENCY
Revised April 14, 2015
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
The deployment policies, training, and experience of PSD teams from outside
agencies can vary significantly. Similarly, deployment and force policies of other
departments can differ from our own. The use of PSDs from other agencies should
only be requested when Long Beach PSDs are unavailable, or fully committed.
When circumstances dictate the need to utilize a PSD from another agency, the
Watch Commander must approve the deployment of another agency’s PSD. Such
a deployment shall be consistent with Long Beach Police Department policy.
In situations where an outside agency PSD is used and a contact occurs, the
Watch Commander will be notified. The PSDU Sergeant, or designee, shall
respond and conduct an immediate follow-up investigation. Additionally, the PSDU
Sergeant, or designee, shall request the PSD Handler from the outside agency
prepare a detailed statement of facts to the Watch Commander explaining the
events. The ultimate responsibility to file the follow-up report is that of the PSDU
Sergeant or their designee.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department POLICE SERVICE DOG UNIT
419 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.7.5 MEDICAL CARE OF THE POLICE SERVICE DOG
Revised April 14, 2015
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
All medical attention shall be rendered by the designated PSD veterinarian, except
during an emergency as provide in section 7.8.5.2 EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE
OF THE POLICE SERVICE DOG. The PSD handler will direct a memorandum to
the PSD Sergeant articulating the circumstances surrounding the need for medical
attention and the treatment received.
7.7.5.1 NON-EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE OF THE POLICE SERVICE
DOG
Revised April 14, 2015
If a PSD is unfit for duty because of illness or injury, the assigned officer will inform
the PSDU Sergeant as soon as practical. Unless otherwise directed, the officer
will report to the PSDU Sergeant, or designee, for assignment.
7.7.5.2 EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE OF THE POLICE SERVICE DOG
Revised April 14, 2015
The PSD handler will notify the PSDU Sergeant as soon as practical when
emergency medical care for the PSD is required.
Depending on the severity of the injury or illness, the PSD shall either be treated
by the designated PSD veterinarian or transported to a designated emergency
medical facility for treatment. If the PSD handler and PSD are out of the area, the
handler may use the nearest available veterinarian.
7.7.6 PSDU - TRAINING
Revised April 14, 2015
The Patrol Bureau will have audit responsibility.
Before assignment in the field, each PSDU shall be trained and certified to meet
current POST guidelines.
The PSDU Sergeant shall be responsible for scheduling periodic training for all
department personnel in order to familiarize them with how to conduct themselves
in the presence of department PSDs.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
420 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.8 BODY WORN CAMERA (BWC)
Revised March 25, 2021
The Patrol Bureau shall review this policy on a two year cycle.
Reviewed March 25, 2021
7.8.1 PURPOSE
Revised July 20, 2018
The Administration Bureau has audit responsibility.
This document establishes policy for employees using Body Worn Cameras
(BWCs) and for preserving and reviewing digital media obtained from BWCs during
the deployment plan.
As part of the BWC deployment plan, Department stakeholders and the Long
Beach Police Officers Association will meet no less than one time per quarter. At
the conclusion of the deployment plan, a debriefing with these same groups will be
conducted to evaluate program effectiveness.
7.8.2 OBJECTIVES
Revised July 20, 2018
Cameras provide additional documentation of police encounters with the public
and may be an important tool for collecting evidence and maintaining the public’s
trust. However, video cannot always show the full story nor does it capture an
entire scene. Digital evidence may capture a less broad and less detailed image
than the totality of the human senses. An officer’s recollection and perception of
specific details may differ from what is captured in digital evidence. The use of
cameras does not replace or reduce the requirement to provide thorough written
documentation. Persons reviewing recordings must also be cautious before
reaching conclusions about what the video appears to show.
7.8.3 DEFINITIONS
Revised July 20, 2018
Activate – Manually switch the BWC device from buffering mode to event mode
by double pressing the event button in order to start permanently recording audio
and digital media.
Automatic Activation Triggers – A feature that initiates a BWC recording
through Bluetooth technology.
Body Worn Camera (BWC) – A camera worn by an individual employee that
records and stores audio and video.
Buffering Mode – The BWC continuously loops a video recording for up to 60
seconds before the recording is started by the officer. While buffering, video only
(no audio) is being recorded.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
421 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Deactivate – Manually stop the BWC device by pressing and holding the event
button, which halts recording of audio and digital media and returns the device to
buffering mode.
Digital Evidence – Photographs, audio records and video footage captured by a
BWC device and stored digitally.
Digital Evidence Management System – A technological solution (i.e.
Evidence.com), which stores digitally encrypted data accessible to personnel
based on security clearance.
Docking – The process by which an employee places a BWC into a network
attached data transfer device, which causes videos recorded onto the BWC to be
uploaded to the Digital Evidence Management System, the BWC battery to charge
and the firmware to update.
Evidence.com – An online, cloud-based digital media storage repository. All
media is stored in a highly secure environment, accessible only by authorized
personnel.
Metadata – DR numbers, CAD call numbers, GPS, and other descriptors used to
identify digital evidence.
7.8.4 BWC USAGE
Revised March 25, 2021
1) Officer safety takes precedence over camera activation.
2) Only personnel trained by the Long Beach Police Department shall receive
a BWC device.
3) Every officer issued a BWC shall take the device into the field during each
work shift, absent the exceptions listed in Item #10.
4) BWC equipment is for official use only and shall not be utilized for personal
use.
5) Personally purchased or aquired BWC devices are not authorized.
6) All digital evidence collected using the BWC is considered property of the
Long Beach Police Department and for official use only.
7) All requests for digital evidence by the public will be handled in accordance
with Public Records Act laws. This does not preclude supervisors and
detectives from showing digital evidence to the public to further an
investigation or investigate a personnel complaint in accordance with
applicable law.
8) Accessing, copying, forwarding, or releasing any digital evidence for other
than official Police Department use is prohibited. Personal computer
equipment and software programs shall not be used to make copies of digital
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
422 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
evidence. Exceptions may be made when done for training purposes and with
appropriate Divisional Commander’s approval.
9) All officers wearing BWCs shall understand there is normally no expectation
of privacy on information obtained through proper use of the BWC, and that
the digital evidence is subject to inspection at any time and without prior
permission of the officer. However, some circumstances may involve an
inherent expectation of privacy, such as those situations listed in § 7.8.4.3
WHEN NOT TO RECORD.
10) If a BWC device or component is damaged, defective, lost or stolen, the user
shall contact a supervisor as soon as possible and note the malfunction in
their unit history. The officer’s supervisor shall facilitate a replacement BWC
as soon as practical.
11) Officers shall note in any associated police report(s) whether a recordable
incident was or was not recorded on their BWC device and if the recording
was reviewed prior to writing the report.
7.8.4.1 NORMAL BWC FIELD USE
Revised July 20, 2018
A) Camera position – Officers shall wear the BWC according to manufacturer
recommendations. Officers shall attach the BWC in a manner approved by
the Department.
B) Citizen advisement – If asked, officers should advise citizens they are being
recorded. Exceptions may be made for investigative reasons.
C) Citizen demands – Officers shall not initiate or cease recording an event,
situation, or circumstance solely at the demand of a citizen.
D) Camera set-up and maintenance – Officers shall complete the following
equipment test at the start of each shift and prior to deploying the BWC:
• Confirm they are using their assigned BWC;
• Visually and physically inspect the device to ensure it is fully charged
and operational.
E) Conclusion of shift – Each officer should place their assigned BWC in the
docking station at the end of each shift.
7.8.4.2 BWC RECORDING
Revised July 11, 2018
See also Special Order – BWC Recording 5/24/21
Officers equipped with a BWC shall activate their camera during enforcement
related contacts whether self-initiated or in response to a dispatch call. If
immediate activation of the BWC is not feasible, officers shall activate the BWC as
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
423 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
soon as safe to do so. The BWC shall remain activated until the contact has
reasonably concluded or the activity moves into an area restricted by § 7.8.4.3
WHEN NOT TO RECORD. If the enforcement contact resumes, the officer shall
re-activate the BWC and continue recording.
Should it become necessary to stop recording during any enforcement related
contact, officers should verbally articulate on the recording the reasons for turning
off the camera before discontinuing the video.
A) Enforcement related contacts – Unless mitigating circumstances are
present, officers shall record enforcement related contacts including but not
limited to the following:
1) Traffic stops
2) Traffic collisions
3) Subject stops
4) Detentions
5) Arrests – Officers may stop recording when the arrestee is cooperative
and safely secured inside a police car or law enforcement facility. If an
arrestee becomes uncooperative, or if there is some evidentiary
purpose, officers shall resume recording.
6) Searches – Officers shall record their actions during the execution of a
search warrant, an arrest, a consent search, or other lawful search in
which the officer is looking for evidence or contraband. (excluding strip
searches – refer to LBPD Manual § 7.8.4.3 (7) WHEN NOT TO
RECORD) When the scene is secured, the recording may be stopped.
A supervisor may use discretion when determining whether or not BWC
equipped officers shall record the service of a warrant. (Revised per
Special Order – Body Worn Camera Recording signed 5/24/21).
7) Crimes in progress – Officers actively engaged in the apprehension of
a suspect during an incident shall activate their BWC. Officers should
begin recording prior to arrival on scene.
8) Demonstrations, protests, unlawful assemblies.
9) Consensual encounters – Recording shall begin at the point when the
officer believes the encounter may transition into a detention.
10) Other – Officers shall record incidents where they are assisting other
City employees or law enforcement officers engaged in an enforcement
related contact. If a dispute arises related to filming, the involved officer
shall notify a supervisor.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
424 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
B) Interviews – Victim and witness interviews may be recorded. Suspect
interviews shall be recorded absent extenuating circumstances. If a situation
exists where a suspect interview cannot be recorded, a supervisor will be
notified and the circumstances will be documented in accordance with LBPD
Manual § 7.8.4.12 BWC REPORTING REQUIREMENTS.
C) Personnel complaints – Supervisors handling personnel complaints should
record interviews with the public. Interviews involving Department personnel
shall follow Internal Affairs protocol.
D) Other circumstances – Officers may record any other legitimate law
enforcement contact where he or she believes that a recording would be
appropriate.
7.8.4.3 WHEN NOT TO RECORD
Revised July 20, 2018
Unless there is a clear and valid law enforcement purpose, BWCs shall not be
used:
1) To record non-work related activity.
2) In areas where there is a reasonable expectation of privacy, such as private
discussions or conversations, locker rooms, restrooms, or breakrooms.
3) Within police facilities.
4) During Internal Affairs interviews.
5) To record persons who have exposed areas of the body that could cause
embarrassment or humiliation to those being recorded, such as an exposed
breast, groin, etc.
6) Where an officer believes that the use of a BWC would impede or limit the
cooperation of a victim, witness or suspect during an investigative contact. If
a situation exists where a suspect interview cannot be recorded, a supervisor
will be notified and the circumstances will be documented, per LBPD Manual
§ 7.8.4.12 BWC REPORTING REQUIREMENTS.
7) BWCs shall not be used during strip searches under any circumstances.
7.8.4.4 AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION FEATURES
Revised July 20, 2018
Automatic activation, also known as automatic activation triggers or signals, is a
feature that initiates a BWC recording through Bluetooth technology. Automatic
video activation features shall be employed to automate BWC recording at the
direction of the Chief of Police or his or her designee.
Axon offers the following automatic activation features:
1) Axon Signal Vehicle – An in-vehicle product that activates the BWC by
certain in-vehicle events, such as turning on the light bar, opening a door, or
releasing the shotgun/rifle lock.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
425 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2) Signal Performance Power Magazine – An accessory for the TASER X26P
that can activate a BWC when the X26P is armed.
3) Axon Signal Sidearm – A duty-gun holster accessory that can activate a
BWC when an officer’s weapon is drawn.
NOTE: These features are not currently deployed at the time of publishing this
policy, the Department anticipates enabling these features within 12 months.
7.8.4.5 MOBILE DEVICE APPLICATIONS AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE
Revised July 20, 2018
1) Axon Capture – A mobile device application that sends digital evidence to
Evidence.com from the field. Axon Capture uses smartphone capabilities to
import photo, video, and audio recordings directly into Evidence.com.
2) Axon View – Allows officers to view a list of all videos stored on the device
in order to review and add associated metadata. Axon View also allows for
in-field viewing of recorded videos, and live-stream viewing from the device.
3) Evidence Sync – Computer software that allows an officer to view video and
priority upload a single incident to Evidence.com. It also allows for adding
associated metadata.
7.8.4.6 ENTERING METADATA
Revised July 20, 2018
Each recorded segment requires the entry of metadata, even if the segments are
of the same event. Metadata should normally be added by CAD integration. In
cases of a technology malfunction, metadata should be added as soon as possible
by the officer wearing the BWC.
7.8.4.7 RETENTION OF DIGITAL EVIDENCE
Revised July 20, 2018
All recordings related to a criminal proceeding, filed claim, pending litigation or
personnel complaint shall be preserved in accordance with the law. All recordings
not governed by legal statute shall be retained for one year.
7.8.4.8 REVIEWING IMPOUNDED DIGITAL EVIDENCE
Revised July 20, 2018
1) Officers may review their own recordings and recordings of other employees
in which they appear or could have been heard.
2) Personnel may review recordings when relevant to their investigation.
3) Officers may review digital evidence prior to completing reports to ensure
accuracy.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
426 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
a) Digital evidence capturing an officer-involved shooting or in-custody death
may be reviewed by involved employees prior to the initial investigation at
the scene and after obtaining approval from the Homicide Detail.
Exceptions to this include situations with exigent circumstances (e.g. to
help identify a suspect involved in an officer-involved shooting who has
fled the scene).
4) Officers should review digital evidence prior to providing testimony at
hearings, trial, or depositions.
5) Supervisors and management may review and use digital evidence for
administrative purposes limited to the following:
a) Death or injury of a Department employee,
b) Use of force,
c) In-custody death,
d) Police pursuit,
e) Officer-involved shooting,
f) Personnel investigations,
g) Prior to the release of a recording in response to a proper legal request
(e.g., in response to a subpoena, court order, or Public Records Act
Request).
h) Field Training Officers and program administrators shall have full access
to the recordings of their trainees during the period of their assignment to
the FTO program, and may use that information to correct field practices.
When an incident is recorded which may be of value as a training aide for
the Department, the appropriate Divisional Commander will approve the
use of the video.
i) It is not the intent of the Department to review BWC footage for the sole
purpose of discovering general policy violations. However, if an employee
believes they have identified potential misconduct during the normal
course of an investigative or supervisory review of video, that employee
shall report the perceived misconduct to the observed employee’s
supervisor.
Supervisors should handle minor infractions of policy or procedure as a
training issue and should use the opportunity to counsel employees to
ensure no future violations occur. Serious offenses that could result in
formal discipline, or repeated violations should be handled in accordance
with existing Department policy addressing misconduct.
j) Other situations where there is a need to review digital evidence not
covered by this procedure, the officer’s Divisional Commander must
approve the request. Each situation will be evaluated on a case by case
basis.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
427 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.8.4.9 DELETION OF RECORDINGS
Revised July 20, 2018
1) A Department employee may request a recording deletion for the following
reasons:
• Unintentional activation,
• Tactically sensitive recording,
• Medically sensitive recording,
• Recordings of undercover officers or confidential informants,
• Other recordings that are not within the objectives of the BWC program,
and are not governed by legal statute.
2) A memorandum detailing the circumstances of the recording will be
forwarded via the chain of command to the officer’s Divisional Commander.
The approved memorandum will be forwarded to the BWC Program
Administrator. The BWC Program Administrator shall facilitate the actual
removal of any record approved for deletion. The BWC Program
Administrator shall maintain a record of the approved request.
3) Deletion of video recordings of sensitive content (full or partial nudity)
unrelated to a law enforcement contact may be expedited under the following
protocol:
• An email requesting deletion is sent to PD-BWCHelp@longbeach.gov
providing details of the incident, including who recorded the video, as well
as the time and date of the recording.
• The video is confirmed to contain employee sensitive content.
• A record of the deletion is appropriately logged by the BWC office.
Video requested for deletion that also contains footage believed to have
investigative or administrative value will not be deleted but will be marked
“restricted” to prevent unnecessary viewing.
Restricted video requested for disclosure through litigation or PRA requests will be
appropriately redacted of all sensitive content before release.
7.8.4.10 BWC PROGRAM ADMINISTRATOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised July 20, 2018
The BWC Administrator is the Information Technology Lieutenant. The BWC
Administrator is responsible for training as required, maintaining records, ensuring
proper performance of equipment, and overseeing program performance reviews.
The BWC Administrator is responsible for adding triggers for deployment in the
field at the direction of the Chief of Police or his or her designee. The BWC
Administrator shall advise all BWC officers prior to incorporating new automatic
features.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department BODY WORN CAMERA
428 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.8.4.11 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised July 20, 2018
Supervisors of BWC personnel shall conduct at least one random supervisor
review per week. Supervisor review results will be completed on a BWC Review
Form provided by the Records Division. Each Division will submit their
performance review forms to the Patrol and Administration Bureaus for review.
7.8.4.12 BWC REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
Revised July 20, 2018
All BWC recordings shall be identified in a Department report or in the recording
officer’s call history. The phrase “PD#BWC” shall be typed on the first line of an
ARS narrative if a report is taken, or as a miscellaneous note in the call history if
no report is taken. If the contact results in a citation only, with no narrative, then
the officer shall write “PD#BWC” in the notes section on the rear of the citation.
If a recording is not made or is initiated late during an enforcement related contact,
officers shall notify a supervisor and document in a police report why the recording
was not made or late. The first line of the officer’s report narrative shall include the
phrase “PD#LateBWC”. If no police report is required, officers shall notify a
supervisor, and note in their call history the phrase “PD#LateBWC” along with an
explanation as to why the recording was not made or late.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
429 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
8 INVESTIGATIONS
8.1 INVESTIGATIONS
8.1.1 LETTERS TO VICTIMS OF CRIMES
Due to the nature of the crimes and the investigative techniques used in
processing, victims of the following crimes will NOT receive a disposition letter:
• Homicide/Dead Body
• Sexual assault
• Traffic Collision/hit and run
• Forgery/fraud check cases
• Petty theft drive-outs
• Cases where the victim is a government agency
• Cases where sworn officers are victims
• Unfounded cases
• Refusal to prosecute
There will be other cases that because of their nature or special circumstances,
the available disposition letters will not apply and a disposition letter will not be
sent.
Disposition Letter Guidelines
There are 21 disposition letters available to victims of crime. These letters are
programmed into the computer as part of the PSIS system. The letters will be
printed as a part of the computer programming developed under the Management
of Criminal Investigations (MCI). The letters will be generated at the time the
investigator-assigned update function is performed in the individual investigative
detail. A letter will be mailed from the City mailroom.
The following method will be used to assure that the appropriate victims of crime
receive a disposition letter:
Cases that are NOT Assigned for Follow-Up Investigation
A letter (N) will automatically be generated on all cases with little or no solvability
factors present. This will be determined in each, respective, investigative Detail.
Cases that are Assigned for Follow-up Investigation
The investigative detail assigned will perform the investigator-assigned update
function. When an investigator is assigned to a case, a letter will be generated to
the victim informing him/her that the case has been assigned. When the
investigator concludes the investigation and a disposition, a second letter will be
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
430 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
generated advising the victim of the outcome. It will be the responsibility of the
assigned investigator to indicate on the case disposition sheet the specific letter to
be sent.
Available Letters/Computer Codes
The following is a list of current letters available, the appropriate computer code,
and the intended use:
Letter Code Use
A Auto Theft (Insufficient evidence to continue investigation)
B Case not assigned (no solvability factor)
C Case has been assigned to the Fire Prevention Bureau
D Case has been assigned to the Burglary Detail
E Case has been assigned to the Auto Theft Detail
G Case has been assigned to the Forgery Detail
H Case has been assigned to the Robbery Detail
I Case has been assigned to the Homicide Detail
J Case has been assigned to the Gangs/Violent Crimes Detail
K Case has been assigned to the Sex Crimes Detail
L Case has been assigned to the Career Criminal Apprehension Team (C-
CAT)
M Case has been assigned to the Juvenile Division
N Case has been suspended
O Case rejected by the District Attorney
P Case filed by the District Attorney
Q Case filed by the City Prosecutor
R Case rejected by the City Prosecutor
S Juvenile referred to the Probation Department
T Juvenile recovered property
U Case has been assigned to the Fraud Detail
V Information Management Division boat/vehicle reported stolen or missing
The appropriate investigative Detail, after review by the Detail Sergeant, will
perform the investigator not-assigned update function and enter the proper letter
code (B) causing a letter to be mailed.
8.1.2 POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS
Juveniles (Persons under 18 years of age)
Juvenile will NOT be administered a polygraph examination unless all of the
following conditions are met:
• Subject agrees to a polygraph
• Written permission has been obtained from the parent or legal guardian
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
431 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• A properly executed request for polygraph examination form has been
submitted and approved
• All reports and current investigative information have been submitted to the
polygraph examiner to gain information during questioning in the polygraph
examination
Adults
Adults may be administered a polygraph examination when:
• Subject agrees to a polygraph
• A properly executed request form for polygraph examination has been
submitted and approved
• All available reports and current investigative information shall be submitted to
the polygraph examiner. These reports are used by the polygraph examiner to
gain information during questioning in the polygraph examination
The polygraph examination technique is used by this Department as an
investigative aid and should not be used as a substitute for investigation.
When used under proper conditions, the polygraph examination technique is
considered to be about 96% accurate. There are, however, some very serious
limitations that could adversely affect the result of a polygraph examination. Some
of these limitations exist when the following conditions are present:
• Individuals with know or apparent psychiatric disorders
• Individuals suffering from lung or respiratory illness
• Individuals who are under the care of a doctor or who are taking large or
multiple daily medications
• Individuals who are suffering from epilepsy and taking Phenobarbital and
Dilantin medications
• Individuals with any type of heart problem
• Individuals who are considered to be slow or having a very low IQ
• Individuals who are deaf or who have an acute hearing loss
Other individuals considered unfit polygraph subjects at the time of the scheduled
examination, are individuals who are:
• Under the influence of drugs or alcohol
• Physically ill
• Pregnant
• Extremely overweight
• Without sleep or physically exhausted
• Emotionally distraught
• Subjected to long periods of interrogation
• Not fluent in the English language
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
432 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.1.3 U-VISA PROGRAM
Revised November 4, 2021
The Investigations Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed November 4, 2021
The Victims of Trafficking and Violence Protection Act (VTVPA) establishes the U-
Visa Program which does not mandate or require local law enforcement agencies
participation. However, the Long Beach Police Department opts to partner with
United States Customs and Immigration Services (USCIS) as a U-Visa certifying
agency.
The U-Visa program provides temporary legal status to individuals without lawful
immigration status who are victims of certain qualifying crimes and who assist or
will assist law enforcement with the investigation or prosecution of such criminal
activity.
8.1.3.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised November 4, 2021
U non-immigrant status (U-Visa) – Victims of certain crimes helpful to law
enforcement in the investigations or prosecution of criminal activity.
8.1.3.2 CERTIFICATION
Revised November 4, 2021
U-Visa applicants (petitioners) are required to include the U-Visa Non-Immigrant
Status Certification (Form I-918, Supplement B), which is a certification of
helpfulness from a certifying agency. California Penal Code (CPC) § 679.10 states
that upon request, a certifying official signing the form is certifying that the
petitioner meets the following criteria:
• Has been a victim of a qualifying crime listed on the Department of
Homeland Security’s U-Visa Immigration Relief for Victims of Certain
Crimes: An Overview for Law Enforcement.
• Possesses specific knowledge and detail(s) regarding the criminal activity.
• Has been, is being, or will likely be helpful to law enforcement in the
detection, investigation, or prosecution of the qualifying crime.
For the purposes of determining helpfulness pursuant to CPC § 679.10(h), there
is a rebuttable presumption that a victim is helpful, has been helpful, or is likely to
be helpful to the detection or investigation or prosecution of that qualifying criminal
activity.
Per USCIS guidelines, the department may choose to conduct a criminal
background check on the petitioner and document the findings on the I-918
Supplement B. A criminal history does not automatically render a victim ineligible.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
433 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Victims’ have an ongoing responsibility to assist the certifying agency while in U
non-immigrant status. If a victim fails to assist with reasonable requests, the
victim’s U non-immigrant certification can be disavowed by a certifying agency by
emailing LawEnforcement_UTVAWA.VSC@USCIS.dhs.gov.
The department shall process a U-Visa Non-Immigrant Status Certification within
30 days of the request. If the petitioner is in removal proceedings, the certification
shall be processed within 7 days of the request.
8.1.3.3 CERTIFYING OFFICIAL
Revised November 4, 2021
The Chief of Police has the authority to delegate signing authority to supervisors
who will act on his behalf to sign Form I-918B as a certifying official. Any supervisor
acting as a certifying official shall have their name and signature on file with USCIS
and all approved petitions shall be signed in non-black ink.
USCIS guidelines require a letterhead signed by the Chief of Police and emailed
to LawEnforcement_UTVAWA.VSC@USCIS.dhs.gov to add or remove any
certifying official.
8.1.3.4 TRACKING
Revised November 4, 2021
Pursuant to CPC § 679.10(l), certifying agencies receiving requests for Form I-
918, Supplement B certification shall report annually to the State Legislature the
following information:
1) The number of petitioners that requested Form I-918 Supplement B
certification from the agency,
2) The number of those certification forms that were approved, and
3) The number of those certification forms that were denied.
Records Division will be responsible for the tracking and reporting of the noted
statistics.
8.1.4 CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS INTERCEPTION
TECHNOLOGY
Revised March 17, 2022
The Investigations Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year cycle.
Reviewed March 17, 2022
Cellular Communications Interception Technology (CCIT) is defined as any device
that intercepts mobile telephony calling information or content, including an
international mobile subscriber identity catcher or other virtual base transceiver
station that masquerades as a cellular station and logs mobile telephony calling
information (California Government Code §53166).
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
434 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.1.4.1 AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL
Revised March 17, 2022
The CCIT shall only be accessed and operated by LBPD detectives authorized by
the Special Investigations Division Commander and who have attended the
requisite training as prescribed by the manufacturer.
8.1.4.2 DEPLOYMENT
Revised March 17, 2022
Use of the CCIT must be approved by the Sergeant of the Career Criminal
Apprehension Team (CCAT) or by their chain of command prior to deployment,
with notification to the Robbery-Homicide Lieutenant by the CCAT Sergeant. Prior
to approval, the CCIT operator shall ensure the use of the equipment will be in
support of a public safety operation in the furtherance of protecting human life
(e.g., missing person) or a criminal investigation, and shall not be utilized unless:
• A search warrant is obtained, or
• An exigent request form is submitted with a telephone/telecommunications
company.
In all cases where the CCIT is deployed, the authorized operator shall complete a
CCIT deployment form. The form shall be signed by the operator responsible for
the operation, the CCAT Sergeant who approved the operation, the Robbery –
Homicide Lieutenant, and the Commander of the Special Investigations Division.
Upon completion of the review and signature process, the form will be retained in
the CCIT deployment file and stored with the Special Investigations Division
Commander.
Requests from another law enforcement agency to assist them with the use of the
CCIT shall only be approved if it meets Long Beach Police Department policy and
legal statute. CCIT deployment for another agency shall not take place until the
proper legal paperwork (i.e., search warrant or exigent request) has been provided
to the CCIT operator and approved by the Robbery – Homicide Lieutenant, or their
designee.
The CCIT shall not be used for immigration enforcement purposes.
8.1.4.3 LEGAL PROCESS
Revised March 17, 2022
The Department is committed to ensuring the collection and retention of data is
lawful and respects the privacy interests of the public. Department employees
shall not collect, retain, or disseminate any data except as authorized by this policy
and by law. Consistent with applicable existing laws and requirements, including
any duty to preserve exculpatory evidence, the Department’s use of the CCIT shall
include the following privacy practices:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
435 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• When the CCIT is used to locate a known cellular device, all data must be
deleted as soon as that device is physically located and no less than once
daily.
• When the CCIT is used following a disaster, or in a search and rescue context,
all data must be deleted as soon as the person(s) in need of assistance has
been located, and no less than once every ten days.
• Prior to deploying the CCIT for any mission, the CCIT operator must verify the
equipment has been cleared of any previous operational data.
• When a suspect is known to have been in two separate geographically different
areas, any data collected to identify the cellular device shall be deleted upon
completion of the mission, unless the data collected is deemed to have
evidentiary value.
• Data collected by the CCIT, which is retained for the investigation, shall only
be shared with those involved within the investigation, or when ordered
produced as part of a legal compliance process.
In the event of a deployment under exigent circumstances, a search warrant shall
be obtained within three days of its use. The CCIT operator shall be responsible
for ensuring the legal paperwork is obtained.
8.1.4.4 SECURITY
Revised March 17, 2022
The CCIT equipment shall be secured and maintained in a locked LBPD facility
when not deployed. Access to the equipment shall only be allowed to authorized
personnel within the CCAT chain of command or those approved by the Special
Investigations Division Commander, or their designee.
8.1.4.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW
Revised March 17, 2022
The CCAT Sergeant is responsible for reviewing the usage of the CCIT, to ensure
exigent search warrants are obtained within three days, and ensuring the data
obtained is being deleted in compliance with this policy and the law. The review
shall take place no less than once every three months. The CCAT Sergeant will
document and submit the review to the Robbery - Homicide Section Lieutenant.
The review shall be forwarded to the SID Commander and the Deputy Chief of
Investigations for their review. The completed and signed review form shall be
retained by the Commander of the Special Investigations Division.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
436 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2 GANGS AND VIOLENT CRIMES (GVC) DIVISION
8.2.1 HOMICIDE DETAIL CALL-OUTS
The Investigations Bureau has audit responsibility.
Revised November 8, 2017
8.2.1.1 DEFINITIONS
Revised November 8, 2017
A) Officer involved shooting (OIS) – a firearms discharge from any person
employed by the City of Long Beach who is authorized by the City of Long
Beach to carry a firearm as part of their normal duties.
B) In-custody death (ICD) – a death which occurs at any point in time when a
person’s freedom of movement has been denied by law enforcement, such
as during arrest, detention, attempted arrest, attempted detention or while
confined in any law enforcement vehicle or facility.
8.2.1.2 NOTIFICATIONS
Revised November 8, 2017
The Homicide Detail shall be immediately notified of the following incidents:
1) Homicide or where the victim has sustained a life-threatening injury;
2) Attempted murder of an on-duty police officer;
3) Officer involved shooting;
4) Shootings involving other law enforcement agency employees;
5) Incidents involving an LBPD employee which result in a homicide or critical
injury;
6) ICD or incident where an ICD is imminent, including incidents where the in-
custody subject is sustained on life support;
a) If the incident involves a vehicle pursuit ONLY and there are no
additional circumstances related to the incident, the Collision
Investigation Detail will respond and handle, for further reference LBPD
Manual § 7.4.1.2 Collision Investigation Detail Call-out Procedure;
7) Attempted suicide incidents by an in-custody subject;
8) Sudden or undetermined death of a child, 12-years-old or younger;
notification is not required for the following:
a) Traffic accidents;
b) A death while involved in a sporting event where no injury occurred and
no foul play is suspected; or
c) A death of a child under a doctor’s care, and the doctor will sign the
death certificate;
9) Missing person’s cases in which foul play is suspected;
10) Kidnappings;
a) If parental abduction, contact Child Abuse or the on-call CART
Detective;
b) If victim is still missing, contact the on-call Homicide Detective;
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
437 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
c) Kidnappings in which the victim has been located do not require a
notification to Homicide;
11) Deaths of a suspicious nature;
12) Deaths involving suspected or actual drowning (bathtub, swimming pool,
etc.);
a) A notification is not required if the decedent is found in a natural body
of water i.e., the ocean, or a flood control and there is no evidence
the decedent died at that location, unless the death is of a suspicious
nature;
13) Deaths resulting from a fire;
14) Discovery of human bones or bones believed to be human.
8.2.1.3 RESPONSE FOR OFFICER-INVOLVED SHOOTING OR IN-
CUSTODY DEATH
Revised November 8, 2017
If an OIS or ICD incident occurs within the City of Long Beach, the Homicide Detail
will respond and conduct the following investigations:
LPBD Homicide
Responsibility
Outside Agency
Responsibility
Officer On-Duty Administrative and Criminal None
Officer Off-Duty Administrative and Criminal None
Outside Agency On-Duty Criminal* Administrative and
Criminal*
Outside Agency Off-Duty Criminal Administrative
* The decision of who will handle the criminal investigation of an on-duty, outside agency employee will be
determined on a case-by-case basis.
If an OIS or ICD incident occurs outside the City of Long Beach, the Homicide
Detail will respond and assume the following roles:
LPBD Homicide
Responsibility
Outside Agency
Responsibility
Officer On-Duty Administrative and Criminal* Criminal *
Officer Off-Duty Administrative Criminal
* The decision of who will handle the criminal investigation of an on-duty, Long Beach officer will be determined
on a case-by-case basis.
8.2.1.4 INCIDENT SCENE MANAGEMENT
Revised November 8, 2017
1) The Incident Commander shall have control of the incident and remain in
charge until the scene is secure and the tactical situation is concluded. The
Homicide Detail shall then assume control of the investigation.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
438 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2) The initial responding field supervisor and field units will secure the crime
scene.
3) Field units should attempt to locate and interview any potential witnesses
prior to the arrival of the Homicide Detective and ask witnesses to remain on
scene until Homicide arrives.
a) Officers should not transport witnesses to the station without a Homicide
Detective’s approval.
b) If a witness cannot remain at the scene, an officer will attempt to properly
identify the witness, obtain a complete statement (recorded if possible),
and in either instance file a report in the Homicide Office.
c) City emergency response personnel who are witnesses to an OIS
should remain on scene until interviewed.
4) Field units should not leave the scene until directed by a Homicide Detective
or their designee.
5) A Lab Unit will process the crime scene in conjunction with the Homicide
Detail.
a) Officers should not collect or disturb any evidence inside the crime
scene unless required to immediately apprehend an outstanding
suspect, to provide aid, or to make the scene safe.
b) Under emergency circumstances where it is impractical to maintain the
scene, the on-scene field supervisor or patrol officers shall collect as
much physical evidence as practical, exercising care to accurately
record the location of each item.
▪ If this occurs, officers shall file their evidence reports in the
Homicide Office and upon completion, submit them to a Homicide
Detective for review.
▪ A Homicide Detective will review the collected evidence prior to
placing the items into Property.
6) The Homicide Detail will notify the Department Psychologist as needed.
7) After officers complete their assignment at the incident scene and receive
approval to leave, they will report directly to the Homicide Office to file, unless
Homicide Detectives direct otherwise.
8.2.2 REPORT FILING FOR ALL OFFICER INVOLVED FIREARMS
DISCHARGE AND IN-CUSTODY DEATH INCIDENTS
Revised November 8, 2017
8.2.2.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
Officers shall complete all original reports in the Homicide Office and give them
directly to a Homicide Detective or the detail secretary unless otherwise directed
by Homicide personnel. Officers shall file these reports prior to end of watch unless
otherwise directed by a Homicide Supervisor or Homicide Detective. Officers
directly involved in an OIS or ICD shall not leave the Homicide Office until approved
by the Homicide Supervisor.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
439 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Every officer who responds to an incident that results in an officer involved firearms
discharge or in-custody death shall file a police report documenting the following:
1) Role and assignment/duties, including length of time at assignment;
2) Location of response,
3) If relieved, indicate the officer’s name that provided relief.
8.2.2.2 SERGEANT AND LIEUTENANT RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
Any sergeant or lieutenant who responds to an incident that results in an OIS or
ICD shall file a police report to document his or her role and the decision-making
process related to the command and control of the incident. The report should
include the name of the sergeant or lieutenant that provided relief.
8.2.2.3 COMMAND OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
In general, command officers are not required to file a police report unless they
assume command of an incident or give orders or direction that results in
employees taking action. This does not include providing recommendations,
insight or experience that may aid those running the incident.
8.2.2.4 WORKERS COMPENSATION DOCUMENTATION
Revised November 8, 2017
In all cases where an officer discharges their firearm at a person in a hit, or no-hit
OIS, a Homicide Supervisor will complete a “Record ONLY Workers
Compensation” entry into the City’s Workers Compensation database system; this
should be input within 24 hours. If the employee files a future claim, this provides
the documentation that the employee was involved in a traumatic incident.
8.2.3 INTENTIONAL FIREARMS DISCHARGE AND IN-CUSTODY
DEATH INVESTIGATIONS
Revised November 8, 2017
This section shall not apply to discharging a firearm for training or recreational
purposes unless there is an injury to a person because of the firearm discharge.
8.2.3.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
If an ON-DUTY officer intentionally discharges a firearm at any person or is
involved in an ICD, as soon as circumstances permit, they shall provide verbal
notification to a field supervisor.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
440 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
If an OFF-DUTY officer intentionally discharges a firearm at any person or is
involved in an ICD, as soon as circumstances permit, they shall provide verbal
notification to the Watch Commander.
Except under extraordinary circumstances, any officer involved in a shooting shall
retain all equipment with them at the time of the incident; equipment is to remain
secured on his or her person. The following shall apply:
a) Rifles shall remain with the involved officer or shall be properly secured until
relinquished to a Homicide Detective;
b) Weapons, including less lethal weapons, shall not be opened, loaded, or
unloaded prior to examination by a Homicide Detective.
8.2.3.2 MEDICAL AID
Revised November 8, 2017
As soon as the scene is safe, and out of reverence for life, the responding officer(s)
shall request medical assistance for any injured person and render aid as required.
If the subject is deceased, officers shall not cover the deceased unless Homicide
approves.
The radio dispatcher or the communications supervisor shall immediately request
paramedics if on scene personnel have not yet done so unless on scene personnel
advise that paramedics are not needed.
8.2.3.3 IN-CUSTODY DEATH WITHIN A DETENTION FACILITY
Revised November 8, 2017
In the case of an ICD within a detention facility, the location of the incident shall be
secured pending the arrival of the Homicide Detectives. On-duty detention officers
will remain at the location. If, for security reasons, prisoners are relocated, the jail
staff will identify those inmates and provide that information to Homicide. Each
inmate who witnesses an incident, and if practical, shall be separated from the
others and placed into a secure area to ensure they do not communicate with other
witnesses.
In the event a prisoner is transported from one of LBPD's detention facilities
unconscious, the area will be secured and the Watch Commander will be notified.
A patrol officer will be dispatched to the hospital with the prisoner and remain with
the prisoner until relieved. The Watch Commander will ensure the Homicide Detail
is notified.
8.2.3.4 FIELD SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
A field supervisor shall respond to every OIS or ICD. As soon as circumstances
permit, the field supervisor shall provide verbal notification to the Watch
Commander. The field supervisor will assume command of the scene until
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
441 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
properly relieved. If the incident is outside the jurisdiction of the City of Long
Beach, the field supervisor will notify the Watch Commander prior to responding
to determine if additional personnel should be sent. If the incident is excessively
far from the City, the Watch Commander will consult with the GVC Division
Commander prior to sending any personnel.
8.2.3.5 REMOVAL FROM SCENE
Revised November 8, 2017
Officers involved in an OIS or ICD may only leave the immediate area with the
consent of the Homicide Supervisor. Involved officers may only go to a location
approved by the Homicide Supervisor. The Homicide Supervisor may designate
another supervisor to accompany the officer and act as a liaison.
8.2.3.6 INVOLVED OFFICER STATEMENT
Revised November 8, 2017
Officers involved in shootings are required to provide a supervisor with a public
safety statement (PSS) from the Public Safety Statement card. The supervisor or
officer who takes the PSS from the involved officer shall file a follow-up report in
Homicide.
In general, Homicide Detectives do not interview officers involved in an OIS or ICD.
If an officer is unable to write a report, the Homicide Supervisor or Homicide
Detective will coordinate the filing of a report later.
If the incident occurs in another agency’s jurisdiction and they are conducting the
criminal investigation, the Homicide Supervisor will request the agency allow LBPD
officers to file police reports instead of being interviewed by that agency. The
Homicide Supervisor will ensure that the LBPD turns over all relevant police
reports to the handling agency in a timely manner.
If the involved officer invokes his or her Miranda Rights or refuses to give a
statement, the investigation will continue to a conclusion. The Homicide
Supervisor will notify the designated Investigations Bureau Command Officer, or if
unavailable, the Duty Chief who will determine if Internal Affairs should respond.
The Homicide Supervisor will also advise the involved officer of the following:
− "We will conduct our investigation without your input. When completed,
the available facts will be presented to the District Attorney's office for
review and determination of criminal violations."
−
The Homicide Supervisor or Homicide Detectives shall not, under any
circumstances, offer the involved officer immunity through the Lybarger process.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
442 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
In cases where the involved officer chooses not to make a voluntary statement, or
chooses not to answer questions by Homicide Detectives, the officer can be
compelled to answer questions by Internal Affairs Detectives, per LBPD Manual §
8.2.6 COMPELLED STATEMENTS. Compelled statements made to Internal
Affairs will not be provided to Homicide Detectives.
If the officer does not provide a voluntary statement, he or she will be placed into
an administrative assignment and will not be permitted to work in a field
assignment which would require contact with the public for law enforcement
purposes until the Chief of Police reviews the incident and authorizes the employee
to work in a field assignment.
8.2.3.7 HOMICIDE DETAIL RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
The Homicide Detail shall:
1) Assume command of the investigation;
2) Ensure officers are assigned to prepare reports, sketches, diagrams, etc.;
3) Coordinate with Forensic Science Services Division personnel;
4) Coordinate media releases with the Incident Commander and Public
Information Officer;
5) Coordinate the walk-through with involved officers;
6) Notify the coroner, if required;
7) Notify the Department Psychologist, if required;
8) Notify the District Attorney Command Post, if required;
9) Prepare a Critical Incident Debrief per LBPD Manual § 7.5.2.5 CRITICAL
INCIDENT DEBRIEF COMMITTEE.
If an officer involved in the incident used force other than a firearm, the Homicide
Supervisor will ensure a Supervisor’s Use of Force Report is completed and
forwarded to Internal Affairs per LBPD Manual § 7.1.2.8 USE OF FORCE –
SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES.
8.2.3.8 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
The Watch Commander, or their designee, shall notify the on-call Homicide
Supervisor regarding all OISs and ICDs. The Watch Commander, when feasible,
will respond to all OISs and ICDs.
The Watch Commander, or their designee, shall complete an Unusual Occurrence
Report whenever an OIS or ICD occurs, and deliver the report to the Homicide
Supervisor for approval prior to distribution.
8.2.3.9 PEER OFFICER
Revised November 8, 2017
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
443 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
After an OIS scene is secure, the Incident Commander shall designate a peer
officer to provide security for, and attend to the needs of, the involved officer. The
peer officer shall remain with the involved officer throughout the entire
investigation, including during the filing of reports, until relieved by Homicide. The
peer officer shall not participate in the involved officer’s report filing.
8.2.3.10 INTERNAL AFFAIRS
Revised November 8, 2017
The Deputy Chief of the Investigations Bureau shall be notified of all officer
involved hit-shootings and ICDs. The Deputy Chief or their designated command
officer shall respond to the scene and coordinate with the Incident Commander
and Homicide Supervisor to determine any potential policy violations. Internal
Affairs will only respond to an OIS or ICD investigation if approved by the Duty
Chief, designated Investigations Bureau Command Officer, a Deputy Chief, or the
Chief of Police. Internal Affairs shall not be contacted to respond until after the
Investigations Bureau Command Officer and Homicide have first been consulted.
A response by Internal Affairs does not, in and of itself, initiate a formal Internal
Affairs investigation. The Internal Affairs administrative investigation shall not
interfere with the Homicide Detail’s investigation.
8.2.3.11 DEPARTMENT PSYCHOLOGIST
Revised November 8, 2017
Homicide will notify the Department Psychologist of an OIS or ICD. The Homicide
Supervisor shall not request the Department Psychologist to respond to the scene
except under extenuating circumstances.
All officers involved in a hit shooting or an ICD will be required to meet with the
Department Psychologist or their designee prior to returning to field duty.
Details of the conversation with the psychologist shall remain confidential. The
Department Psychologist will report a recommendation as to the officer’s work
status to the officer’s Division Commander or Deputy Chief. The GVC Division
Commander or designee may direct other employees, such as witness employees
and dispatchers to meet with the Department Psychologist.
8.2.3.12 EMPLOYEE ASSOCIATION REPRESENTATIVE OR ATTORNEY
Revised November 8, 2017
An officer involved in an OIS or ICD is entitled to have an association
representative or attorney present prior to any statement beyond a public safety
statement. The Homicide Supervisor or designated Homicide Detective will
determine a reasonable amount of time for the officer's representative to arrive;
however, undue delays will result in the detectives proceeding with the
investigation.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
444 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
If the involved officer agrees to speak with the Homicide Detectives, either the
representative or attorney may be present with the involved officer during the
consultation and walk-through of the scene.
The officer's attorney or representative shall not be present during the filing of
relative police reports; however, the association representative may go to the
station with the involved officer to provide for needs.
8.2.3.13 PUBLIC INFORMATION OFFICER (PIO)
Revised November 8, 2017
The on-scene Public Information Officer (PIO) may release the following:
1) An acknowledgement that an incident occurred and general dispatch
information (i.e., time, location of incident, type of call, etc.);
2) Status of assigned Homicide Detectives (i.e., on scene or en route);
Additional information will not be disseminated without the approval of the
Homicide Detail.
The PIO will prepare a press release and obtain final approval from the Homicide
Supervisor or his or her designee prior to its release.
8.2.3.14 RELEASE OF OFFICERS’ NAMES
Revised November 8, 2017
The Department will release the name(s) of an officer(s) involved in an OIS or ICD
in conjunction with the California Supreme Court ruling (LA Times v City of Long
Beach/LBPOA case #S200872) when the Department receives a formal Public
Records Act (PRA) request.
In all cases, the Office of the Chief of Police will be notified of any PRA request to
release the name of an officer. The request will be forwarded to the Homicide
Detail who will determine if there are any known credible threats that have been or
are being investigated in the case.
If a potential or actual threat has been determined, the Office of the Chief of Police
shall be notified and the City Attorney’s Office shall be consulted before a decision
is made on the release of any name(s). The Chief of Police or his or her designee
shall have final authority on whether to release any name(s).
In a case where there is no credible threat, a name will be released to the requestor
unless otherwise directed by the Chief of Police or his or her designee.
8.2.3.15 PAID ADMINISTRATIVE LEAVE
Revised November 8, 2017
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
445 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The GVC Division Commander, or designee, is responsible for determining how
many days of paid administrative leave each officer will receive following an OIS
or ICD; the GVC Division Commander may authorize up to four days unless
otherwise approved by the Chief of Police.
Officers shall not work, including overtime, during those days off; however, they
will still be required to attend all previously scheduled court appearances. During
unusual circumstances where the involved officer cannot make a previously
scheduled court appearance, the Homicide Supervisor will contact the Court
Affairs office to ensure the proper court authorities are notified.
The Homicide Supervisor will notify the following individuals of the number of days
off an officer receives:
1) Deputy Chief of the officer;
2) Commander of the officer;
3) Deputy Chief of Investigations;
4) GVC Division Commander;
5) Personnel Administrator; and,
6) Department Psychologist.
8.2.3.16 POST-OIS SHOOTING COURSE
Revised November 8, 2017
Every officer who discharges his or her weapon at a person, whether the person
is struck or not, is required to report to the Police Pistol Range and participate in a
shooting course prior to being released back to field duty.
A) Officer Responsibility
1) The officer shall complete a post-OIS shooting course to reacquaint
himself or herself with the emotions surrounding an OIS, in a controlled
environment.
a) An officer involved in an OIS, involving a person, must report to the
range as soon as practical and, if possible, should be done prior to
seeing the Department Psychologist.
2) Upon completing the shooting course, the officer shall schedule an
appointment with the Department Psychologist.
B) Rangemaster
1) The Rangemaster is required to have a standard post-OIS range
shooting course for each officer to complete.
a) This shooting course is not incident specific and is not considered
retraining. The Rangemaster should only conduct retraining that
would normally occur during a routine qualification if they observe
a safety violation, or other firearms training that the officer needs.
b) The Rangemaster should not debrief or discuss the specifics of the
OIS with the officer.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
446 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
2) The shooting course is not scored.
3) Upon completion of the shooting course, the Rangemaster will notify the
Department Psychologist and the officer’s Division Commander.
8.2.4 UNINTENTIONAL FIREARMS DISCHARGE AND ANIMAL
SHOOTINGS
Revised November 8, 2017
This section shall not apply to the discharging of a firearm for training or
recreational purposes unless there is an injury to a person because of the firearm’s
discharge.
Any officer-involved, unintentional firearms discharge that results in a hit shooting
to any person will be investigated per LBPD Manual § 8.2.3 INTENTIONAL
FIREARMS DISCHARGE AND IN-CUSTODY DEATH INVESTIGATIONS.
If an officer is involved in an OIS where an animal is injured, the responding
officer(s) shall notify Animal Control; if the animal’s owner wants to transport the
animal to a veterinarian, they may do so. An officer will respond to the
veterinarian’s office to preserve evidence. Additionally, a priority lab unit will be
called to meet the officer at the veterinarian’s office for photos, etc.
Under no circumstances will an officer give approval for a deceased animal to be
destroyed (i.e., cremated) prior to the notification and approval of the Homicide
Detail.
8.2.4.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
If an ON-DUTY officer has a no-hit unintentional shooting or intentionally
discharges his or her firearm at an animal, as soon as circumstances permit, they
shall verbally notify a field supervisor. The field supervisor shall verbally notify the
Watch Commander.
If an OFF-DUTY officer has a no-hit unintentional shooting or intentionally
discharges his or her firearm at an animal, as soon as circumstances permit, they
shall verbally notify the Watch Commander.
8.2.4.2 FIELD SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
A field supervisor or designee will be the primary investigator and conduct the
investigation into the incident unless Homicide personnel respond to oversee and
direct the investigation. A crime scene log and a sketch are not needed unless, in
the opinion of the handling supervisor, they will help the investigation and
administrative review of the incident.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
447 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The field supervisor shall:
1) Obtain a public safety statement from the involved officer;
2) Determine if the officer wants to have a representative present for the walk-
through and, if so, wait a reasonable amount of time for the representative
before conducting the walk-through;
3) Account for all rounds fired and thoroughly investigate the path of the round(s)
to ensure no injuries or property damage occurred;
4) Assign a peer officer to the involved officer;
5) Ensure all potential witnesses are interviewed:
6) Conduct a walk-through of the scene with the involved officer,
a) No notes shall be taken or tape recordings shall occur during the walk-
through,
7) Ensure the lab responds and takes photographs of the scene and potential
evidence, including photographs of the involved officer as they were dressed
at the time of the incident;
8) Direct all officers to file their reports using the crime classification “officer
involved shooting;"
9) Conduct a weapon inspection of the involved officer’s firearm at the station:
a) The Supervisor will note in his or her report the number of rounds
remaining in both the magazine and the chamber of the gun, and
b) Ensure photographs are taken of the firearm along with any magazine
in the weapon if applicable;
10) Review all reports prior to submission to the Homicide Detail;
11) Forward all the original reports connected with the shooting to the Homicide
Supervisor;
12) Complete the Officer Involved Shooting Field Supervisor’s Report;
13) File an Unusual Occurrence Memorandum;
14) If the incident involved an unintentional discharge and the officer indicates
the unintentional discharge might be a result of a weapon malfunction, the
Patrol Supervisor shall place the weapon into Property; otherwise, after the
weapon has been photographed, it may be returned to the officer;
15) Issue the involved officer(s) a written order to report to the range per LBPD
Manual § 8.2.4.10 POST UNINTENTIONAL DISCHARGE SHOOTING
COURSE AND TRAINING;
16) Not make an entry into the Department’s Use of Force database system for
the firearm discharge.
8.2.4.3 INVOLVED OFFICER STATEMENT
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.3.6 INVOLVED OFFICER STATEMENT.
8.2.4.4 HOMICIDE SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
The Homicide Supervisor shall do the following:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
448 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1) Notify the Homicide Lieutenant or, in his or her absence, the GVC Division
Commander;
2) Respond to the scene and oversee the investigation;
3) Determine if a Homicide team is necessary;
4) Assist patrol in the handling of the investigation;
5) If misconduct is suspected, notify the GVC Division Commander or the
Deputy Chief of the Investigations Bureau who will assist in determining
Internal Affairs’ response;
6) Prepare a Critical Incident Debrief per LBPD Manual § 7.5.2.4 INCIDENT
DEBRIEFING;
7) Complete an entry into the Department Use of Force database system for the
firearm discharge.
8.2.4.5 WATCH COMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES
Revised November 8, 2017
The Watch Commander, when feasible, will respond to the scene, and shall make
all appropriate notifications.
8.2.4.6 INTERNAL AFFAIRS
Revised November 8, 2017
If Internal Affairs responds to the scene based on alleged misconduct, they will
follow their normal investigative and review procedures. The Internal Affairs
investigation will follow the Homicide investigation, or will happen concurrently;
however, the Internal Affairs’ investigation shall not interfere with the Homicide
investigation.
8.2.4.7 DEPARTMENT PSYCHOLOGIST
Revised November 8, 2017
While not required, the Department reserves the right to refer an employee to the
Department Psychologist. When an employee is referred to the Department
Psychologist, refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.3.11 DEPARTMENT PSYCHOLOGIST
for further.
8.2.4.8 EMPLOYEE ASSOCIATION REPRESENTATIVE OR ATTORNEY
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to Manual section 8.2.3.12 EMPLOYEE ASSOCIATION
REPRESENTATIVE OR ATTORNEY for further.
8.2.4.9 NO-HIT UNINTENTIONAL DISCHARGE – ANIMAL SHOOTING
REVIEW
Revised November 8, 2017
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
449 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
In general, there will not be a shooting review board for a no-hit, unintentional
discharge or animal shooting unless, based on the totality of the circumstances,
the Chief of Police deems one is necessary. In those cases, the Homicide
Supervisor will ensure the procedures outlined in Manual section 8.2.3.6
INVOLVED OFFICER STATEMENT are followed.
The Homicide Supervisor will complete the No-Hit Unintentional Discharge /
Animal Shooting Review Form and forward the entire package to the Homicide
Lieutenant.
All no-hit, unintentional discharges and animal shootings will be reviewed through
an administrative process. The following personnel will review the shooting:
1) Officer’s Division Commander;
2) Officer’s Deputy Chief; and
3) Deputy Chief of the Support Bureau
o If the involved officer is assigned to the Support Bureau, then the
Deputy Chief of the Investigations or Patrol Bureau will conduct the
review.
Each reviewer will determine if the incident is in-policy or out-of-policy and if it was
intentional or unintentional. Each reviewer will make an independent
determination and sign the review form. The last reviewer will then return the entire
package to the Homicide Detail.
Homicide will take the final package to the Chief of Police for review, additional
comments, recommendations and signature.
8.2.4.10 POST UNINTENTIONAL DISCHARGE SHOOTING COURSE AND
TRAINING
Revised November 8, 2017
If an officer has an unintentional discharge, the officer will be required to attend
mandatory training at the Police Pistol Range (Range) prior to returning to work. If
the weapon was taken as evidence, a Homicide Supervisor will schedule the
training when the weapon is available.
The supervisor in charge of the investigation will give the officer a written order
directing them to report to the Range on the employee’s next workday where the
Range is open, or as soon as practical. An officer will be assigned to administrative
duties and will not be permitted to work in a field assignment which could require
contact with the public for law enforcement purposes until they receive the training
and after the Critical Incident Debrief is concluded. This order shall be given before
the officer leaves work on the day of the incident.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
450 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The supervisor providing the written order will ensure the Range staff is notified
before the officer reports for training. The supervisor will advise the Range staff of
the circumstances of the incident and any specific training needs.
The Range staff will be responsible for conducting the training and filing a
memorandum documenting that the training has occurred. The memorandum will
be forwarded to the Homicide Supervisor.
During the Critical Incident Debrief, the Chief of Police will make a determination
as to the duty status of the involved officer(s) and whether they can return to field
duty, per LBPD Manual § 7.5.2.5 CRITICAL INCIDENT DEBRIEF COMMITTEE.
8.2.4.11 UNINTENTIONAL DISCHARGE – NON-POLICE DEPARTMENT
EMPLOYEES
Revised November 8, 2017
If the employee involved in the unintentional discharge is not a Police Department
employee, and the other City department agrees to have the Police Department
conduct the review of the incident, the following personnel will review the shooting:
1) Employee’s Administrative Officer or Division Head;
2) Employee’s Bureau Manager; and
3) Deputy Chief of the Support Bureau
o If the involved officer is assigned to the Support Bureau, the
Chairperson of the Board shall be the Deputy Chief of the
Investigations or Patrol Bureau.
Each reviewer will determine if the incident is in-policy, or out-of-policy and if it was
intentional or unintentional. Each reviewer will make an independent
determination and sign the review form. The last reviewer will then return the entire
package to the Homicide Detail.
Homicide will take the final package to the Chief of Police who will provide his or
her recommendations and whether or not he or she concurs with the reviewer’s
recommendations.
The involved employee’s Department Head will then review the case for additional
comments, recommendations, and signature.
8.2.5 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE – RESPONSE TO OFFICER
INVOLVED SHOOTING AND IN-CUSTODY DEATH
INVESTIGATIONS
Revised November 8, 2017
The Department will participate in the District Attorney’s (DA) county-wide program
whereby a District Attorney Team (DA Team) has the discretion to respond to the
scene of an officer-involved hit shooting and ICD. The DA Team will not interview
any officer involved in those incidents. The DA has agreed to accept the Long
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
451 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
Beach Police Department’s reports as the statement of the officer involved and as
the statement of any police officer witness.
The procedures followed during ICDs shall be consistent with those for handling
officer-involved hit shooting investigations. The DA Team may not always respond
to ICD investigations. The decision to respond will be based upon the
circumstances of the incident and will be made by the DA’s Office.
8.2.5.1 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE – AT THE SCENE
Revised November 8, 2017
It shall be the responsibility of the assigned Homicide Supervisor or Homicide
Detective to coordinate the investigation with personnel from the DA’s office.
As soon as practical, the Homicide Supervisor or Homicide Detective shall:
1) Call the DA Command Post;
2) Provide DA personnel with a briefing;
3) Provide a location within the crime scene for the DA Team to clearly observe
the crime scene, physical evidence and investigation;
4) Escort the DA Team into the scene:
a) The DA Team may not enter without an escort from the Homicide
Supervisor/Detective; and
5) Allow DA personnel to inspect the physical evidence found at the scene.
Homicide shall provide a comprehensive walk-through of the scene for the DA
Team and take additional photographs, measurements, or other investigative
steps as requested. The walk-through shall include an explanation of the incident
and the identification of all civilian and sworn witnesses and principals, and their
whereabouts.
8.2.5.2 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE – AT THE STATION
Revised November 8, 2017
The Homicide Supervisor/Detective shall continue to coordinate the investigation
with the DA Team. The DA Team may be present when detectives interview
civilian witnesses. The DA Team will not be allowed to ask questions during the
initial interview phase. After Homicide Detectives have finished their initial
questioning, they may ask the DA Team if they have any further questions for the
civilian witnesses. These interviews will be recorded.
Homicide will contact the DA Team regarding any subsequent interviews. The DA
Team may choose to be present for these interviews. The Homicide
Supervisor/Detective shall make every effort to apprise the DA Team on the
progress of the investigation.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
452 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.5.3 DISTRICT ATTORNEY’S OFFICE NOTIFICATION – OFF-DUTY
OFFICER INVOLVED SHOOTING INVESTIGATIONS
Revised November 8, 2017
If the shooting occurs within the City of Long Beach, the shooting shall be handled
per the guidelines set forth in this policy.
If the shooting occurs outside the City of Long Beach, the outside agency shall
have primary responsibility for investigating the shooting and will follow their own
District Attorney protocol. LBPD personnel will not make any notification to the
Los Angeles County DA regarding off-duty shootings outside of Long Beach city
limits.
8.2.6 COMPELLED STATEMENTS
Revised November 8, 2017
If an officer declines to provide Homicide with a voluntary statement of what
occurred, the Internal Affairs Division may obtain a compelled statement from the
officer. Internal Affairs will maintain the officer’s compelled statement.
Homicide will present the case during both the Critical Incident Debrief, the Review
Board process, and Chief of Police review.
If a compelled statement is needed for the Critical Incident Debrief or Review
Board process, Internal Affairs will present the statement. Members of the
Homicide Detail involved in the investigation, including the GVC Division
Commander, shall not be present or hear any part of the officer’s compelled
statement.
8.2.6.1 CHIEF OF POLICE REVIEW
Revised November 8, 2017
If a compelled statement is needed for the Chief’s review of the incident, Internal
Affairs will present the statement. Members of the Homicide Detail involved in the
investigation, including the GVC Division Commander, shall not be present or hear
any part of the officer’s compelled statement.
8.2.7 FIREARMS – SHOOTING REVIEW BOARD
Revised November 8, 2017
The following procedure shall be adhered to whenever an officer discharges a
firearm in the line of duty, except for the following:
1) No-hit unintentional discharge,
2) Shooting involving an animal,
3) Firearms qualification,
4) Practice, and
5) Training.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
453 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Shooting Review Board reviews incidents involving the discharge of a
weapon, except those listed above, by an employee. The Board shall make
recommendations to the Chief of Police whether the shooting was intentional or
unintentional, and in-policy, or out-of-policy. It shall also make recommendations
relative to any other forms of force used, officer actions, or other Department
actions that occurred during the incident. The Board is not intended to replace the
Internal Affairs process. The Board shall be administrative and make no findings
regarding criminal culpability.
The Chief of Police is responsible for making the final determination regarding the
disposition of an OIS.
8.2.7.1 CONVENING THE BOARD
Revised November 8, 2017
The Board will convene within a reasonable time from the date of the incident.
When the incident results in a death, the Board will not be held until the Homicide
Detail receives the final autopsy report.
It is the responsibility of the Homicide Detail to make a complete, non-biased, and
concise presentation of all the facts surrounding the incident. In the event an
officer’s statement must be compelled, LBPD Manual § 8.2.6 COMPELLED
STATEMENTS shall govern how the information will be presented to the Board.
8.2.7.2 MEMBERSHIP – SHOOTING REVIEW BOARD
Revised November 8, 2017
A) The Review Board shall be comprised of the following VOTING members,
none of whom may have been involved in the incident:
1) Deputy Chief of the Support Bureau or designee (Chairperson of the
Board):
a) If the involved officer is assigned to the Support Bureau, the
Chairperson of the Board shall be the Deputy Chief of the
Investigations or Patrol Bureau;
2) Chief of Staff or designee;
3) Deputy Chief or designee of involved officer(s) or designee;
4) Training Division representative:
a) The Training Division representative should be qualified to provide
expertise in Department training and be responsible for assembling
any additional training or subject matter experts to provide expert
testimony to the Board;
b) The Training Division representative should be able to provide the
Board with up-to-date training and shooting records of the involved
officer(s); and
5) Peer of the involved officer(s).
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
454 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
B) The Review Board shall be comprised of the following NON-VOTING
members, none of whom may have been involved in the incident:
1) Commander of the involved officer;
2) Detective assigned to the incident;
3) Employee association representative;
4) Internal Affairs representative;
5) Emergency Communications Department representative;
6) Homicide Supervisor or designee.
The Homicide Detail will make a timely notification to the involved officer(s)
regarding the convening of the Board. The notice will include the incident to be
reviewed and the names of the Board members. The officer has one (1)
preemptory challenge of the peer-level member. If the officer wishes to make a
preemptory challenge, he or she needs to notify the Chairperson of the Board at
least three (3) days prior to the convening of the board. The peer will be replaced
by a selection made by the Chairperson of the Board or his or her designee. The
appointment of the second peer is final. If the peer fails to appear, the Chairperson
will select another peer without challenge. The Homicide Supervisor is responsible
for notifying the involved officer(s) being reviewed of any peer changes.
8.2.7.3 NON-POLICE DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEES
Revised November 8, 2017
If the officer involved in the shooting is not a Police Department employee, and the
other City department agrees to have the Police Department conduct the review
of the incident, the following changes will be made to the Shooting Review Board:
A) Voting Members
1) The employee’s Bureau Manager or designee of the City department
involved will replace the Deputy Chief of the involved officer;
2) Peer member will come from the department involved.
B) Non-Voting Members
1) The employee’s Administrative Officer, Division Head, or designee of
the City department involved will replace the Commander of the involved
officer.
8.2.7.4 REVIEW OF OFFICER INVOLVED SHOOTINGS
Revised November 8, 2017
The review process of an OIS shall include an examination of the circumstances
of the shooting, including the events leading up to and after the incident. For each
involved officer, the Shooting Review Board shall make a recommendation as to
whether:
1) The involved officer’s actions, prior to the shooting, were within Department
policy, procedure, and training guidelines;
2) The shooting was in-policy, or out of policy;
3) The involved officer’s actions, after the shooting, were within Department
policy, procedure, and training guidelines.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
455 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
When evaluating an OIS, deviation from policy, procedure or training should be
viewed within the totality of the circumstances.
The Shooting Review Board shall also make a recommendation as to whether any
other Department actions are needed, or if any non-shooting officer’s actions
during the incident require Department action.
8.2.7.5 DISSENTING OPINIONS
Revised November 8, 2017
Any voting Review Board member who has a dissenting vote (not recommended
actions) in any area will be required to file a memorandum to the Chief of Police
explaining his or her dissenting vote. The Board member will forward the
memorandum to the Homicide Supervisor. A voting Board member may author a
memorandum to the Chief of Police explaining his or her decision, regardless of
whether his or her vote was in the majority or minority.
8.2.7.6 CHIEF OF POLICE REVIEW
Revised November 8, 2017
The Homicide Detail shall present the completed case and Board
recommendations to the Chief of Police, who will determine final disposition.
8.2.7.7 NON-POLICE DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE DEPARTMENT HEAD
REVIEW
Revised November 8, 2017
If the employee involved in the shooting is not a Police Department employee, and
the other City department agrees to have the Police Department conduct the
review, the Homicide Supervisor shall present the completed case to the
Department Head and Chief of Police for review. The Chief of Police will provide
a recommendation to the Department Head and advise whether he or she concurs
with the Board recommendations.
The Department Head will then determine whether the employee’s actions were
in-policy, or out-of-policy.
8.2.7.8 PROJECT ASSIGNMENT – SHOOTING REVIEW BOARD
RESULTS
Revised November 8, 2017
The Homicide Detail shall create a memorandum documenting the Chief’s
decision. Completed original project assignments will be sent to the Homicide
Supervisor for inclusion in the case file.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
456 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.7.9 MEMORANDUM OF COMPLETION
Revised November 8, 2017
The Homicide Detail shall create a memorandum of completion to the Chief of
Police. If the incident does not involve a Police Department employee, the
memorandum will be forwarded to the Department Head of the involved employee
and the Chief of Police for signature.
8.2.8 IN-CUSTODY DEATH REVIEW BOARD
Revised November 8, 2017
The In-Custody Death Review Board reviews all ICDs to determine whether the
actions of the involved officer(s) were within established Department policies and
procedures. The Board will make recommendations to the Chief of Police whether
the incident was in-policy, or out-of-policy. The Board will evaluate and make
recommendations where applicable regarding policy, tactics, equipment, and
facilities. The Board is not intended to replace the Internal Affairs process. The
Board shall be administrative and make no findings regarding criminal culpability.
The Chief of Police is responsible for making the final determination regarding the
disposition of an ICD.
8.2.8.1 CONVENING THE BOARD
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.7.1 CONVENING THE BOARD.
8.2.8.2 MEMBERSHIP – IN-CUSTODY DEATH REVIEW BOARD
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.7.2 MEMBERSHIP - SHOOTING REVIEW BOARD.
8.2.8.3 REVIEW OF IN-CUSTODY DEATHS
Revised November 8, 2017
It shall be the responsibility of the Homicide Detail to make a complete and concise
presentation of all the circumstances surrounding the ICD to all members of the
In-custody Death Review Board.
The Board will review the circumstances of the incident and the Coroner’s report
and determine if the officer’s actions were in-policy, or out-of-policy. If the death
occurs within a facility, the Board will utilize the same standard of review and will
review the facility policies and procedures to see if any changes or modifications
are required.
The Board shall make one of the following findings concerning each officer
involved in the incident:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
457 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
1) In-Policy – The officer’s actions were in-policy.
2) Out-of-Policy – The officer’s actions were out-of-policy.
In making a decision as to whether the incident was in-policy or out-of-policy, the
Board's review shall include, but is not limited to, an examination of the following:
1) Review any force used and determine if it was within policy;
2) Review the tactics used by the officer, including, but not limited to, the type of
contact (consensual, detention, arrest, etc.), and whether the tactics used
before, during and after the contact were consistent with Department policies,
procedures, and training; and
3) Review communication between officers, Communications Center personnel,
and citizens.
8.2.8.4 DISSENTING OPINIONS
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.7.5 DISSENTING OPINIONS.
8.2.8.5 CHIEF OF POLICE REVIEW
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.7.6 CHIEF OF POLICE REVIEW.
8.2.8.6 PROJECT ASSIGNMENT – IN-CUSTODY DEATH REVIEW
BOARD RESULTS
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.7.8 PROJECT ASSIGNMENT - SHOOTING REVIEW
BOARD RESULTS.
8.2.8.7 MEMORANDUM OF COMPLETION
Revised November 8, 2017
Refer to LBPD Manual § 8.2.7.9 MEMORANDUM OF COMPLETION.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
458 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.9 HATE CRIMES AND HATE- OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS
The Investigations Bureau will have audit responsibility.
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
8.2.9.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
This department recognizes and places a high priority on the rights of all individuals
guaranteed under the Constitution and the laws of this state. When such rights are
infringed upon by violence, threats or other harassment, this department will use
all available resources to investigate those incidents. This policy has been
developed to follow the provisions of Penal Code § 13519.6(c) and provides
guidelines for identifying and investigating incidents motivated by hate or other
bias.
8.2.9.2 DEFINITIONS
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
Hate crimes – Penal Code § 422.55(a) defines a hate crime as a criminal act
committed in whole or in part, because of one or more of the following actual or
perceived characteristics of the victim:
a) Disability
b) Sex
c) Nationality
d) Race or ethnicity
e) Religion
f) Sexual orientation
g) Association with a person or group with one or more of these actual or
perceived characteristics
Examples of hate crimes include, but are not limited to:
1. Interfering with, oppressing or threatening any other person in the free exercise
or enjoyment of any right or privilege secured by the Constitution or laws
because of one or more of the actual or perceived characteristics of the victim
(Penal Code § 422.6).
2. Defacing a person’s property because of one or more of the actual or perceived
characteristics of the victim (Penal Code § 422.6(b)).
3 Terrorizing a person with a swastika or burning cross (Penal Code § 11411).
4. Vandalizing a place of worship (Penal Code § 594.3).
Hate- or bias-motivated incident - These incidents do not rise to the level of a
hate crime as defined by the penal code.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
459 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
According to the Department of Justice, a hate- or bias-motivated incident is not
categorized as a hate crime because it lacks either a criminal act or a bias-
motivation. For example, a note reading, “I HATE HOMOSEXUALS” is posted on
the door of a residence occupied by a homosexual. That act would be classified
as a bias-motivated incident, not a hate crime, because although there was a bias-
motivation there was no criminal act. If the words, “I HATE HOMOSEXUALS” were
spray painted on the same door, that act would be considered a hate crime
because it involved a criminal act and a bias-motivation.
8.2.9.3 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND HATE-
OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
Officer(s) will be promptly assigned to contact the victim, witness, or reporting party
to investigate any suspected hate crime and hate- or bias-motivated incident. The
first point of contact is critical in the handling of hate crimes and hate- or bias-
motivated incidents. The person who first receives the incident information must
be aware of the sensitivity to the distinguishing characteristics of hate crimes, so
that the victim and the incident are treated appropriately.
8.2.9.4 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND HATE-
OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – PRELIMINARY
INVESTIGATING OFFICER
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
When an officer receives a report of a suspected hate crime or other activity that
reasonably appears to involve a potential hate crime, the following shall occur:
(a) A supervisor shall be notified of the circumstances as soon as practical.
(b) The Violent Crimes Detail shall be notified. The Violent Crimes Sergeant is
responsible for making the final determination of whether or not the incident
will be classified as a hate crime.
(c) The assigned officer will take all reasonable steps to preserve available
evidence that may tend to establish that a hate crime has been committed.
(d) The assigned officer(s) will interview available witnesses, victims and others
to determine what circumstances, if any, indicate that the incident should
potentially be classified as a hate crime.
(e) Depending on the situation, the assigned officer(s) may request additional
assistance from on-call Violent Crimes detectives or other resources to
further the investigation.
(f) Absent prior approval of a supervisor, all reports will be completed and
submitted by the assigned officer(s) before the end of the shift.
(g) The assigned officer(s) will provide the victim(s) of any suspected hate
crime with a brochure entitled, “We Care about Your Safety – How to Report
& Protect Yourself against Hate Crimes,” (Penal Code § 422.92). This
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
460 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
brochure will also be available to members of the general public upon
request. The assigned officer(s) should make reasonable efforts to assist
the victim(s) by providing available information on local assistance
programs and organizations.
(h) At no time will Patrol personnel make notification to the Human Dignity
Coordinator. It will be the responsibility of the Violent Crimes Sergeant to
make all such notifications regarding hate crimes to the Human Dignity
Coordinator.
8.2.9.5 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND HATE-
OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – FIELD SUPERVISOR
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
A field supervisor shall be dispatched and respond to all hate crime incidents. The
field supervisor shall maintain the flow of information on hate crimes to the Division
Commanding Officer. When a hate crime has occurred, a field supervisor will
review all reports and ensure proper notifications are made to the Violent Crime
Detail.
8.2.9.6 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND HATE-
OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – WATCH COMMANDER
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
The Watch Commander will send out an internal Watch Commander Notification
using the event type, “Hate or bias motivated incident.” This notification will
automatically be sent to the Violent Crimes Sergeant and the Command Staff.
The Watch Commander will ensure that proper notification is made to the Violent
Crimes Detail.
A hate crime incident is a mandatory after-hours and weekend notification to the
Duty Chief. The Duty Chief will assist the Watch Commander in determining
whether a CM Staff notification is appropriate. During business hours, the Watch
Commander will first consult with the Violent Crimes Sergeant or his/her chain of
command before sending out a CM Staff notification.
The Watch Commander or Patrol personnel shall not make a notification to the
Human Dignity Coordinator. It will be the responsibility of the Violent Crimes
Sergeant to make all notifications to the Human Dignity Coordinator.
8.2.9.7 PROCEDURE FOR INVESTIGATING HATE CRIMES AND HATE-
OR BIAS-MOTIVATED INCIDENTS – INVESTIGATING DETAIL
RESPONSIBILITY
Revised April 14, 2015
Reviewed May 2019
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
461 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The assigned detective will be responsible for following up on the reported hate
crime and hate- or bias-motivated incident as follows:
a) The handling detective will maintain contact with the victim and other involved
individuals as needed.
b) The handling detective will conduct follow-up investigations as needed.
8.2.10 CRIMES AGAINST PEACE OFFICERS
Revised December 17, 2020
Reviewed December 17, 2020
The Investigation Bureau will have review responsibility.
The Los Angeles County District Attorney’s Office has a specialized unit, the
Crimes Against Peace Officers Section (CAPOS) dedicated to the prosecution of
those who commit violent crimes against peace officers. CAPOS will handle cases
in which the assault caused, or could have caused, death or great bodily injury to
the officer. CAPOS is available to respond to crime scenes 24-hours a day upon
request by our Department.
Injured Officer Admitted to a Hospital
If an on-duty peace officer is the victim of a gunshot, stabbing, and/or the officer’s
injuries are critical in nature where the officer will be admitted to the hospital, the
on-call Homicide Detective shall be notified to evaluate the circumstances of the
incident. The on-call Homicide Detective will determine if Homicide will respond
or defer the incident to the on-call Violent Crimes Detective based upon the totality
of the circumstances. The handling detail shall be responsible for all follow-up
investigation and coordination with the CAPOS Unit.
Injured Officer Not Requiring Hospitalization
If an officer’s injuries do not require hospitalization, the Violent Crimes Section will
be responsible for the follow-up investigation. Violent Crimes detectives are not
required to respond to the scene unless the investigator or watch commander
determine a detective response is necessary.
8.2.11 VIOLENT CRIMES DETECTIVE – NOTIFICATION
Revised October 24, 2014
The Investigations Bureau will have review responsibility (Reviewed July 2019).
The Violent Crimes Detail will be on-call and available after hours to respond to, or
handle inquiries regarding violent crime incidents. The on-call Violent Crimes
Detective shall be notified when the following circumstances exist:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
462 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
a) An on-duty officer is the victim of an assault resulting in significant injury, to
include a broken bone, loss of consciousness, head trauma, serious cuts or
stab wounds;
b) An actual or suspected explosive device requiring a response from the Los
Angeles County Sheriff’s Department Bomb Detail;
c) Hate crimes or potential hate crimes;
d) A criminal act involving stalking or workplace violence where the suspect
specifically targets a City employee because of their employment with the
City of Long Beach;
e) Other serious incidents where the Watch Commander determines notification
to the Violent Crimes Detail is warranted.
8.2.12 TARASOFF NOTIFICATION
Revised December 17, 2020
Reviewed December 17, 2020
The Investigation Bureau will have review responsibility.
A licensed psychotherapist shall report to a local law enforcement agency,
within 24 hours, the identity of any person under their care who has
communicated a serious threat.
Within 24 hours of the receipt of the Tarasoff report, the local law enforcement
agency shall notify the Department of Justice (DOJ) of the person who has
made such a threat.
8.2.12.1 OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
Officers shall ensure the following is completed upon the receipt of a
Tarasoff Report call:
• Notify a supervisor of the Tarasoff report call and ensure an Info-Tarasoff
report is filed prior to the end of the shift. VIC and SUS will not be used for
person blocks as a Tarasoff report is not used to report a crime.
• If, in the course of the Tarasoff notification a crime was found to have
occurred in relation to the target and the person making the threat in the
City of Long Beach, the handling officer shall take a crime report.
• Attempt to notify the target(s) of the threat and document the steps taken
to notify the target in the report. If the target was not notified and all leads
were not exhausted, an officer from the next shift will complete the call
and further documentation.
• Once the target(s) has been notified of the threat or all reasonable leads
have been exhausted in attempting to notify the target(s) of the threat,
an on-duty field supervisor can determine the call closed.
• The officer shall complete and fax DOJ Form (BOF 4074) to The Bureau of
Firearms prior to the end of the shift (available in Laserfiche as "Form BOF
4074").
• A confirmed fax receipt shall be attached to the officer's report and forwarded
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
463 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
to records.
8.2.12.2 SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES
• The original handling officer's supervisor shall communicate the information
to the supervisor of the oncoming shift if a continued investigation is
necessary.
• The supervisor from the oncoming shift shall assign the call to an officer for
continued investigation.
• Once the target(s) is notified or all reasonable leads are exhausted, as
determined by the on-duty field supervisor, the call can be closed.
• The supervisor shall ensure the BOF 4074 form has been faxed.
• The supervisor shall ensure an entry is made in the Watch Commander Log.
The Reporting Section shall route Tarasoff reports to the Mental Evaluation Team.
The Mental Evaluation Team shall conduct any follow-up investigation as needed.
8.2.13 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS
Revised March 25, 2021
The Investigations Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed March 25, 2021
The Long Beach Police Department does not consider any report of a missing
person to be routine and assumes that the missing person needs immediate
assistance unless determined otherwise. Missing person cases are prioritized
over property-related cases.
A police officer shall be dispatched to all missing person and located missing
person calls for service. A missing person’s report shall be accepted regardless of
how long the person has been missing. All missing person reports shall be taken
by a police officer.
8.2.13.1 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – DEFINITIONS
Revised March 25, 2021
At-Risk Missing Person – An at-risk missing person is a person who is any of the
following:
• 11 years of age or younger,
• A victim or suspected victim of a crime or foul play,
• In need of medical attention, or life-saving medication,
• Has no pattern of running away or disappearing,
- A runaway, 12 years of age and older, not in immediate danger may be
treated as a not-at-risk missing person,
• A child that may be the victim of parental abduction and there is reason to
believe harm may come to the child, or
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
464 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Mentally impaired, cognitively impaired, or developmentally disabled (i.e.
Dementia, Alzheimer’s, or Autism).
Courtesy Missing Person Report – A missing person report taken by an agency
that does not have jurisdiction over the area where the missing person resides.
These reports are forwarded to the agency with jurisdiction over the investigation.
Missing Person – Any person who is reported missing to law enforcement when
the person’s location is unknown. This includes any child who is missing
voluntarily, involuntarily or under circumstances that do not conform to their
ordinary habits or behavior, and who may need assistance, CPC § 14215. It also
includes a child who has been taken, detained, concealed, enticed away or kept
by a parent in violation of the law, CPC § 277.
8.2.13.2 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – NOTIFICATIONS
Revised March 25, 2021
The Homicide Detail shall be notified in the following circumstances:
• If foul play is suspected or the case is suspicious in nature,
• If an at-risk investigation reaches four (4) hours without locating the missing
person or the investigation progresses to a point where an informational bulletin
is necessary,
• A parental/family abduction with evidence of an immediate threat to the child,
see also LBPD Manual § 8.2.1.2 HOMICIDE DETAIL CALL-OUTS,
NOTIFICATIONS.
- If there is no evidence of an immediate threat to the child, the Child Abuse
Detail shall be notified.
8.2.13.3 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – OFFICER
RESPONSIBLITIES
Revised March 25, 2021
Officers shall be responsible for the following when handling a missing person
investigation:
• Conduct the initial investigation,
• Take the missing person report,
• Make all necessary notifications,
• Ensure that a BOLO is broadcast and note it in the call history,
• Submit the report to Teletype for DOJ input, see § 8.2.13.6 MISSING
PERSONS INVESTIGATIONS – TELETYPE,
• Document in the located missing person report who took custody of a
juvenile or an at-risk missing person.
8.2.13.4 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – CLASSIFICATION
Revised March 25, 2021
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
465 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
An at-risk missing person classification for a missing person 11 years old or
younger, who is not the victim of a child concealment, shall only be downgraded
by the Special Investigations Division Commander.
Any other at-risk missing person, including a victim of child concealment where
there is no evidence of danger to the child, may be downgraded by the Watch
Commander.
If an officer is dispatched to a missing person call and determines it to be an at-
risk missing person call, they shall immediately notify their supervisor and the
Communications Center.
8.1.13.5 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – BE ON THE LOOK OUT
(BOLO)
Revised March 25, 2021
A Be on the Look Out (BOLO) shall be transmitted, without delay, for any missing
person who is 20 years old or younger, or an at-risk missing person per CPC §
14211(d).
8.2.13.6 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – TELETYPE
Revised March 25, 2021
When a missing person is 20 years old or younger, a teletype shall be sent to the
Department of Justice and the National Crime Information Center within two hours
after accepting the report ((42 USC 5779(a) and (42 USC 5780(3)).
8.2.13.7 MISSING PERSON INVESTIGATIONS – LOCATED MISSING
PERSONS
Revised March 25, 2021
A police officer shall be dispatched to all calls regarding located missing persons
to file the located missing person report and notify teletype.
When an officer is dispatched to a missing person call and the person is located
the following reporting requirements shall apply:
• If the report has not been submitted to teletype, the officer shall file a
missing person and a located missing person report, these may be
completed in the same report.
• If the report has been submitted to teletype, a separate located missing
person report shall be filed and submitted.
• Department report numbers for missing person reports shall not be voided.
If a located missing person is arrested, complete a located missing person report
as follows:
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
466 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Long Beach PD located missing person – File the located missing person
report as a supplement to the original missing person incident number and
file the arrest report with a separate incident report.
• Other jurisdiction located missing person – File the located missing person
report with an LBPD incident number and file the arrest report with a
separate incident report (two incident numbers).
If an officer contacts a subject and discovers the subject is a reported missing
person, regardless of jurisdiction, the officer shall file a located missing person
report.
8.2.13.8 COURTESY MISSING PERSON REPORTS
Revised March 25, 2021
If a missing person report is requested where the missing person is not a Long
Beach resident, a courtesy report shall be taken.
8.2.13.9 AMBER AND SILVER ALERTS
Revised March 25, 2021
In the event that Amber or Silver Alert criteria is met, the Watch Commander, or
designee shall notify the on-call Missing Persons Detective.
A. SILVER ALERT CRITERIA
A Silver Alert will not be initiated by the California Highway Patrol unless it meets
all of the following criteria:
• The missing person is 65 years of age or older, developmentally disabled
or cognitively impaired,
• The investigating agency has utilized all available local resources,
• The law enforcement agency determines that the person has gone missing
under unexplained or suspicious circumstances,
• The law enforcement agency believes that the person is in danger because
of age, health, mental or physical disability, environment or weather
conditions, that the person is in the company of a potentially dangerous
person, or that there are other factors indicating that the person may be in
peril, and
• There is information available that, if disseminated to the public, could assist
in the safe recovery of the missing person.
B. AMBER ALERT CRITERIA
The California Amber Alert Plan is a voluntary partnership between law
enforcement, transportation, and media to rapidly disseminate information about a
suspect and victim to law enforcement agencies and the public when a child has
been abducted.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
467 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
The decision to initiate an Amber Alert shall be approved by the Watch
Commander. Per the California Highway Patrol, the following criteria must be met
to initiate an Amber Alert:
• It has been confirmed that an abduction has occurred, or the child has been
taken by anybody including, but not limited to, parents and/or guardians.
• The victim is 17 years of age or younger, or of proven mental or physical
disability.
• There is reason to believe the victim is in imminent danger of serious bodily
injury or death.
• There is information available that, if disseminated to the general public,
could assist in the safe recovery of the victim.
8.2.14 GUN VIOLENCE RESTRAINING ORDERS (GVRO)
Revised January 27, 2022
The Investigations Bureau shall review this policy on a three-year review cycle.
Reviewed January 27, 2022
GVRO laws provide law enforcement with an intervening mechanism to prevent
escalating firearm-related violence. Officers should consider petitioning a
GVRO when they have reasonable cause to believe a subject poses an
immediate and present danger of causing personal injury to themselves or
another by having in their custody or control, owning, purchasing, possessing,
or receiving a firearm or ammunition (Penal Code §18100).
8.2.14.1 GVRO DEFINITION
Revised January 27, 2022
Gun Violence Restraining Order - an order, in writing, signed by the court,
prohibiting and enjoining a named person from having in his or her custody or
control, owning, purchasing, possessing, or receiving any firearms or
ammunition, including ammunition magazines (Penal Code §18100).
8.2.14.2 TYPES OF GVROS
Revised January 27, 2022
1) Temporary Emergency GVRO – requested by a law enforcement officer
which may be obtained telephonically when court is not in session and expires
21 days from the date the order is issued (Penal Code § 18125).
2) Ex Parte GVRO – an order that can be requested by law enforcement, as
well as immediate family members, employers, coworkers, or teachers of the
subject of the petition. The order is issued or denied on the same day as
submitted to the court, unless the petition is filed too late in the day to permit
effective review (Penal Code § 18150).
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
468 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
3) GVRO Issued After Notice and Hearing– a renewable court order for a
period of one to five years (Penal Code § 18170).
8.2.14.3 GVRO CONSIDERATIONS
Revised January 27, 2022
Officers should consider the use of a GVRO in the following situations (Penal
Code §18108):
• A domestic disturbance response to any residence which is associated with
a firearm registration or record, where a firearm is present, or one of the
involved parties owns or possesses a firearm.
• During a contact with a person exhibiting mental health issues, including
suicidal thoughts, statements, or actions, if that person owns or possesses a
firearm.
-Officers should consider requesting a response from the Mental
Evaluation Team (MET) or detaining the person for a mental health
evaluation (5150 WIC) if there is reasonable cause to believe that the
person poses an immediate and present danger of causing personal
injury to themselves or another person by having custody or control
of a firearm.
Additional Considerations:
• A credible threat of self-harm or violence directed at another
• Proximity of potential victims
• Access to firearms
• Prior conviction or outstanding warrant for crimes listed in Penal Code §29805
• Prior restraining order or criminal protective order violations
• Violent criminal history
• Mental health history
• Whether the subject is currently on Parole, Probation, or Post Release
Community Supervision
• Unlawful or reckless use display or brandishing of a firearm
• Documented evidence showing that subject committed crimes involving
ongoing alcohol and/or substance abuse
8.2.14.4 PROCEDURES FOR OBTAINING A GVRO
Revised January 27, 2022
Ex Parte GVRO
1) The officer or detective shall contact the designated Deputy City Attorney to
explain the circumstances and provide the required documentary evidence
(e.g., police report, CAD, field interview, Tarasoff Report, 5150 report, criminal
history, etc.).
2) If the circumstances meet the threshold for pursuing a GVRO, the Deputy City
Attorney will work with the officer or detective to pursue the acquisition of the
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
469 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
GVRO.
3) Once the GVRO is served and the firearms or ammunition are seized, the
Deputy City Attorney shall be contacted with the results and be provided all
related documents in order to prepare for the hearing that follows. If the court
determines the GVRO is upheld, a GVRO issued after notice and hearing will
be secured and served. If the restrained person is present, the service will
occur in court.
4) If a restrained party to a GVRO does not appear for the hearing, the GVRO will
proceed “in absentia.” If the order is upheld it will become a GVRO issued after
notice and hearing but will require additional service.
8.2.14.5 TEMPORARY EMERGENCY GUN VIOLENCE RESTRAINING
ORDER
Revised January 27, 2022
Any time access to the court is not available (such as holidays, weekends, or after-
hours) and the Deputy City Attorney is unable to present the request, the officer
should pursue a Temporary Emergency GVRO.
In emergency situations, a Temporary Emergency GVRO may be issued on an ex
parte basis only if a law enforcement officer asserts, and a judicial officer finds,
there is reasonable cause to believe both of the following:
1) The subject of the petition poses an immediate and present danger of causing
personal injury to himself, herself, or another by having in his or her custody or
control, owning, purchasing, possessing, or receiving a firearm or ammunition
(Penal Code § 18125(a)(1)).
2) A Temporary Emergency GVRO is necessary to prevent personal injury to the
subject of the petition or another because less restrictive alternatives either
have been tried or found to be ineffective or have been determined to be
inadequate or inappropriate for the circumstances of the subject of the petition
(Penal Code § 18125(a)(2)).
To obtain the Temporary Emergency GVRO, the officer or detective shall do the
following:
1) Complete a Firearms Emergency Protective Order Form (EPO-002).
2) Call the phone number used for Emergency Protective Orders and state that a
Temporary Emergency GVRO will be requested. The operator will connect the
officer or detective with the Commissioner.
3) The officer or detective will advise the Commissioner of the circumstance
surrounding the investigation.
MANUAL of the Long Beach Police Department INVESTIGATIONS
470 | P a g e
Return to the TABLE OF CONTENTS
4) Be prepared to provide the Department Record (DR) number assigned to the
Temporary Emergency GVRO and enter the DR number in the upper right
corner of the EPO-002.
5) The officer or detective shall provide LBPD Records Division with the
completed EPO-002 form. Records Division will provide the completed EPO-
002 form to the court and forward a copy to the Deputy City Attorney.
6) If possible, the officer or detective will serve the restrained party and take
possession of all firearms and ammunition under the control of the restrained
party.
8.2.14.6 GVRO SERVICE
Revised January 27, 2022
• All circumstances that warrant the acquisition of a GVRO represent a high level
of risk. It is critical therefore that extreme caution be exercised in the service of
such orders.
• When serving a GVRO, officers are required to demand all firearms and
ammunition be relinquished at the time of service. The restrained party is
required by law to relinquish all firearms and ammunition